Home

FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide

1. 0 0 0 00 22 9 Setting up color animation 0 0 eee ees 22 10 Setting up fill animation 0 0 0 000 ccc eee eens 22 13 Setting up horizontal position animation 0 00 0 e eee 22 13 Setting up vertical position animation 0 cc cece 22 14 Setting up width animation 0 0 ee eee eee 22 14 Setting up height animation 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 22 14 Setting up rotation animation n naaa sanaaa eens 22 14 Setting up horizontal slider animation 0 0 e eee 22 15 Setting up vertical slider animation 0 00 c cece eee eee 22 15 Applying animation to groups 0 0 0 0 cece et eens 22 16 Checking the animation on objects 0 ccc eee eee 22 16 Copying or duplicating objects with animation 0 000 cee eee 22 18 Copying animation without copying objects 0 ccc ees 22 18 23 24 e Contents Setting up animation for global objects 0 00 22 18 Using expressions About CXPLESSIONS 2 a4 464544005 5ue ahs we dedeedas devenee be wdesuas aed 23 1 Expressions that result in floating point values 0005 23 1 Expression components 000 c ccc ccc ee ee eens 23 2 Using the Expression editor 0 0 eee eens 23 2 Using the Expression editor versus typing expressions directly 23 2 Where you Can use expressions Le teens 23 4 POrmatliiG ExpressiONss erri a piedddeod
2. 0 0 000 cece eens 8 1 Setting up global connections 0 0 0 0 0 sannana eee eens 8 2 Updating the date and time nnana cee eens 8 2 Changing displays 0 00 eee eee n nets 8 4 Controlling display changes remotely 0 ccc cece eee eee 8 4 Remote display changes and security 0 eens 8 4 Setting up remote display changes 0 0 cc cece ees 8 5 Printing displays 1 eee eee n ees 8 5 Closing On Top displays 0 ee eens 8 6 Applying parameters to changed displays 000 c cece ees 8 6 Running macros 1 eee eee eee es 8 6 Setting up backlight intensity remotely 000 0 8 7 Contents Monitoring run time RAM usage 6 0 0 0 0 cee eee eens 8 7 9 Setting up alarms About alarmis putt eed atu hae Shama hese Pas eE a Mew EOE 9 1 Multiple language alarm messages 0 0 00 annann eee eens 9 2 Other multiple language alarm features 0 0 0 cece eee 9 2 Summary OF SIGHS 2 048 345 4o eeeassb deed do ged oon dtedunte bun Gud ee ee 9 2 Setting Up alarms 4 6o4iouectaiwes oie odes oad eeee ew de sereasases 9 3 Preparing to set up alarms 0 eee een nes 9 3 THE Cala SOUL Cs coped ia CoA cee heed Fee ae oe aeeesae ieee 9 3 Taps and ex pressiOns 6 4244 cab bedadecwsete sont aendedestae seer noes 9 4 Identifying alarm Conditions 4 22 22 60e4e0002b4 49040540800 deen G48 9 4 Importing and exporting alarm setup files
3. 0 0 0 0 cece eee 9 4 TOW alarms WOT I tee ee 9 taco Su dines bai re neha Ae eee Sara ee Ee as 9 4 Alarm triggers and trigger values 0 0 cee eens 9 5 Filtering alarm triggers in multiple languages 000 00 ee 9 5 Alarm notification methods nananana cee eens 9 6 Displaying alarm information 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 ccc eee eee eens 9 6 Interacting With alanis lt 22220n eecedideesnageddakenesetGeieedadss 9 7 Thealarm lop Mie nunc caw teeh aed dikigi narr oes hee eeseteee o 4 9 10 A lari trigger data TV PCS cas 65 ane bt eke choad ete ed sada EEEE EEEN 9 11 The Value trigger type sisscrrisceiikiryr inerpica iNap E aR 9 11 The Bit irioger itype persson i erate i a E E ES 9 12 The Least Significant Bit LSBit trigger type 00004 9 13 Tips for using array 1A 0S 02 25 oa e Oe ha eee een wae dds RodwReee hese oes e ees 9 15 Eguivalent data TY PCS a 5 4 ob ots caves these tes eedesene A 9 16 RSLinx Enterprise tag syntax 2 0 eens 9 16 KEPServerEnterprise tag syntax 0 9 17 Creating alarm messages in multiple languages 0000 c eee eee 9 17 Optional alarm connections 0 0 0 0 eee teens 9 17 Connections that work with a specific alarm trigger 00000 9 18 How the Handshake connection works 0 00 ccc eee eee ees 9 18 How the Ack connection works nunana anaana naana eee eee 9 19 How the Remote Ack connection works
4. 0 0000 ec eee 9 19 How the Remote Ack Handshake connection works 9 21 Ensuring alarm messages are read by the data source before sending new messages 9 21 Methods of alarm message handshaking 0 00 e enue 9 21 Holding the message for a specific period of time nnna nananana naan 9 21 Holding the message until the data source acknowledges that it has read the mes T EE E E E E E E E E E ee meee 9 22 vii FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE viii How messages are queued 0 ccc eee teens 9 22 How the Message connection works 00 c cece ee eee eee 9 23 How the Message Notification connection works 0000 9 23 How the Message Handshake connection works 0 0005 9 23 Connections that apply to all alarms 0 0 0 0 naana 9 23 How the Silence connection works 0 00 ccc eee eee 9 24 How the Remote Silence connection works 00 cece ee eee 9 24 How the Remote Ack All connection works 0 0 00000 00a 9 24 How the Status Reset connection works n a asasan cece eee 9 25 How the Remote Status Reset connection works 00005 9 25 How the Close Display connection works 0 000 cece eee 9 25 How the Remote Close Display connection works 004 9 25 The ALARM display 0 c ccc ee ee eens 9 25 The ALARM BANNER display 0 0 0000 cc ee
5. 9 38 Acknowledging the selected alarm 2 0 nannan cee eee 9 38 Acknowledging all alarms 0 0 0 0 ccc ccc eee eee 9 39 Silencing ALANIS eese opcodes boos Bea OSE a see od ou See acces E 9 39 Clearing and deleting messages 0 00 9 40 Using alarm buttons to sort alarms and reset alarm status 9 40 DORMS AIAN p50 5a8 dou e eed doe me node Maes ooo eee oak ees 9 40 Resetting alarmi Status 2 cus2esconenseedd dodhehyseaeereoguceies 9 40 Contents Retaining alarm status 0 nets 9 4 Changing the alarm status displayed in the alarm status list 9 4 10 Setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics 11 About FactoryTalk Diagnostics 0 0 00 eee ees 10 1 Browsing diagnostics messages 0 eee eee ee 10 1 How to set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics 0 anana aaaeeeaa aaa 10 1 Destinations 45 4 a4 dae dot ee naeheanwed sees ws a eee ane eee we a 10 2 MeSSAa06 TONNE 4424465400 renee teekadews os vend oo buwe bes Gee oS24 10 3 CACO 4 5 cc oe 4ee scene Bo Renee Hee sees cheno neta eee nee he aoe 10 3 Messape SCVEINICS oan terete ed akeoeSetek est dandanestese ee Ses 10 4 AOE aca tees aaar Oo aw a Fwd SA Re ee ek eee ees 10 4 Displaying diagnostics messages during application development 10 5 Viewing FactoryTalk Diagnostics log files 0 0 0 0 cee eee 10 5 Using the Diagnostics Setup tool 0 eens 10 6 Logging to an ODBC database 2 0 eens 10 7 Ro
6. Image attributes Type 167r r216 color Width Height 203 25 Format JPEG Cancel Help For details about using the Image Browser to import select and delete images see Help You can also remove an image by clicking it in the Images folder and then right clicking Remove or Delete For more information see page 18 4 Using Symbol Factory Symbol Factory is a third party graphics library that provides a large number of quality graphic elements Import Symbol Factory objects directly into image container 1 From the Image Browser window click the Launch Library button This will open a Symbol Factory window 2 Browse through the Categories and locate the graphic to be used Select the graphic so it is highlighted Click the Copy button in Symbol Factory Symbol Factory will be minimized to the system tray 3 From the Image Browser click on the Paste from Library button 4 A dialog box will open and ask for a unique image name Type the new name over the default text SFBitmap1 5 Click the OK Button in Image name dialog The dialog box will close returning you to the Image Browser The new image will be displayed and the new image name shown in the image browser explorer 19 e Using graphic displays 6 Click the OK button in the Image Browser for the graphic to be placed in the current workspace Note that any Symbol Factory object including Bitmap DIB and metafile can be pasted into
7. m When the Value connection s value is 0 the display is cleared m If you set up local messages in multiple languages messages are displayed in the current application language When a language switch occurs the message that was already in the local message display remains in the language that it originally appeared in New messages are displayed in the new language Printing displays You can print your graphic displays on the development computer This might be useful if you want other people to review the displays before implementing the application or if you want to keep a visual record of the displays You can also print graphic displays at run time to provide a printed record of process values such as trend data For information about printing on the development computer see page 2 13 Printing displays at run time When you print a display at run time everything on the screen is printed including the current display pop up windows and any visible background applications 19 e Using graphic displays For information about specifying which printer to use at run time for applications that will run on a personal computer see page 15 10 For information about specifying printer options for applications that will run on a PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual To print graphic displays at run time use one or both of these methods m Create di
8. 2 On the Setup menu click Windows Security Options Windows Security Options Use Windows Accounts at source for Factor alk View User 4ccounts Windows Domain JCORECKYREMPELOT z Windows Users or Groups FactoryT alk View User eH Administrators 4 G default ye Backup Operators G supervisor rf Guests gt ma Hel pServyicesbroup rt Network Configurat ef Power Users 7 Remote Desktop Use rt Replicator Fi TT Feu Cancel Help 3 Inthe Windows Security Options dialog box specify the users and groups to use For details see Help 4 Inthe Runtime Security editor specify login and logout macros and assign security codes to the users For details see Help You cannot change the user or group name Account ID and password To change the password use the Windows Control Panel Removing 3 20 and earlier users or groups You can also use the Windows Security Options dialog box to remove users or groups When you remove a user or group from the FactoryTalk View User list the user or group s name is deleted from the FactoryTalk View Runtime Security editor The user or group is not deleted from the Windows domain 11 Setting up security If you remove users from the Windows domain they are not removed automatically from the FactoryTalk View Runtime Security editor You must remove the users from the Runtime Security editor manually using the Windows Security Options dialo
9. 3 To select from a list of all the objects in the display that you can link the button to click the Browse button next to the Linked object box 4 Click the name of the object to link the button to and then click OK 5 Click OK to close the button s Properties dialog box To link a button to a specific object using the Property Panel m Inthe Properties tab specify the SendPressTo and LinkedObject properties 21 Setting up graphic objects Once you have linked buttons to an object you might want to turn off the object s key navigation since this option is no longer needed For details see page 21 9 Repeating a button s action by holding down the button To repeat a button s action by pressing and holding it set up auto repeat for the button If you set up auto repeat when the operator presses and holds down the button repeated button presses are registered until the operator releases the button A button press occurs when the operator clicks an object with the mouse presses it on a touch screen or presses the function key associated with the object Auto repeat works with all these methods of pressing buttons You can use auto repeat with these buttons For this button Multistate push Each button press does this Sends the value for the next state to the data source External changes to the Value connection are not recognized when the button is in auto repeat mode Ramp Sends the new ramped value
10. Interlocked Push Button Properties ES General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width 4 IV Border uses back color im Highlight color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle Button Yalue lo Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo jo Other MV Audio Cancel Apply Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify the button s appearance and the value it sends to the Value connection m Inthe States tab specify what the button looks like when it is pressed and released at run time For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag with which the button exchanges data Interlocked push buttons have no Indicator connection For information about assigning tags see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up ramp buttons Use the ramp button to increase or decrease the value of a tag 21 Setting up graphic objects Ramp buttons can change a tag by either an integer or floating point value You can use two ramp buttons together to create an increment decrement control Each time the operator presses the button the tag value increases or decreases depending on how you set up the butto
11. Select the initial runtime application language English Canada en A is Select the language to use for strings that support language switching in 5 0 applications but do notin 4 0 applications English Canada en A g Cancel Help If your application uses multiple languages specify up to 20 languages to include in the run time application specify the initial run time language and specify the language to use for alarm trigger labels and alarm information and local messages in FactoryTalk View 4 00 run time applications For details see Help This wizard is not displayed if your application uses only one language To display undefined strings in the default language at run time include this language in your selection The default language is also required for filtering alarms For more information about the default language see page 12 2 Click Finish For information about transferring the run time application 14 6 14 Creating run time applications m toa personal computer see Chapter 15 m toaPanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see Chapter 16 Converting run time application files to development applications For FactoryTalk View version 5 00 and later mer files you can convert the run time application file back to a development application This allows you to make changes to the application without losing run time information such as passwords and RecipePlus data
12. You can link key buttons to a specific alarm object or set up the buttons to work with whichever object is selected in the graphic display For more information see page 21 9 For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 For information about setting up key buttons see Help Using alarm buttons to acknowledge silence clear and delete alarms Acknowledging messages does not remove them from the alarm log file You can still display acknowledged alarms in an alarm list that is set up to show acknowledged alarms Acknowledging the selected alarm When the operator presses the acknowledge alarm button an enter button or the Enter key on an external keyboard or keypad m the selected alarm in the alarm list is acknowledged and the audio indicator for the alarm if any is silenced m the displayed alarm in the alarm banner is acknowledged and the audio indicator for the alarm if any is silenced This is what happens when the alarm is acknowledged m If assigned the alarm trigger s Ack connection is set to the alarm trigger value at the data source The value is held as long as the operator presses the button or for the hold time whichever is longer 9 Setting up alarms If the hold time is still in effect and the operator acknowledges a new instance of the same alarm the new acknowledgement is ignored m Ifthe alarm list is set up to display unacknowledged alarms only the alarm is removed from th
13. As your application is running information is continually sent to the data source about the state of various processes For example your application might be monitoring whether a valve is open or closed or the temperature in a boiler Values representing the status of these processes are sent to the data source The data source The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data for both data server tags and HMI tags The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source 19 27 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 28 The data source is set up to exchange information in the form of numeric or string values between FactoryTalk View and the machine that your application is controlling Identifying the tags and values to monitor To set up local messages determine which tags associated with machine processes to monitor and identify the values for those tags that will trigger local messages For information about creating HMI tags see Chapter 7 How local messages work These are the key parts of the local message system Local message files text files containing lists of messages with a numeric trigger value for each message Local message display object a graphic object that displays local messages when the Value connectio
14. Dashes in tag names are supported in PanelBuilder but not in FactoryTalk View Studio Before importing the PanelBuilder application in the PanelBuilder Tag Editor locate any tags whose names contain dashes and duplicate the tags Then rename the tags without the dash or replace the dash with an underscore _ Once the tags have been renamed use the Tag Search feature to find the graphic objects using the original tag names and edit the objects to replace the old tag names with the new ones You can convert the PanelBuilder application when you open FactoryTalk View Studio or once FactoryTalk View Studio is already open B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications To convert a PanelBuilder application when you open FactoryTalk View Studio 1 Open FactoryTalk View Studio NHew Open Machine Edition Application New E visting Application name Descriptior Compact Machine Edition application Check this box to create an application that will rn on a PaneMiew Plus Compact terminal Language English United States en US B Cancel 2 Inthe New tab in the Application name box type a name for your converted application up to 32 characters long 3 If desired type a description of the application If the PanelBuilder application contains an Application Description the Application Description will overwrite the description you type here You can add or change the description
15. FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 24 8 Number formats The numeric variable uses the number format of the current application language For example if the application language uses a comma for the decimal symbol the numeric variable uses a comma for the decimal symbol For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 String embedded variables For string embedded variables that do not use a fixed number of characters the entire string tag value is displayed unless a null character is read Nothing after a null character is displayed If a fixed number of characters is used the variable displays the value of the tag up to the number of characters specified unless a null character is encountered before the specified length Nothing is displayed after a null character If necessary spaces are used to make up the required number of characters Null characters have a hex value of 0 The null character indicates the end of string input It does not add to the actual string length If the string is longer than the specified number of characters it is truncated to fit the number of characters If the SHOWSTAR option is used an asterisk replaces the first or last character displayed If the embedded variable is set up to display right most characters excess characters are truncated at the left end of the string and the asterisk if used appears at the left Otherwise the right most characters are trun
16. Summary of steps To set up communications follow these steps l Gather information about your network and the devices that are connected to it You will need this information to set up RSLinx Enterprise RSLinx Classic or another OPC server If you want to use RSLinx Enterprise for communications install it on the development computer For information about installing RSLinx Enterprise see the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Installation Guide If you want to use RSLinx Classic as the OPC server that enables communications on your network set up RSLinx Classic on the development computer RSLinx Classic is included on the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition DVD ROM For details see Getting Results with RSLinx or see Help for RSLinx FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE RSLinx Classic is available for personal computers only If you want to use an OPC server other than RSLinx Classic for communications on your network set up the OPC server on the development computer For details see the documentation supplied with your OPC server In FactoryTalk View Studio create a data server that points to the OPC server you set up in step 3 or step 4 For details see page 5 3 If you are using RSLinx Enterprise for communications you don t need to create a data server because it is created automatically when you create your FactoryTalk Machine Edition application If you want to use HMI tags in your applicatio
17. The operator can view the status list in three different modes All alarms displays the status of all alarms that have been defined in the Alarm Setup editor Active alarms displays the status of all the alarms that are currently active Past alarms displays the status of all the alarms that have been active since the alarm status has been reset The operator can press the alarm status mode button to cycle through the different modes If desired you can set up the alarm status list to show alarms for specific alarm triggers only FactoryTalk View comes with a library graphic display called STATUS that contains an alarm status list object alarm status mode button and other buttons for working with the list You can use the display and objects as is customize them or create your own For more information about using alarm status lists see page 9 34 To set up an alarm status list 1 Double click the alarm status list Alarm Status List Properties Ea General Alarm Common Appearance Border style Border width m v Border uses back color Raisedinset fe g ao BB Border color P Header back color BB Header fore color Text Font Size Arial fic J B z ul Other MV Key navigation Wrap around Cancel Help 21 63 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the alarm status list looks like at run time w
18. Use this graphic object 20 Using graphic objects To do this RecipePlus button Display data set and tag values for ingredients in the RecipePlus table Write tag values from the selected data set to the data source Write tag values from the data source to the selected data set or to a new data set Save data set values from the table to a recipe file Rename or delete recipe units For details see page 29 3 RecipePlus selector Select the recipe unit to display download from write to rename or delete For details see page 29 2 RecipePlus table Display and compare recipe data set values and tag values Edit data set values For details see page 29 2 ActiveX object Enter or display data using a third party object connected to an analog digital or string tag including both HMI and data server tags The format of the data entered or displayed depends on the object For details see page 20 21 Displaying alarms and messages Use this graphic object To display this Alarm list Multiple alarm messages including the time the alarms are triggered and acknowledged For details see page 9 32 Alarm banner A single unacknowledged alarm message For details see page 9 33 Alarm status list The status of alarms including how many times an alarm has been triggered and how long it has been active For details see page 9 34 Diagnostics list Messages about system activity such
19. numeric or string values between FactoryTalk View and the machine that your application is controlling The general term data source is used unless specifically discussing a programmable controller Summary of steps Follow these steps to convert PanelBuilder applications l 2 Convert the application file as described in the next section Specify additional project settings as described on page 4 11 For example if you want the application to have a border around its graphic displays or to use a title bar you can specify these options in the Project Settings editor If you select Convert to new window size check the position of the graphic objects in each display Set up communications and edit tags that don t convert directly For more information see page B 8 Set up graphic object features that don t convert directly For more information see page B 10 Converting PanelBuilder application files Follow these steps to convert a PanelBuilder application file with the extension pba or pva to an FactoryTalk View application file with the extension med The original PanelBuilder application file is not modified by the conversion Steps to take in PanelBuilder before you convert the application l Semicolons in tag addresses are supported in PanelBuilder but not in FactoryTalk View Studio Before importing the PanelBuilder application in the PanelBuilder Tag Editor change the semicolons to colons
20. 0 0 cc cece e es 19 29 Contents Creating local messages in multiple languages 00 19 30 How the local message display graphic object works 19 30 Printing CisplaySs uct aceak an ee Sa nd ete ime eed one ed ieee eee 19 30 Printing displays at run time 1 6 eens 19 30 Using graphic objects Types of graphic ODjECtS 2 444442cs440044040 44 04a Reeder eRe a 20 1 ADOUl connections s 44 26 d0444440d4 od PEE ae baaes 20 2 Illustrating your displays 44 2 lt iscc4024eegudidoewcdavrataedestoteaeaes 20 3 Controlling the applications 02 c2oiscadesecesoucttcanwsedesedpeereees 20 3 Starting and controlling processes 0 cee eens 20 4 Displaying processes and values graphically 0 00 ees 20 5 Working with lists trends alarm banners and numeric input objects 20 6 Entering and displaying numeric and string values 0 00000 e eee 20 8 Displaying alarms and messages 0 0 0 0 cc cee eee eens 20 9 Selecting tools for creating graphic objects 0 0 0 0 cece eee 20 10 Before you begin creating objects 0 0 eens 20 11 Creating graphic ODj6CS i ceis anne ddedngs eny ra deste aeee 20 11 Creating drawing Objects 2 0c 026dsa00 646 een inedi iieri id kria ikErE i 20 12 Dg On E E E E E E E E E E EE E k oie 20 12 Creatine IMA Cs sic sx tesa ks saad ust tacos EE Ene hose ed teehee 20 14 Create Panels 460s eee th eae edd ee eae GE abe erus ake
21. 0 0 eee 20 33 Assigning tags and expressions to graphic objects 0 000 0c eee 20 34 ASSOUMO TAGS gant on een ae nad Renee ansehen ten eee een ead 20 34 Using expressions to manipulate tag values 0 0 00 00 eee 20 35 Replacing tags using tag substitution 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 20 36 Using tag placeholders 2 0 24 2 0 4 0de66e45ecekboso 0 Rkdwen ae ceda 20 37 Performing basic operations on objects 2 0 eee 20 38 Moving ODJ6CIS uccaeccdsaddescbensdeervdddwedsae aed She sbeades 20 39 Copying objects 2 0 eee eens 20 40 Duplicating objects n n anaana eee eee eens 20 41 Resizing ODICCS 2 4424 6dcdhedeenednrdeeraddude dened dca eeeades 20 42 Reshaping drawing objects 0 0 0 0 cc eee eens 20 43 Deleting objects 22 2265 Fu ooo oa esbuieh ees nese ae ee bees See 20 44 Working with groups of objects 0 eee eens 20 45 Grouping and ungrouping objects 0 000s 20 45 Editing groups of objects 0 eee nee 20 46 Editing objects within a group 2 ee eens 20 46 Atrane me ODjECtS iow ct ocean ser idediousse eed os oS On esdete bees E A 20 47 Layering ODJCCS 2 42665 140 8 eaaehdaae Dd 0SSs Soe deeees eeetaes 20 48 Alone ODICCIS lt 3 cce426e ceo eendesedes eb eshendateetdereeaesa 20 49 Pacis oDe Ssss rorudiana ets yeh ees Sane boeees eee se 20 51 Flipping drawing objects 1 2 0 ccsdee0s eich beehewes sd riirii ca 20 52 Rotating drawing Objects 2 244 s 0scedu ved eeeeenseb
22. 3 Inthe Permissions box below the list select Full Control and then select Allow Opening multiple applications To open two applications at the same time for example to copy images and graphic objects between applications start two instances of FactoryTalk View Studio To view a graphic display in different languages at the same time open the application multiple times selecting a different language each time you open it 4 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Close button 4 10 Opening and editing applications from earlier versions of RSView You can open and edit applications from RSView 3 10 3 20 4 00 5 00 6 00 and FactoryTalk View 6 10 When you are finished editing you can create run time application files for ME Station version 3 10 3 20 4 00 5 00 5 10 6 00 or 6 10 This allows you to continue running your applications on existing terminals without upgrading all your software The application is converted to the current version of FactoryTalk View when you import it but when you create the run time application file you can save it back to the earlier version If the application uses a feature that is not supported by the run time version you will not be able to create the run time application file The exceptions are multiple languages and global objects When you create the run time application file it uses the application s current language You can create as many different run time
23. FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 3 8 m use the DeskLock tool on Windows platforms to prevent users from switching to another application at run time for applications that will run on personal computers You can use this tool to set up a customized desktop and to prevent access to Windows functions Based on these considerations you can set up security for individual users or groups of users For example you might want to set up groups of users such as a manager group and an operator group For more information about setting up security see Chapter 11 AY CA Working with applications What This chapter describes application files m creating importing opening and closing applications m renaming copying deleting backing up and restoring applications m specifying project settings m viewing application properties m viewing HMI server properties is an application An application is the software application you create in FactoryTalk View Studio to monitor and control your plant processes An application consists of one or more data servers and an HMI project also known as an HMI server The data servers provide communications for the project The project or HMI server consists of graphic displays alarm information user information and other settings For information about viewing the application properties see page 4 18 For information about viewing the HMI server properties see
24. If desired you can assign unique connections animation and size to the reference object To create a reference object 1 Copy an object from a global object display to a standard graphic display 2 To assign unique connections animation or size to the object double click the object to open the Property Panel For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 You can also create reference objects by adding a global object display to the Displays folder All the objects in the new display are reference objects To add a global object display to the Displays folder 1 In the Explorer window in the Graphics folder right click the Displays icon 2 Click Add Component Into Application 3 Browse to and select the global object display to add and then click Open The display is copied into the Displays folder and given the file extension gfx All the objects are converted to reference objects To edit a reference object s base object 1 Right click the reference object and then click Edit Base Object 2 The global object display containing the base object opens with the object selected 3 Make your changes to the base object 25 Using parameters and global objects All reference objects linked to the base object are updated To view the changes to the reference object close the display containing the reference object and then reopen it Or toggle the object s LinkSize property on and off Setti
25. Move Control menu i Minimize Close Close button For information about using a title bar in graphic displays see page 4 15 For information about preventing unauthorized users from shutting down applications see page 11 14 What happens when the application shuts down When the application shuts down m if you assigned a shutdown macro in the Startup editor the macro runs assigning values to tags and then the application stops For information about the Startup editor see Chapter 14 m FactoryTalk View ME Station closes m The computer s FactoryTalk System Directory is restored Changing application settings Editing device shortcuts You can use FactoryTalk View ME Station to edit device shortcuts that have been set up in the application Before editing device shortcuts load the application containing the device shortcut as described on page 15 4 To edit device shortcuts 1 In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Application Settings 2 Double click Device Shortcuts 3 Double click the name of the shortcut to edit 15 Running applications on a personal computer Edit ShortCuts Backplane lt No Devices gt Ethernet 1788 ENBT A 10 85 134 104 B17SL FlexLogix L34 Processor 0 DF1 Point to Point 1756 ENBT A 10 85 134 106 1756 A10 A 1756 CNBjD 1 1756 ENET A 2 1756 DNB A 3 1756 DHRIOjB 4 DF1 Point to Point 2 YVersa View CE 1250H 10 85 134 109 4 I
26. STATUS and HISTORY displays m using displays from the library in your application m creating your own alarm display m opening and closing the alarm display how the alarm list alarm banner and alarm status list graphic objects work m using buttons to acknowledge silence clear and delete alarms m using buttons to sort alarms and reset alarm status About alarms An alarm occurs when something goes wrong or is about to go wrong Alarms can signal that a device or process has ceased operating within acceptable predefined limits and can indicate breakdown wear or process malfunctions Alarms are also used to indicate the approach of a dangerous condition Alarms are an important part of most plant control applications because an operator must know the instant something goes wrong It is often equally important to have a record of the alarm and whether the alarm was acknowledged Compact applications applications running on PanelView Plus Compact terminals have a limited number of alarm messages 9 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 2 Multiple language alarm messages A key component of any alarm system is the messages that appear when alarms occur FactoryTalk View supports alarm messages in multiple languages For information about setting up alarm messages in multiple languages see page 9 17 Other multiple language alarm features FactoryTalk View supports using multiple languages fo
27. Using graphic objects Spacing objects With Space Vertical and Space Horizontal objects or groups of objects are moved vertically or horizontally to have the same amount of space from the center point of each object To space objects 1 Select the objects you want to space 2 On the Arrange menu click a Space menu item or click a tool on the Graphics toolbar This tool or menu item Does this Space Horizontal Places the centers of the selected objects an equal distance apart horizontally Space Vertical Places the centers of the selected objects an equal distance apart vertically Examples Spacing objects vertically and horizontally Centers are separated by an equal vertical distance lt gt Select objects Space vertically l l l 1 gt l Centers are separated by an equal horizontal distance l l l Select objects Space horizontally 20 51 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Flip Vertical 5 Flip Horizontal 20 52 Flipping drawing objects Flipping an object creates a mirror image of the object You can flip all the drawing objects or groups of drawing objects except text images and panels To flip a drawing object 1 Click the object 2 On the Arrange menu click a Flip menu item or click a tool on the Graphics toolbar This tool or menu item Flips selected objects Flip Vertical Top to bottom upside down Flip Horizontal Left to right
28. at the left or top of the toolbar and then drag Press the Ctrl key to prevent accidental redocking 19 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 8 To move an undocked toolbar m Click the toolbar s title bar and then drag Press the Ctrl key to prevent accidental redocking To dock a toolbar m Click the toolbar s title bar and then drag to any edge of the workspace To close a toolbar m Onthe View menu select Toolbars and then click the name of the toolbar to close or click the toolbar s Close button Showing displays in grayscale You can set displays to appear in grayscale especially for developing applications that will run on the Panel View Plus grayscale terminals When Show Displays in Grayscale is checked on the View menu all open displays will change from full color to grayscale When Show Displays in Grayscale is cleared all open displays will appear in color Show Displays in Grayscale does not work in Test Application mode Third party ActiveX objects will not appear in grayscale if Show Displays in Grayscale is checked Using the grid To size and position objects precisely use the grid You can change the grid settings at any time during the drawing process The grid can be active or passive When the grid is active all the objects you draw or position are pulled to the closest grid point This makes it easy to align and size objects When the grid is passive it is visible but
29. ng Pumphouse f Alarm tags E3 system The folders list with server The folders list with server names hidden names shown In the example on the left folders are listed alphabetically by name In the example on the right there are two data servers named KepServer and RSLinxServer Folders of data server tags are listed under the data server to which they belong Below the data servers the application is listed as an HMI server with folders of HMI tags under the application name Browsing for off line tags For each RSLinx Enterprise device shortcut or each RSLinx Classic OPC topic in your application an Offline and an Online folder is displayed in the Tag Browser FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 6 8 In RSLinx Enterprise you can use the Offline folder to browse tags in an RSLogix 5000 RSLogix acd file For details about making the acd file available to browse offline see RSLinx Enterprise Help In RSLinx Classic you can use the Offline folder to browse tags in a PLC program stored on disk If the OPC topic in RSLinx Classic has access to symbols you can browse for them in the Offline folder For details about adding symbols to the OPC topic in RSLinx Classic see RSLinx Classic Help Folders a Tags that are available when EEF Waste Water you are not connected to the HE Chlorinator 3 28 Count_up controller are located in the HHL Offline lt _ _ Offline folder Stealth Tags that are availa
30. pval ASview Machine Edition Project red mei Heb 7 Follow the steps in the Machine Edition Import Wizard For details about the options in the Machine Edition Import Wizard see Help When you complete the steps of the wizard Factory Talk View Studio converts the PanelBuilder 1400e application creates the converted application s folders and files and then displays the converted application in the Explorer window in FactoryTalk View Studio If there are any messages about conversion they are displayed automatically in the Project Status dialog box The converted application is created in the ME HMI projects directory in a folder with the same name as the application name you specified in step 2 A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications This is the path to the ME HMI projects directory Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 Conversion messages are saved in a file called Convert log in the HMI projects directory To convert a PanelBuilder 1400e application when FactoryTalk View Studio is already open 1 On the File menu click New Application or click the New Application tool L If an application is already open FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close New Application the a
31. versus projects l using earlier versions of FactoryTalk View 1 using earlier versions of RSView 10 Arc graphic object 3 16 Arithmetic operators in expressions 6 evaluation order of 10 Array tags 15 data types for 15 16 Arrow images 21 Audiences for diagnostics messages 4 Auto repeat 11 AutoCAD files See dxf files Automatic logout 13 23 B Background Color toolbar 31 Background style transparent 21 Backing tags 6 14 Backspace button graphic object 6 16 49 Bar graph graphic object 5 44 46 at run time 18 using animation to create 11 using with recipes 11 Base objects breaking links to 14 creating 11 deleting 14 editing 12 Bit arrays using to generate alarms based on priority sequence 13 using to generate multiple alarms 12 Bit trigger type 12 Bitmap files See bmp files Bitwise operators in expressions 8 evaluation order of 10 Bounding box 5 Button graphic objects bounding box 5 creating touch margins for 4 linking to specific objects 9 repeating button presses 11 selecting objects to send button presses to 7 9 using function keys with 5 using with alarm banners 6 8 using with alarm history and diagnostics messages 8 using with lists 6 using with numeric input objects 6 8 using with trends 6 8 1l Button presses repeating 11 sending to graphic objects 7 9 C Caches for data servers synchronizing 5 Change Password window 5 Circle graphic object 3 17 Clear alarm banner button graphic object 8 7 16 u
32. 0 ccc eens 13 1 Testing display navigation o2540c0sac 4hiden niece bhacedodeceeeseensxent 13 3 Using graphic objects to navigate 0 6 eee eens 13 3 Switching languages ea os eee dew andaa b oS Re oor ee edee we ee dees 13 3 Depli TVG sarrera hens ace ee ae ok oe een e oats oes 13 4 Goto display buttons 0 0 0 0 as 13 4 Goto configure mode buttons 0 2 0 ccc eee eee 13 4 Return to display buttons 0 0 0 0 eee eens 13 5 Close display DUUONS 22 4 64 4 2 cencn2ea 026040 kes Raeede ooaee ee ees 13 6 Display list sel cto S spuds eee cewnkas oe coe e es odo p aa 13 6 Shutdown buttons lt 2 na ate dh eae tu eek ee ee kde ae eee awweeedades 13 7 Controlling display changes remotely 0 0 c cece eens 13 7 Creating run time applications Specifying startup settings 0 eee eens 14 Testing your application 0 cette een nes 14 2 Creating run time application files 0 0 00 eee eens 14 3 Creating mer files for previous versions 0 cece eee ee ees 14 3 Creating mer files for PanelViewPlus 0 0 00 e eee ees 14 3 Converting mer files to development applications 14 3 Converting run time application files to development applications 14 7 xi FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE xii 15 Running applications on a personal computer 16 17 SUMMMMALY OF SICDS since noo a a bod a aana bed bbe x Sadness
33. Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications Invalid characters in screen names Characters in PanelBuilder 1400e screen names that are not supported in FactoryTalk View are replaced with the underscore character Screen security settings PanelBuilder 1400e screen security settings are not converted because FactoryTalk View uses a different method to assign security to graphic displays For information about setting up security in FactoryTalk View see Chapter 11 Block tags Block tags are not supported in FactoryTalk View Block tags that are monitored for alarms in your PanelBuilder 1400e application are converted to bit arrays For information about monitoring bit arrays for alarm conditions see Chapter 9 Converting non RIO communications This section describes how communications that do not use Remote I O RIO are converted For information about converting RIO communications see page A 10 FactoryTalk View does not use nodes for communications Nodes are converted to RSLinx topics Topics are then converted into device shortcuts to run with RSLinx Enterprise You must have both RSLinx Classic and RSLinx Enterprise installed to make this two step conversion Tags are converted to HMI device tags and RSLinx aliases The Unsolicited Msgs node is not converted If you import an application multiple times delete the device shortcuts in RSLinx Enterprise before re importing Otherwise multiple unused device shortcut
34. Data log files 3 1 Data log models changing the model to use at run time 4 deleting tags from 4 Data Log Models editor 2 using tags in 12 Data logging 1 choosing the data to log 4 methods 3 problems with 5 setting up l storage locations 3 to monitor memory usage 8 Data server tags 1 browsing for 5 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 how to use 3 when to use 3 Data servers 8 l 2 creating 4 synchronizing caches for 5 Data sets for recipes 1 comparing amp printing 9 Data source ensuring values are read by 12 for alarms 3 for HMI tags gt b for information messages 3 for local messages 28 for tags 2 for trends 2 Default graphic displays ALARM display 6 DIAGNOSTICS display 11 INFORMATION display 6 Default language 2 and alarm triggers 5 DEFAULT user 4 at runtime 3 DeskLock tool 2 17 Device shortcuts editing at run time 6 Device tags 5 addressing syntax for 5 Diagnostics clear all button graphic object 8 16 using with diagnostic lists 13 Diagnostics clear button graphic object 7 16 using with diagnostics lists 13 DIAGNOSTICS display 11 at run time 19 opening and closing 12 window size 14 Diagnostics List 5 clearing messages in 5 displaying 5 moving 9 resizing 5 showing and hiding 8 using to test displays 10 Diagnostics list graphic object 9 64 at run time 12 19 displaying communication errors in 20 linking buttons to 9 navigating to 7 using buttons with 13 Diagnostics List Se
35. Expression mooo i we BJ 80 dd Value Line E C 95 dd Fill E Fil Style Soia gt Default Colors Blink rate Seconds Apply Delete Close Help 22 17 Copying or duplicating objects with animation You can copy or duplicate objects that have animation attached to them When you do the animation attached to the objects is also copied or duplicated If you copy or duplicate a group the copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects just like the original For information about copying and duplicating objects see pages 20 40 and 20 41 Copying animation without copying objects If you have attached animation to an object you can copy the animation and paste it onto another object If the object has more than one type of animation all animation is copied and pasted Note that you can only copy animation to an object that supports the same type of animation To copy and paste animation 1 Select the object that has the animation you want to copy 2 On the Edit menu click Copy Animation or right click the object and then click Copy Animation 3 Select the objects to copy the animation to 4 On the Edit menu click Paste Animation To paste to a single object you can right click the object and then click Paste Animation Setting up animation for global objects FactoryTalk View global objects allow you to link the appearance and behavior of a graphic object to multiple copie
36. For information about creating buttons see Chapter 20 For details about setting up the buttons see page 21 16 Example Editing and downloading recipe values at run time This example shows how to use the RecipePlus graphic objects to edit and download recipe values at run time 1 Inthe RecipePlus editor create a RecipePlus file containing ingredients several data sets a tag set and several units combining the different data sets with the tag set 2 Open the RecipePlus Components library 3 Start test mode 29 Setting up RecipePlus 4 Use the move up and move down buttons next to the RecipePlus selector to highlight a unit in the selector and then press the Restore button The unit s ingredients are displayed in the RecipePlus table with the data set values in the Recipe column 5 Use the move up and move down buttons next to the RecipePlus table to select an ingredient and then press the Enter button The numeric pop up keypad opens displaying the minimum and maximum values for the ingredient If the ingredient is a string ingredient the string pop up keyboard opens 6 Type anew value for the ingredient and then press Enter The new value is displayed in the Recipe column 7 Press the Save button to save the new value 8 Press the Download button to write all the values in the Recipe column to the tags associated with the ingredients The values are downloaded to the data source Viewing data valu
37. For information about using the Tag Browser see page 6 5 Browse button in the Type anew tag name in the Tags to add box and then click Add You are warned Data Log Models editor that the tag does not exist Click Yes to add the tag to the list of tags in the datalog model Keep track of the tag name and add the tag in the Tags editor when convenient For more information about the Data Log Models editor see Chapter 26 i datalog Objects 5 Screen Demo Data Log Models OF x Enter tag names separated by a space if more than one in the Tags to add box then click Add to add them to the list of tags in the model Tags to add ve Tags in model mem int memini Add apgtem Second Remove Remove All Tag s in the model soo Importing tags from a PLC database Use the Import PLC Tags dialog box to selectively import tags from a PLC or other database into your application s HMI tag database Tags imported in this way are copied into the database they are not shared with the source database This means changes to tags in your application do not affect the database from which they have been imported and vice versa FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE You can import tags from any of these databases RSLogix 500 internal database with file extension rss RSLogix 5 internal database with file extension rsp RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 saved as an external database with file e
38. GermMachine A Temp GermMachineControl GermStepControl f A S z N NNN deg F Kiln Status KilnDesc Kilnmachine2 KilnMachineContral KilnStepContral a Hartt Overview x FanRoom a xi E Saving the Displays SteepingDesc to HMI Server succeeded es Clear All Position width 3 height 3 Client Area a as Z Workbook tabs 2 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 8 Showing and hiding items in the main window You can display or hide all the items in the main window except the menu bar by clicking the items on the View menu fa FactoryT alk Yiew Studio Machine Edition The Status bar Explorer File View Application Tools Window Help window Diagnostics List Y Status Bar and Standard toolbar are workbook Mode visible Workbook Mode is lE Beets ise ve Diagnostics List turned off v Graphics h Objects Alignment Back Style Pattern Style Foreground Color Background Color To hide or display the Explorer window m On the View menu click Explorer Window or click the Explorer Window tool on the toolbar Using the Explorer window The Explorer window is the main tool for working with FactoryTalk View Studio It lists the editors you use to develop your application as well as the components such as graphic displays you ve created Use the Explorer window to set up security for your application You can use the window to set up users and user groups and to assign s
39. Pixels Ja o At minimum T At masimum D Create an analog tag called tag Use tag s min and max property values b b to test sliders 22 8 A Use constant Min E Max fioo e Read from A Bl tags HER l Apply Beldie Close Help In the display drag the rectangle to the position that will indicate the lowest number in the range In the Animation dialog box set this position by clicking the At minimum check box Horizontal offset Fisels At minimum w oo At masimum D bo In the display drag the rectangle to the position that will indicate the highest number in the range EF 22 Animating graphic objects 8 Inthe Animation dialog box set this position by clicking the At maximum check box Horizontal offset Fisels Ab minimum I lo Ab masimum w 9 To save the settings click Apply When you finish setting up the animation the rectangle returns to its original position Setting up the different types of animation This section describes the different types of animation and provides tips and examples for setting up animation Setting up visibility animation With visibility animation an object becomes visible or invisible based on a tag value or the result of an expression If an object is invisible it is inactive Visibility animation is available for all objects Visibility animation overrides an object s Visible property If you use a tag s value to control vis
40. S GUIDE 6 Specify whether to replace the RSLinx Enterprise communication settings on the run time computer with the application s settings when the application starts 7 Specify whether to delete the application s log files on startup To start FactoryTalk View ME Station without running an application when Windows starts 1 In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Terminal Settings 2 Double click FactoryTalk View ME Station Startup FactoryT alk View ME Station Startup Do not start FactoryTalk View ME C Go to Configuration Mode On Startup F1 C Run Current Application Cancel F8 3 Click Go to Configuration Mode 4 Click Configuration Mode Options 15 14 15 e Running applications on a personal computer Configuration Mode Options Yes Load Current Application F1 C No Replace RSLinx C Yes Enterprise Communications F2 amp No OK Cancel F7 F8 5 Specify whether to load the current application when FactoryTalk View ME Station starts This option is not available if you have not loaded an application 6 Specify whether to replace the RSLinx Enterprise communication settings on the run time computer with the application s settings when the application starts This option is not available if you have not loaded an application Using Windows 7 Professional or Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 with ME Station In order to deploy a HMI s
41. Setting up graphic objects At run time the operator presses the key combination to activate the object to which the function key is assigned To assign function keys to buttons m On the Edit menu click Key Assignments or right click a button and then click Key Assignments Key Assignment Properties General Select an object Select a key assignment ClozeDigplayB utton F4 4 F4 a ClearalarmButton F3 SilencedlarnmnsB utton F2 AcknowledgeAlarmButton F1 Cancel Help For details about using the Key Assignment Properties dialog box to assign function keys and change function key assignments see Help Using the keyboard to navigate to and select objects If a mouse or touch screen is not available on the run time computer the operator can use the keys on a keyboard or keypad to select give focus to these objects m lists control list selector piloted control list selector display list selector diagnostics list alarm list and alarm status list m alarm banners m trends m numeric input enable buttons and string input enable buttons m numeric input cursor points RecipePlus table and selector m third party ActiveX input objects 21 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 8 What input focus looks like The object with focus is surrounded by a highlight box unless the Disable Highlight When Object has Focus box is selected in the Display Settings dialog box You can
42. Shape E Highlight color Rectangle Blink Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin o o Other M Audio l Key navigation l Take focus on press Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab 21 34 21 Setting up graphic objects Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time whether the operator can navigate to the button using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the operator can press the button to give it focus m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button The same text will appear as a caption on the pop up that appears when the button is pressed at run time m Inthe String tab specify the pop up to open and the number of characters to accept Inthe Timing tab set up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key For information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 12 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up goto display buttons Use the goto display button to open a graphic display You can create as many goto display buttons as you need but each button opens a s
43. Supported PanelBuilder tags are converted to HMI device tags and RSLinx aliases For information about unsupported PanelBuilder tags see below To convert an RIO application from PanelBuilder to FactoryTalk View 1 Convert the application as described on page B 2 2 Open the RSLinx Enterprise data server and then double click Communication Setup 3 Inthe Communication Setup editor add an RIO driver m For PanelView Plus 400 and 600 terminals use the 2711P RN1 driver m For all other PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminals use the 2711P RN6 driver For information about adding drivers in RSLinx see RSLinx Help 4 Expand the RIO tree right click RIO Data and then click Configure RIO 5 Inthe RIO Configuration dialog box right click RIO and then click Import 6 Browse to the location of the RIO configuration file The file is saved in the root of the application s directory 7 Inthe Communications Setup editor create a device shortcut named PVRIO that points to the RIO data device For information about creating a device shortcut see RSLinx Help 8 Correct any invalid RIO configurations Invalid RIO configurations are highlighted with red x icons 9 Save the converted RIO application Unsupported PanelBuilder RIO tags A PanelBuilder RIO tag will be converted to an HMI memory tag and an error will be logged to the conversion log file if the RIO tag m has a blank address m has a data type of Bit Arra
44. To convert the run time application file use the Restore runtime application operation in the Application Manager Data logging and alarm data that occurred at run time are not restored to the development application If your application uses FactoryTalk Security you must have write backup and restore permissions to convert the run time application to a development application For more information about FactoryTalk Security see Chapter 11 If desired you can also restore the run time application s FactoryTalk Local Directory to the development computer The development computer s FactoryTalk Local Directory will be backed up and the run time version will replace it If you choose this option make sure you have access to the run time FactoryTalk Local Directory For more information about the FactoryTalk Local Directory see Chapter 11 RSLinx Enterprise device shortcuts that were edited at run time are restored when you convert the run time application to a development application However the Runtime tab in the RSLinx Enterprise Communication Setup editor might not display the device configuration for the run time application Make sure the Runtime tab shows the correct device configuration before making any changes to the shortcuts RSLinx Enterprise device shortcuts that were valid on the run time terminal might not exist or ij might be invalid on the development computer Review all device and tag file shortcut assignments in
45. Use the maintained push button to change a setting in a machine or process Maintained push buttons are not useful for starting or stopping a machine or process When pressed the first time the maintained push button changes a tag to one value When pressed and released a second time the button changes the tag to another value The error state The button s error state is displayed at run time when m the Value connection is unassigned m the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up The error state is also displayed when the display containing the maintained push button first opens if the Value connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up To set up a maintained push button 1 Double click the maintained push button Maintained Push Button Properties Ea General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width 4 M Border uses back color Back site E Highlight color Solid Shape Rectangle State settings Next state based on Current State Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo fo Other MV Audio Cancel Help 21 21 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 22 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and how the button changes state m Inthe States tab specif
46. at run time For information about using a different message file see page 27 8 Creating information messages in multiple languages FactoryTalk View 5 00 and later supports information messages in multiple languages When you create information messages they are in the current application language You can export the information messages for translation and then import them back into the application For details see Chapter 12 Language switching information messages in FactoryTalk View ME Station 4 00 For applications that will run in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 4 00 use the CurrentLanguage expression function to specify message offsets in the information message file In the file divide your messages into sections for each language For information about the CurrentLanguage function see page 23 14 27 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 27 6 The INFORMATION display FactoryTalk View comes with an information message graphic display called INFORMATION It contains an information message display graphic object and buttons for acknowledging the displayed message and closing the display By default the INFORMATION graphic display opens automatically at run time when an information message is generated FS INFORMATION Condiments Display Ack Close F1 F2 Information Message Display Information message display graphic object Buttons You can use the INFORMATION display
47. carry forward parameters from one display to other related displays that open from it To carry the same parameter forward to subsequent displays assign the same tag placeholder for example 1 instead of a tag name in the parameter list or parameter file field of the object in the related display Example Using a parameter list to replace tag placeholders in linked displays This example uses PIDE faceplate displays to demonstrate parameter passing The main or first level display is called MAIN It has a goto display button that opens a Logix PIDE faceplate display The faceplate has a goto display button that opens a Trend faceplate In the Main display the goto display button has the parameter list option on the General tab selected and a structure tag name with a shortcut selected from the Tag Browser to represent 1 PLC1 Program Fermenter Temp Tank PIDE01 for example When the button is pressed the Logix PIDE faceplate opens The objects on the faceplate have been set up to read the tags in the structure 1 CV 1 SP and so on The objects 25 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE replace the parameter 1 with the structure tag name and then derive their values from the structure elements they have been set up to read To carry the same parameters forward another level the goto display button on the Logix PIDE faceplate display has the parameter list option on its General tab selected and the pa
48. en IE English Ireland en JM English Jamaica en NZ English New Zealand en PH English Philippines en ZA English South Africa en TT English Trinidad and Tobago en GB English United Kingdom F RFC1766 names RFC1766 Language Country Region Name en US English United States en ZW English Zimbabwe et EE Estonian Estonia fo FO Faroese Faroe Islands fa IR Farsi Iran fi FI Finnish Finland fr BE French Belgium fr CA French Canada fr FR French France fr LU French Luxembourg fr MC French Monaco fr CH French Switzerland mk MK FYRO Macedonian gl ES Galician Galician ka GE Georgian Georgia Default Sort Order Traditional ka GE Georgian Georgia Alternate Sort Order Modern Sort de AT German Austria de DE German Germany Default Sort Order Dictionary de DE German Germany Alternate Sort Order Phone Book Sort DIN de LI German Liechtenstein de LU German Luxembourg de CH German Switzerland el GR Greek Greece gu IN Gujarati India he IL Hebrew Israel hi IN Hindi India hu HU Hungarian Hungary Default Sort Order hu HU Hungarian Hungary Alternate Sort Order Technical Sort is IS Icelandic Iceland id ID Indonesian Indonesia it IT Italia
49. if an ActiveX control used in a graphic display is a different version than the one installed on the run time computer a warning is logged to indicate the mismatch Mismatched ActiveX controls might not behave as expected at run time Information indicates that a process or action has completed successfully For example a user logged on to the system or a tag value has been written to the data source Audit indicates that the system configuration has been changed FactoryTalk View records the creation modification and deletion of components such as graphic displays as audit messages Other Rockwell Automation products also use audit messages For example if you set up an audit log in RSMACC FactoryTalk View s audit messages will be sent there as well as to FactoryTalk Diagnostics In the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer the message severity is shown in the Severity column indicated by the symbol The content of the messages is provided by the system you don t need to do anything to set up message content Audiences FactoryTalk Diagnostics allows messages to be categorized differently for the various people for whom the messages are relevant You can sort the messages in the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer so that those relevant to a particular person are grouped together Who receives which messages You can specify which types of messages are sent to the Operator Engineer and Developer audiences 10 Se
50. in the Display Settings dialog box every new display is assigned the number 1 by default Therefore to use remote display changes you must assign a unique display number to each Replace and On Top display that you want to change remotely For more information about graphic displays see Chapter 19 2 Inthe Global Connections editor assign a tag or an expression to the Remote Display Number connection 3 Ifyou assign a tag to the Remote Display Number connection set up the data source to send a display s number to the connection when you want the display to open If you assign an expression to the Remote Display Number connection FactoryTalk View monitors the values of the tags used in the expression and uses the expression result to determine which display to open 4 Ifyou assign a tag to the Close An On Top Display or Close all On TopDisplays connection or both set up the data source to send a display s number to the connection when you want one or more displays to close If you assign an expression to the Close An On Top Display or Close all On TopDisplays connections FactoryTalk View monitors the values of the tags used in the expression and uses the expression result to determine which display to close Printing displays Use these global connections in the Display tab of the Global Connections editor to monitor and control display printing m Display Print Active notifies the data source that a display print
51. nine positions for images depending on the type of object On conversion images are positioned using the closest match Therefore some images might be clipped to fit the object All objects Turn Object View On property If this property is set to False the converted object has a transparent background no border no caption and no image All objects Blinking inner graphics If the inner graphic uses a color image it will not blink Use a monochrome image if you want the inner graphic to blink FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE B 12 _ Aprenbox C System tags This appendix describes system tags System tags are preconfigured HMI tags created by FactoryTalk View System tags are read only Display them as needed in your application Alarms The following tag contains the time and date when the status of alarms was last reset The date uses the long date format Tag name Type Function system AlarmReset String Contains the date and time of the DateAndTimeString last alarm reset For information about resetting alarms see page 9 9 Graphics The following HMI tags can be used to make graphic objects appear as though they are blinking on and off Tag name Type Function system BlinkFast Digital Toggles on and off every 100 ms 10 times per second system BlinkSlow Digital Toggles on and off every 500 ms twice per second A more efficient way to make graphic objects blink is to use the bli
52. recommended either an HMI tag or a data server tag You can also use the Property Panel to specify the properties and assign a tag to the Enter connection Holding the value until it is acknowledged To set up an object s Enter key handshaking so that the value at the Value connection is held until the data source notifies FactoryTalk View that it has read the value use two connections the Enter connection and the Enter handshake connection Instead of using an Enter key hold time specify an Enter key handshake time You must also specify the Handshake reset type You can use an Enter key control delay if desired 21 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 14 How the Handshake reset type works How the Enter handshake connection resets the Enter connection depends on which Handshake reset type you select With this handshake reset type The Enter connection is set to 0 when Non zero Value The Enter handshake connection has a non zero value If the Enter handshake connection already has a non zero value when the value is sent to the Value connection or when the Enter key control delay has expired if the delay is used then the Enter connection is not set to 1 and Enter key handshaking does not take place Zero to Non zero transition The Enter handshake connection changes from 0 to a non zero value Set up the data source to send a non zero value to the Enter handshake connection when it has re
53. see Help For information about setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual For applications running on personal computers you can also view the run time messages in the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer as described on page 10 5 If you don t want to display diagnostics messages in FactoryTalk View ME Station m In FactoryTalk View Studio in the Diagnostics List Setup editor clear the Display name box or clear the four Open display automatically when boxes Setting up how messages are displayed and printed at run time Follow these steps to set up how diagnostics messages are displayed at run time 1 In FactoryTalk View Studio in the Diagnostics List Setup editor specify which messages to print the graphic display to use when to open the graphic display and the maximum number of messages to store 2 If desired modify the default DIAGNOSTICS display or create your own graphic display to use for diagnostics messages For example if you don t want the operator to clear all messages at once edit the default display to remove the clear all button For information about graphic displays see Chapter 19 10 Setting up Factory Talk Diagnostics The DIAGNOSTICS display When you create an application it comes with a graphic display called DIAGNOSTICS The DIAGNOSTICS display is the default display f
54. specify the color of the highlight in this dialog box as well For more information see Help peor Highlight box Manual Automatic Focus highlight for ActiveX and trend objects For ActiveX and trend objects use the Common tab in the object s Properties dialog box to specify whether or not to display a highlight box For more information about setting up options on the Common tab see page 21 2 If the Disable Highlight When Object has Focus box is checked in the Display Settings dialog box that setting overrides the setting you specify in the Common tab Using the keys on the keyboard or keypad When a graphic display opens the keyboard navigable object that is closest to the top left corner of the display is selected The operator can use these keys to move to and select a different object Use this key To do this Tab Move from the upper left to the lower right Shift Tab Move from the lower right to the upper left Ctrl arrow key Move left right up or down Removing objects from and adding objects to the tab sequence By default you can use the keys to navigate to all lists alarm banners numeric input cursor points trends and ActiveX input objects in a display However you can turn off key navigation for these objects if desired When an object s key navigation is turned off the operator can still select the object using a mouse or touch screen if available 21 Setting up graphic objects B
55. such as the button action for a push button whether to use key navigation to select the object or whether to link a button to a specific object For information about touch margins see page 21 4 For information about key navigation see page 21 8 For information about linking buttons to objects see page 21 9 States Set up the states for the object including the value for each state and whether to display a caption or image for the state For information about checking that the states are set up the way you intended see page 20 33 Label For objects that don t have multiple states specify whether to use a caption or image on the object For information about using the Image Browser to select an image to use in the label see page 19 23 Timing Set up the object s auto repeat see page 21 11 or Enter key handshaking see page 21 12 settings Common Set up the object s spatial properties name and visibility For details see page 21 2 Connections Assign tags and expressions to the object s connections For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 The tabs that are available depend on the object m Some objects have only General and Common tabs m Ifan object can have more than one state the object s Properties dialog box contains a States tab Some objects have unique tabs that are not listed in the table above m The tabs that an Acti
56. tag1 gt tag2 then 0 else if tag gt tag3 then 2 else 4 23 Using expressions Using tag names and tag placeholders A tag name can be included as part of an expression or can stand alone as the entire expression To supply a tag name do one of the following m Type a tag name You can type a tag name that does not exist in the tag database When you click OK you are prompted to create the tag You can create it now or write down the name and create it later m Click the Tags button and select a tag from the Tag Browser Enclose tag names that contain dashes or start with a number in braces when you use them in an expression This distinguishes the characters in the tag name from the characters in the expression You can use string tags as operands with the plus arithmetic operator and with the relational operators Using tag placeholders instead of tag names The Graphics editor accepts tag placeholders instead of tag names Placeholders allow you to use the same display with different sets of tags You can use tag placeholders in m the graphic display that opens when the application is first run m graphic displays that are opened using a goto display button m graphic displays that are opened using a display list selector m the graphic display that is opened by a logout button m the graphic that is opened when auto logout is used m graphic displays that are opened using the Remote Display Number g
57. 15 This diagram shows the bit addresses and bit positions for the array tag Bit addres e 15 14 13 1211 10 09 08 07 Ob Os 04 O3 02 01 OO wzo OOOO TOfO lO lO lO 1 0 0 0 1 0 Bit position t 16 1514131211109 87654321 Bit address w 15 141312111009 08 OF 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Nat OPO TOPOLO TOTO LOL TOF Ofojo Bit position e 32 31 30 29 20 27 26 25 44 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 The tag is currently generating alarms at bit positions 2 6 12 21 22 26 and 30 9 Setting up alarms To set up alarms for this array tag 1 Create an alarm trigger for the array tag Use the Bit trigger type You must use a direct reference for the array tag The tag uses the Integer data type 16 bits per element Append L2 to the tag s starting address to indicate that the trigger will monitor 2 tag elements 32 bits as follows PLCS N7 0 L2 PLCS is the RSLinx Enterprise device shortcut name The two colons at the beginning are necessary when the tag reference contains a colon 2 Specify trigger values and alarm messages for the alarm trigger Each trigger value corresponds to a bit position not a bit address Bit in the array bit address Bit position Trigger value Message 00 l l Line 1 Conveyor has stopped 01 2 2 Line 1 Power failure 02 3 3 Line 2 Conveyor has stopped 03 4 4 Line 2 Power failure 31 32 32 Oven door open The Least Significant
58. 2 Designing an HMI tag database nnana nananana eee nes 3 2 Collecting intonation 22 240 ose eetneesaudetauee i i hrs eiar idi heed 3 2 Joanne 14Cs tLe teded canes ee adeessade tanned edane d Chesed beeee 3 2 Planning oraphic displays ogavi0hs0ss00edcdadesiuseisenees dhesxd tees 3 3 Developing a hierarchy of displays 0 0 eens 3 3 Creating a template to ensure consistency 0 0 cece eee 3 4 Desionine dipy tous oe obo a kn Sob soe ee ee hha eedudesseaeee kA 3 4 Oi a a E hee tee es oe te eh eae ay eae bee hada dewe ee seeeee ss 3 5 Planning laneta eh lt 4 0c 0 52d bade cob Seema shed Rede eS eee ek ae dare 3 5 Pilani alaini 22tb ten oat seeeehacadenepaoteensthadddawe ENENGE 3 6 Providing information for the operator 0 0 ccc eee eens 3 6 Local and information messages 00 ccc eee eens 3 6 Diagnostics messages 24 gs 5 eco pabaca asd tdeteuneseees send bere ds 3 6 Planning CMOS 2 cS cscs icd ae od eee Cad ee ewe ad eee eee eee eee eee 3 6 Plannin TeCIPeS s 6 in eta a he Gee ped dun o dg teed See ee eee eeed ee 3 7 Designing a secure SysSteM 0 s 43 2 6 Gawparscens ee hoe Pad eor eee dew sae Sd 3 7 4 Working with applications What is an application 2 0 0 0 0 eee een S 4 Application versus project 2 0 0 eens 4 HMI project file 2 205 6scn dit eeadedes sone ndeheedoweed a i 4 Run time application file 0 0 cee ee eee 4 2 Component files 0 cen teens 4 2
59. ABC Alarm list graphic object Ack Ack All Silence Close Buttons D Alarm Alarms Alarms A Vv F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 You can use the ALARM MULTI LINE display as is or modify the display For example you can select which alarm triggers alarms to display in the list The alarm list graphic object The ALARM MULTI LINE display contains an alarm list graphic object which lists the time the alarms occurred and were acknowledged as well as the alarm messages You can set up the alarm list to show any combination of active inactive acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms The alarm list in the ALARM MULTI LINE display is set up to show all alarms but you can edit it if desired For more information about the alarm list see page 9 32 9 27 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Buttons in the ALARM MULTI LINE display The ALARM MULTI LINE display contains alarm buttons for acknowledging and silencing alarms as well as buttons for scrolling the list and closing the display For information about how the buttons work see page 9 36 The STATUS display The Libraries folder contains a graphic display called STATUS The STATUS display allows the operator to see the status of all the alarms that have been set up in the Alarm Setup editor The STATUS display comes in two sizes 640x480 and 800x600 r STATUS 640x480 Condiments Library Alarm Status All Alarms 2 24 2007 1 33 12 P
60. Alarm History and Boiler displays since all users except the DEFAULT user have access to these displays Example Using security codes to control the visibility of the shutdown button This example shows how to set up users so that only authorized users can use the shutdown button to stop the application This example uses the CurrentUserHasCode security function to determine whether a user is authorized to view and use the shutdown button The security code E is assigned to users who are authorized to use the button l In the Runtime Security editor clear all the security codes for the DEFAULT user 11 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 11 12 2 Assign security codes to the other users To this user Assign these security codes OPERATOR A B MAINTENANCE A B C E ADMIN All 3 Create a shutdown button 4 Assign visibility animation to the button using this expression CurrentUserHasCode E For the Expression True State click Visible When the graphic display containing the shutdown button is open the MAINTENANCE and ADMIN user can see the button If the OPERATOR or DEFAULT user is logged in the button is not visible Providing a way for users to log in and log out Use login and logout buttons to provide a way for users to log in and log out Make sure you place these buttons in graphic displays that all users have access to Logging in When the application starts the DEFAULT use
61. CIP and Assembly Object addressing used in PanelBuilder32 Ethernet communications Tags that use unsupported communication protocols are converted to HMI memory tags Once you have set up communications for your converted application change the memory tags to device tags that point to the correct addresses All other imported tags are converted to HMI device tags For information about editing HMI tags see Chapter 7 For more information about which communication protocols are not supported see Help or see the Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase Bit array tags You can monitor bit arrays for alarm conditions in FactoryTalk View but you can t assign bit arrays to most graphic objects or write to bit arrays The only exception is the piloted control list selector object For this object you can assign a bit array tag to the Visible States connection All bit array tags in your PanelBuilder application are converted to HMI memory tags For information about monitoring bit arrays for alarm conditions see Chapter 9 For information about editing HMI tags see Chapter 7 For information about the piloted control list selector see Help B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications Converting RIO communications Remote I O RIO communications are not supported for applications that will run on personal computers You can use RIO communications on the PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE run time platforms
62. Depending on what type of printer you use pen lines with a width of 1 pixel might not appear in the printout Choose high contrast colors and wider line widths to ensure that the trend data prints clearly Run time errors for the trend If data for the trend is not available at run time due to communication errors a message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics See Help for information about solving common trend problems 28 12 C20 Setting up RecipePlus This chapter describes m what recipes are m summary of steps for creating a recipe system m how the recipe system works m specifying the run time location of recipe files m creating recipe files m comparing recipes m creating RecipePlus buttons selectors and tables m testing RecipePlus objects m using objects from the RecipePlus Components graphic library m using buttons with the recipe objects m viewing data values that are saved at run time About recipes A recipe is a set of numeric and string data values ingredients that can be downloaded to their associated tags at the data source Each ingredient has a pre set data value assigned to it The set of data values for all the ingredients in a recipe is called a data set The set of numeric and string tags assigned to the ingredients in the recipe is called a tag set The ingredients data sets and tag sets are stored together in a recipe file You can create different pairs of data sets and tag sets fo
63. Enterprise RSLinx Classic and KEPServerEnterprise provide access to OPC DA compliant tags In the FactoryTalk View documentation the tags you use through a data server are called data server tags For more information about data servers see Chapter 5 Data server tags include tags found in Logix5000 processors and tags from other OPC compliant devices You use data server tags by providing a direct reference to the tag s location wherever you want your application to use the data 6 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE HMI tags In addition to direct referencing tags from data servers FactoryTalk View allows you to create tags with additional properties such as minimum and maximum values scale and offset These tags can reference values at an external data source or store values in the run time computer s memory Tags you create in FactoryTalk View are called HMI tags The data source The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data for both data server tags and HMI tags The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source is set up to exchange information in the form of numeric or string values between the FactoryTalk View value table and the machine that your application is controlling Basic st
64. Examples Flipping drawing objects vertically and horizontally E E E E E E Select object Flip vertical E E E E m m m m u E Select object Flip horizontal Rotating drawing objects You can rotate all the drawing objects or groups of drawing objects except images panels and rounded rectangles You can attach rotation animation to the same drawing objects With rotation animation the object rotates around an anchor point to indicate a tag s value at run time For details about rotation animation see page 22 14 Rotate tool 20 Using graphic objects When you rotate text 1t rotates around the anchor point but the text itself remains upright To rotate a drawing object l pA a On the Objects menu click Rotate or on the Objects toolbar click the Rotate tool Click the object you want to rotate A small crosshair circle appears in the middle of the object This is the anchor point that is used as the center of rotation You can place the crosshair inside an object C You can place the crosshair outside an object A To move the center of rotation click the cross hair and drag it to a new anchor position The anchor can be inside or outside the object Click an edge of the object and drag in the direction you want to rotate it To rotate the object in five degree increments press Ctrl while you drag When the object is in the desired position release the mouse button Locking ob
65. FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box opens 16 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 16 4 Current application Load Application Run Application Application Settings F1 F2 F3 soto 3 yes Terminal Settings Delete Log Files Before Running F5 No Device PVP12761 IP Addr 10 108 18 5 Reset F7 Subnet 255 255 252 0 Starting FactoryTalk View ME Station on a PanelView Plus terminal If you are running a PanelView Plus terminal the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box opens automatically when the terminal starts up Specifying the driver to use for the transfer You can download the run time application file to the PanelView Plus PanelView Plus CE or PanelView Plus 6 terminal using m Ethernet m a direct serial connection If you are using an Ethernet connection for the transfer you don t need to set up a driver for the transfer since the Ethernet driver is selected and loaded by default If you are using a serial connection for the transfer specify and set up the driver You can also transfer applications to the terminal using a Flash Card For information about this method see the Panel View Plus Terminals User Manual To specify and set up a serial driver for the transfer 1 In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Terminal Settings 16 Transferring applications to a PanelView Plus terminal 2 Double click Networks and Communications 3 Inthe Networks a
66. For details about the options in the tabs see Help In the General tab specify what the button looks like at run time For some buttons you can specify whether to link the button to a specific object For the logout button you can specify a display to open when the button is pressed and whether the display will use a parameter file or list when it opens In the Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button In the Timing tab set up whether or not the button press repeats automatically when the operator presses and holds the button down You can also set up the rate at which the button press repeats For more information about auto repeat see page 21 12 The Timing tab is available only for the move up move down move left move right page up and page down buttons In the Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility 3 When you are finished click OK 21 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 18 Buttons described later in the chapter Information about setting up these buttons is described later in the chapter Close display Multistate push Goto display Numeric input enable Interlocked push Print alarm history Latched push Print alarm status Macro Ramp Maintained push String input enable Momentary push How to use push buttons Push buttons start or stop processes or actions by changing tag values Never use push buttons for e
67. For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 Setting up graphic objects Setting up gauges The gauge graphic object represents numeric values using a needle on a dial At run time the gauge indicates the value of a tag or expression in relation to the gauge s minimum and maximum values To set up a gauge 1 Double click the gauge General Display Common Connections Appearance Back style C Back color E Fill color Line style Line width Nestle color e z 1 Soia F BB Fore color Sweep style Needle width Point Major ticks Minor ticks 3 fi Font Size fs Jf wf wf Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the gauge looks like at run time In the Display tab specify how the gauge displays values at run time In the Common tab specify the gauge s spacial properties name and visibility In the Connections tab specify the tag or expression from which the gauge receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 47 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 48 Setting up scales Use the scale graphic object to show the possible range of values for a bar graph To place value labels on the sca
68. If the display does not close the close value if any is not written out If the display change is controlled by the operator and the graphic display that is closing is a Replace display if there are no On Top displays open an empty window is displayed The operator will not be able to use the application again unless a remote display change occurs or an alarm activity or information message display opens We therefore recommend that you use close display buttons in On Top displays only For information about setting up close display buttons see Help Display list selectors Use the display list selector to show a list of graphic displays that the operator can choose from The operator can scroll through the list and select the graphic display to open The specified display doesn t open if the operator does not have security access for the display You can also assign a parameter file or parameter list that assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the display opens For more information about parameter files and lists see Chapter 25 For information about setting up display list selectors see Help 13 Setting up display navigation How display types affect the selector s behavior The display list selector s behavior at run time also depends on which types of graphic displays are already open and which type of display it is opening m Ifthe selected graphic display is a Replace display it closes any ope
69. Image Browser where it will be stored as a bitmap Import Symbol Factory objects directly into display 1 Launch Symbol Factory either by using the Menu bar Objects gt Symbol Factory or from the Objects toolbar 2 Browse through the Categories and locate the graphic to be used Select the graphic so it is highlighted To place the object into the display you could m Click the Copy button in Symbol Factory Symbol Factory will be minimized to the system tray then from the Menu bar click on Edit and paste Or m Click the object and hold down the mouse button while dragging the object to where you want it placed on the disply Releasing the mouse drops the object onto the display Tips for using images Using bitmaps versus JPEG images When deciding whether to use a bitmap image or a JPEG image consider these points m FactoryTalk View supports 256 color grayscale and 16 million color JPEG images only For all other color types use bitmaps For large color images 16 million color 320 x 240 pixels or larger JPEG images load faster than bitmaps In all other cases bitmaps load faster than JPEGs Color JPEG images have a much smaller file size than the equivalent bitmap image and therefore require less disk space at run time Guidelines for using images Images consume Windows resources so when using graphic images use the lowest color depth possible 19 25 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUID
70. In the Startup editor turn on data logging by selecting the Data logging check box Also use this editor to specify the data log model to use at run time See Chapter 14 In the Graphics editor create a graphic display containing the trend graphic object and set up how the object looks which tag values to display the start time and the time span for the data Also specify the name of the data log model to use Data log files As soon as the application starts running FactoryTalk View begins logging tag values to the data log files When the maximum number of data points have been logged the oldest data is deleted to make room for the new data FactoryTalk View supplies data from the log files to the trend object for the requested tags and time span The data log files are retained when you restart an application after a shutdown or power loss You can delete the log files from the run time computer at application startup Use data logging to keep a permanent record of tag data You can record tag data as tag values change or on a periodic basis for example every minute For information about deleting the log files see page 15 16 26 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE File names FactoryTalk View creates two data log files m Data Log Model Name log m Data Log Model Name tag You ll need this information if you log to a custom path and want to delete the log files manually Data Log Models A data log m
71. Iofs o Project Settings EA Runtime Security l g Diagnostics List Setup Global Connections Project window size PvPlus FOOT 000 640 480 width Height i General Runtime Please sowe Alorm Setup edits before changing the Project Window Size setting between Panelview Plus Compact and PanelViaw Plus or vice verse Any uns eved Alam Setup changes will be lost ifthe Project Window Size setting is changed from a Panelview Plus to Panelview Plus Compact terminal or VICE versa Cancel Help You can change an application to PanelViewPlus Compact by selecting it in the Project window size list 4 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 4 18 Viewing application properties You can view this information about your application m application name application description if any To view application properties m On the Application menu click Application Properties Malthouse Clox 6402480 Properties General Mame Malthouse Clogs 6402460 Description E Cancel Help Viewing HMI server properties You can use the Explorer window to view this information about your project or HMI server m application name application description if any location of the project file number of graphic displays in the application m maximum number of displays you re licensed to use ey System Add Process Faceplates E Pro Server St
72. Keypad Write Expression Optional Expression programmable controller data source control connection FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE In FactoryTalk View the data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source is configured to exchange information in the form of numeric or string values between FactoryTalk View and the machine that your application is controlling The general term data source is used unless specifically discussing a programmable controller Summary of steps Follow these steps to convert PanelBuilder 1400e applications l Prepare the application in PanelBuilder 1400e and then convert the application file as described in the next section Specify additional project settings as described on page 4 11 For example if you want the application to have a border around its graphic displays or to use a title bar you can specify these options in the Project Settings editor We recommend that you use the Project Settings editor to change the project window size rather than using the Convert to new window size option in the Machine Edition Import Wizard If you use the Convert to new window size option in the Machine Edition Import Wizard check the position of the graphic objects in each display Set up communications and edit tags that don t convert directly For mor
73. Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 limits in graphic displays 1 off line browsing for 7 planning 2 using in expressions 95 See also Analog tags Array tags Backing tags Data server tags Digital tags HMI tags PLC tags SLC tags String tags Structured tags System tags Test mode for animation 5 for graphic displays 10 for RecipePlus objects 10 for trends 10 Text graphic object 3 12 blinking 11 editing 13 Text strings exporting for translation 6 importing 13 translating in Excel 9 translating in Unicode file 9 Time and date at run time 17 setting using global connections 2 system tags 2 updating 2 Time and date display graphic object 6 57 at run time 19 specifying time and date format for 17 Time and date embedded variables 6 at runtime 8 Title bar and security 14 in graphic displays 15 Toolbars 4 Background Color toolbar 31 Foreground Color toolbar 31 in the Graphic Displays editor 7 showing and hiding 8 Standard toolbar 5 States toolbar 33 Tools Application Manager 10 DeskLock 2 17 Diagnostic Setup 6 Diagnostics Viewer 6 Tag Import and Export Wizard 11 Transfer Utility 6 Touch margins using on buttons 4 Touch screens positioning objects for 4 Transfer Utility tool 6 Translating application text in Excel 9 in Unicode 9 Transparent background style 21 Trend data printing at run time 12 remotely 12 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 Trend graphic object 6 1 and data logging 5 at runti
74. Numeric Data Display Object List Set Bit Cursor Point Unsupported settings and controls This section describes PanelBuilder 1400e settings and controls that are not used in FactoryTalk View Controls for transferring run time application files PanelBuilder 1400e uses these optional controls for transferring files to the run time terminal m Transfer Inhibit control m Transfer Request control m Transfer Status control These controls are not necessary in FactoryTalk View because the ME Transfer Utility allows you to transfer the run time project file while running a project on the run time terminal Settings and controls for alarms FactoryTalk View does not use these PanelBuilder 1400e features and settings to manage alarms m alarm relays m bit alarm acknowledgement Remote Alarm Operation Hold Time The PanelBuilder 1400e Remote Alarm Ack Control Hold Time will be used for all alarm hold times You can change the hold time in the FactoryTalk View Alarm Setup editor in the Advanced tab Remote Alarm Control Delay Time In FactoryTalk View if an Ack connection is assigned when an alarm is acknowledged the Ack connection is set immediately without waiting for a delay time FactoryTalk View does not use these PanelBuilder 1400e controls to manage alarms m PLC Controlled Relay control m PLC Controlled Audio control Acknowledge to PLC control if the Alarm Acknowledge to PLC option is set to Bit A
75. Right click the component and then click Remove Renaming components To rename a component 1 Right click the component and then click Rename 18 e Working with components Rename From PurnpRoorn To PurnpFioorn Cancel 2 Inthe To box type the new name 3 Click OK Duplicating components The Duplicate option is useful for creating multiple similar components For example you could create a graphic display to use as a template then duplicate the display each time you want to use the template To duplicate a component 1 Right click the component and then click Duplicate 2 Inthe Component name box type a name for the duplicate component 3 Click OK Printing Each component has a Print item on its File menu To print a component s contents 1 Open the component 2 On the File menu click Print 3 Click OK For information about selecting a printer and printing at run time see page 2 13 18 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 18 6 C49 Using graphic displays This chapter describes the Graphics Images and Local Messages editors in the Graphics folder and outlines how to m use the Graphics editor m set up graphic displays m create a background for your displays m use graphic libraries import graphic images m create local messages in your displays m print graphic displays at run time Before creating graphic displays specify project settings Proje
76. State settings Number of states Trigger type 5 Value X Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the indicator looks like at run time and the number of states for the indicator m Inthe States tab specify how the indicator s appearance changes when its tag or expression s value changes For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 Inthe Common tab specify the indicator s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression from which the indicator receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 43 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 44 How to use bar graphs gauges and scales Bar graphs and gauges display graphical representations of numeric values The scale is used with bar graphs to indicate the range of values for the bar graph Bar graphs make it easy to compare values Bar graphs display numeric values in bar graph format They are useful for allowing comparisons between multiple values or for representing the fill levels of tanks for which a reading on a vertical scale is appropriate For example one bar graph can show the required level of a tank and a second bar graph can show the actual level of the tank The fi
77. The Preview frame will show the changes made to the graphic 5 When finished modifying the graphic can be dragged and dropped from the Preview frame to the Graphic Display or copied and pasted into the Graphic Display Symbol Factory has it s own Help file which explains operations within Symbol Factory and it s functions For more information click Help in the Symbol Factory 19 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Fi Save tool 19 16 To open a graphic library l Z In the Explorer window open the Graphics folder and then open the Libraries folder Double click the library name or right click it and then click Open Creating graphic libraries You can create a graphic library in the Libraries folder or create a graphic display in the Displays folder and then add the display to the Libraries folder To create a graphic library l 2 In the Graphics folder right click Libraries and then click New Create the objects you want to put in the library For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 On the File menu click Save or click the Save tool In the Component name box type a name for the library and then click OK The library is added to the list in the Libraries folder You can also create a graphic display and then use Add Component Into Application to add the display to the Libraries folder To add a graphic display to the library l 2 3 Create t
78. Tile Horizontal arranges all the open displays with as much of the top part of each display showing as possible Creating a background for your display You can create a background for your graphic display by converting graphic objects to wallpaper When objects are converted to wallpaper they are locked into position and become an unchanging background for the other objects in the display Converting objects that do not need to be animated or updated with tag values can significantly improve the run time performance of a graphic display Objects that have been converted to wallpaper cannot be selected or edited until you unlock the wallpaper Also animations attached to the wallpaper objects are not in effect However animations are restored when you unlock the wallpaper Similarly any tags or expressions assigned to an object become inactive when the object is converted to wallpaper Connections are restored if you unlock the wallpaper To manage a number of objects easily group the objects and then convert the group to wallpaper 19 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To convert objects to wallpaper l Select the objects to convert For information about selecting objects see page 20 23 On the Edit menu select Wallpaper and then click Convert to Wallpaper For a single object you can right click it and then click Convert to Wallpaper To unlock the wallpaper On the Edit menu select Wallpaper an
79. Tools Window Help IEEE oe lie a Local USPAZ FULKE RO E a InstantFizz_ME lnstantFiz2_ME ES System 3 E Project Settings ae Ge Runtime Security oy D iag i ostic Lis t 5 etu p Global Connections a Startup HMI Taos i Diagnostics List Setup Pumphouse Mil Log messages to printer when Warming occurs T Information occurs T Audit occurs Runtime display Display name DIAGNOSTICS m Edit Open display automatically wher if Error occurs M Warming occurs Information occurs I Audit occurs Masinurn number of messages 200 mei tee For details about using the Diagnostics List Setup editor see Help 10 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 10 10 Printed messages list the date and time the category of system activity and the message text By default messages are not printed at run time By default your application is set up to display diagnostics messages automatically at run time If you want to use the default settings you don t need to do anything further to set up diagnostics messages for print and display in FactoryTalk View ME Station The messages that are printed and displayed depend on how you set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the run time computer m For applications running on personal computers use the Diagnostics Setup tool to set up diagnostics message logging For information about using the Diagnostics Setup tool
80. Using graphic objects m duplicate objects m resize objects m reshape drawing objects m delete objects Moving objects You can move objects using the mouse or the keyboard The keys give you fine positioning allowing you to move objects in small increments You can also use the grid to position objects precisely Another option is to position an object using the object s Top and Left properties in the Property Panel For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 You can also specify an object s position using the Common tab in the object s Properties dialog box For more information see page page 21 2 Once you ve moved objects into position you might want to align other objects with them or lock them into place For information about aligning objects see page 20 49 For information about locking objects into position see page 20 53 To automatically align objects to the grid as you move them m On the View menu select Snap On A check mark appears beside the menu item when the option is selected For information about setting up the grid see page 19 8 To move objects by dragging with the mouse 1 Select one or more objects 2 Place the pointer on an object not on the edge or on the handles 3 Drag the objects to the desired position E E ooo gt E z E E Select the object Drag the object to the desired position If you selected several objects dragging one of the obje
81. When the object s property value changes the new value is written to the associated tag For details see page 20 21 Displaying processes and values graphically Use this graphic object To display this Bar graph Gauge Scale Multistate indicator Numeric values in bar graph format The bar graph increases or decreases in size to show the changing value For details see page 21 46 Numeric values in dial format The gauge s needle moves around the dial to show the changing value For details see page 21 47 A static indication of the range of values for a bar graph For details see page 21 48 The state of a process on a panel that changes its color image or caption to indicate the current state Each state is set up to correspond to a numeric tag value For details see page 21 39 Symbol The state of a process using a monochrome image that changes color to indicate the current state Each state corresponds to a numeric tag value This object is useful for showing the state of a process or operation at a glance For details see page 21 41 20 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 6 Use this graphic object To display this List indicator The state of a process using a list of possible states with the current state highlighted Each state is represented by a caption in the list and corresponds to a numeric tag value This indicator is useful if you want to vie
82. a RecipePlus selector and table and buttons for working with the objects It also contains a bar graph and multistate indicator that display the status of recipe operations Use test mode to see how the different RecipePlus objects work together In test mode the RecipePlus selector in the library displays any recipe files and units that you have created in your application You can use the objects in the library as they are or you can edit them to suit your needs To use the objects drag and drop or copy and paste them into your graphic display For information about copying and pasting objects from the graphic libraries see page 20 41 r RecipePlus_Components Condiments Library Recipe Selection Recipe Buttons Download recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit Upload Upload and Create unit unit unit unit oo recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe rer unit unit unit unit Raio recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit Delete Rename ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient To use the RecipePlus_ Components graphic library 1 Open the Graphics folder and then open the Libraries folder
83. a numeric pop up keypad or scratchpad enter a number in the keypad or scratchpad and then send the number to the data source For more information about using the numeric input enable button at run time see page 17 6 You can also set up the numeric input enable button to work as a ramp button In this case when the button has focus the operator can press a move up or move down button to change a tag by either an integer or floating point value The operator can also press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow on the keyboard or keypad to ramp the value To set up a numeric input enable button 1 Double click the numeric input enable button Numeric Input Enable Properties Ed General Label Numeric Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width MV Border uses back color ja I Back color Back style Pattern style oO Border color Sodda ts None a _ Pattern color Shape E Highlight color Rectangle Blink Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin o o Other M Audio l Key navigation l Take focus on press OK Cancel Help ok 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time whether the operator can navigate to the button using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the operator can press the button to give it focus 21 30 21 Setting up graphic objects m Inthe Label
84. about setting up a particular object see Help 20 28 Show Hide Property Panel tool Using the Property Panel 20 Using graphic objects Use the Property Panel to modify the properties of graphic objects and assign tags and expressions to the objects The Property Panel is especially useful for making changes to the properties of multiple objects at the same time To open the Property Panel use one of these methods m On the Graphics toolbar click the Property Panel tool m On the View menu click Property Panel m Right click an object and then click Property Panel m Right click an empty area of the display and then click Property Panel Setting up properties Use the Property Panel s Properties tab to set up the properties of the selected object or objects If only one object is Property Pane selected this box gt Multiple Selection shows the object s P ti name and type Ope ress Connections All Properties C Shared Properties If a group object is selected click this GroupH eight button to edit the GroupLett properties of the oe GroupT op objects within the Group yisible group Group idth Alignment Middle Center Audio True AutoRepeatD elay 400 msec AutoR epeath ate 0 BackColor EE ooon Back Style Solid Blink False BorderColor EE OOS00000 BorderStyle Name Type String l Sets the name of the object Click to close Click for help o
85. activity occurs If desired you can set up your own graphic displays to open automatically instead of the default displays You can also set up any of the displays to open when an operator presses a goto display button or selects a display in the display list selector 17 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 17 20 The operator can acknowledge alarm and information messages The operator can clear alarm and diagnostics messages The operator can sort alarms and reset their status Viewing information about run time communication errors To display communication errors in the diagnostics list object set up message routing so that messages are sent to the FactoryTalk View Diagnostics List For information about setting up diagnostics message routing see Chapter 10 Changing languages You can change languages at run time The languages available depend on what has been set up for the run time application There is a separate language switch button for each language that you can change to For information about setting up language switching see Chapter 12 To change languages m Press a language switch button Text strings in the application change to the language specified by the button 18 Working with components This chapter describes which editors have components working with components printing information in components For information on working with particular editors see the chapters later in th
86. anaana naana eee ene Removing components n snoa susana eee eens Renaming components 0 00 teenies Duplicating components annaa c cee eee PAM nee eae oS SOR Be Hae eee Abd Bee eee ee Contents xiii FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE XIV 19 Using graphic displays About graphic displays and graphic objects 0 19 Before yOu DEDIN a5 bo uadou ee so cea en eae a hes bee bees bees 19 2 Using the Graphics editor 0 0 eee eens 19 3 Creating and opening graphic displays 0 0 0 cc cece eee eee 19 3 Importing and exporting graphic displays 0 0 0c cee eee 19 5 Tools and tips for working in the Graphics editor 0 0000 19 5 Using context MCNUS z 4 20644 244 4 lt e0 b ooh 0b edad s Pade we es Ged E RS 19 6 Using the toolbars 2444 46i02444450 605554 Deane ee obs ba E ea 19 7 Showing displays in grayscale 0 eee eens 19 8 Using Ihe giid 22454505460 4cadee besa dom Adee ee ee dws dad een ohare 19 8 Zooming in and OUls lt 5 4 220 c445504405556 24d ee oe eos oS Sod mR RE OS 19 9 Correcting MISTAKES 44552545504 20066 355592 naoR ob EASES a 19 10 Testing your displays as you work 0 ee eee 19 10 Setting up graphic displays 0 0 0 0 eee 19 11 Specifying display settings nonan ananena 19 11 About display types 0 0 een nee eens 19 12 Resizing displays 0 ccc eee eee nent eens 19 13 Creating a backgrou
87. and work on multiple graphic displays at the same time Creating and opening graphic displays To create a graphic display 1 In the Graphics folder do one of the following m right click Displays and then click New m click the New Display tool m drag and drop the Displays icon into the workspace On the Edit menu click Display Settings to open the Display Settings dialog box and specify settings for the display For more information see page 19 11 3 Create the objects you want to put in the display For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 4 On the File menu click Save or click the Save tool 5 Inthe Component name box type a name for the display and then click OK The display is added to the list in the Displays folder The display is created as a Replace display by default but you can change it to an On Top display in the Display Settings dialog box For more information about display types see page 19 12 19 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 4 Standard toolbar Graphics toolbar gt mom inweumanaaacie To open a graphic display m Inthe Graphics folder open the Displays folder and then double click the display name or right click the display name and then click Open You can also drag and drop the display from the Explorer window to an empty area in the FactoryTalk View Studio workspace This example shows a graphic display with the Explorer window
88. and Settings All r nen NN Enterprise mMeE HMI Projects Bakery RecipePlus organic cookies rpp Data Sets Data Set 1 from Recipel Small batch Data Set 2 from Recipe2 Small batch Ingredients that are duplicated in Recipel butter Data Set 1 1 Data Set 2 2 eg gs Data Set 1 4 Time and date formats The time and date in the report use the time and short date format for the current application language For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 Printing recipes You can use the RecipePlus Editor to print recipe data sets For information about printing from editors see page 2 13 29 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Creating RecipePlus objects You can create one RecipePlus table and RecipePlus selector per graphic display You can create multiple RecipePlus buttons in a display with a different action assigned to each The objects and button actions to use depend on how you want to use your recipe system For example if you just want to write data set values to tags all you need is a RecipePlus selector and a RecipePlus button with the download action For information about how the different objects in the recipe system work see page 29 2 To create a recipe object 1 In the Graphics editor create or open a graphic display 2 Select a RecipePlus drawing tool by doing one of the following m Inthe Objects toolbox click the RecipePlus Button RecipePlus Selecto
89. and at run time For example while you develop your application use diagnostics messages to track what the system is doing and to ensure you ve set things up the way you intend At run time use diagnostics messages to show the operator messages about system activity You can also save information in a log file for future processing or analysis How to set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics You must set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on both the development computer and the run time computer The settings for FactoryTalk Diagnostics apply to all Rockwell Automation products installed on the computer 10 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 10 2 Setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics involves m setting up destinations where logged information is received for storage or display m setting up which destinations receive which categories of messages This is called message routing m setting up how messages are displayed and printed at run time This chapter describes how to set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on personal computers For information about setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual Destinations FactoryTalk Diagnostics allows you to send diagnostics messages to multiple destinations During application development During application development you can send diagnostics messages to m the Diagnostic
90. animation see Help Setting up height animation With height animation an object s height changes based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object s height will be halfway between its minimum and maximum percentage Height animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up height animation see Help Setting up rotation animation With rotation animation an object rotates around an anchor point based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will rotate half the specified amount Rotation animation is available for all drawing objects except images panels and rounded rectangles If you apply rotation animation to text the text rotates around the anchor point but remains in the upright position For more information about setting up rotation animation see Help 22 Animating graphic objects Setting up horizontal slider animation With horizontal slider animation you can use a drawing object to set the value of a tag To do this define a path for the object At run time when the operator moves the object horizontally using a mouse
91. another FactoryTalk View application that is import them directly from the application without first creating a tag csv file import tags from legacy PLC databases created using WINtelligent LOGIC 5 or A I 5 with file extension dsc import tags from RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 saved as an external database with file extension ctd before importing explicitly export to the ctd format to be sure of including the latest changes To start the wizard do one of the following m In FactoryTalk View Studio on the Tools menu click Tag Import and Export Wizard m On the Windows Start menu select Programs Rockwell Software FactoryTalk View Tools and then click Tag Import and Export Wizard For details about using the wizard see the wizard s Help 7 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 7 12 o gt C8 Setting up global connections This chapter describes what global connections are updating the date and time changing displays controlling display changes remotely using parameter files or parameter lists with display changes close On Top displays printing displays running macros setting up the backlight intensity remotely monitoring run time RAM usage About global connections Global connections are connections that apply to your entire run time application Global connections allow the data source to control or interact with your application at run time You can use glo
92. as tag reads tag writes and communications errors For details see page 10 12 Information message display Messages about the process prompts or instructions and information about current states For details see page 27 6 Local message display Ongoing information about the status of devices or processes For details see page 19 30 20 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Selecting tools for creating graphic objects The Objects menu in the Graphics editor contains items for creating objects as well as items for selecting and rotating objects You can also create most objects using the tools on the Objects toolbar Objects menu Objects toolbar Objects Arrange Animation Ic v Select hk Ase oC Rotate 488 D1 4 er a Drawing te o So lt gt m oy js m Push Button Geb a tnt Ss Sy nare and String P E un fb t Indicator H xndpwa ze Gauge and Graph i l z 68 8eaaan4 Advanced O fo amp GS amp a Ek H Alarm and Ewent OLE Object Activex Control Import Symbol Factors Before you can create an object you must select the object s tool either by clicking a menu item or by clicking the tool on the toolbar When you position a cursor over a tool on the toolbar the name of the tool is displayed in a tooltip and in the status bar To select a tool m Click the tool on the toolbar or on the Objects menu When you click a tool the pointer changes to show
93. at run time communication errors viewing 20 data logging 5 displaying numeric values 28 displaying trend data 12 logging in 4 printing from a PanelView Plus CE terminal 1 2 printing from a PanelView Plus terminal 2 3 using the numeric pop up windows 10 using the string pop up windows 15 Problems at runtime memory usage 7 Problems during application development exporting text for translation 8 importing alarm XML files 3 importing graphics XML files 3 importing text 14 navigating through displays 3 opening applications 3 9 Process faceplates adding to an existing application 17 selecting tags for 6 Project files location of viewing 18 Project Settings editor 17 Project window size ll 12 changing 13 Projects versus applications 1 Properties dialog box opening 28 setting up objects in 26 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 using to assign connections to graphic objects 34 36 Property Panel opening 29 setting up objects in 29 using to assign connections to graphic objects 30 Push buttons 18 R RAM usage monitoring at runtime 7 Ramp button graphic object 5 36 27 at run time 16 setting up auto repeat for 11 Range of motion for animation 6 7 Read connection 30 Read write connection 30 Real time trends See Current trends Recipe files setting up 6 specifying location for 5 RecipePlus 1 RecipePlus button graphic object 9 16 3 creating 10 using at runtime 16 18 12 RecipePlus Editor 6 8 viewing
94. bit position for bit triggers All alarms for a particular trigger are acknowledged when m the trigger s Remote Ack connection value changes to the Acknowledge all value The Acknowledge all value is specified in the Use ack all value box in the Alarm Setup editor m the operator presses an acknowledge all alarms button that is set up to acknowledge the alarms for a specific alarm trigger All alarms in the alarm log file are acknowledged when m the operator presses an acknowledge all alarms button that is set up to acknowledge all alarms m the Remote Ack All connection s value changes to a new non zero value For more information about acknowledging alarms see page 9 38 The operator can send button presses to objects that do not have focus For information about linking buttons to objects see page 21 9 Methods for clearing and deleting alarms Alarms are deleted from the alarm log file and cleared from all alarm lists and alarm banners when the operator presses the clear alarm history button You can set up the button to clear alarms for all alarms or for a specific alarm trigger The alarm in the alarm banner is cleared when the operator presses the clear alarm banner button It is not deleted from the alarm log file For more information about clearing and deleting alarms see page 9 40 9 Setting up alarms Methods for silencing alarms The audio alarm indicator is available for applicati
95. box type a name for the imported application up to 32 characters long 3 Ifdesired type a description of the application If you don t type a description now you can add one later as described on page 4 18 4 Specify whether the application will be a Compact Machine Edition application Applications that exceed the Compact Machine Edition application limits will not be converted into Compact Machine Edition applications 5 Specify a language for the application For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 6 Click Import The Machine Edition Import Wizard opens 4 Working with applications 7 Follow the directions in the Machine Edition Import Wizard For more information about importing PanelBuilder 1400e applications see Appendix A For more information about importing PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications see Appendix B Opening applications You can open an application when you start FactoryTalk View Studio or once FactoryTalk View Studio is already open Older RSView Machine Edition application files are converted to the current version of FactoryTalk View when you open them However you can still use the current version of FactoryTalk View Studio to create older version run time files For information about the features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View see Appendix G For information about opening a sample application see page 2 2 To open an existing applicatio
96. can assign a different set of these connections to each alarm trigger or to only one or some alarm triggers m Handshake Assign a tag to this connection to notify the data source when the trigger s value changes Ack Assign a tag to this connection to notify the data source when the operator acknowledges an alarm or all alarms Remote Ack Assign a tag or an expression to this connection to allow the data source to acknowledge alarms m Remote Ack Handshake Assign a tag to this connection to notify the data source when a remote acknowledgement occurs m Message Assign a tag to this connection to send alarm messages to the connection Make sure the tag supports the type of data sent in the alarm message For example if the message is a string of text assign a string tag to the Message connection m Message Notification Assign a tag to this connection to notify FactoryTalk View that an alarm message has been sent to the connection and FactoryTalk View must wait before sending a new message m Message Handshake Assign a tag to this connection if you want the data source to notify FactoryTalk View when it has read the message Assign tags or expressions to these connections when you create your alarm triggers For more detailed information about how these connections work see the next sections How the Handshake connection works The Handshake connection is useful for triggers that use the Value data type Program t
97. do one of the following m In FactoryTalk View Studio on the Tools menu click Transfer Utility m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt FactoryTalk View gt Tools and then click ME Transfer Utility 16 Transferring applications to a PanelView Plus terminal Transfer Utility BEI Download Upload Compare Source file P E Help M Download as Destination storage type WARNING Internal Storage eee Include a goto configure mode button in your application if E you need to access the configuration mode screens Include a shutdown button in your application if you want to ia be able to shut it down Select destination terminal E RSLins Enterprise CARBCKYREMPELO1 1789 417 Backplane EtherNet Ethernet Mode Selec Not Browsing For details about using the utility see the utility s Help Uploading applications from the PanelView Plus CE PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus 6 terminal Use the Transfer Utility to upload your run time application from the PanelView Plus CE PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus 6 terminal to the development computer Run time applications have the extension mer Any password changes that were made while the application was running are saved in the mer file and will be uploaded If the upload process fails or is cancelled the application file will be deleted from the destination directory Make sure there is enough storage
98. eRe H 2 Importing XML files 0 eee ene eee nes H 3 Error loo file 3 6 6 2 22 cedde oheeesesreaseedsso456 44444 eb4dnen ees H 3 Importing graphics XML files 0 0 ce eee nes H 3 Graphics XML file structure 0 0 cee eens H 3 Prefa ce FactoryTalk View Machine Edition is a member of the FactoryTalk View family of products It is an integrated package for developing and running automation applications Designed for use with the following operating systems or terminals Windows 7 Professional with Service Pack 1 32 bit Windows 7 Professional with Service Pack 1 64 bit Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 3 32 bit Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition with Service Pack 2 32 bit Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition with Service Pack 2 64 bit Windows Vista Business with Service Pack 2 32 bit Windows Vista Home Basic with Service Pack 2 32 bit Windows Server 2008 Standard Edition with Service Pack 2 32 bit Windows Server 2008 Standard Edition with Service Pack 2 64 bit Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition with Service Pack 1 64 bit PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals running Microsoft Windows CE 4 1 PanelView Plus 6 terminals running Microsoft Windows CE 6 0 FactoryTalk View Machine Edition gives you all the tools you need to create effective machine level monitoring and control applications About the documentation The FactoryTalk View Machine Edition documentatio
99. equal to tagl lt tag2 serial no lt ST011 true true GE gt greater than or equal to tagl gt tag2 serial no gt ST011 false false How string operands are evaluated String operands are evaluated by case and by alphabetical order Lower case letters are greater than upper case letters For example h is greater than H Letters later in the alphabet are greater than those earlier in the alphabet For example B is greater than A Logical operators Logical operators determine the validity of one or more statements There are three logical operators AND OR and NOT The operators return a non zero value if the expression is true or a 0 if the expression is false 23 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Any statement that evaluates to a non zero value is regarded as true For example the statement tagl is false if the value of tag1 is 0 and true if tag has any other value The logical operators are Example For these examples Symbols Operator Action tag 5 and tag2 7 AND amp amp and Returns a 1 if the tagl lt tag2 AND tagl 5 statements to the Both statements are true right and left ofthe returns a 1 operator are both true OR or Returns a 1 ifeither tagl gt tag2 OR tagl 5 the statement to the tagl 5 is true left or right ofthe returns a 1 operator is true NOT negation Reverses the NOT tagl lt tag2 logical value of the Although ta
100. ewe dees 11 4 Setting up users for 4 00 and later applications 00 11 4 Setting up users for 3 20 and earlier applications 000 11 6 Changing RSView 3 20 and earlier user passwords 000005 11 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 12 Adding 3 20 and earlier users or groups from a Windows domain 11 7 Removing 3 20 and earlier users Or groups 1 0 0 0 00 cee eee 11 8 How user accounts and security codes work 0000s 11 9 Assigning security to graphic displays 0 0 0 0 00 ens 11 9 Providing a way for users to log in and log out 2 0 0 eee eee 11 12 ROCCO 6 4 6 om oshe Senne ae oe oe eae eee ion eee eee 11 12 Logging OU 4 06 cidabiabod aed dkk nuE n Areni ALES CESS SSS 11 13 Logging out automatically 0 0 0 0 eens 11 13 Preventing unauthorized users from stopping the application 11 14 To prevent unauthorized users from stopping the application 11 14 Additional step for personal computers 0 0 0 0 cece 11 14 Additional step for Panel View Plus CE applications 11 14 Setting up FactoryTalk Security for your application 04 11 15 Summary Of SEPS ees rarere Gedo aed oeudeeed sn geee ees bosdeee ss 460555 11 17 Creating FactoryTalk Security users 0 20 0 00 11 17 Creating FactoryTalk Security user groups 0 0 e enue 11 19 Setting up security access to
101. exact speed of a conveyor belt or just whether the belt is moving jammed or stopped Do different users need to have access to different types of information Do you need to limit access to certain types of information Also consider the run time environment and how the operator will use the application Does the run time computer have a touch screen mouse keyboard or some combination of these How will the operator navigate through the displays of the application m Will the application be available in multiple languages Review the chapters on planning security and navigation before you begin creating displays Browse through the sample applications for design ideas Map out a display hierarchy Then create a graphic display to use as a template The time you spend planning your displays will make your application easy to use and will save you time in the long run For information about See Planning your displays and creating a template Chapter 3 Setting up application security to control access to displays Chapter 11 Setting up display navigation and creating a display hierarchy Chapter 13 Setting up how objects are used at run time Chapter 21 ri New Display tool E Save tool 19 e Using graphic displays Using the Graphics editor The Graphics editor opens when you create or open a graphic display global object display or graphic library Each display is stored in the Displays folder You can open
102. examples of how to set up objects see the sample applications that come with FactoryTalk View Studio The Help also provides examples of how to use objects Types of graphic objects The elements that make up a graphic display are called graphic objects Use objects to control your process machines and application FactoryTalk View comes with a complete range of configurable objects such as push buttons list selectors bar graphs and trends Some objects interact with the data source allowing the operator to change or view tag values For example the operator can push a button to set a tag value to 1 causing a programmable controller to start a conveyor belt Other objects are used to control your application For example there are button objects that you can use to change displays and scroll through lists FactoryTalk View also comes with drawing objects that you can use to illustrate your graphic displays The drawing objects include text bitmap images and geometric and freehand shapes 20 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 2 FactoryTalk View also supports the use of ActiveX objects third party software components that you can use to control processes and display information The ActiveX objects available depend on which third party applications are installed on your development computer For example products such as Microsoft Visual Basic Rockwell Automation and Microsoft Office provide ActiveX ob
103. expression in the base object the same change is made to all the reference objects If you don t use global object parameters you can still assign different tags to different reference objects by changing the reference object s LinkConnections property to False and the LinkAnimations property to Link without expressions The global object parameter takes the same form as a regular parameter where can be any number from 1 to 500 The parameter can be the placeholder for an individual tag or for a folder of tags For example 1 could be a placeholder for the path to the folder containing the PIDE tags assigned to the global object When you set up the base object specify the global object parameters to use with the object You can provide a description of each parameter to remind you or another application designer of the type of value to assign to the parameter on the reference object Then assign specific values to each parameter for the reference object You can assign numeric or string constants tags or backing tags Difference between global object parameters and regular parameters Global object parameters allow you to assign different values to different instances of the same placeholder For example each reference object in the display might have the placeholder 1 Using regular parameter files you could only assign one value to 1 and this would apply to all objects in the graphic display With global object parameters
104. expression to the Remote Date and Time connection Also assign a tag or an expression to one or more of these connections This connection Contains this range of values Remote Year 00 99 or 0000 9999 Remote Month 1 12 Remote Day of Month 1 31 Remote Hour 0 23 Remote Minute 0 59 Remote Second 0 59 8 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 8 4 When the Remote Date and Time connection value changes to a new non zero value the terminal resets its internal time and date to the time and date read from the individual remote date and time connections The date and time are updated at the rate specified in the Maximum update rate box but changes are not made until the Remote Date and Time connection changes to a new non zero value Changing displays Use these global connections in the Display tab of the Global Connections editor to monitor and control display changes Replace Display Number notifies the data source of the number of the Replace display that s currently open Remote Display Number allows the data source to change the display on the run time computer Controlling display changes remotely To control display changes remotely you can set up the data source to open and close graphic displays The data source can open Replace and On Top displays and close On Top displays remotely To use remote display changes assign a unique display number to each Replace and On
105. file name format 0 0 00 cece eee ee 12 7 Exported language string file locations 0 0 0 00 e eee eee 12 8 Contents Problems exporting saas kirssa cee eee eens 12 8 Translating application text in Excel spreadsheet files 0 0 12 9 Translating application text in Unicode files 2 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 12 9 Pile Name and format 6 4400 ck oe edeti dca ase hea ed eee a aed 12 9 Opening the text file in Microsoft Excel 0 00 cee eee 12 10 Saving the text file in Microsoft Excel 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 12 10 Differences in file format for files saved in Excel 0 12 11 Saving the Unicode text file in Notepad 0 00 00s eee 12 11 PMC SCNCHIA 5244 ctaneadn deeds abc Anes a ab sed aba Keres 12 11 Working with pairs of double quotes 2 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee eee ee 12 12 Working with backslashes and new line characters 0 12 13 lmporine EX 2 24254 224d eewedd pashan dh ne aea ou eee d Shee eeadodes 12 13 Problems importing 2 024454 4084e44 cand b eed 45444 Rngdeaeeeed Geeees ws 12 14 Canceling importing 0 0 naaa aaeeea 12 14 Setting up multiple language support for graphic libraries 12 15 Using graphic libraries that support multiple languages 12 15 Setting up display navigation About display navigation 0 0 0 0 cc eee Er ieni 13 1 Developing a hierarchy of displays 0
106. first color and yellow for the blink color Repeat for the fill colors Set up the color for the second warning m In the list box click C 22 12 22 Animating graphic objects m Inthe Value box type 95 m For the line and fill click Blink A palette box will be displayed for the Blink color Red Gray Blink Line Jw ill lv B For the line colors select gray for the first color and red for the blink color Repeat for the fill colors 6 Click Apply Setting up fill animation With fill animation the level of fill in an object is based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be half full Fill animation is available for all drawing objects including group objects except images and panels If you select the Inside Only check box fill animation does not affect objects borders line objects or objects with transparent backgrounds For more information about setting up fill animation see Help Setting up horizontal position animation With horizontal position animation an object moves horizontally based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be halfway
107. handling sensors PLCs transmitters and ISA symbols 19 14 19 e Using graphic displays To open Symbol Factory Symbol Factory opens into a new window when launched there are four ways to open Symbol Factory From the Explorer click on the Symbol Factory Object m When the Objects menu is available click on the Symbol Factory drop down menu item m When the Objects toolbar is available click on the Symbol Factory icon m Clicking the Launch Symbol Factory button in the Image Browser To select a graphic 1 Browse the Categories frame clicking on a category to see the symbols in the right frame 2 Click on the graphic to select it for the Graphic Display If the graphic is to be used in this original state it can be dragged and dropped into the Graphic Display When View Studio is unlicensed and in Grace Period mode the Symbol Factory library will be in demo mode and restricted in the number and type of graphics available for use Only a licensed View Studio can enable a fully licensed Symbol Factory library Factory Talk ViewStudio Manipulating the graphic With the graphic selected it can be modified using Symbol Factory 1 Select Options on the menu 2 Select Symbol Options from the drop down menu 3 The Symbol Options dialog allows the graphic to be modified in several ways The orientation can be changed it can be rotated the fill color can be changed and applied to the graphic in different modes 4
108. if itnemsLastDisp_y1 3 13 4N Value Use ack all value oO Optional tigger connections 7 andshake ck Epi a emote Ack Ett e DC a Create alarm messages Specify the graphic emote Ack Handshake display to use to display Edt Message Message Notification alarm messages at run Remove Message Handshake time caret Heh For detailed information about the options in the Alarm Setup editor see Help Preparing to set up alarms As your application is running information is continually sent to the data source about the state of the various processes For example your application might be monitoring whether a valve is open or closed or the temperature in a boiler Values representing the status of these processes are sent to the data source The first step in setting up alarms is determining which processes to monitor for alarm conditions The data source The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data for both data server tags and HMI tags The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source is set up to exchange information in the form of numeric or string values between FactoryTalk View and the machine that your application is controlling 9 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MAC
109. import older application files FactoryTalk View creates a copy of the application for the current version of FactoryTalk View The older version is not altered You can use current version application files to create previous version run time files For more information see page 4 10 If the application you are importing contains any direct driver nodes the import wizard will create one RSLinx topic for each direct driver node it finds All topics are then converted into device shortcuts to run with RSLinx Enterprise You must have both RSLinx Classic and RSLinx Enterprise installed to make this two step conversion To create RSLinx topics after import follow these steps in RSLinx before importing the application To validate direct driver nodes in RSLinx 1 Create the appropriate RSLinx Classic drivers if not already created for example AB _ETH 1 For more information about creating RSLinx Classic drivers see the RSLinx Classic Help 2 Ifitis an Ethernet driver AB ETH 1 add the IP address of each direct driver node to the Ethernet driver setup 3 Start RSWho and select each device associated with each direct driver node for example 131 200 13 128 If these steps are not followed in this order the topics generated by the import code will be invalid and will need to be fixed using the Topic Editor in RSLinx To import an application l Start FactoryTalk View Studio 2 Inthe New tab in the Application name
110. in the Libraries folder contains an alarm list graphic object that is set up to display all the alarms in the alarm log file active inactive acknowledged and unacknowledged m STATUS a display in the Libraries folder contains an alarm status list graphic object that is set up to display active alarms It contains a goto display button for opening the HISTORY display This display is available in two sizes m HISTORY a display in the Libraries folder contains an alarm list graphic object and a goto display button for opening the STATUS display The alarm list is set up to display all the alarms in the alarm log file active inactive acknowledged and unacknowledged This display is available in two sizes By default the ALARM graphic display opens automatically at run time when an alarm is generated 9 Setting up alarms You can accept the default edit the ALARM display use one of the other alarm displays or create your own display If you elect not to automatically open a graphic display for alarm notification an alternative is to provide the operator with a way to open an alarm display when desired For more information about See The ALARM display page 9 25 The ALARM BANNER display page 9 26 The ALARM MULTI LINE display page 9 27 The STATUS display page 9 28 The HISTORY display page 9 29 Creating your own alarm display page 9 31 The alarm list graphic object page 9 32 The
111. in the alarm status list When the operator presses the alarm status mode button the type of alarms displayed in the alarm status list changes as follows m Ifthe current type displayed is all alarms the list changes to display active alarms only Ifthe current type displayed is active alarms the list changes to display past alarms only m Ifthe current type displayed is past alarms the list changes to display all alarms The change affects the linked or selected alarm status list only not all alarm status lists 9 41 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 42 10 Setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics This chapter describes m FactoryTalk Diagnostics m displaying diagnostics messages during application development m viewing FactoryTalk Diagnostics log files m using the Diagnostics Setup tool m displaying and printing diagnostics messages at run time m the DIAGNOSTICS display m creating your own diagnostics display m opening and closing the diagnostics display how the diagnostics list graphic object works About FactoryTalk Diagnostics FactoryTalk Diagnostics records information about various types of system activity including m macro usage m operator comments m system messages and errors m errors from the communication network m tag read and write activity Browsing diagnostics messages You can view diagnostics messages about system activity during application development
112. in your application You can use multiple alarm status lists in the same display or in different displays You can set up different lists to display different information For information about setting up alarm status lists see Help 9 Setting up alarms What is displayed If you set up the list to show the alarms for specific alarm triggers only alarms for those triggers are displayed If an alarm is active an asterisk appears in the alarm state column if displayed If the message is too long to fit in the object the last character that would fit is replaced with an asterisk Similarly if a column heading is too long to fit in the column the last character that would fit is replaced with an asterisk You can specify how many lines to allow for each alarm message from 1 to 10 The number of alarm messages that fits in the display depends on the height of the alarm status list the list s font size how many lines you have specified for each alarm message and whether the column headings are displayed For value triggered alarms the accumulated time column shows how long the alarm has been set to the trigger value For bit triggered alarms the accumulated time column shows how long the bit has been set to 1 For LSBit triggered alarms the accumulated time column shows how long the corresponding alarm s least significant bit has been set to 1 If you set up alarm messages in multiple languages all messages and
113. is a read Ea n ea iama Er connection arrow points left T memini a _ data flows from the data source to the object If the connection is a write connection arrow points right data flows from the object to the data source If the connection is a read and write connection double headed arrow data flows in both directions This box describes the Value selected connection and Type Long fe cae P Returns the control state value of the object indicates the type of data the z connection uses Help 20 Using graphic objects For more information about using the Property Panel to assign tags and expressions to an object s connections see Help For more information about assigning tags and expressions to objects see page 20 34 Coloring objects using the color toolbars The Foreground Color and Background Color toolbars contain a selection of colors you can assign to objects color properties About color properties The number of color properties an object has depends on the type of object and how you set it up For example a button with states can use up to seven different colors for each state When you select colors using the color toolbars some properties are assigned the foreground color and some are assigned the background color Other color properties such as Fill color cannot be assigned using the color toolbars instead use the object s Properties dialog box or the Property Panel This table
114. is in progress m Remote Display Print allows the data source to trigger a display print The operator can also print the current display by pressing the display print button For information about setting up this button see Help 8 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 8 6 When the data source or the operator prints a display everything on the screen 1s printed including the current display pop up windows and any visible background applications i If you plan to print graphic displays remotely turn off the screen saver If the screen saver is on when a remote display print is triggered only the screen saver image is printed For information abut turning off the screen saver on personal computers see your Windows documentation For information about turning off the screen saver on a PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual Closing On Top displays Use these global connections to close displays remotely Close an On Top display notifies the data source of the number of the On Top display to be closed m Close All On Top Displays notifies the application to close all On Top displays whose display number is not zero Only replaceable On Top displays can be closed remotely Applying parameters to changed displays Use these global connections to replace tag placeholders in displays that use parameters when they open m Parame
115. is large enough for users to touch easily m Ensure there is always a clear way to move between displays Keep the intended user in mind and design displays so they are easy to understand and use Ask the users to test the displays Planning languages Before setting up languages plan which languages you need to use which Windows fonts support these languages For applications running on a personal computer which Windows fonts support these languages For applications running on a PanelView Plus terminal which languages the fonts resident on the terminal support how different languages will affect design elements in your graphic displays such as object size and message length whether operators need to switch languages at run time and if so under what conditions This will help you determine where to locate language switch buttons in your application how to show operators which button to press to switch to their languages For example by using a text label in French or a French flag to alert a French operator For information about setting up language switching see Chapter 12 3 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Planning alarms Before setting up alarms plan what conditions will trigger alarms how operators will be notified of alarms what information you want alarm messages to contain how operators will respond to alarms m the maximum number of alarm messages supporte
116. is pressed and released This button is useful for changing a setting within a machine or process but not for starting the machine or process For details see page 21 21 Latched push button Multistate push button Start a machine or process The button remains set latched until the process is complete For example use this button to start a bag filling machine When the process is complete the bag is full the button is reset unlatched by the Handshake connection For details see page 21 22 Cycle through a series of values Each time the operator presses the button the value for the next state is sent to the tag When the button is in its last state pressing it changes the button to its first state and writes out the first state value This button is useful when you want the operator to see and select multiple options in sequence using a single button The button displays the current state of an operation by showing a different color caption or image to reflect the different states For details see page 21 24 Interlocked push button 20 4 Use a group of buttons to send values to the same tag When the operator presses one button in the group the button s value is sent to the tag and the button remains highlighted as long as the tag value is the same as the button s value Pressing another button in the group releases the first button and sends a new value to the tag For details see page 21 25 You can a
117. later as described on page 4 18 4 Ifthe application is intended to run as a Compact Machine Edition application check this box If the application exceeds the limits for Compact applications the application will be created as a regular non Compact application 5 Specify the last language that was used to edit the application This will be used for the converted application FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE B 4 You can only import one language for your application even if the original application uses multiple languages The imported language will be the last language used to edit the application For information about using different languages see Chapter 12 6 Click Import Machine Edition Import Wizard Import Type Select the import type PanelBuilder Application pbal PanelBuilder 1400 Application pyc Panel iew Terminal pval ASvView Machine Edition Project red mei Heb 7 Follow the steps in the Machine Edition Import Wizard For details about the options in the Machine Edition Import Wizard see Help When you complete the steps of the wizard FactoryTalk View Studio converts the PanelBuilder application creates the converted application s folders and files and then displays the converted application in the Explorer window in FactoryTalk View Studio If there are any messages about conversion they are displayed automatically in the Project Status dialog box
118. models To run a different data log model 1 Shut down the application 2 Start FactoryTalk View Studio and open the application 3 In the Startup editor specify the new data log model 6 26 Setting up data logging Create the run time application See Chapter 14 Transfer the run time application to the run time platform For information about transferring applications to m apersonal computer see Chapter 15 m aPanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see Chapter 16 Run the new application Displaying data logs using the trend graphic object You can use the trend graphic object to display the data that you ve logged At run time when the operator opens a graphic display containing a trend the trend displays values from the data log file for the data log model that is running The data log model specifies which data to collect in the data log file In addition to displaying historical values from the data log file trends can display current values for the tags in the model Trends can also display current values for tags or expressions that are not in a data log model For more information about trends see Chapter 28 Problems with data logging Problems with data logging occur under these circumstances When your application starts at run time if any of the tags specified in the current data log model do not exist an error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics If the data log file is corrupte
119. more text at once which is useful for longer more complicated expressions Also you can click buttons to enter tag names operators 23 Using expressions and functions thus avoiding typing mistakes Another advantage of using the Expression editor is that you can check whether the syntax of the expression you ve created is valid To create an expression by typing it directly m Type an expression up to 16 000 characters long Expressions that you type directly are not checked for syntax To open the Expression editor do one of the following m Click the Browse button in the Exprn column for a connection that accepts Expr expressions ttt The Browse button is not available for connections to which you can assign only tags Browse button in the Exprn column m Inthe Animation dialog box click the Expression button The Expression editor has these parts Expression box Expression buttons Expression Editor IF dla tagBlend sensar_on offt IF Logical Arithmetic Bitwize Functions Tage Check E Syntax s Ls gt GT Line 1 Column gt GE gt NE OF Cancel Help Cursor position Validation area 23 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 4 For details about using the options in the Expression editor see Help Where you can use expressions You can use expressions in these editors m Graphics You can define an expression to control various aspec
120. options as required For detailed information about printer options refer to your Windows documentation Specifying startup options for FactoryTalk View ME Station This section describes how to start FactoryTalk View ME Station automatically when Windows starts and describes startup options for FactoryTalk View ME Station When you start FactoryTalk View ME Station you can run an application load an application automatically delete an application s log files before running the application replace RSLinx Enterprise communications on the run time computer with the application s settings By default the option to start FactoryTalk View ME Station when Windows starts is turned off The settings in this section apply only if you want FactoryTalk View ME Station to start automatically when Windows starts To start FactoryTalk View ME Station and run an application when Windows starts l In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box load the application that you want to run For details see page 15 4 Click Terminal Settings Double click FactoryTalk View ME Station Startup 15 Running applications on a personal computer FactoryT alk View ME Station Startup ontiguration Mode Options F2 nun Options 4 Click Run Current Application This option is not available if you have not loaded an application yet 5 Click Run Options Run Options 15 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER
121. or Windows Server 2008 For more information about security see Chapter 11 To set up write access for any Windows Security Group 1 Right click the HMI projects folder and then click Properties 2 Inthe Security tab of the Properties dialog box select a Windows Security Group ex Power Users from the list of groups and user names 3 Inthe Permissions box below the list select Full Control and then select Allow 2 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 4 Exploring the FactoryTalk View Studio main window Title bar m 4 FactoryTalk iew Studio Machine Edition Menu bar Ele view Application Tools Window Help gt EJ eS Toolbar p lauan akl E amp Local USPAZJFULKERO2 Effa Malthouse Clgx 800x600 lt Eff Malthouse Clgx 800x600 EGY System a E Project Settings 8 Runtime Security 3 Diagnostics List Setup z Global Connections ioio wD Startup Explorer l l ga HM Tage hg Tags window SES Graphics E Displays fag Global Objects e Symbol Factory fa Libraries fg Images ff Parameters Po oS Local Messages O Sy Alarms Iih A Alarm Setup 3 Information Poi ma Information Setup E Information Messages Workspace o H Logic and Control 38 Data Log B RecipePlus j RecipePlus Setup oj i RecipePlus Editor AS Lins Enterprise H E System Diagnostics List ____ Harem senoosan YC a rl Status bar Ae The menu ba
122. or cursor point a keypad or scratchpad opens The operator enters a value in the keypad or scratchpad and this value is substituted for the placeholder in the write expression 23 Using expressions Example Using write expressions In this example the operator regulates the speed of a conveyor belt by entering a value in feet or meters per second When the operator enters the value in meters per second the value is converted to feet per second before being passed to the data source The operator first indicates whether the value is in feet or meters by pushing a maintained push button The push button has one state corresponding to feet per second and the other state to meters per second Then the operator presses the numeric input enable button and enters the value for the conveyor speed in a numeric pop up keypad The character in the write expression is the placeholder for the value the operator enters To set up the maintained push button 1 In the Maintained Push Button Properties dialog box in the States tab set up these States m State 0 Value 0 Caption Feet S m State 1 Value 1 Caption Meters S 2 Inthe Connections tab assign a digital tag called Feet_or_ meters to the Value connection either an HMI tag or a data server tag To set up the numeric input enable button 1 Inthe Numeric Input Enable Properties dialog box in the Label tab type the caption Enter conveyor speed 2 Inthe Connec
123. page 4 18 Application versus project This manual generally uses the term application to refer to both application level and project level procedures An exception is the section on using the Project Settings editor which begins on page 4 11 In that section the term project is used When you create an application FactoryTalk View creates folders and files in various locations on the development computer Some of the folders are empty until you start setting up your application When you finish developing the application FactoryTalk View uses the information in the various folders and files to create the run time application HMI project file The HMI project file has the extension med The HMI project file 1s located in this directory C Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or 4 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE C Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows 7 Professional Windows Vistaor Windows Server 2008 Run time application file The run time application consists of a file with the extension mer For information about creating the run time application see Chapter 14 Component files Component files are located in folders in the HMI project folder as described in the following table For example graphic display component files with the extension gfx are stored in the Gfx folder
124. runtime 8 String input enable button graphic object 8 34 at run time 10 16 how values are written 14 navigating to 7 using Enter key handshaking with 12 String pop up character input using at run time ll String pop up windows using at run time 11 13 String tags 1 String values using graphic objects to display and enter 8 Structured tags 6 14 Sybase SQL Server logging to 7 Symbol Factory 14 24 import into display 25 import into image container 24 Symbol graphic object 5 41 at run time 18 Syntax embedded variable 3 System activity See Diagnostics messages System tags 1 alarm reset date and time l for making graphic objects blink 1 time and date 2 System time and date 2 T Tag Browser opening 9 using 6 Tag Import and Export Wizard 11 Tag placeholders 37 1 4 creating 38 3 using in expressions 9 using with animation 5 Tag sets for recipes l comparing amp Tag statistics viewing 8 Tag substitution 11 36 Tag syntax for array tags KEPServerEnterprise 17 RSLinx Enterprise 16 Tag values changing at run time 15 displaying at run time 17 ensuring the data source has read 12 logging 12 4 using graphic objects to display 8 using graphic objects to set 4 8 using macros to assign 12 1 Tags 1 addressing syntax 5 assigning to graphic objects 34 viewing in Object Explorer 25 using the Property Panel 30 assigning to parameter lists in global connections 6 basic steps for using 2 browsing for 5 Document version 6 1
125. set animation Because the Animation dialog box stays open you can go back and forth between the dialog box and the graphic display This makes it easy to set the range of motion for an object because you do not have to know how many pixels you want an object to move Instead you can set the range of motion visually using the Object Smart Path feature For details see page 22 7 22 Animating graphic objects Testing animation Ip Test Display tool E Edit Display tool To test the animation you have set up in a graphic display use the Test Display tool to switch to test mode When you are finished testing switch back to edit mode to continue editing To switch between test and edit modes m On the View menu click Test Display or Edit Display or click the Test Display and Edit Display tools Test mode is not the same as running the display Test mode does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box Using tag names and tag placeholders When setting up animation for objects you are linking objects to tags You can specify a tag name or use tag placeholder You can use HMI tags or data server tags that already exist or you can use a new tag name Tag placeholders allow you to create displays that can be used with different tags You can use tag placeholders in m the graphic display that opens when the application is first run m graphic displays that are opened us
126. size you want the object to be 3 Double click the object to open its Properties dialog box 4 In the dialog box specify how the object looks its behavior and connections For more information about the Properties dialog box see page 20 26 You can also use the Property Panel to set up objects For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 20 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE A Text tool 20 12 Creating drawing objects The following instructions for creating drawing objects describe how to create the objects and then open the objects Properties dialog boxes to set up how the objects look For information about using the Properties dialog box see page 20 26 You can also use the Property Panel to set up objects For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 Creating text Choosing fonts You can select any font you have installed but TrueType and OpenType fonts are recommended These fonts can be resized easily without losing text quality For PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals you must use TrueType fonts If you run an application on a computer that does not have the fonts you used when setting up the application Windows substitutes with the fonts that most closely match the fonts you specified Choosing fonts for language switching If you are going to use the application with multiple languages we recommend using Microsoft San
127. space on the destination computer About the upload You can upload while an application is running on the run time computer You can upload an existing copy of the application currently running on the run time computer Serial uploads To perform a serial upload make sure the terminal is connected to the development computer using the correct cable Connect a Panel View Plus CE PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus 6 terminal to the PC using the Allen Bradley serial cable 2711 NC13 For details about performing the upload see Help for the Transfer Utility 16 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Comparing applications You can also use the Transfer Utility tool to compare an application on the development computer with an application on the terminal The comparison tool can tell you whether the files are identical or different The comparison tool detects differences using a binary checksum It is not possible to list individual differences between the files 16 8 Using your application This chapter describes logging in and logging out m changing passwords m entering numeric and string values m changing tag values m viewing tag data m viewing alarms and messages m viewing information about run time communication errors m changing languages For information about navigating between displays see Chapter 13 For information about navigating between and using the graphic objects in a display see p
128. status of alarms that have been defined for the application in the Alarm Setup editor The report can include all alarms active alarms only or only alarms that have been active since the alarm status was last reset The report can include how many times each alarm was triggered and the accumulated time in alarm To set up a print alarm status button 1 Double click the button Print Alarm Status Button Properties x General Label Print Common Appearance Border style Border width I Border uses back color J i BB Back Cater Back style Pattern style W Border Color C Pattern Color Solid None Ton E Highlight color Shape Blink Rectangle Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin jo jo Filtering Filtered triggers U Other MV Audio Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and whether to filter the alarms to include in the report In the Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button In the Print tab specify what information to print on the report In the Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 59 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 60 Setting up alarm lists The alarm list graphic objec
129. tab or the States tab depending on the type of object For text objects use the Text box on the General tab Click Insert Variable Click the type of variable to insert Fill in the options in the dialog box that opens For details about the options see Help To create an embedded variable in an On Top display s title bar l 2 3 Open the Display Settings dialog box Select the Title Bar check box if it is not already selected Click Insert Variable Click the type of variable to insert 24 Using embedded variables 5 Fill in the options in the dialog box that opens For details about the options see Help To create an embedded variable in a message 1 Inthe Message column of the Local Messages Information Messages or Alarm Setup editor right click and then click Edit String Oven temperature M 3 Over temp NOFILL OP 0 Insert Warable Cancel Help 2 Click Insert Variable 3 Click the type of variable to insert 4 Fill in the options in the dialog box that opens For details about the options see Help Embedded variable syntax Embedded variables are case sensitive and must use specific syntax to work Otherwise the embedded variable is treated as a piece of text Therefore we do not recommend creating and editing embedded variables manually Instead use the Insert Variable and Edit Variable dialog boxes Numeric embedded variable syntax Use numeric embedded variables to ins
130. tag database Take the time to plan your HMI tag database A good design helps reduce the time required for maintenance and can improve programmable controller to FactoryTalk View response time For information about creating HMI tags see Chapter 7 If you are going to use direct referencing for all your tags you don t need to create HMI tags in FactoryTalk View Data Server tags usually update faster than HMI tags To obtain the best system performance for your application use Data Server tags where possible For information about creating Data Servers to data server tags see Chapter 6 Collecting information Before you begin creating the tag database collect m flowcharts of your processes or process and instrument diagrams m alist of programmable controller data table or register addresses your application will have access to m machinery systems documentation m alarm requirements for more information see page 3 6 Organizing tags Before creating tags Develop naming conventions for tags choosing names that are familiar and logical to everyone This makes troubleshooting easier Group related tags 3 Planning applications Group tags in the way that makes the most sense for your application For example group all similar devices or group related areas of the plant floor When creating tags place related tags into folders For greater organization nest folders Planning graphic displays W
131. tag2 gt tag3 2 is evaluated in this sequence 1 NOT tagl 0 2 0 AND tag2 0 3 tag3 2 100 4 0 gt 100 0 The expression evaluates to 0 false Mathematical functions 23 Using expressions Use math functions to calculate the square root log natural or base 10 or trigonometry ratios in radians or degrees of a tag This function Returns this value SQRT expression The square root of the expression LOG expression The natural log of the expression LOG10 expression The base ten log of the expression SIN expression The sine of the expression in radians COS expression The cosine of the expression in radians TAN expression The tangent of the expression in radians ARCSIN expression The arc sine of the expression in radians ARCCOS expression The arc cosine of the expression in radians ARCTAN expression The arc tangent of the expression in radians SIND expression The sine of the expression in degrees COSD expression The cosine of the expression in degrees TAND expression The tangent of the expression in degrees ARCSIND expression The arc sine of the expression in degrees ARCCOSD expression The arc cosine of the expression in degrees ARCTAND expression The arc tangent of the expression in degrees 23 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 14 Security functions Use securi
132. the Data Log Models editor only In the illustration above only a single tag can be selected m select data server tags and HMI tags m select a folder of tags without selecting a specific tag in the folder This is useful for applications that use process faceplates It is also useful when you use global object parameters Folders of tags are also known as backing tags or structured tags For information about global object parameters and process faceplates see Chapter 25 You cannot select backing tags when you open the Tag Browser from the Data Log Models editor m create and edit HMI tags m create new folders for HMI tags m import tags from a PLC or SLC database For more information about using the Tag Browser see Help Showing server names 6 e Working with tags By default the Folders pane in the Tag Browser shows folders but not the servers they belong to You can show the names of servers that have been set up in the application To display server names m Right click a blank area of the Folders pane and then click Show Server Names Folders Folders fa Pumphouse al Pumphouse 3 Alam tags z kepere Channelkep 3 ChannelKep System 9 System 3 Devicekep Devicekep EJ _Hirits EJ _Hints System J _ System ChannelSiemens ChannelSiemens 9 _ System E System DeviceSiemens DeviceSiemens 3 PLCS z RSLins Server Offline PLCS system
133. the FactoryTalk Directory 11 19 Setting up security access to the application 0000 08 11 20 Setting up security access to System policies groups and users 11 20 Setting up security access to networks and devices 00 11 20 Specifying which users can back up and restore FactoryTalk Directory and Fac toryTalk View applications 0 0 0 0 0 eee 11 21 Specifying activities to track for audit purposes 000005 11 21 Specifying policies for passwords accounts and FactoryTalk sign on 11 21 Summary of security features in a sample startup display 11 22 Setting up language switching About language switching 0 0 0 ccc cence eens 12 1 The default lanp ndie serseri a a ee eee A A 12 2 Summary Of SEPS sse ea aaa e E A AR EA R a A A 12 3 Setting up Windows for language switching 000 c cece 12 4 Installing Windows languages 0 0 0 nes 12 4 Setting up Windows fonts nanaonan aana ce cee eens 12 4 Windows locale settings nannan nnana cnn eens 12 5 Adding languages to the application 0 cc ccc eens 12 5 Removing languages 0 0 0 eee eee eens 12 6 Exporting application text strings for translation 000 0c eae 12 6 Exporting text in Unicode format 0 0 0 0 0 cc cece eee 12 6 Exporting text to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet 0 12 7 Excel spreadsheet
134. the Ingredients tab 5 Ifthe data set you want to view is not visible scroll right to see more data sets 29 14 30 Using macros This chapter describes m using macros to assign values to tags m using the Macros editor m when to use macros m running macros when tags or expressions change value m where to assign macros Using macros to assign values to tags A macro is a list of tag assignments stored in a text file in the format lt tag gt lt value gt Each assignment assigns a value to a tag The value can be in the form of another tag an expression a numeric constant or a string Examples Using macros to set tag values Tagl 8 Sets the value of Tag1 to 8 Tank 1 Message Tank1 overflow Sets the string tag Tank1 Message to Tank1 overflow Tagl Tag2 Sets the value of Tagl to be the same as Tag2 Tagl Tagl 1 Increases the value of Tag1 by 1 Tagl if Tag2 lt Tag1 then 4 else 3 Performs the if then else calculation and stores the result in Tag 1Pump Industry 2 2Pump Adds the values of Industry 2 and 2Pump and stores the result in 1Pump Brackets surround Industry 2 because of the dash in the name Brackets surround 2Pump because the name starts with a number No brackets are used for 1Pump because this name is on the left side of the equal sign For more information about expression syntax see Chapter 23 30 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Using
135. the Macros editor Use the Macros editor to create macros Blend recipe Pumphouse Macros Form lt Tag gt lt Expression gt a 5 1 Diesel_blend_percent 2 Mogas_blend_percent a For details about using the Macros editor see Help When to use macros You can assign macros to run when the application starts or shuts down a graphic display opens or closes a user logs in or out Macros can be assigned to individual users and to groups of users a specified tag or expression changes to a new non zero value using global connections an operator presses a macro button At run time when the macro runs the values are sent to the tags at the data source At run time the tag assignments are executed asynchronously That is the system does not wait for the completion of one tag assignment before executing the next Therefore do not rely on the order of assignments to control your process 30 2 30 Using macros Running macros when tags or expressions change value You can use global connections to run macros when tags or expressions change value This means you can use the data source to trigger the macro to run FactoryTalk View allows you to create up to five macros for use with global connections The macros must be named Macrol Macro2 Macro3 Macro4 and Macro5 in order to work with global connections For more information about global connections see Chapter 8 Example Usin
136. the RSLinx Enterprise Communication Setup editor before you edit test or transfer the application 14 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 14 8 To convert a run time application to a development application l Zs In FactoryTalk View Studio on the Tools menu click Application Manager When prompted to select the application type click Machine Edition and then click Next Click Restore runtime application and then click Next p Application HM anager Specity the runtime application to restore things W4ll Users Documents AS view EnterorisesSME Runtime Pumphouse me f Restore the runtime application C Restore the runtime application and FactoryT alk Local Directory Specity the password if the runtime application i protected with a password Specify the folder and file name of the run time application to convert To restore the run time application s FactoryTalk Local Directory to the development computer click Restore the runtime application and FactoryTalk Local Directory If you created a password for the file when you created the run time application type the password Click Next Type a name for the converted application and then click Finish Running applications on a personal computer This chapter describes moving applications to the run time computer starting FactoryTalk View ME Station loading and running applications shutting down applications e
137. the card is removed or the network drive becomes unavailable data logging stops It does not restart until you restart the application Logging to a network location To log data to a network location the network drive must be shared and the run time computer must be logged in to the same domain as the computer on the network To do this the user must have access rights for the domain The Panel View Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal cannot be part of a domain However you can verify that the user who is logged into the Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal is on a user list that is part of a domain For more information about logging in to a Windows domain or authenticating users see page 17 1 Data logging methods There are two methods for triggering data logging You can set up logging so tag values are logged m periodically periodic logging m only when a tag value changes on change logging Logging periodically Periodic logging is used to take a snapshot of all tag values at a particular point in time Tag values are logged even if there has been no change You cannot change the periodic log rate at run time 26 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 26 4 Logging on change On change logging is used to log only tags whose values have changed For HMI tags before logging occurs the change must equal a specified percentage of change in the tag value The percentage is based on HMI tag
138. the graphic objects and the size of graphic images in the Images folder If you choose not to scale displays when you change the project window size Replace displays are resized but any objects in the displays remain the same size and in the same position as before On Top displays are not resized For more information about Replace and On Top displays see page 19 12 For more information about scaling displays see Help 4 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE How the run time screen resolution affects the pop up windows FactoryTalk View comes with a pop up Login window as well as numeric and string pop up windows for run time data entry and a Change Password window for changing user passwords at run time f Low Level Tag Read Write Condiments Display Wak Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk View Machine Edition I5 I Tl ice e o Korean font needs to be installed to display Korean characters corre Pushbuttons Inputs Numeric sae is al Maintained z Om String Latched ao Unlatch Eh ORE exo E FactoryTalk View sizes the pop up window to occupy the center of the screen How the project window size affects the default message displays Your application comes with preconfigured default graphic displays for diagnostics alarm and information messages If the project window size is smaller than the default displays the edges of the displays are cut off at run time These ar
139. the hopper is nearly full When the flour level reaches 95 the rectangle blinks between gray and red You could use a bar graph object without animation to achieve a similar result 1 Double click the rectangle to open the Polygon Properties dialog box Assign these properties to the rectangle m Inthe Back style box select Solid 22 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE m For the Fore color and Back color select gray 2 Click OK to close the Polygon Properties dialog box 3 With the rectangle selected open the Animation dialog box and then click the Fill tab 4 Attach fill animation as follows m Inthe Expression box type Hopper FlourLevel this is the tag that monitors the fill level m For Fill Direction click Up 5 Click the Color tab and then attach color animation as follows m Inthe Expression box type Hopper1 FlourLevel the same tag that was used in the Fill tab Set up the color for the normal state m Inthe list box click A In the Value box leave the value as 0 m For Fill Style click Solid m For Line and Fill click the color box and then click gray the same gray used for the rectangle Set up the color for the first warning m In the list box click B m Inthe Value box type 80 m For Line and Fill colors click Blink A palette box will be displayed for the Blink color Yellow Gray Blink Line m Fill mr L m For the line colors select gray for the
140. the run time computer m use the keyboard or keypad to navigate to and select lists trends and ActiveX input objects m use buttons to work with lists and trends m repeat a button s action by pressing and holding it m ensure that tag values are read by the data source before sending new values Positioning objects for touch screens If the operator will be using a touch screen at run time keep these tips in mind when positioning graphic objects in your displays Don t place important buttons where they ll be blocked by an On Top display The user can t press a covered button Ensure buttons are large enough for users to touch easily m Use touch margins for buttons that are positioned close together to ensure that the adjacent button is not pressed by mistake Using touch margins Touch margins are touch insensitive borders inside the button s margin If the operator presses on the touch margin the button press is not registered Touch margins are useful when buttons are positioned close to each other and you want to make sure the operator doesn t press the wrong button by mistake You can create touch margins at the top and bottom of the button at the sides or on all four sides In the illustration below the button s border and touch margins are the same size 12 pixels A button press would be registered only when the darker square in the middle of the button is pressed 21 Setting up graphic ob
141. to the data source External changes to the Value connection are not recognized when the button is in auto repeat mode Move up Moves the highlight up an item in the list recipe selector or recipe table scrolls up in the trend or ramps the numeric input cursor point or numeric input enable button value Move down Moves the highlight down an item in the list recipe selector or recipe table scrolls down in the trend or ramps the numeric input cursor point or numeric input enable button value Page up Moves the highlight up a page in the list recipe selector or recipe table Page down Move left Moves the highlight down a page in the list recipe selector or recipe table Scrolls the trend to the left Move right Scrolls the trend to the right For each button that uses auto repeat you can specify these properties Auto repeat rate the number of times per second a button press is registered when the button goes into auto repeat mode The default rate is 0 which means that auto repeat is turned off 21 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 12 Auto repeat delay the length of time the button has to be pressed and held down before auto repeat starts To set up auto repeat for a button use one of these methods m Inthe Timing tab of the button s Properties dialog box specify the Auto repeat rate and Auto repeat delay properties m Inthe Properties tab
142. to their original values To restore the text originally in the application import the text from the backup text file you created before importing 12 e Setting up language switching Setting up multiple language support for graphic libraries When you create an application the graphic libraries installed with FactoryTalk View are language neutral by default This means that graphic objects in the libraries always display their text strings as shipped regardless of the current application language Since the current application language is ignored text strings never appear as undefined You can change the default for any graphic library so that it supports multiple languages instead of a single language When you do this when you open the library you can view the text strings that are defined for the current application language If the library s text strings have not been defined for the current language the undefined strings appear as single question marks If you turn off a graphic library s multiple language support and then save the library only strings for the current application language are saved The current application language therefore becomes the language neutral language Any strings for other languages are deleted To turn on support for multiple languages in a graphic library 1 Right click an empty area in the graphic library display and then click Display Settings 2 Inthe General tab select S
143. translating in Unicode 9 Language switch button graphic object 4 3 16 placing in displays 3 planning 5 Language switching l See also Languages setting up 3 setting up Windows for 4 Languages adding 5 to libraries 17 choosing fonts for 12 default 2 displaying current language 14 planning 5 display navigation 3 RFC1766 names 1 setting up in runtime application 6 setting up messages alarm 5 17 for RSView ME Station 4 00 15 information 5 local 30 testing 2 Latched push button graphic object 4 22 at run time 16 Least Significant Bit trigger type 13 Libraries See Graphic libraries License viewing maximum allowable graphic displays 18 Line graphic object 3 17 Link properties for reference objects 13 List indicator graphic object 6 42 at run time 18 Local message display graphic object 28 9 54 at run time 19 30 using with message files 26 Local message files 27 28 Local messages 26 embedded variables in 2 multiple languages for 30 viewing at run time 19 Local Messages editor 27 Localizing applications importing text 13 information for translators 9 new line character 13 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 problems importing text 14 Unicode file schema 11 Log files ODBC format for diagnostics messages LOGIC 5 See WINtelligent LOGIC 5 tags Logical operators in expressions 7 evaluation order of 10 Login button graphic object 3 16 locating in display hierarchy 1 logging in with 12 Login macr
144. trigger labels are displayed in the current application language regardless of what language they were originally logged in What happens when the display is opened The first time a display containing the alarm status list is opened the first page of alarms is displayed If the list is set up to display active alarms only and alarms that were visible when the display was closed are no longer active the alarms are removed from the list If alarms have been reset since the display was last opened the first page of alarms is displayed 9 35 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 36 Using buttons with the alarm history and alarm objects Alarm buttons You can use these alarm buttons to interact with the alarm list alarm banner or alarm status list and to clear and sort the alarm history With this graphic Use this button object To do this Acknowledge alarm Alarm list Acknowledge and silence the selected Alarm banner alarm Acknowledge all alarms Acknowledge and silence all currently unacknowledged alarms or the currently unacknowledged alarms for a specific alarm trigger Alarm status mode Alarm status list Change the type of alarms displayed in the alarm status list from all alarms to active alarms to past alarms Clear alarm banner Alarm banner Clear the alarm in the alarm banner without removing the alarm from the alarm log file and alarm lists Clear alarm history Remove alarms from the alar
145. up windows You can use the following buttons and their keyboard equivalents with the string pop up keyboard For the pop up scratchpad you can use the keys on an external keyboard only The string pop up character input doesn t have a SHF or CAP key and it has additional arrow keys for selecting the characters to input Use this pop up Or this keyboard keyboard button equivalent To do this SHF none Capitalize a single letter or type a shifted character such as CAP none Capitalize multiple letters INS Insert Toggle between insert and overstrike modes SPACE Spacebar Insert a space lt lt Left Arrow Move the cursor to the left ao Right Arrow Move the cursor to the right ESC Esc Close the pop up window without writing the string to the Login dialog box the Change Password dialog box or the string input enable button s Value connection CLR Delete Clear the scratchpad 17 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 17 14 Use this pop up Or this keyboard keyboard button equivalent Backspace Backspace Enter Enter To do this Delete the character in front of the cursor Close the pop up window and write the string to the Login dialog box the Change Password dialog box or the string input enable button s Value connection If Enter key handshaking is set up for the string input enable button the button s Enter connection is set to 1 and the handshaking timer begins timing For details see
146. used The parameter list option appears in m the States tab of the Display Selector object m the General tab of the Logout button and Goto Display button objects m the Initial graphic option on the Startup editor m the Runtime tab of the Project Settings editor m the Display tab of the Global Connections editor Parameter lists are defined in the object on the display If the display or the object is copied or imported to another application the parameter list stays with the object 25 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 8 Follow these steps to use tag placeholders and parameter lists l In the Graphics editor create graphic objects and assign tag placeholders to the objects In the dialog box where the parameter list option appears click on the Browse button to open the Tag Browser Select the first tag or folder to add to the list and click OK The tag or folder name appears in the parameter list text box At run time this tag replaces placeholder 1 To add another tag to the list repeat steps 2 and 3 Each tag in the parameter list box is separated from the previous tag by a comma At run time the second tag replaces placeholder 2 the third tag replaces placeholder 3 and so on Example Using a parameter list to replace tag placeholders This example shows how to use a graphic display called Canning Overview with two sets of tags one for canning corn and one for canning peas The Cannin
147. user accounts FactoryTalk View creates a user named DEFAULT and this user is automatically logged in when you start applications at run time You do not need to set up any other users and users do not need to log in to use the applications you create If you use FactoryTalk View user accounts If you want to use FactoryTalk View user accounts for example to run login and logout macros but you do not want to use FactoryTalk Security follow these steps 1 Add users or user groups to FactoryTalk Security For details see page 11 17 2 Add the FactoryTalk Security users or user groups to the FactoryTalk View Runtime Security editor For details see page 11 5 3 Inthe FactoryTalk View Runtime Security editor if desired assign login and logout macros and security codes to users or user groups For details see Help for the editor 4 Inthe Graphics editor assign security codes to graphic displays that will have limited access 5 Provide users with a method for logging in and out 6 If desired prevent unauthorized users from stopping the application These steps are described in detail in this chapter Working with the Runtime Security editor Use the Runtime Security editor to m add FactoryTalk Security users and assign security codes and login and logout macros for each user or group of users that will have access to the application at run time m migrate users from RSView 3 20 and earlier to FactoryTalk View versi
148. version 6 00 FactoryTalk View ME Station version 5 10 FactoryTalk View ME Station version 5 00 RSView ME Station version 4 00 RSView ME Station version 3 20 RSView ME Station version 3 10 RSView ME Station version 3 00 Studio can open 3 0 but cannot create a 3 0 MER Multiple version support is useful for system designers and others who create and modify applications for different versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station on an ongoing basis You can use the latest version of FactoryTalk View Studio on a single development computer to provide applications for terminals that use previous versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station To check which version of FactoryTalk View ME Station you are using 1 In FactoryTalk View ME Station click Terminal Settings 2 Click System Information 3 Click About FactoryTalk View ME Station G 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE G 2 Creating run time application files for previous versions When you create the run time application file with the file extension mer you can specify the version of FactoryTalk View ME Station for which to create the file For example if the application will run on a terminal that uses RSView ME Station version 3 20 you can specify that version for the mer file If the application contains features that are not supported by the version you select FactoryTalk View displays a validation report that lists the unsupported features The run t
149. when its tag or expression s value changes For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 Inthe Common tab specify the symbol s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression from which the symbol receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up list indicators The list indicator displays a list of states for a process or operation and highlights the current state Each state is represented by a caption in the list This type of indicator is useful if you want operators to view the current state but also see the other possible states For sequential processes the list can inform the operator about what happens next The list indicator has no error state If the value of the Indicator connection does not match any of the available states none of the states is highlighted 21 Setting up graphic objects To set up a list indicator 1 Double click the list indicator List Indicator Properties Ea General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width MV Border uses back color Raisedinset fe O Back color Pattern style Bl Border color _ Pattern color None I Selection fore color L Selection back color Blink Text Font Size Caption truncate Arial l 0 B Z U Word C Character
150. which tool is active Ra Ra Freehand tool Text tool 20 10 k Select tool 20 Using graphic objects To deselect a tool do one of the following m Double click an empty area in the display m Click the Select tool m Click another tool For some drawing objects double clicking an empty area of the display creates another instance of the object For these objects to finish drawing click the Select tool For more information see the instructions for creating drawing objects beginning on page 20 12 Before you begin creating objects To size and position objects precisely as you create them use the grid To use the grid m On the View menu click Show Grid and then click Snap On For information about setting up the grid see page 19 8 The next sections describe how to create graphic objects For information about setting up graphic objects once you ve created them see Chapter 21 For information about attaching animation to the objects you create see Chapter 22 Creating graphic objects This section applies to graphic objects in general ActiveX objects and some drawing objects require extra steps to create them For details about creating drawing objects see the next section For information about ActiveX objects see page 20 21 To create a graphic object 1 Select the tool for the object to create 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag to draw a rectangle the general
151. with an asterisk m The number of diagnostics messages that is visible at one time depends on the height of the diagnostics list and the list s font size m Messages are listed with the newest diagnostics message on top 10 Setting up Factory Talk Diagnostics Using buttons with the diagnostics list Diagnostics buttons You can use these diagnostics buttons to interact with the diagnostics list This button Does this Diagnostics clear Clears the selected message from all diagnostics lists in the application Diagnostics clear all Clears all diagnostics messages from all diagnostics lists in the application You can assign any captions you choose to the labels on the diagnostics buttons You can link the diagnostics clear button to a specific diagnostics list When the operator presses the button the selected message is deleted from the linked diagnostics list and also from any other diagnostics lists in the application For information about linking buttons to objects see page 21 9 Key buttons You can also use these key button graphic objects to interact with the diagnostics list This button Does this Move up Scrolls up one row in the list Move down Scrolls down one row in the list Page up Moves the highlight up one page in the list Page down Moves the highlight down one page in the list Home Moves the highlight to the top message in the list End Moves the highlight to the bottom messag
152. with 2 Graphic Displays editor 3 undoing and redoing actions in 10 using tags in 9 Graphic images importing 20 monochrome 21 that come with FactoryTalk View Studio 21 viewing 23 Graphic libraries 14 ALARM BANNER display 26 ALARM MULTI LINE display 6 26 27 changing file location for 19 copying 30 creating 16 HISTORY display 6 29 opening 16 RecipePlus Components library 11 saving with multiple languages 17 setting up for multiple languages 15 Sliders library 15 STATUS display 6 28 Trends library 10 Graphic Libraries editor 16 Graphic object types acknowledge alarm button 7 16 acknowledge all alarms button 8 16 ActiveX objects 2 21 alarm banner 9 61 alarm list 9 60 alarm status list 9 62 alarm status mode button 7 16 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 backspace button 6 16 49 bar graph 5 44 46 clear alarm banner button 7 16 clear alarm history button 8 16 close display button 3 36 control list selector 5 49 diagnostics clear all button 8 16 diagnostics clear button 7 16 diagnostics list 9 64 display list selector 3 37 display print button 3 16 drawing objects 1 arcs 3 16 circles 3 17 ellipses 3 17 freehand objects 3 17 images 3 14 lines 3 17 panels 3 15 polygons 3 18 polylines 3 18 rectangles 3 19 rounded rectangles 3 19 squares 3 19 text 3 12 wedges 3 16 end button 6 16 49 enter button 6 16 49 gauge 0 44 47 goto configure mode button 4 16 got
153. you can assign a different value to 1 for each object that uses the placeholder 1 If a placeholder is defined in a global object parameter for an individual object and defined in a parameter file the definition assigned to the object takes precedence Using global object parameters with group objects To use global object parameters with a group object the parameters are defined at the group level not at the level of individual objects Thus the definition applies to each object within the group You can assign as many parameters as desired to the group For example you might assign 1 to some members of the group and 2 to other members of the group If you create a global object parameter definition for an object and later group the object the definition is deleted In addition if you create a global object parameter definition for a group and then ungroup the object the definition is deleted Values are assigned to the global object parameters at the group level as well You cannot assign separate values to individual objects in the group Summary of steps Follow these steps to use global object parameters 25 15 1 Inthe global object display assign placeholders and parameter definitions to the base object For details see the next section 2 Inthe standard graphic display select the reference object and specify the value to use for each parameter For more information see page 25 12 To specify global object parameter
154. 0 0 0 ccc ce eee Unsupported graphic objects 0 0c ees Unsupported settings and controls 0 0 0 0 00 cece eee eee Controls for transferring run time application files Settings and controls for alarms 0 0 000 eee ue Invalid characters in screen namesS 0 0 00 e eee Screen security settingS 0 0 0 cece cee eens Block ACS 2 25 4 ba yct sikasan aaea ob ae Os Oke ee edad Converting non RIO communications 0000 cee eee Unsupported tag data types 0 eee Unsupported initial values 0 0 0 0 eee xxii Contents Converting RIO communications 0 0 000 eens A 10 Unsupported PanelBuilder 1400e RIO tags 0005 A 11 Unsupported graphic object features 0 00 eee A 12 Converting expressions eee nets A 13 Equivalent expression syntax suunnan naeeua A 14 Unsupported expression syntax 0 cece eens A 15 Order of precedence 1 eee eens A 16 B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications MEME OOO Ys 4 nb eas E BESS aE Nard SA ee eee Se Cees ee B 1 PHM Ar OT SEPS oe cads ce boee ewe bee aE eee ee eee ee eee ees B 2 Converting PanelBuilder application files 0 000 000 0 cee eee B 2 Equivalent graphic Obj6Cts s cn624 obsess dedeudeesai tab keane beeede tobe B 5 Unsupported graphic objects ananuna naaa eee eee es B 6 Unsupported settings and controls 1 0 eee e
155. 2 eens 21 56 Setting up time and date displays 0 20 0 ccc eee eee 21 57 Setting up print alarm history buttons 0 0 21 58 Setting up print alarm status buttons 0 00 cee eee 21 59 Setting up alarm lists 2 0 eee eee eens 21 60 Setting up alarm banners 0 0 0 0 eee eens 21 61 Setting up alarm status lists nananana eee eens 21 62 Setting up diagnostics lists 2 cee ee eens 21 64 Setting up information message displayS 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 21 65 Animating graphic objects Types of animation 6 sue oo tae ate dks hems Gk se eet Ace codudedaeeeete 22 1 Which objects can have which types of animation 22 2 Using the Animation dialog box 00 eee eens 22 2 About the Animation dialog box 0 ccc eee eee 22 4 Using Object Smart Path to visually set animation 22 4 Testing aMiiatiOn o3 s0ce04 sev eusekssbeerdge tense hacededidesteaeees 22 5 Using tag names and tag placeholders 2 0 0 0 anaana anaana 22 5 Usima EX PeSSIONS s ceka krri reri eae dE EUSTE ee woes Bowen seeders 22 6 Setting minimum and maximum values 0 0000 22 6 Defining a range of motion 6 ee eee nnn 22 7 Animation that does not use a range of motion 0000 005 22 7 Using Object Smart Path o an nananana ccc ee 22 7 Setting up the different types of animation 000 ccc eee 22 9 Setting up visibility animation
156. 2 Double click the RecipePlus Components library 3 Drag and drop or copy and paste objects into your display 29 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 29 12 Using buttons with recipe objects You can use button graphic objects with the RecipePlus selector and table to select the recipe and unit to work with and to select ingredients in the table You can link buttons to a specific recipe object or set up a button to work with whichever object is selected in the graphic display For information about linking buttons to objects see page 21 9 Use these buttons with recipe objects This button Does this Move up Moves the highlight bar up one item in the list Move down Moves the highlight bar down one item in the list Page up Moves the highlight bar up one page in the list Page down Moves the highlight bar down one page in the list Home Moves the highlight bar to the top item in the list End Moves the highlight bar to the bottom item in the list Enter table only Opens the numeric keypad or string keyboard for the operator to edit the data set value If a numeric ingredient has a minimum and maximum value defined these values are displayed in the numeric keypad If the table is defined as View only the operator cannot edit it To see how the buttons work with the RecipePlus selector and table open the RecipePlus Components graphic library see page 29 11 and start test mode
157. 2 to nt 2 Oe S2 PM Details aviain Menu These move up and Tank move down buttons Hedi work with the object Railyard that has focus By default the buttons are set up to work with whichever object has input focus is selected in the display 21 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 10 However if space isn t a concern you can create multiple copies of the buttons you want to use and link them to specific objects One benefit of linking a button to a specific object is that the operator doesn t have to select the object before pressing the button Another benefit is that you can position the buttons close to the specified object making it easier for the operator to understand which buttons work with which objects PS Tank output Diplay Tank Ouput Control System Activity florchiy Seachem 02 20 10 0000 Otie ro 6 0000 Otte 7 palhe tag Tank2 output has no l z polie UE tag Tanki outeut has nom TARN prgihe item Tank2 output does ee peythe item Tankl_output dues 6 0000000 7 Nhe tag Tank output has no 1 0 0000 Oe J 5 15 08 Pl 217 09 PM EA ES EA ES Details hiai Mens UETA Tarka Dock Railyvarc Each object has its own set of buttons To link a button to a specific object using the button s Properties dialog box 1 Double click the button to open its Properties dialog box 2 Inthe General tab in the Send press to box select Linked Object
158. 20 15 Creating arcs and Wedges ccc ccc ete eens 20 16 Creating ellipses and circles 2 2 0255 222450964 4440e usee e a eheaed es 20 17 Creating trechiand Shapes 3 dc 0sied dad eread aeiiae eee nes 20 17 Create IMCS iia st 5 ote eee on en ee oe ee ee echoes a eh 2 es 20 17 Creating polygons and polylines 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 20 18 Creating rectangles and squares nonn nnana c cece eee eee 20 19 Creating rounded rectangles and squares 00 0 cece eee enue 20 19 Using wmf and dxf HIES eiseres 60600444 60s e nee ea eee e eee wdeuws 20 21 Using ActiveX objects 2124 cco40e25064o4e44eis4 sooo poe EER eee 20 21 Tools and tips for working with objects 0 0 0 0 0 20 23 Selecting and deselecting objects 0 0 0 ccc eee 20 23 Using the Object Explorer 4424 4 20066 boee cebe ees dadaa e ba nia 20 24 Highlighting objects in the Object Explorer 0 000048 20 25 Using the Properties dialog box 0 0 ene 20 26 Using the Property Panel 2 25524 242 48es440504404440 6065 4055045 20 29 Setting up properties 1 6 cee eee eee 20 29 Assigning tags and expressions to an object s connections 20 30 Coloring objects using the color toolbars 0 0 0 0 00 c eee eee 20 31 Naming ODJCClS 5 4 0 002 6n0 Wane Sheed ae eb a aden heeetaketnde 20 32 XV FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE XVI 21 Testing how objects look in different states 2 0 0 0
159. 25 17 Setting up data logging Summary Of StepS 6 ee eee eee e eens 26 1 Data log files 5 4454 ccuet oh oadeshenedddene biteesebaedaseregneecaes 26 1 Data Log Models 0 0 cee ee een nen 26 2 Creating Data Log Models 00 cc ccc teens 26 2 Data storage locations 1 een eens 26 3 Data logging methods 1 0 2 nananana anaana 26 3 Tags in the data log model 1 0 0 teens 26 4 Changing the data log model used at run time 0 0 00 ce eee eee 26 4 Displaying data logs using the trend graphic object 0000005 26 5 Problems with data logging 0 cece nes 26 5 Using information messages About information messages 0 0 ccc eee ee eens 27 1 Information messages versus local messages 0 000 cece eee 27 1 SANAE OT ICDS eaa ck eee es ee wees e boule ote beeen ee eens 27 1 Using the Information Messages editor 0 0 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 27 2 Setting up how information messages are displayed 00005 27 3 Preparing to set up information messages 00 ee eee eee 27 3 Tie da SOU Cues daw hoa 4 Rae wai b Seek eee ee oe en 27 3 Identifying the tags and values to monitor nannan naaa eee 27 3 How information messages work 0 0 0 0 00 cece eee eens 27 4 Information messages and trigger values 0 cece eee eee 27 5 Creating information messages in multiple languages 00 27 5 The INFORMATION displa
160. 7 for global objects 18 13 for group objects 45 16 setting minimum and maximum values for 6 testing 9 viewing in Object Explorer 25 using expressions 6 using Object Smart Path 4 7 using tags and placeholders 5 Animation dialog box 2 Animation types 1 color 10 si i height 14 horizontal position 13 horizontal slider 15 rotation 14 vertical position 14 vertical slider 15 width 14 visibility 9 Application Explorer 4 5 showing and hiding 8 using 8 Application files converting from runtime to development 4 7 deleting from disk 4 viewing location of 18 Application Manager 10 converting mer files to med files 7 security for 10 Application properties viewing 18 Application text exporting for translation 6 importing 13 translating in Excel 9 translating in Unicode 9 Applications 1 backing up and restoring 10 closing 10 comparing amp converting PanelBuilder 1 PanelBuilder 1400e 1 PanelBuilder 32 1 copying deleting and renaming 10 creating 4 importing PanelBuilder 1 PanelBuilder 1400e 1 PanelBuilder 32 1 multiple version support for 10 1 opening 7 multiple 9 problems with 9 planning 1 runtime creating 3 sample granting users access to 2 sample opening 2 security for 18 19 20 specifying language for 5 4 3 testing on the development computer 2 transferring from PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE 7 transferring to PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE 6 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15
161. 7 Fii Notice that in this illustration each pen uses its own scale If desired you can use the same scale for all pens With isolated graphing a grid line is automatically placed above each pen s band Plotting a value across the full width of the chart Use horizontal lines to provide a frame of reference for your tag data For example if you define values that are the limits within which a tag must operate and display horizontal lines in your trend to indicate the limits when a tag crosses one of these limits the tag s alarm condition is obvious on the trend There are two ways to plot a value across the full width of the chart m Inthe Connections tab assign a constant value to a pen 28 Setting up trends When values for the pen have been plotted across the full width of the chart the pen appears as a solid line m Inthe Connections tab assign to a pen the tag expression or constant whose value will be used to determine the position of the line and then in the Pens tab choose the pen type Full Width As soon as the trend is displayed the pen appears as a horizontal line across the full width of the chart Its vertical position is determined by the tag expression or constant s value If the value changes the position changes Choosing trend colors fonts lines and markers The following table summarizes where in the Trend Object Properties dialog box to specify colors fonts lines and markers for a
162. 9 e Using graphic displays Resizing displays The project window size is used for all Replace displays If you change the project window size after you have designed any graphic displays you have the option of scaling graphic displays If you choose to scale graphic displays all Replace and On Top displays are resized and the objects in them are scaled to fit the new size You can also specify whether to scale the font size and border size of the graphic objects and the size of graphic images in the Images folder If you choose not to scale displays when you change the project window size Replace displays are resized but any objects in the displays remain the same size and in the same position as before On Top displays are not resized For information about specifying the project window size see page 4 11 Changing the display area while working You can change the display area of a display while you re working on it by dragging the border of the display area For example you might want to make the display area smaller so you can see parts of two displays in order to drag and drop objects between them Changing the display area in this manner does not change the display size for Replace displays For On Top displays that are sized with the Use Current Size option dragging the border does resize the display Another way to arrange multiple displays while working on them is to use the options on the Windows menu For example
163. AULT user s access to the security codes you plan to use To provide a way for users to log out Create a logout button in a graphic display that all logged in users have access to Logging out automatically You can set up your run time terminal so that the current user will be logged out automatically after the terminal has been inactive for a specified period of time The automatic logout is independent of FactoryTalk Security settings or Windows security settings The logout will take place regardless of what you set up in FactoryTalk Security or Windows To set up automatic logout 1 Inthe Explorer window double click Project Settings and then click the Runtime tab 2 Select Enable auto logout 3 Specify how many minutes the terminal must be inactive before the automatic logout occurs 4 If desired specify a graphic display to open after the automatic logout At run time when the inactivity period expires the current user is logged out Logout macros assigned to the current user run The DEFAULT user is logged in The DEFAULT user s login macro runs The specified graphic display opens if any 11 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 11 14 Preventing unauthorized users from stopping the application To prevent unauthorized users from stopping the application Do not use a title bar on the application window because the title bar contains a Close button To turn off the title bar for the applic
164. Back tool Y s f fe Select the object Send the object to back 20 Using graphic objects Aligning objects You can align objects or groups of objects with each other and with the grid To align objects 1 Select the objects you want to align 2 On the Arrange menu click the appropriate menu item or click a tool on the Alignment toolbar This button or menu item Aligns selected objects with the A Alen Len Left most selected object sie Align Center Horizontal center of all selected objects ai Align Right Right most selected object Align Top Top most selected object he Align Middle Vertical center of all selected objects a Align Bottom Bottom most selected object atal Align Center Points Center of all selected objects ee Align to Grid Grid To automatically align objects to the grid as you create or move them m On the View menu select Snap On A check mark appears beside the menu item when the option is selected For information about setting up the grid see page 19 8 20 49 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Examples Aligning objects left right and center oS lt n 35s Select objects Align left Cc O u Select objects Align right gt o Select objects Align center Examples Aligning objects top middle and bottom Align top Align middle Align bottom 20 50 Space Horizontal tool Space Vertical tool 20
165. Bit LSBit trigger type Use the Least Significant Bit trigger type to generate alarm messages based on a priority sequence that is determined by bit position You can assign an array tag consisting of up to 1 024 bits to the trigger connection When multiple bits in the array change from 0 to 1 only the alarm with the lowest bit position is generated Example Trigger values using least significant bits This example shows how to use the Least Significant Bit trigger type to prioritize which alarm is generated when multiple alarm conditions occur In this example a programmable controller monitors a motor s power manual stop and overload status The diagram indicates the location of sensors that are linked to an array tag in the programmable controller 9 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE L1 L2 Pomer loss Bit 0 atop Ovenoad OR Ovenoad Bit 02 hanual stop Bit 01 If power to the motor is lost the manual stop and overload switch also lose power generating alarms for all three motor parts The only alarm the operator needs to see is the alarm for the motor since the cause of the alarm is power loss to the motor not a problem with the other two motor parts If someone stops the motor manually power to the overload switch is lost Alarms are generated for the manual stop and the overload switch but the only alarm the operator needs to see is the alarm for the manual stop 1 Create an alarm
166. Create Restore or Save Display undefined strings using the default language option In the Language Configuration dialog box clear the option s checkbox Tag assigned to the MERuntime RAM Usage Total RAM Usage or Available RAM connection Tag or expression assigned to the Remote RAM Usage connection CaptionOnBorder property assigned to graphic object Unassign the tag in the Memory tab of the Global Connections editor Unassign the tag or expression in the Memory tab of the Global Connections editor In the Property Panel set the object s CaptionOnBorder property to False Embedded variable L character assigned to a caption or message Select the Tag radio button in the Numeric Variable or String Variable dialog box for the caption or message Minus sign qualifier used to show right most text assigned to a caption or message Clear the Right most characters in string are displayed checkbox in the String Variable dialog box for the caption or message SHOWSTAR qualifier assigned to a caption or message Clear the Show character if string is longer than field width checkbox in the String Variable dialog box for the caption or message Embedded variable assigned to the title bar of an On Top display RSLinx Enterprise Remote I O alias with a BitArray data type Remove the embedded variable Assign a different data type to the alias Global objec
167. Display Settings dialog box You can specify and edit the display settings at any time while you work on your display Specifying display settings To specify display settings m On the Edit menu click Display Settings or right click an empty area of the display and then click Display Settings Set up how the display looks Set up how the display works Display Settings General Behavior Size Use Current Size f Specify Size in Pixels Display Type Replace OnTop T Cannot Be Replaced Width fes Height faso Display Number fo Position Security Code i T Title Bar Background Color a nee varane Disable Initial Input Focus Maximum Tag Update Aate 1 seconds Cancel Apply Help 19 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 12 For details about the options in the Display Settings dialog box see Help About display types Replace displays Replace is the default display type Replace displays are full sized displays They use the project window size specified in the Project Settings editor For more information about the project window size see page 4 11 At run time you can have only one Replace display open at a time When the operator opens a Replace display this is what happens m The Replace display that was open closes On Top displays that do not use the Cannot Be Replaced option are closed m The new Replace display o
168. E 19 26 The more colors you use the more memory is consumed and the longer the image takes to load and display This bitmap type Consumes this many bits per pixel Monochrome l 16 color 4 256 color 8 1 byte 64 K color 16 2 bytes 16 million color 24 3 bytes For example a 24 bit bitmap image that measures 800x600 pixels consumes 1440 KB of memory If the bitmap color depth is decreased to 256 colors the image might have minor color loss but the new image uses only 480 KB of memory Use images with a similar pixel size to the size of the FactoryTalk View object on which the image will be placed FactoryTalk View resizes the image to fit the object but if you use an image that is much larger than the object the display will be slow to open at run time due to the time required to resize the image Using local messages Use local messages to give the operator ongoing information about the status of devices and processes For example you might use local messages to describe the status of a device whose condition cannot be shown graphically with complete accuracy The messages you create in the Local Messages editor are displayed in local message display objects in graphic displays You can use multiple local message display objects in your application and link each object to a different file of messages Or you can use the same file of messages for multiple local message display objects Local messages vers
169. Each editor has a Print item on its File menu To print an editor s contents 1 Open the editor 2 On the File menu click Print 3 Click OK 2 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 14 Selecting a printer You must install a printer before you can select it For information about installing a printer see your Windows documentation The Print Setup menu item in FactoryTalk View Studio applies to your development computer only To print at run time set up a printer on the computer or PanelView Plus terminal you ll be using to run your application For more information about printing at run time see page 2 15 To select a printer 1 On the File menu in any editor or component click Print Setup Print Setup Ei Frinter Name HF 2000C Properties Status Ready Type HP 2000C Wher 1P_137 200 13 250 Comment Faper Orientation Size Letter fe Portrait Ls SOLUCE Automatically Select C Landscape Network Cancel 2 Ifyou don t want to use the default printer specify another printer 3 Choose the appropriate paper and orientation options 4 Click OK Selecting printer setup options For detailed information about printer options refer to your Windows documentation Selecting a network printer FactoryTalk View Studio can print to a network printer For detailed information about setting up network printers refer to your Windows documentation 2 e Explorin
170. Enter key For more information about using display list selectors see page 13 6 21 37 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 38 To set up a display list selector 1 Double click the display list selector General States Common Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color Raisedinset fe o Back color BB Border color Batali _ Patter color None z _ Selection back color BB Selection fore color Blink Text Font Size Caption truncate Arial 0 B z u amp Word Bi z a C Character Number of states 5 Other MV Key navigation V Wrap around Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the selector looks like at run time its number of states whether the operator can navigate to the selector using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the cursor wraps from the bottom of the list back to the top m Inthe States tab specify which graphic display to use for each of the display list selector s states whether the display will use a parameter file or list when it opens its opening position and how each graphic display is named in the list For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 Inthe Common tab specify the display list selector s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are
171. External folders oa cee aro asia athe tom ere Rea al a NAS Smet ww rae ace ahd 4 2 Default log file locations for Panel View Plus 6 Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE applications 0 0 0 0 0 ccc eee teens 4 3 Naming THES 0452 oe ccekea we oon eta e ee ee wale oe OSs eaacekor ene 4 4 Creating importing opening and closing applications 006 4 4 Creating applications 2 0 0 0 0c eet eens 4 4 Importing applications 0 0 0 eee eens 4 5 Opening applications 0 0 0 0 eee eens 4 7 Opening multiple applications 0 0 0 ccc eee eee Opening and editing applications from earlier versions of RSView Closing applications 0 0 0 0 00 ee Renaming copying deleting backing up and restoring applications About project settingS 0 0 0 cee eee eee eens Project window size and run time screen resolution Compact Machine Edition application 0 00000 Tie Dd 2p 4asantedeadede comod seen Bide ed eee kee ay buered Specifying project settingS 0 eee ees Viewing application properties nnas aonana aaaeeeaa ee eee Viewing HMI server properties 0 0 00 ee ees 5 e Setting up communications About OPC communications 0 0 0 eee eens Summary Ol SIGNS ed bosd ed oe knee asaan eee danse eee es About data Servers ac ac 4 5 tre caer Se Rae od OTe eeeees RE Creating Gala Servers agi 2 ateka i SEa dae ees eee eee eds ROG ee se oe Setti
172. Graphics editor create a local message display object In the object s Properties dialog box assign the Hoist_Status tag to the Value connection and select the Hoist status message file At run time when the operator views the graphic display containing the local message display object the status of the hoist is displayed Local messages and trigger values Create messages associated with each tag value that you want to inform the operator about Assign each message a trigger value and set up the data source to send the trigger value to the Value connection You can use both HMI and data server tags The trigger value can be any non zero integer value positive or negative Trigger values do not need to be contiguous but they must be unique for each message For example you could use trigger values of 1 2 and 3 or values of 10 20 and 30 If you use an analog tag or an expression you can use any non zero integer or floating point value to trigger an alarm Floating point values are rounded to the nearest integer For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 Trigger values cannot be 0 Digital tags have two possible values 0 and 1 Therefore if you use a digital tag you can only use the value to trigger a message If you want to use a digital tag to trigger two different messages create an expression that adds 1 to the digital tag s value That way you can use the trigger values 1 and 2 When the Value connec
173. HINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Tags and expressions Before setting up alarms you must set up data server or HMI tags corresponding to the addresses at the data source that will store the values you want to monitor for alarm conditions You can monitor analog and digital tags for alarm conditions including both HMI and data server tags You cannot monitor string tags For information about setting up data server tags see your OPC data server documentation For information about creating HMI tags see Chapter 7 You can also use expressions to perform logical or mathematical calculations on tag values and then monitor the expression value rather than the original tag value For example you could use an expression to monitor whether a tag value has increased or decreased beyond a threshold value If Tag gt 90 then 1 else 2 For information about creating expressions see Chapter 23 Identifying alarm conditions Once you have identified the processes you want to monitor for alarms and the tags or expressions that will store the values representing the status of the processes you must determine the acceptable range of values for each tag or expression Then you can set up alarms to notify the operator when a value is outside the normal operating range Importing and exporting alarm setup files The Alarm Import Export Wizard in FactoryTalk View Studio allows you to export alarm information to an XML file and to import an alarm setup XML fil
174. Help Graphics XML file structure The graphic display or global object display XML file is a FactoryTalk View XML document that describes the objects and settings for a display The root element of the H 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE H 4 XML document is called gfx It represents the display An XML document can contain only one root element All other elements in the document must be contained or nested within the root element In an XML document the start of an element is marked lt element name gt The end is marked lt element name gt If the element contains no subelements the end can be marked gt For example lt caption fontFamily Arial fontSize 8 bold false gt The syntax for specifying an attribute for an element is attribute value The attribute value must be enclosed in single or double quotes Here is a sample structure for a graphic display XML document containing two graphic objects The second object has states Element Description lt gfx gt Root element lt displaySettings gt Contains attributes from the Display Settings dialog box in the Graphics editor lt objectl gt Contains attributes from the General and Common tabs in the object s Properties dialog box as well as elements for the object s caption image animation and connections lt caption gt Contains attributes for the object s caption lt imageSettings gt Contains at
175. INTEGRATED PRODUCTION amp PERFORMANCE SUITE LISTEN THINK SOE USER S GUIDE PUBLICATION VIEWME UM004H EN E July 2011 Supersedes Publication VIEW ME UM004G EN E Rockwell Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Contact Rockwell Copyright Notice Trademark Notices Other Trademarks Warranty Document version 6 1 Customer Support Telephone 1 440 646 3434 Online Support http www rockwellautomation com support 2011 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA This document and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Automation Inc Any reproduction and or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Automation Inc is strictly prohibited Please refer to the license agreement for details Allen Bradley ControlLogix Data Highway Plus DH Data Highway II FactoryTalk Logix5000 PanelBuilder PanelView PLC 2 PLC 3 PLC 5 Rockwell Rockwell Automation Rockwell Software RSAssetSecurity RSLinx RSLogix RSView RSView Administration Console SLC VersaView and WINtelligent are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Any Rockwell Automation software or hardware not mentioned here is also a trademark registered or otherwise of Rockwell Automation Inc ActiveX Microsoft Microsoft Access SQL Server Visual Basic Visual C Visual SourceSafe Windows Windows ME Windows NT Windows 7 Professional Windows Server
176. ION USER S GUIDE 12 10 Opening the text file in Microsoft Excel When you open the text file in Microsoft Excel the Text Import Wizard appears To specify the file format Step 1 of the wizard 1 Click Delimited 2 In the Start import at row box type or select 1 3 Inthe File origin list click Windows ANSI 4 Click Next To specify the field delimiter Step 2 of the wizard 1 Select the Tab check box If any other check boxes are selected clear them 2 Make sure the Treat consecutive delimiters as one check box is cleared 3 Click Next To specify the column data format Step 3 of the wizard 1 Ifitis not selected already under Column data format click General 2 Click Finish Saving the text file in Microsoft Excel To save the file 1 On the File menu click Save Excel warns that the file may contain features that are not compatible with Unicode text 2 When prompted to keep the workbook in Unicode format that leaves out incompatible features click Yes 3 Close the file 4 When prompted to save changes click Yes 5 When prompted again to keep the workbook in Unicode format that leaves out incompatible features click Yes 12 e Setting up language switching Differences in file format for files saved in Excel If you use Notepad to open a Unicode text file that was saved in Excel you will notice some differences from a file edited and saved in Notepad You do not have to change t
177. If you select Link with expressions the reference object uses the animation and expressions assigned to the base object Reference objects also have a property called LinkBaseObject which specifies the name and location of the base object to which the reference object is linked You cannot edit the LinkBaseObject property To change a reference object s link properties 1 Double click the object to open the Property Panel 2 Make your changes to the link properties 3 Specify the new size connections or animation for the object 25 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 14 For information about resizing objects see page 20 42 For information about assigning connections to objects see page 20 30 For information about assigning animation to objects see Chapter 22 To specify default link properties for reference objects 1 On the Edit menu select Global Object Defaults 2 Specify the new default values 3 Click OK The defaults are used for any new reference objects you create You can still edit the properties for individual objects separately To break the link to a base object m Right click the reference object and then click Break Link The reference object becomes a regular object You can edit all of its properties However you cannot restore the connection to the base object Deleting the base object If you delete a base object or a global object display containing base objects any ref
178. In the pharmaceutical industry you could use recipes to design flexible packaging creating recipes that specify the number of tissues to put in a box or the number of milliliters of shampoo to put in a bottle Summary of steps These are the steps for creating a recipe system 1 Inthe RecipePlus Setup editor specify the run time location for recipe files The files can be stored with the application or in a separate location For details see page 29 5 2 Inthe RecipePlus Editor set up ingredients data sets tag sets and units You can also specify a percent complete tag and a status tag for the recipe For details see page 29 6 3 Create a display in the Graphics editor containing a RecipePlus selector table and buttons For details see page 29 10 4 If desired create key buttons in the same graphic display to allow the operator to use the selector and table without a keyboard For information about the buttons you can use with recipes see page 29 12 How the recipe system works A recipe system consists of a recipe file and the graphic objects used to work with the ingredients at run time RecipePlus selector Use the RecipePlus selector to select the recipe file and unit to work with RecipePlus table Use the RecipePlus table to display the selected recipe file s ingredients tag values and data set values The operator can edit data set values in the table unless you select the View only option If desire
179. LINE display but the alarm list graphic object is larger to display more alarm messages at once and the HISTORY display contains more buttons The HISTORY display comes in two sizes 640x480 and 800x600 r HISTORY 640x480 Condiments Library Alarm History Header cknowlec e Message 2 24 2007 1 32 27 PM 2424 2007 1 32 27 PM ABCDE FGHIJK LMNOPQ RSTUYV WXYZ ABC Alarm list graphic object Ack Silence A os A Alarm Buttons _ gt Alarm Alarms Print Status Ack Clear Y z v History Sort t All All Alarms You can use the HISTORY display as is or modify the display For example you can select which alarm triggers alarms to display in the list or remove buttons that you don t want to use The alarm list graphic object The HISTORY display contains an alarm list graphic object which lists the time the alarms occurred and were acknowledged as well as the alarm messages 9 29 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 30 You can set up the alarm list to show any combination of active inactive acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms The alarm list in the HISTORY display is set up to show all alarms but you can edit it if desired For more information about the alarm list see page 9 32 Buttons in the HISTORY display The HISTORY display contains alarm buttons for acknowledging silencing and clearing alarms sorting the list of alarms printing
180. Logic and Control Ej 4 Data Log PG E 9 RecipePlus 2 RSLinx Enterprise data server a FD ASLing Enterprise This folder contains FactoryTalk El System Security policies and users ss LQ Action Groups a Policies Eevee ae Networks and Devices eH Users and Groups H E Connections 2 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 10 Viewing the Explorer window You can view the Explorer window in a number of ways m As a docked window When docked the explorer is always on top of other windows that it overlaps You can dock the explorer to any edge of the main window m Asa floating window When floating the explorer is always on top of other windows that it overlaps but you can move it to different locations in the main window m Asa child window When the explorer is in child mode you can minimize the explorer or position other windows in front of it This mode is particularly useful when you are working in multiple editors or working with the Help open To put the explorer in child mode right click the Explorer window title bar and then click MDI Child Moving and resizing the Explorer window You can move the Explorer window in a number of ways m Click the title bar and drag m Right click the title bar then select a new docking location floating or child mode w Docked Floating MOI Child Docked to d Top MOI Child as Left Bottom Right You can resize the E
181. M Header aan Tr ABCDE FGHIJK LM 1234 9999 00 00 00 ABCDE FGHIJK LMNOPO RSTUV WXYZ ABCDE Alarm status list gt graphic object Time Last Reset Silence A amp A Buttons sarge cane Print Alarm Clase 9 28 Reset History saus wv Y You can use the STATUS display as is or modify the display For example you can select which alarm triggers alarms to display in the list or remove buttons that you don t want to use The alarm status list graphic object The STATUS display contains an alarm status list graphic object which lists the alarm messages You can set up the alarm status list to show the status of all alarms that have been set up active alarms only or all alarms that have occurred since the alarm status was last reset The alarm status list in the STATUS display is set up to show the status of active alarms but you can edit it if desired For more information about the alarm status list see page 9 34 9 Setting up alarms Buttons in the STATUS display The STATUS display contains alarm buttons for resetting and silencing alarms changing the display mode printing the status of alarms and opening the HISTORY display as well as buttons for scrolling the list and closing the display For information about how the buttons work see page 9 36 The HISTORY display The Libraries folder contains a graphic display called HISTORY It is similar to the ALARM MULTI
182. Message to Tag option is selected If you are going to generate text alarm messages in multiple languages make sure the tag assigned to this connection can accommodate the string length of the messages in each language For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 How the Message Notification connection works This connection is used to notify FactoryTalk View that an alarm message has been sent to the data source and FactoryTalk View must wait to send another message When the application starts the Message Notification connection is set to 0 When a message is written to the Message connection the Message Notification connection value changes to 1 When the hold time expires or the Message Handshake connection changes to a new non zero value the Message Notification connection value changes from 1 to 0 Messages for an alarm trigger are queued if the Message Notification connection is set to 1 How the Message Handshake connection works Use the Message Handshake connection to reset the Message Notification connection when the data source has read the alarm message Set up the data source to send a new non zero value to the Message Handshake connection when it has read the message at the Message connection Connections that apply to all alarms These connections apply to all alarms m Silence Assign a tag to this connection to notify the data source that all alarms have been silenced for applications that w
183. Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 importing 11 Visibility animation 9 using to set up security 14 24 9 Unicode text translating 9 Units for recipes l Workbook Mode 7 turning on and off 8 Workspace 5 Write connection 30 Write expressions 18 User accounts DEFAULT user 4 User groups assigning security codes to 9 Factorylalk Security creating 19 Windows adding to RSView 3 20 and earlier applications 7 Users assigning login and logout macros to 5 assigning security codes to 5 9 assigning security permissions to 18 displaying current user 14 FactoryTalk Security adding to FactoryTalk View 5 creating 17 managing accounts 21 logging in and out 12 6 at runtime 2 RSView 3 20 and earlier assigning login and logout macros to 7 assigning security codes to 7 RSView 3 x migrating to 4 00 and later applications 6 X XML using with FactoryTalk View 1 XML files alarm structure 3 creating 1 editing 2 exporting 1 graphics structure 4 importing 3 testing 2 XY Plot trend 7 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15
184. O Spanish Dominican Republic es EC Spanish Ecuador es SV Spanish El Salvador es GT Spanish Guatemala es HN Spanish Honduras es MX Spanish Mexico es NI Spanish Nicaragua es PA Spanish Panama es PY Spanish Paraguay es PE Spanish Peru es PR Spanish Puerto Rico es ES Spanish Spain Default Sort Order International es ES Spanish Spain Alternate Sort Order Traditional es UY Spanish Uruguay es VE Spanish Venezuela sw KE Swahili Kenya sv FI Swedish Finland sv SE Swedish Sweden syr SY Syriac Syria ta IN Tamil India tt RU Tatar Russia te IN Telugu India th TH Thai Thailand tr TR Turkish Turkey uk UA Ukrainian Ukraine ur PK Urdu Pakistan uz UZ Cyrl Uzbek Cyrillic Uzbekistan uz UZ Latn Uzbek Latin Uzbekistan vI VN Vietnamese Vietnam F 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE _ Aprenbrx G Features supported in different versions of Factory Talk View This appendix describes which versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station are supported m which features are not supported in previous versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station Which versions are supported FactoryTalk View Studio allows you to create run time mer files for these versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station FactoryTalk View ME Station version 6 10 FactoryTalk View ME Station
185. OGO 4 4 4 4 5 bord deter doa dta he ous da Baan a bod He aed sade aA 2 4 The Explorer widow 1 2460 4004455040502404 4 495 55500605 AGE RES 2 5 TMG Works PACS es 65 2 o crore Bde edd Std Sb Sus ed mw andes ae eS Suk aa oe ae 2 5 The Diagnostics List ctw edt ia eee ene ae eeedinan ache eels be 2 5 The status Dat ao 6 gw a m aq eet d a art eave aha a eomend alerted duces me ov eax be 2 6 Workbook tabs 0 0 eee eee e eens 2 7 Showing and hiding items in the main window 0 0000 e ee 2 8 Using the Explorer window 00 ccc aaaeeeaeo 2 8 Viewing the Explorer window 0 0 2 10 Moving and resizing the Explorer window 0 000 e eee eee 2 10 Working with editors 2 0 eee e eee ens 2 10 Locating editors 6 teen nee eens 2 10 Viewing an editor s components 00 eee eee 2 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Openin CditoIsc coc cendeoe etd tics tena deenee Jotieehen eek ai 2 11 Closing CdIOTS 4 c4sc0c4 ce cecdabiddadsanceeh evi taked whee cee eee 2 11 Entering information in spreadsheets 0 000 c ccc eens 2 12 Printia Gein Rae eR een hee han eae eee ade a pee aes 2 13 Selecting a printer once cee eean dehaehewecd Meadow She eeeanecew ee 2 14 Printing at run TMC oa ane ee We aed Ae he ed ee SAR ee ae 2 15 3 Planning applications Understanding he Process osse 44 4 ees cc anedviedeeeh ee radiri sarka beet 3 1 Collectio ald eseerees snti nine r ar peee a 3
186. Place images in your display For more information see page 20 14 Panel Draw rectangles that have borders See page 20 15 Arc Draw an arc a segment of an ellipse or circle s perimeter See page 20 16 Ellipse Draw ellipses and circles See page 20 17 Freehand Draw freehand shapes as you would with a pen on paper See page 20 17 Line Draw straight diagonal horizontal and vertical lines See page 20 17 Polygon Draw a series of connected straight lines forming a closed shape See page 20 18 Polyline Draw a series of connected straight lines See page 20 18 Rectangle Draw rectangles and squares See page 20 19 Rounded rectangle Draw rectangles and squares with rounded corners See page 20 19 Wedge Draw a filled segment of an ellipse or circle See page 20 16 Symbol Factory Select images to place in your display Controlling the application Use this graphic object Goto display button To do this Open a graphic display For details see page 13 4 Return to display button Close display button Close a display and return to the previous display For details see page 13 5 Close a display Can also send a value to a tag For details see page 13 6 Display list selector Display print button Select a display to open from a list of displays For details see page 13 6 Print the current display For details see page 19 31 Language switch button Login button Switch t
187. RSLogix 500 tags importing 11 RSLogix 5000 2 Runtime changing tag values 15 deleting log files 16 displaying tag values 17 entering numeric values 6 entering string values 10 font substitution 12 logging in and out 2 6 automatic logout 13 problems with logging in 4 printing 15 graphic displays 30 printing graphic displays 30 setting up communication drivers on personal computers 9 setting up printers on personal computers 10 switching language at 3 time date and number formats 17 viewing alarms and messages 19 viewing communication errors 20 using graphic objects 4 Runtime application mer files 1 converting to development application 4 7 opening 4 on personal computers 4 12 running on PanelView Plus CE terminals 3 on PanelView Plus terminals 3 on personal computers 4 shutting down 5 transferring from PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE 7 to PanelView 1 6 to PanelView Plus CE 1 6 to personal computers 1 3 Runtime application file creating 3 Runtime RAM usage monitoring 7 Runtime screen resolution 11 Runtime Security editor 3 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 S Sample applications 2 Scale graphic object 5 44 48 Screen resolution at run time ll Screen size See Window size Security and remote display changes 4 automatic logout 13 controlling who can stop the application 14 FactoryTalk Security 1 FactoryTalk View security 1 for Application Manager 10 logging in and out 12 planning 7 set
188. RYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To see how the buttons work with the trend open the Trends graphic library see page 28 10 and start test mode For information about creating buttons see Chapter 20 For details about setting up the buttons see page 21 16 Printing trend data To print trend data at run time provide the operator with a method for printing the graphic display You can use these methods to print graphic displays at run time m Create a display print button For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 m Assign a tag or expression to the Remote Display Print connection in the Global Connections editor When the value of the tag or expression changes from 0 to a non zero value the current display is automatically printed Program the data source to trigger the change as often as you want the data printed For more information about setting up remote display printing see Chapter 8 Everything on the screen is printed including the current display pop up windows and any visible background applications For information about specifying which printer to use at run time for applications that will run on a personal computer see page 15 10 For information about specifying printer options for applications that will run on a PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual Improving clarity of the trend printout
189. SLinx Classic on a remote computer install RSLinx Classic on the remote computer If you are using an OPC server other than RSLinx Enterprise or RSLinx Classic install the OPC server software on the run time computer or on another computer on the network For installation information see the documentation supplied by your OPC server vendor For information about OPC see Chapter 5 If your application uses third party ActiveX objects install and register the Windows 7 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 version of the objects on the run time computer For information about ActiveX objects see page 20 21 Install on the run time computer all languages used by the run time application If the run time computer uses different time date or number formats than the development computer specify the time date and number formats to use at run time For more information see page 15 17 If desired use the DeskLock tool to prevent users from switching to another software application or using the Windows desktop at run time For more information see page 15 17 Transferring the application Move the application to the run time personal computer For more information see page 15 3 Setting up options in FactoryTalk View ME Station l On the run time computer start FactoryTalk View ME Station For more information see page 15 4 15 Running applicati
190. Saving XML files in Notepad 0 0 0 0 ccc eens E 2 Testing XML Mes 6 cca neiven a dkduatasaceetadd chew keaen eka en E 2 Importing XML Tiles ois cs oo eed wae Reh ee ed eee Ree Ree E 3 Piror lOO Tle t 0c scnenhneeueekiedbeace caeeere ceases ey cen se ser E 3 Importing alarm XML files 2 2 eee nes E 3 Alarm setup XML file structure 0 0 0 cee ees E 3 F e RFC1766 names Mapping languages to RFC1766 names 0 ces F 1 G Features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View Which versions are supported 0 0 aaan aaaeeeaa G 1 Creating run time application files for previous versions 04 G 2 Features that are not supported in version 5 10 or earlier 0 G 2 Features that are not supported in version 5 00 or earlier 0 G 2 Features that are not supported in version 4 00 or earlier G 4 Features that are not supported in version 3 20 or earlier 04 G 5 Features that are not supported in version 3 10 or earlier G 6 H Importing and exporting graphics XML files ADO XME 6 S36 sto 2b aa a tne och OR Awana E nd lS ORD Bw aie even a H 1 Creating graphics XML files by exporting 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee eee H 1 Editing XML HIES sssnisiass raer acc kee Oo oe ae a SO Oe ae oe EE H 2 Saving XML files in Notepad 0 0 0 0 ccs H 2 Testing XML TMCS 2 0 ec euin a ae ced tee a eke cee we eee oe
191. Standard Time North America only except on statutory holidays When you call When you call be at your computer and be ready to give m the product serial number You ll find this number on the Activation disk label and in the About FactoryTalk View Studio dialog box available from the Help menu in FactoryTalk View Studio m the product version number m the type of hardware you are using m the exact wording of any messages that appeared on your screen m a description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred m adescription of how you tried to solve the problem You may also be required to provide information about the FactoryTalk View add ons and updates that are installed on your computer To view the list of installed add ons and updates 1 In FactoryTalk View Studio click Help and then click About FactoryTalk View Studio 2 To view the list of installed add ons click Add Ons P 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE C4 Getting Started FactoryTalk View Machine Edition is software for developing and running human machine interface applications FactoryTalk View Machine Edition is designed for monitoring and controlling automated processes and machines For information about installing FactoryTalk View Machine Edition see the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Installation Guide The parts of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition FactoryTalk View Machine Edition includes two p
192. States tab specify what the button does when it is pressed and released For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 m Inthe Timing tab set up whether or not the button press repeats automatically when the operator presses and holds the button down You can also set up the rate at which the button press repeats For more information about auto repeat see page 21 11 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up interlocked push buttons Multiple interlocked push buttons work together and share the same tag Pressing one button cancels another Although interlocked push buttons work as a group you add them to the display one at a time When the operator presses one of the interlocked push buttons the tag assigned to its Value connection changes to one value When the operator presses a different interlocked push button the tag changes to another value Assign the same tag to each button s Value connection You can also use a single interlocked push button to send a value to a tag 21 25 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 26 To set up an interlocked push button 1 Double click the interlocked push button
193. System tags This tag contains the name of the current user Tag Name Type Function system User String Contains name of logged in user We recommend that you use the expression security function CurrentUserName instead of the system User tag especially if you intend to convert the application to FactoryTalk View Supervisory Edition In distributed applications system User returns the name of the user logged into the HMI server not the user logged into the display client For more information about the security functions see page 23 14 C 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE _ Aprenbox D ODBC database schema This appendix describes the ODBC database format or schema for messages from FactoryTalk Diagnostics The target table of the ODBC database to which you are sending messages must use the format shown in this appendix The option of logging FactoryTalk Diagnostics messages to an ODBC database is available for personal computers only For information about setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics see Chapter 10 Factory Talk Diagnostics log table FactoryTalk Diagnostics log data in ODBC format uses one table This column Contains SQL data type Length TimeStmp The time and date data was logged in coordinated SQL TIMESTAMP Driver universal time format Encoded as a date variant dependent MessageText Message to be logged SQL VARCHAR or 254 SQL CHAR Audience A number representing th
194. The converted application is created in the ME HMI projects directory in a folder with the same name as the application name you specified in step 2 This is the path to the ME HMI projects directory Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 Conversion messages are saved in a file called Convert log in the HMI projects directory To convert a PanelBuilder application when FactoryTalk View Studio is already open 1 On the File menu click New Application or click the New Application tool L If an application is already open FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close New Application the application that is currently open Click Yes 2 Follow steps 2 through 7 in the previous procedure Equivalent graphic objects This section describes graphic objects that are equivalent in PanelBuilder and FactoryTalk View but have different names in the two products Is converted to this FactoryTalk View This PanelBuilder object object Notes Numeric Entry Keypad Enable Numeric input enable button Button Numeric Entry Cursor Point Numeric input enable button Increment Decrement Entry Button Numeric input enable button The numeric input enable bu
195. Top display that you want to change remotely To open a Replace display or an OnTop display remotely assign a tag or expression to the Remote Display Number connection When the data source sends a display s number to the connection the specified display opens When the connection s value is 0 the operator has control of display changes using display navigation objects To close one or all On Top displays assign a tag or expression to the Close an On Top Display or the Close All On Top Displays connection or both When the source sends a non zero value to one of these connections one or all open On Top displays will close The operator can control On Top display changes no matter what the connection values for the Close an On Top Display or the Close All On Top Displays connections are Note On Top displays whose Cannot Be Replaced setting is true cannot be closed using these connections For information about assigning numbers to displays see Help Remote display changes and security If you set up the data source to open graphic displays remotely remote display changes occur whether or not the logged in user has security access to a given display 8 Setting up global connections Setting up remote display changes This section outlines the steps for setting up remote display changes For more detailed information about the Global Connections editor see Help To set up remote display changes 1 In the Graphics editor
196. Transparent E _ Image color Alignment Copy O Image back color eee Image blink sce Image scaled coe Cancel Help For details about the options in the States tab see Help Copying and pasting properties from one state to another Often you ll want most of the properties to be the same from state to state with only one or two settings changing to distinguish the different states To simplify setting up states when many of the properties are the same you can copy and paste settings from one state to another For details see Help Adding and removing states Some graphic objects have a configurable number of states For these objects you can use the Insert State and Delete State buttons in the States tab to add and remove states without returning to the General tab The Number of States setting on the General tab is automatically updated For more information about the Insert State and Delete State buttons see Help 21 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 4 Setting up how objects are used at run time Just as you must provide operators with a way to navigate between displays at run time you must also make sure that operators can use the objects within the displays The next sections in this chapter describe how to set up your objects so the operator can m press objects using a touch screen m use function keys to press buttons when a mouse or touch screen is not available on
197. Using the numeric pop up keypad 000008 Using the numeric pop up scratchpad 44 Using buttons and keys with the numeric pop up windows How values are ramped 0 0 0 ccc eee eee How values are calculated 20 0 0 cece eee Problems with the numeric pop up windows Entering string values 1 0 0 0 0 ccc eee tenes Using the string pop up keyboard 0 00000000 Using the string pop up character input Using the string pop up scratchpad 000000 Using buttons and keys with the string pop up windows What is written to the Value connection Problems with the string pop up windows Changing tag Vales 2d does eed tts ee ee SESS te ee RA KRESS OR Viewin a0 dla osteo sbeteat see cneeeeeesesese tet haneeese Viewing alarms and messages 0 eens Viewing information about run time communication errors Changing languages 20 i2cnadensdeo tee dteetiaxdeckdeeeess Working with components Editors that have components 0 0000 cece eee eee eee Working with components 0 0 0 cece eee eee Creating components 20 4 0042440040ehehadebeaasene es Opening components 0 0 cece eee ees Saving components 0 0 0 eee eee Closing components 000 eee ees Adding components into an application 05 Deleting components
198. VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE ats Show Hide Object Explorer tool 20 24 To select Do this All objects in the drawing area On the Edit menu click Select All or press Ctrl A or in a group you are editing Deselecting objects To deselect Do this An object Ctrl click the object Several objects Press and hold Ctrl and then drag a selection border around the objects All selected objects Click in the Drawing area away from any objects Using the Object Explorer Use the Object Explorer to view and select objects from a tree list of all the objects in a display Groups are listed as expandable items in the tree with a icon Use the Object Explorer to select an object that is hidden behind other objects in the display without bringing the object to the front Objects are listed in front to back order The object you created most recently is at the front unless you move it back using the Send to Back option For more information about layering objects see page 20 48 You can also use the Object Explorer to highlight objects by object type highlight objects that have animation attached and to highlight objects with specific tag or expression assignments For more information see page 20 25 The Object Explorer does not show wallpaper objects nor objects within ActiveX composite objects To open the Object Explorer use one of these methods m On the Graphics toolbar click the Object Explorer tool
199. View Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals operating systems have a 32 MB RAM process limit On these terminals FactoryTalk View ME Station has a tag connection threshold of 26 MB Screen change performance will slow down significantly as the system adds and removes tag connections from the cache PanelView Plus 6 terminals operating systems have a 2 GB RAM process limit this creates easier memory management The run time RAM memory usage can be monitored by using the run time RAM usage global connections To reduce run time RAM usage reduce the number of displays or tags in your application and restart the application regularly for example once a week Adding more RAM to the terminal will not help For more information see Answer ID 39481 in the Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase Use these global connections in the Memory tab of the Global Connections editor to monitor run time RAM usage This connection Provides this information in kilobytes Kb MERuntime RAM Usage The amount of memory being used by your application and by the MERuntime exe process Total RAM Usage The total amount of memory being used by all applications and processes on the personal computer or terminal Available RAM The remaining amount of memory available Remote RAM Usage Assign a tag or expression to this connection When it has a non zero value data is sent to the other three connections if assigned You can monitor the values
200. Windows XP and Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Oracle is a registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA Symbol Facotry is a trademark of Software Toolbox All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged This product is warranted in accordance with the product license The product s performance may be affected by system configuration the application being performed operator control maintenance and other related factors Rockwell Automation is not responsible for these intervening factors The instructions in this document do not cover all the details or variations in the equipment procedure or process described nor do they provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation operation or maintenance This product s implementation may vary among users This document is current as of the time of release of the product however the accompanying software may have changed since the release Rockwell Automation Inc reserves the right to change any information contained in this document or th
201. You might need to navigate to the location of these files for example if you are adding a component from one application into another application This folder Contains File extensions Application name HMI project file and the folders described below med DLG Data log models component files mdf Gfx Graphic display component files gfx Global Objects Global object display component files ggfx Images Image files bmp or jpg Information Information message component files fm Local Local message component files loc Macros Macro component files mcr PAR Parameter component files par RecipePlus RecipePlus component files pp External folders The following table lists some FactoryTalk View folders that are external to the HMI project folder and the types of files they contain The folders are located in this directory C Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or 4 Working with applications C Users Public PublicDocuments RS View Enterprise Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 This folder Contains File extensions Images Image files for use on graphic objects bmp ME Archives ME archive application files apa ME Libraries Graphic library component files and image files gfx used in the library displays bmp ME Logs Runtime Data log files for applications that have run on log Applicatio
202. a new non zero value For more information about resetting alarms see page 9 40 9 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 10 Methods for printing alarm information In addition to automatically printing each alarm message as it occurs you can keep a printed record of alarms m using the print alarm history button When the operator presses the button a report of the contents of the alarm log file is printed The report can include the time alarms occurred and were acknowledged You can set up this button to print the alarm history for a selected alarm trigger or for all alarms If you set up alarm messages in multiple languages messages and trigger labels are printed in the language that they were originally logged in Messages are logged in the application language that is current at the time the message is triggered All alarm times and acknowledge times are printed in the current application language m using the print alarm status button When the operator presses the button a report of the status of alarms is printed The report can include active alarms past alarms or all alarms that have been set up in the Alarm Setup editor The report can include how many times each alarm was triggered and the accumulated time in alarm You can set up this button to print the alarm status for a selected alarm trigger or for all alarms If you set up alarm messages in multiple languages all messages trigger label
203. a variety of sources so you have a complete and detailed understanding of the machines and processes you re automating To gather information Talk to machine operators and other experts who are going to use the system Find out what information they need to optimize machine operations and processes Talk to management and management information systems staff to find out what information they need to support planning decisions Break up each section of the process into its constituent parts Determine what type of communications you ll be using which network types data servers and devices Determine which process variables you need to have access to and identify their locations in the programmable controllers FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 3 2 Collecting data When planning data collection design your system so only essential data is collected Limiting data collection is important because collection activities require substantial processing power and generate a lot of traffic on the network Keep data collection requirements in mind when designing the layout of the programmable controller data tables and the HMI tag database Ideally tag addresses reference contiguous blocks of programmable controller data tables to reduce highway traffic and optimize system response If you re going to use data from an OPC server read the server documentation to find out how to optimize traffic Designing an HMI
204. about creating and setting up the trend graphic object see Chapter 28 For information about creating and setting up the RecipePlus graphic objects see Chapter 29 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 2 Setting up objects spatial properties names and visibility Every graphic object has a Common tab in its Properties dialog box Use the Common tab to set up the following properties for the object height and width top and left position m name m visibility For ActiveX and trend objects you can also set up these properties m focus highlight m key navigation Momentary Push Button Properties Fa General States Common Connections Size Position Height Width Top Left jis fat ft to IV Visible Cancel Help For details about the options in the Common tab see Help 21 Setting up graphic objects Tips for setting up objects with states The graphic objects that have states have a States tab in their Properties dialog box Momentary Push Button Properties E3 General States Common Connections Select state General Value Pattern style Statel BB Back color None Error BB Border color B _ Patter color Caption Ei Insert Variable Font Size Arial fio B Z U _ Caption color Alignment Caption back style E Caption back color C C C Transparent gt l Caption blink Cee M Word wrap eee Image settings Image Image back style E gt l
205. aceplates contain graphic objects that display values from a Logix5000 processor and allow operators to interact with the processor You can use the faceplate graphic displays as stand alone displays or copy the faceplate objects into other graphic displays If desired you can edit the objects in the faceplates For example you might want to add your company logo or change the colors used in the faceplates To use a process faceplate you must add it to your application and specify the path to the Logix5000 processor instructions used by the faceplate The faceplates are set up so that you can specify the path to the instructions using parameter files For more information see the Help for the faceplates accessible from the Add Process Faceplates dialog box FactoryTalk View Studio comes with sets of faceplates that work with these Logix5000 instructions m Enhanced PID Logix PIDE m Discrete 2 State Device Logix D2SD m Discrete 3 State Device Logix D3SD m Totalizer Logix TOT m Enhanced Select Logix ESEL 25 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE m Alarm Logix ALM m Ramp Soak Logix RMPS m PhaseManager Logix PhaseManager The name in parentheses is the name of the main graphic display and global object display Other displays in the set are named beginning with this name followed by a segment describing the purpose of the subdisplay For example Logix ALM has two subdisplays called Logix ALM _ Co
206. actory Talk View ME Station 6 0 or earlier installed on personal computers If the application contains features that are not supported by the version you select FactoryTalk View displays a validation report that lists the unsupported features The run time application file is not created You must remove or turn off the unsupported features before you can create the run time application file For information about the features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View and how to remove or replace them see Appendix G Creating mer files for PanelViewPlus For FactoryTalk View version 6 1 or later some PanelViewPlus project screen size settings can not be used when creating some ME run time projects m PanelViewPlus 400 600 terminals only support run time projects mer created for version 5 1 and earlier m PanelViewPlus Compact 400 600 1000 with a screen size of 640 x 480 or 320 x 240 only support run time projects mer created for version 5 1 Converting mer files to development applications m For FactoryTalk View version 5 00 and later mer files you can convert the run time mer file back to a development application med file This option is useful if you lose or don t have access to the original med file and you need to make a change to the application m you make changes to the mer file at run time such as adding passwords updating RSLinx Enterprise device shortcuts or saving recipes and you need
207. ad it 1 In the Timing tab of the object s Properties dialog box specify these properties m Enter key control delay optional Enter key handshake time m Handshake reset type 2 Inthe Connections tab assign these connections m Enter assign a tag A digital tag is recommended either an HMI tag or a data server tag m Enter handshake assign a tag or expression 3 Setup the data source to send a non zero value to the Enter handshake connection when it has read the new value at the Value connection and then to reset the Enter handshake connection to 0 You can also use the Property Panel to specify the properties and assign tags to the connections Time date and number formats for graphic objects Graphic objects use the time date and number format of the current application language For example if the application language uses a comma for the decimal symbol floating point values displayed in graphic objects uses a comma for the decimal symbol For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 21 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 16 Setting up buttons Many of the button graphic objects are set up the same way The instructions in this section apply to these buttons Acknowledge alarm Logout Acknowledge all alarms Move down Alarm status mode Move left Backspace Move right Clear alarm banner Move up Clear alarm history Next pen Diagnos
208. ad the new value at the Value connection and then to reset the Enter handshake connection to 0 If the Enter key handshake time expires before the Enter handshake connection resets the Enter connection an error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics How handshaking works If you use the Enter handshake connection handshaking works like this 1 When the operator presses the Enter button the value is sent to the Value connection and the Enter key control delay timer begins timing The use of a delay is optional 2 Ifyou specify an Enter key control delay when the time is up the Enter connection is set to 1 If you don t use the delay the Enter connection is set to 1 as soon as the operator presses Enter As long as the Enter connection is set to 1 the operator cannot send new values to the data source If the Handshake reset type is Non zero Value the Enter handshake connection must be 0 when the delay expires in order to set the Enter connection to 1 3 When the Enter connection is set to 1 the Enter key handshake time timer begins timing 4 The Enter connection remains set until the Enter key handshake time expires or until reset by the Enter handshake connection whichever happens first 21 Setting up graphic objects 5 The Enter connection is reset to 0 and the operator can send a new value to the Value connection To set up Enter key handshaking to hold the value until the data source has re
209. age 21 4 Logging in to a Windows domain To log data to a network location the run time computer must be logged in to the same domain as the computer on the network To do this the user must have access rights for the domain To log in to a domain from a personal computer m When Windows starts type a user name password and domain name The PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminals can be part of a domain by being added as a computer This is necessary for authentication and attaching to a network resource For more information see Answer ID 65603 in the Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase On the Panel View Plus 6 Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal logging in caches the user credentials This gives the terminal access to permissible network resources such as network folders To authenticate a user on a PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal 1 In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Terminal Settings 2 Double click Networks and Communications 17 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 17 2 3 Double click Network Connections 4 Double click Network Identification 5 Type a user name password and domain name and then click OK Logging in to the application Users log in using the Login window They must have a user account in order to log in For information about setting up user accounts and passwords see C
210. age 21 9 Use these buttons with trends This button Pause Does this Toggles between pausing and automatic scrolling When the trend is paused the pen icons continue to move vertically to indicate the pens current values When the trend resumes scrolling values that occurred while the trend was paused are filled in bringing the trend up to the current time unless you are scrolling historical data Next pen Changes the vertical axis labels to the scale for the next pen The color of the labels matches the color of the selected pen Move up Scrolls up to display higher values on the vertical scale For example if the visible scale range is 0 to 100 pressing move up could change the visible range to 10 to 110 The incremental amount the axis scrolls depends on the pen s range and the number of horizontal grid lines This button does not work if the Minimum maximum value option in the Y Axis tab is set to Automatic Move down Scrolls down to display lower values on the vertical scale This button does not work if the Minimum maximum value option in the Y Axis tab is set to Automatic Move left Pauses the trend and scrolls to the left Move right Pauses the trend and scrolls to the right Home Pauses the trend and moves to the earliest data in the trend End Resumes trend scrolling and moves to the current latest data in the trend 28 11 FACTO
211. ains a header row followed by a row for each text string in the application There is a column for each language defined in the application The default language is first followed by the remaining languages in alphabetical order by RFC1766 name All cells use the text format Do not delete the header row in the spreadsheet FactoryTalk View requires this information when you import the translated text into your application Similarly do not change the cell formats If you select the option to optimize duplicate strings there is a reference column to the left of each language column Do not change the information in the reference columns Translating application text in Unicode files This section contains information about the format and schema of the exported Unicode text file It also contains information about using Microsoft Excel or Windows Notepad to edit the file Because FactoryTalk View requires that parts of the text file remain the way they were exported give the information in this section to the translator to ensure that the file can be imported after it has been modified File name and format You will likely want to rename the file before translating it to avoid confusing it with the original file You can use any file name ending with the file extension txt To import text into a FactoryTalk View application you must save the file as tab delimited text in Unicode text format 12 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDIT
212. al connections 1 setting up 2 use to apply parameter files or lists 6 using to change displays remotely 4 5 7 using to close On Top displays 6 using to monitor memory usage 7 using to print displays remotely 5 using to run macros 6 3 Global Connections editor 2 3l Global object displays creating 11 exporting to XML 1 importing XML 3 Global objects animating 18 13 creating 11 12 exporting to XML 1 importing XML 3 See also Base objects See also Reference objects Goto configure mode button graphic object 4 16 using to navigate 3 Goto display button graphic object 3 35 and alarms 31 and diagnostics messages 12 and information messages 7 assigning visibility animation to 24 using parameter files with 3 using to navigate 3 4 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 Graphic displays 1 changing remotely 4 7 security issues 4 setting up 9 when a user logs out 23 using global connections 4 creating 3 creating a background for 13 default ALARM 6 DIAGNOSTICS 11 INFORMATION 6 developing a hierarchy for 1 exporting to XML l illustrating 3 importing XML 3 limiting access to 9 maximum number licensed to use 18 navigating between 1 objects for 3 testing navigation 3 numbering 4 5 opening 4 planning 3 2 printing 30 at run time 30 remotely 5 31 setting up printer 10 setting up ll gizine l2 13 testing 10 animation 9 title bar in 15 types of 12 default type 3 viewing in detail 9 using parameter files
213. alarm banner graphic object page 9 33 The alarm status list graphic object page 9 34 Interacting with alarms Depending on which alarm objects you set up the operator can m acknowledge one or all alarms or the alarms for a specific alarm trigger m clear and delete alarms m silence alarms if the application is running on a personal computer m sort alarms reset the status of all alarms print alarms For information about the alarm button graphic objects the operator can use to work with alarms see page 9 36 Using the data source to interact with alarms You can also set up remote acknowledgement silencing and resetting of alarms to allow the data source to perform these functions And you can set up the data source to determine which types of alarms to display active inactive acknowledged and unacknowledged and to close the alarm display These topics are discussed later in the chapter 9 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Methods for acknowledging alarms A single alarm is acknowledged when m the operator selects an alarm in the alarm list and presses the acknowledge alarm button an enter button object or the Enter key on an external keyboard or keypad m the alarm banner has focus and the operator presses the acknowledge alarm button A single alarm for a particular trigger is acknowledged when m the trigger s Remote Ack connection value changes to the alarm s trigger value or
214. alue cannot be fully displayed the value is truncated and the last displayable digit is replaced with an asterisk m Ifthe value doesn t fit on the first line of the display and there is room for a second line the value continues onto the second line To set up a numeric display Double click the numeric display Numeric Display Properties ES General Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width ha Border uses back color B Back color Raisedinset 8 oe BB Border color Back style Pattern style _ Pattern color Solid None 7 L Fore color Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial fio gt Bi zjujocc Cel eee Value settings Number of digits Fill left with 5 a Decimal places None fo Cancel Help 21 Setting up graphic objects 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the numeric display looks like at run time Inthe Common tab specify the object s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression whose data is displayed For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 29 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Setting up numeric input enable buttons The operator can press the numeric input enable button to open
215. ameter list specify the tags for the list in the Startup editor For information about the Startup editor see Chapter 14 If auto logout is enabled you have the option of opening a display on logout Specify the appropriate parameter file in the Runtime tab of the Project Settings dialog box To use a parameter list specify the tags for the list in the Project Settings dialog box For information about the Project Settings editor see Help If the displays that will be changed remotely by global connections use parameters specify the parameter file or parameter list in the Display tab of the Global Connections editor For information on global connections see Chapter 8 Creating tag placeholders A tag placeholder is the crosshatch character followed by a number The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name including folder names For example you could create a parameter file specifying that the tag placeholder 1 Folderl You could assign the folder and a tag name to a graphic object s connection 1 Tag1 You can create tag placeholders in the Connections tab of an object s Properties dialog box 25 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 4 m the Connections tab of the Property Panel m the Expression box in the Animation dialog box m a global object s Parameter Definitions dialog box m anywhere that you can insert an embedded variable For information about embedded variable
216. an display both current and historical data in the same trend For information about data log models see Chapter 26 28 2 28 Setting up trends Time date and number formats The trend is displayed using the time date and number formats of the current application language For example if the application language uses a comma for the decimal symbol the scale on the y axis uses commas for the decimal symbol For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 Summary of steps These are the steps for creating a trend 1 To plot historical data create a data log model in the Data Log Models editor For information see Chapter 26 2 Create a trend graphic object in the Graphics editor as described on page 28 3 3 Set up the trend in the Trend Object Properties dialog box For details about the options in the dialog box see Help 4 If desired create a next pen button a pause button or key buttons in the same graphic display to allow the operator to switch between pens pause the trend or scroll the trend For information about the buttons you can use with trends see page 28 11 5 To keep a printed record of the trend data provide a way for the operator to print the graphic display For information see page 28 12 Creating trend objects To create a trend object 1 In the Graphics editor create or open a graphic display 2 Select the Trend drawing tool by doing one of the following m Inthe Objec
217. and number formats for graphic objects 00000 21 15 Setting up BUMONS sssi on doo dadaddnd eheGeetencek enced edeaewaoee eee 21 16 Buttons described later in the chapter 0 0 0 0 cee eee 21 18 How to use push buttons 0 0 ccc eee een nes 21 18 Setting up momentary push buttons n a 0 00 ee eee 21 19 Setting up maintained push buttons 0 0 0 eee 21 21 Setting up latched push buttons 0 eee eee 21 22 Setting up multistate push buttons 0 eee 21 24 Setting up interlocked push buttons 0 00 21 25 Setting up ramp buttons 2 eee eens 21 27 Setting up numeric displays n nananana eee eee eee 21 28 How values are displayed o n eee ees 21 28 Problems with displaying values 00 ccc cece eee eens 21 28 Setting up numeric input enable buttons 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 21 30 Setting up numeric input cursor points 0 0 ee eee 21 31 Detling up string displays rsca seas edadesedes eee be inneu RERE 21 33 How values are displayed 0 een nes 21 33 Setting up string input enable buttons 000 00 21 34 Setting up goto display buttons 0 0 0 teens 21 35 Setting up close display buttons 1 20 0 00 ccc ee ee eee 21 36 Setting up display list selectors 0 0 0 eee eens 21 37 HOw touse MGICAl0IS 6 46 dee ned sma EER er E hace eh iedes ote eds 21 39 Setting up multistat
218. and the accumulated time in alarm to 0 Reset alarm status button Reset the number of times an alarm has been triggered to 0 and the accumulated time in alarm to 0 for all alarms Silence alarms button Silence the audio indicator for all current alarms on personal computers only Sort alarms button Toggle between sorting alarms in alarm lists and the alarm log file by time and by trigger value Diagnostics clear all button Remove all diagnostics messages from all diagnostic lists Entering and displaying numeric and string values Use this graphic object To do this Numeric input enable button Enter a numeric value and then write the value to a tag or an expression or ramp a value at the data source For details see page 17 6 Numeric input cursor point Enter a numeric value and then write the value to a tag or an expression or ramp a value at the data source For details see page 17 6 String input enable button Enter a string value and then write the value to a tag For details see page 17 10 Numeric display Display numeric tag values For example display the current temperature of an oven For details see page 21 28 String display Display string tag values For example set up the data source to generate strings that report on the state of a process of operation or that provide the operator with instructions about what to do next For details see page 21 33
219. anelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications This appendix describes terms that are different in PanelBuilder and FactoryTalk View steps for converting PanelBuilder applications names of equivalent graphic objects in PanelBuilder and FactoryTalk View PanelBuilder graphic objects that are not supported in FactoryTalk View PanelBuilder settings and controls that are not supported in FactoryTalk View how communications are converted and which PanelBuilder communication protocols are not supported in FactoryTalk View converting PanelBuilder Remote I O communications PanelBuilder graphic object features that are not supported in FactoryTalk View with information about how to achieve the same result when possible This appendix uses the term PanelBuilder to refer to both PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 features For information about converting applications from PanelBuilder 1400e see Appendix A Terminology These terms are different in PanelBuilder and FactoryTalk View PanelBuilder term FactoryTalk View term screen display graphic display programmable controller data source control connection In FactoryTalk View the data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source is configured to exchange information in the form of B 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE B 2
220. anguage of your choice For details see Chapter 4 Add languages to the application For details see page 12 5 Create graphic objects and specify the text strings that they will use 12 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 12 4 6 Create alarm information and local messages 7 Create a language switch button for each language you plan to use at run time For details see Help 8 Export the application text strings for translation For details see page 12 6 9 Translate the text strings For details see page 12 9 10 Import translated text strings for each of the translation languages For details see page 12 13 11 Open the application in each language to check the layout of the translated text 12 Create the run time application specifying the startup language and the languages that the operator can switch to For details see Chapter 14 Setting up Windows for language switching Installing Windows languages We recommend that you install all the languages that your application will use on both the development and run time computers Installing languages turns on the Windows font support features which allow applications to display characters for different languages using a single application font For details about installing languages see Windows Help PanelView Plus 6 Panel View Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals are shipped with languages already installed Setting up Windows fon
221. application files in as many different languages as you want However the language switch feature is not available at run time for version 3 10 and 3 20 applications Global objects are converted to regular objects in the run time application file for versions 3 10 and 3 20 For information about importing applications see page 4 5 For information about the features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View and RSView see Appendix G For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 For information about using global objects see Chapter 19 Closing applications To close an application m On the File menu click Close Application If there are any unsaved changes in open editors FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to save the changes before closing the application To close an application and exit FactoryTalk View Studio at the same time m Click the Close button at the right end of the FactoryTalk View Studio title bar If there are any unsaved changes in open editors FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to save the changes before closing Renaming copying deleting backing up and restoring applications Use the Application Manager tool to m rename applications 4 Working with applications m copy applications m delete applications m create a compressed backup copy of an application with the file extension apa m restore an application from the backup file with the file e
222. applications application settings and terminal settings The operator can also delete log files For more information about the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box see Chapter 15 13 Setting up display navigation Return to display buttons When the operator presses a return to display button at run time the graphic display that the button is on closes and the display that was previously open reopens The current display does not close if m the display change is currently controlled remotely using global connections m there were no previously opened Replace displays m the operator does not have security access for the previous display This can only occur if a new user logs in using a login button in the current display The return to display button only goes back to the most recent display It doesn t go back through a series of displays For information about setting up return to display buttons see Help How display types affect the button s behavior Both the current display and the previous display must be Replace displays When the operator presses the return to display button m Ifthe graphic display that is closing is a Replace display the display closes and the previously opened Replace display opens Any On Top displays that were previously open with the Replace display are not reopened m Ifthe graphic display that is closing is an On Top display the display closes but no display is reopened We ther
223. applications that will run on PanelView Plus 6 terminals use the Remote Backlight Intensity connection in the Backlight tab of the Global Connections editor to set the backlight intensity of a run time terminal remotely from a data source To update the backlight intensity of the run time terminal from the data source assign a tag or an expression to this read only connection This connection Contains this range of values Remote Backlight Intensity 0 100 At run time the application reads the value at the data source and sets the backlight to the percentage of its maximum intensity corresponding to the value For instance if the value of the connection is 25 the backlight will be set to 25 of its maximum intensity This value will override the terminal s own backlight intensity setting If the value of the connection is greater than 100 the backlight will be set to its maximum intensity If the value is less than 0 the backlight is set to its minimum intensity That is it will be turned off Monitoring run time RAM usage Sometimes it is helpful to monitor run time RAM usage for troubleshooting purposes If your application seems to be running slowly consuming too much memory or interfering with the operation of other applications on the same personal computer or terminal it is useful to monitor the exact amount of memory the applications are consuming 8 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 8 8 The Panel
224. ar or cursor remains at the top If alarms are sorted by time when the operator selects an alarm other than the top one in the list by using the move down button and new alarms occur they are added above the visible area if the list is full The currently selected alarm continues to be selected and maintains its position in the displayed portion of the list If alarms are sorted by trigger value as new alarms occur the currently selected alarm continues to be selected and maintains its position in the list If the sort order changes the selected alarm continues to be selected but it might be displayed in a different position in the list How the alarm banner graphic object works The alarm banner graphic object displays a single unacknowledged alarm At run time when a trigger connection at the data source matches a message s trigger value an alarm appears in the alarm banner The alarm banner can be in the ALARM 9 33 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 34 display or ALARM BANNER display in an alarm display you have created or can be placed on any display in your application You can use multiple alarm banners in the same display or in different displays You can set up different banners so that one displays the most recent alarm and the other queues alarms until the displayed alarm is acknowledged For information about setting up alarm banners see Help What is displayed If you set up the
225. are comes pre installed Installing hardware and software on a PanelView Plus 6 terminal l If you will be printing displays alarms reports or diagnostics messages connect a printer to the USB or Network port PanelView Plus 6 terminals incorporates the JETCET PRINT solution for Microsoft Windows CE devices supporting select Canon Epson Hewlett Packard and Brother printers Plug and play installation is supported for these printers as well as manual installation if a suitable JETCET print driver is available If you are using an OPC server other than RSLinx Enterprise for example KEPServerEnterprise install the OPC server software on the terminal For installation information see the documentation supplied by your OPC server vendor For information about OPC data servers see Chapter 5 If your application uses third party ActiveX objects install and register the Windows CE version of the objects on the terminal For information about ActiveX objects see page 20 21 Installing printers on a PanelView Plus 6 terminal If you will be printing displays alarms reports or diagnostics messages connect a printer to the USB or Network port 16 Transferring applications to a PanelView Plus terminal PanelView Plus 6 terminals incorporates the JETCET PRINT solution for Microsoft Windows CE devices supporting select Canon Epson Hewlett Packard and Brother printers Plug and play installation is supported
226. are two ways you can use alarm message handshaking m to hold the message at the data source for a specific period of time m to hold the message at the data source until the data source notifies FactoryTalk View that the message has been read Choose the method that best suits your application needs and communication system Holding the message for a specific period of time To set up an alarm trigger s alarm message handshaking so that the message at the Message connection is held for a specific period of time assign a tag to the Message Notification connection and specify a hold time in the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor 9 21 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 22 How handshaking works This method of alarm message handshaking works as follows 1 When an alarm occurs the alarm message is sent to the Message connection 2 The Message Notification connection is set to 1 As long as the Message Notification connection is set to 1 FactoryTalk View cannot send new messages to the data source 3 The hold time timer begins timing 4 When the hold time has expired the Message Notification connection is reset to 0 and FactoryTalk View can send a new message to the Message connection Holding the message until the data source acknowledges that it has read the message To set up an alarm trigger s alarm message handshaking so that the message at the Message connection is held until the data sour
227. arm banners see page 9 33 21 61 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To set up an alarm banner 1 Double click the alarm banner Alarm Banner Properties Ed General Alarm Common Appearance Border style Border width V Border uses back color Raisedinset E BB Back color Back style Pattern style O Border color Solid z None E _ Pattern color Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial fio B Z U see BI Z Cec Iv Word wrap see Other V Key navigation 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the banner looks like at run time and whether the operator can navigate to the banner using the keys on the keyboard or keypad m Inthe Alarm tab set up whether to queue alarms whether to display all alarms or active alarms only and which alarms to include in a filtered trigger list Inthe Common tab specify the alarm banner s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up alarm status lists The alarm status list graphic object displays the status of alarms including how many times an alarm has been triggered and how long it has been active For example the list could display an alarm that has been triggered 5 times for a total accumulated time in alarm of 10 minutes 21 62 21 Setting up graphic objects
228. arrow key until the object is the desired size To adjust the amount of the increment first hold down the Shift key and press the or keys on the keyboard s numeric keypad Reshaping drawing objects You can reshape arcs lines polygons polylines rectangles rounded rectangles and wedges To reshape lines rectangles polylines and polygons I 2 Select the object you want to reshape Click the Polygon tool or right click the object and then click Edit The cursor changes to the Polygon tool and handles appear on the object 20 43 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE m Arc tool c Wedge tool E Rounded rectangle tool a Undo tool 20 44 3 Move the cursor over any line or corner of the object A handle with a cross hair appears 4 Drag the handle until the object is the desired shape GOL Dragging from a point along the line between corners creates a new angle between the two corners 5 To delete an angle position the pointer at the tip of the angle and then press Delete To reshape arcs and wedges 1 Select the object you want to reshape 2 Click the Arc or Wedge tool or right click the object and then click Edit The cursor changes to the Arc or Wedge tool and handles appear on the object 3 Place the pointer on one of the handles A cross hair appears 4 Drag the handle until the object is the desired shape To reshape rounded rectangles 1 Select the rounded r
229. as is or modify the display For example you can change the color of the objects or add and remove buttons Or you can create your own graphic display to use for displaying information messages In the Information Setup editor specify the display to use Another option is to place the information message display object in a graphic display that doesn t open automatically when a message is generated For information about creating your own information message display see page 27 7 The information message display graphic object The INFORMATION display contains an information message display graphic object which lists one information message at a time For information about how the information message display object works at run time see page 27 7 Buttons in the INFORMATION display The INFORMATION display contains these buttons This button Does this Ack information acknowledge Acknowledges the information message Close close display Closes the information message graphic display You can assign any caption you choose to the labels on the buttons 27 Using information messages Using the information acknowledge button When the operator presses the information acknowledge button if the Ack connection 1s assigned the connection value is set to 1 at the data source The value is held as long as the operator presses the button or for the acknowledge hold time whichever is longer Then the connection is re
230. at run time You specify an initial language for the run time application when you create it and select the languages that will be available at run time You can use up to 40 languages per development application and 20 languages per run time application When the application runs operators can change the language using a language switch button Set up a different language switch button for each language With language switching you can develop an application in one language export the user defined text strings for the application and then import translated strings for up to 40 languages into the same application export an application s text strings in multiple languages into a single Microsoft Excel spreadsheet import text strings in multiple languages from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet into your application in a single operation use the same application in different countries allowing operators in each location to view the application in their own language allow operators in multilingual countries to use the language of their choice 12 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 12 2 import application components developed in different countries into a single application that supports multiple languages The default language For applications that use multiple languages you can specify one of the languages as the default language Any undefined text strings in the other languages can be displayed in th
231. ata type floating point values are rounded If the Optional Expression connection is assigned the floating point value is substituted for the in the expression and the expression result is rounded For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 Problems with the numeric pop up windows Problems with the numeric pop up keypad and scratchpad occur under these circumstances If the graphic display changes remotely before the user has pressed the Enter button the pop up window closes without writing out a value If the screen resolution is smaller than 124 pixels wide by 240 pixels high the pop up keypad cannot open If the screen resolution is smaller than 124 pixels wide by 68 pixels high the pop up scratchpad cannot open If the value is too large for the data type of the tag assigned to the Value connection the pop up window remains open and the value is not written to the connection The scratchpad area changes to red to alert the operator of the error If the value is outside the minimum and maximum range specified for the object the pop up window remains open and the value is not written to the connection The scratchpad area changes to red to alert the operator of the error If Enter key handshaking is still in effect the pop up window closes but the value is not written to the connection Entering string values The operator can enter string values at run time using the string input enable button Whe
232. ating 11 12 selecting tools for 10 deleting 44 deselecting 23 duplicating 41 editing 38 embedded variables in 2 exporting to XML l grouping and ungrouping 45 importing XML 3 moving 39 naming 32 navigating between 7 positioning 48 with grid 8 replacing tags and expressions in 36 resizing 42 selecting 23 setting up l using the Properties dialog box 26 using the Property Panel 29 spatial properties of 2 time date and number formats 15 visibility setting up 2 using at run time 4 using keys to work with See Special keys using to display alarms and messages 9 using to display processes 5 using to enter and display numeric and string values 8 using to illustrate displays 3 using to navigate 3 using to start and control processes 4 Grid in graphic displays 8 in trends 9 Group objects animating 45 16 creating 45 editing 46 naming 33 H Handshaking Enter key 12 for Alarm messages 21 for alarms 18 remote 21 Height animation 6 14 at run time 18 Historical trends 5 2 HISTORY display 6 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 editing 29 HMI servers 8 9 1 HMI tags 2 1 addressing syntax for 5 browsing for 5 creating 8 data sources 5 exporting 11 how to use 5 importing 9 ll merging databases 11 naming 7 searching for 4 when to use 4 See also Analog tags Device tags Digital tags Memory tags String tags System tags Home button graphic object 7 16 49 using with alarm o
233. ation RIO configurations are not saved with the application when you exit Factory Talk View Studio However they are backed up with the application in the Application Manager For information about handling multiple applications with different RIO settings see the Rockwell Automation KnowledgeBase For information about using the Application Manager see page 4 10 Unsupported PanelBuilder 1400e RIO tags A PanelBuilder 1400e RIO tag will be converted to an HMI memory tag and an error will be logged to the conversion log file if the RIO tag m has a blank address m has a data type of 1 BCD 2 BCD 3 BCD 5 BCD 6 BCD or 7 BCD m has a data type of Bit Position and its address does not reference a single bit m float has a data type of Float and its address has a bit offset assigned that is not 0 m has a data type of Long Integer or 8 Digit BCD its address has a bit offset assigned that is not 0 and its length or range is greater than 32 Start Bit m has a tag type of Block m has an invalid PanelBuilder 1400e address or references an undefined rack A 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Unsupported graphic object features This section describes features of PanelBuilder 1400e graphic objects that are not supported in FactoryTalk View The Notes column provides additional information and describes methods for achieving the same result when possible Unsupported feature in Graphic object FactoryTalk Vie
234. ation or click the Test Application tool 2 If your application uses multiple languages specify the languages to include and the initial run time language and then press Finish For details see Help 3 Test your application 4 To stop your application press a shutdown button or type the character x Make sure you provide the operator with a method for shutting down the application at run time For more information about methods for shutting down applications see page 15 5 Once you ve tested your application to make sure everything works the way you intend create the run time application file and transfer the file to the run time computer 14 Creating run time applications Creating run time application files Before you can run your application you must create a run time version When you create the run time version FactoryTalk View Studio compiles all of the necessary application information into a single file with the extension mer Creating mer files for previous versions You can specify the version of FactoryTalk View ME Station for which to create the mer file For example if the application will run on a terminal that uses FactoryTalk View ME Station version 3 20 you can specify that version for the mer file Starting with FactoryTalk View ME version 5 1 you can no longer create version 3 0 ME run time projects Version 6 0 or earlier mer files created on a 64 bit operating system will not run on F
235. ation system 21 Setting up graphic objects Holding the value for a specific period of time To set up an object s Enter key handshaking so that the value at the Value connection is held for a specific period of time assign a tag to the Enter connection and specify the Enter key hold time You can also specify an Enter key control delay if desired How handshaking works This method of Enter key handshaking works as follows 1 When the operator presses the Enter button the value is sent to the Value connection and the Enter key control delay timer begins timing The use of a delay is optional 2 Ifyou specify an Enter key control delay when the time is up the Enter connection is set to 1 If you don t use the delay the Enter connection is set to 1 as soon as the operator presses Enter As long as the Enter connection is set to 1 the operator cannot send new values to the data source 3 When the Enter connection is set to 1 the Enter key hold time timer begins timing 4 When the Enter key hold time has expired the Enter connection is reset to 0 and the operator can send a new value to the Value connection To set up Enter key handshaking to hold the value for a specific period of time 1 In Timing tab of the object s Properties dialog box specify the Enter key control delay optional and Enter key hold time properties 2 Inthe Connections tab assign a tag to the Enter connection A digital tag is
236. ation window in the Project Settings editor in the Runtime tab clear the Title bar check box For more information about using the Project Settings editor see Chapter 4 Assign visibility animation to the shutdown button so that the button is only visible when a user who is authorized to stop the application is logged in For an example see page 11 11 Or set up security for the graphic display in which the shutdown button is located so only users who are authorized to stop the application can open the display Additional step for personal computers Use the DeskLock tool to prevent users from having access to the Windows desktop This will prevent access to operating system functions such as restarting Windows or shutting down tasks For more information see page 15 17 Additional step for PanelView Plus CE applications Hide the Windows Taskbar to make it inaccessible To hide the Windows Taskbar l 2 3 4 5 On the Windows Start menu select Settings and then select Taskbar Clear the Always on top check box Select Auto hide When you are finished click OK At the Command prompt or in the Run box run Regflush exe to save your changes to persistent internal flash memory Otherwise the changes will be lost when you reboot 11 Setting up security Setting up FactoryTalk Security for your application In the Explorer window of FactoryTalk View Studio you can create FactoryTalk Security users and gro
237. atus Properties uli Global Connections To view HMI server properties 4 Working with applications Inthe Explorer window right click the HMI server name and then click Properties Condiments Properties General Mame Description Project File Condiments C Documents and Settings 4ll Users Documents RS yview Enterprise MEVHMI Projects Condiments Number of displays 4 Licensed maximum 5 Cancel Apply Help 4 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 4 20 Er C45 Setting up communications This chapter describes OPC communications what data servers are creating data servers in your application updating data server caches About OPC communications OPC is OLE for Process Control used to connect FactoryTalk View to communication devices via vendor specific OPC servers FactoryTalk View supports the OPC Data Access DA 2 05 specification OPC servers provide a way for FactoryTalk View to retrieve tag values from Allen Bradley controller devices using RSLinx Classic or RSLinx Enterprise as an OPC server third party controller devices such as Siemens or Modicon using third party OPC servers such as KEPServerEnterprise ControlNet Scheduled DeviceNet I O and Remote I O are not supported on PanelView Plus 6 0 PanelViewPlusNG terminal and Windows CE terminals They are not supported on personal computers
238. awing objects except images and panels For tips about creating slider objects see the previous section For more information about setting up vertical slider animation see Help 22 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 16 Applying animation to groups You can apply animation to objects and then group those objects and apply animation to the group When the display is running animation is applied as follows These types of animation Color Are applied like this Animation attached to individual objects within the group overrides group animation Fill Animation results for both the individual objects and the group are applied Horizontal slider vertical slider Group animation overrides animation attached to individual objects within the group Height width horizontal position vertical position and Animation results for individual objects and the group are combined For example if an individual s horizontal position rotation animation result is to offset the object by 100 pixels and the group s result is to offset the group by 200 pixels the individual object is offset by 300 pixels Visibility When the group s animation visibility is False the group is not visible then no objects in the group are visible regardless of the animation status of the individual objects When the group s animation visibility is True the group is visible the visibility of an object wi
239. ay is the default display for showing alarm messages at run time It contains an alarm banner graphic object that is set up to display a single active alarm You can use the ALARM display as is or modify the display For example you can change the color of the objects or add and remove buttons 9 25 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE P ALARM Condiments Display Alarm banner graphic object Silence Buttons Alarms F2 Another option is to create your own graphic display to use when an alarm occurs as described on page 9 31 Or you can use one of the alarm displays in the graphic library These displays are described in the next four sections A copy of the ALARM display is included in the graphic library with the name ALARM BANNER The alarm banner graphic object The ALARM display contains an alarm banner graphic object which lists the most recent alarm message You can set up the alarm banner to queue new alarms until the displayed alarm has been acknowledged or to show new alarms as they occur The alarm banner in the ALARM display is set up to display new alarms as they occur and to display active alarms only but you can edit it if desired For more information about the alarm banner see page 9 33 Buttons in the ALARM display The ALARM display contains alarm buttons for acknowledging silencing and clearing alarms as well as a button for cl
240. ays For example if every display contains a goto display button that returns the operator to a graphic display called Main Menu assign the same function key to this button in each display m Include the name of the function key assigned to a button in a caption on the button 21 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE For buttons with multiple states include the function key name in the caption for each state or create a text object to use as a label for the button so that you don t have to set up the caption for each state and then group the text and button together If your application will run on a PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal assign keys that are supported by the run time terminal Different sizes of terminals have different function keys Function key equivalents If your application will run on a personal computer the keyboard contains the function keys F1 to F12 only The remaining function keys are associated with these key combinations For this function key Use this key combination F13 Left Shift F1 F14 Left Shift F2 F15 Left Shift F3 F16 Left Shift F4 F17 Left Shift F5 F18 Left Shift F6 F19 Left Shift F7 F20 Left Shift F8 K1 K12 Right Alt F1 to Right Alt F12 K13 Right Shift F1 K14 Right Shift F2 K15 Right Shift F3 K16 Right Shift F4 K17 Right Shift F5 K18 Right Shift F6 K19 Right Shift F7 K20 Right Shift F8 21 6 21
241. bal connections to update the date and time at the data source using the run time terminal s date and time update the date and time on the run time terminal using the data source date and time notify the data source of the current display number notify the data source when a display is printed change the display on the run time terminal remotely from the data source close On Top displays apply parameter files or parameter lists to the tag placeholders in the changed displays print the current display from the data source run up to five macros from the data source when a tag or expression result changes set the intensity of the backlight on a PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal 8 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE m monitor run time RAM usage for troubleshooting purposes The use of each global connection is optional Setting up global connections Use the Global Connections editor to set up global connections Global Connections CPR9D16 Date and time output interval seconds Maximurn update rate i seconds Date and Time Display Macro Backlight Memory TE rea a eo E Ea SE ee d e me tee For detailed information about the options in the Global Connections editor see Help Updating the date and time Use the date and time connections in the Date and Time tab of the Global Connections editor to update the date and time Yo
242. banner to show the alarms for specific alarm triggers only alarms for those triggers are displayed m You can set up the banner to queue new alarms until the operator clears the current alarm or to always display the most recent alarm m When a display containing an alarm banner is first opened the alarm banner is blank unless the display is the alarm display specified in the Alarm Setup editor and it was opened in response to an alarm m When the displayed alarm is acknowledged it is removed from the alarm banner If there are no newer alarms the banner is blank m Ifthe operator presses a clear alarm banner button the banner is blank m Ifthe operator presses a clear alarm history button or if all alarms are acknowledged the banner is blank m Ifthe banner is set up to show both active and inactive alarms when an alarm is active an asterisk appears beside the message m Ifyou set up alarm messages in multiple languages messages and trigger labels are displayed in the language that they were originally logged in All alarm times are displayed in the current application language How the alarm status list graphic object works The alarm status list graphic object displays the status of alarms including whether an alarm has been triggered how many times an alarm has been triggered and for how long The alarm status list can be in the STATUS display in an alarm display you have created or can be placed on any display
243. bedded variable syntax nnana annuun naana 24 3 Numeric embedded variable syntax 0 0 0 24 3 String embedded variable syntax 0 0 nee 24 4 Time and date embedded variable syntax 0 0 cece eae 24 6 How embedded variables are updated at run time 0 00000 24 6 How embedded variables are displayed at run time 0000 24 7 Numeric embedded variables 0 24 7 String embedded variables 0 00 eee nes 24 8 Time and date embedded variables 20 0 0 ccc eee eee 24 8 XIx FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE XX 25 Using parameters and global objects 26 27 Using tag placeholders o s 0 lt lt 23 54 00c6neeneten oe ddd doe sue esaue a ae gees 25 1 Summary 01 SEPS 5 0 5 4 ao dne ss bee Fa Se amp aed a 4 oo ee de ode 25 3 Creating parameter Tiles 220445 6446 ba hh044e o4eKeeeeoene eee es 25 4 Using the Parameters editor 2 eee nes 25 5 Using global ODjECIS s2 2 55442 usd ees dno sooo ERNE Ee peer ee ae Re 25 10 Creating global object displays and base objects 00048 25 11 Creating reference ODjCCIS i2 40440 54490 meii ese eus es ean ode 25 12 Setting up reference objects link properties 00 0000 25 13 Deleting the base object 2 eee eens 25 14 Using global object parameters 0 0 0 25 14 Using process faceplates 2 552 24685 444 440065558 40802 444000008 084 254
244. between its minimum and maximum pixel offset Horizontal position animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up horizontal position animation see Help 22 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 14 Setting up vertical position animation With vertical position animation an object moves vertically based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object will be halfway between its minimum and maximum offset To move an object on the display up a negative offset number is required The top left corner of the display has the coordinates of 0 0 Vertical position animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up vertical position animation see Help Setting up width animation With width animation an object s width changes based on a tag value or the result of an expression in relation to the specified minimum and maximum values For example if the value of the expression is halfway between the minimum and maximum values the object s width will be halfway between its minimum and maximum percentage Width animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up width
245. bjects 38 using with diagnostics lists 13 using with recipes 12 using with trends 11 Horizontal position animation 6 13 at run time 18 Horizontal slider animation 6 7 15 at run time 17 J If then else logic in expressions 16 nesting 17 Image Browser 23 Image graphic object 3 14 Images editor 22 Importing alarm files 4 3 applications 6 global object displays 3 graphic displays 5 3 tags 11 Importing application text 13 problems with 14 Indicators 39 Information acknowledge button graphic object 7 16 at run time 7 INFORMATION display 6 at run time 19 opening and closing 7 window size 14 Information message display graphic object 9 65 at run time 19 7 Information message files 2 4 changing the file to use at run time 8 Information messages 1 creating your own display for 7 displaying 3 embedded variables in 2 multiple languages for 5 setting up l viewing at run time 19 Information Messages editor 2 Information Setup editor 3 Ingredients for recipes 1 Initial values for tags 12 1 See also Tag values Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 Input focus giving to graphic objects 7 Interlocked push button graphic object 4 25 at run time 16 ISA symbols 21 Isolated graphing in trends 8 K KEPServerEnterprise array tag syntax 17 Keyboard button symbols 21 Keyboard navigation 7 Ly Language function in expressions 14 Language strings exporting for translation 6 importing 13 translating in Excel 9
246. ble when L system you are connected to the controller are located in the Online folder Using tags and expressions in your application Once you ve created tags either in data servers or in FactoryTalk View assign them to connections in your application to allow the application to interact with the data source and perform actions based on the tag values You can assign tags in these editors m Expressions Global Connections m Graphic Displays Global Object Displays m Graphic Libraries m Parameters m Alarm Setup Information Setup m Macros m Data Log Models RecipePlus Editor 6 e Working with tags Assigning tags This example shows the Trigger dialog box that opens when you click the Add button in the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor Trigger nea Type the tag name here or click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser To assign a tag do one of the following m Inthe Tag or expression column type the tag name m Inthe Tag column click the Browse button and then select a tag from the Tag Browser For information about using the Tag Browser see Help Assigning tags to graphic objects In the Graphics editor you can assign tags to many of the graphic objects you create You can use up to 1 000 tags per graphic display This limit includes the tags contained in embedded variables and expressions For example if an expression references the same tag twice this counts as
247. cated and the asterisk if used appears at the right Literal strings are displayed using the same rules as string tag values Time and date embedded variables For embedded variables that show both the time and the date a space is placed between the time and date when the embedded variable is displayed at run time Time and date formats Time and date embedded variables use the time and date formats for the current application language For example if you specify the short date format at run time the display uses the short date format that the application language uses For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 C25 Using parameters and global objects This chapter describes using tag placeholders and parameter files or lists creating tag placeholders creating parameter files and parameter lists using global objects creating global object displays and base objects creating setting up and deleting reference objects using global object parameters adding process faceplates that connect to Logix5000 processors The topics in this chapter describe features of FactoryTalk View Studio that can help you set up your applications more quickly by reusing similar groups of objects and graphic displays Tag placeholders parameter lists and parameter files allow you to use the same graphic display with different sets of tags Global objects allow you to use multiple instances of the same graphic objec
248. cations You can create a new application when you start FactoryTalk View Studio or once FactoryTalk View Studio is already open To create a new application when you start FactoryTalk View Studio l Start FactoryTalk View Studio NHew Open Machine Edition Application New Existing Application name oOo Description Compact Machine Edition application Check this box to create an application that will min on a PaneMview Plus Compact terminal Language English United States en US Cancel 2 Inthe New tab in the Application name box type a name for your application up to 32 characters long 3 Ifdesired type a description of the application If you don t type a description now you can add one later as described on page 4 18 L New Application 4 Working with applications 4 Specify whether the application will be a Compact Machine Edition application that is whether it is intended to run on a Panel View Plus Compact terminal You can change this setting in the Project Settings editor later if necessary For information about the Project Settings editor see page 4 17 5 Specify a language for the application For information about using different languages see Chapter 12 6 Click Create FactoryTalk View Studio creates the application s folders and files and then displays the new application in the Explorer window The application is created in the ME HMI projects di
249. ce notifies FactoryTalk View that it has read the message use two connections the Message Notification connection and the Message Handshake connection Set up the data source to send a new non zero value to the Message Handshake connection when it has read the message at the Message connection How handshaking works If you use the Message Handshake connection handshaking works like this 1 When an alarm occurs the alarm message is sent to the Message connection 2 The Message Notification connection is set to 1 As long as the Message Notification connection is set to 1 FactoryTalk View cannot send new messages to the data source 3 When the data source has read the message it sends a new non zero value to the Message Handshake connection 4 The Message Notification connection is reset to 0 and FactoryTalk View can send a new message to the Message connection How messages are queued FactoryTalk View can queue up to 128 messages while it waits for the Message Notification connection to be reset to 0 Queued messages are sent to the data source on a first in first out basis 9 Setting up alarms If the alarm message queue fills before the Message Notification connection is reset to 0 an error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics How the Message connection works This connection is used to send the message associated with a trigger value to the data source The message is sent only if the alarm message s
250. closed f FactoryTalk iew Studio Machine Edition p gt eS ngel File Edit View Objects Arrange Animation Application Tools Window Help Objects toolbar gt ROABOCOCNYVADOCSS VSR Snina ES ma npt vay GRSHANEASZOOREE46 5 f Overview Malthouse Clgx 800x600 Display Display area NumericDisplay10 Text2 Text4 Group TimeD ateDisplay1 ShutdownButton1 Line3 Text29 Object explorer Temis Text28 Text27 Text26 Text25 Text6 Line36 Line35 z Highlighting on Expand Collapse Help D l ag n osti CS L l st xl In service The server RNA Local Malthouse Clax 800x600 Malthouse Clax 800x600 on computer USPAZJFULKEROZ is now active Statu S ba r _ gt Position x 332 y 167 width 96 height 72 NumericDisplay10 Numeric Display 2 Properties Connections All Properties Shared Properties NumericDisplay10 Middle Center Mis 000000 Solid NNNNN i False BorderColor Ml 00800000 BorderStyle Raisedinset BorderUsesBackColo True Borderwidth 8 Pce DecimalPlaces 0 Descrip 4 C O0FFFFFF fal Please press on an area or use the function keys for your selection Ba Property Panel The Graphics editor has special items on the View and Edit menus and extra toolbars For details about using the Graphics editor see Help 19 e Using graphic displays Importing and exporting graphic displays Each graphic display s in
251. contents of 10 Alarm messages embedded variables in 2 exporting to XML 1 handshaking 21 importing XML 3 multiple languages for 5 17 printing at run time 10 viewing at run time 19 ALARM MULTI LINE display 6 copying 30 editing 27 Alarm Setup editor 3 exporting to XML 1 importing XML 3 using tags in 9 Alarm status list graphic object 9 62 at run time 34 linking buttons to 9 navigating to 7 using buttons with 36 Alarm status mode button graphic object 7 16 using with alarm status lists 36 Alarm triggers 5 and the default language 5 data types for 11 exporting to XML l importing XML 3 Alarms 1 acknowledging 8 19 38 remotely 19 21 24 clearing 8 40 creating your own display for 3l deleting 40 displaying 6 displaying in the alarm status list 41 expressions in 4 filtering 5 handshaking 18 for remote acknowledgements 21 importing and exporting 4 5 keeping a permanent record of 6 10 notification methods for 6 planning 6 printing 10 queueing 18 resetting status of 9 25 40 remotely 25 responding to 7 retaining status of 41 sending messages to the data source 23 setting up 2 silencing 9 24 39 remotely 24 sorting 9 40 testing on the development computer 2 Analog tags 1 how floating point values are rounded 2 logging values for 4 monitoring for alarms 4 using to generate a range of alarms 11 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 Animation 1 checking 16 copying 18 defining range of motion for
252. ct one or more objects In the Property Panel click the State property and then select the state to view To view the next state quickly double click the row or press the Enter key on your keyboard Assigning tags and expressions to graphic objects You can assign tags and expressions to many graphic objects including ActiveX objects depending of course on how the vendor implemented the object This section describes how to m assign tags to graphic objects m use expressions to manipulate tag values m replace tags using tag substitution m use tag placeholders so the same display can be used with different sets of tags Assigning tags To assign tags to a graphic object use one of these methods Double click the object to open the object s Properties dialog box and then assign tags in the Connections tab Homentary Push Button Properties General States Common Connections Type the tag name here or Click the button to open the Tag Browser 20 Using graphic objects m Select the object and then assign tags in the Connections tab of the Property Panel Property Panel HMomentaryPushButtont Momentan Push Bu p Properties Connections tame tag Tag Exper _ Pe E pe ee Type the tag Or Click the button name here to open the Tag Browser Yalue Type Long Returns the control state value of the object g m Select the object and then on the Edit menu clic
253. ct settings determine important aspects of your graphic display such as size and position For more information see page 4 11 For information about global object displays and the Parameters editor see Chapter 25 About graphic displays and graphic objects A graphic display represents the operator s view of plant activity The display can show system or process data and provide operators with a way to write values to an external data source The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server Operators can print the display at run time to create a visual record of tag values object States or current messages The elements that make up a graphic display are called graphic objects You can create objects in the Graphics editor or copy them from a global object display from a graphic library or from another application For information about creating and copying graphic objects see Chapter 20 You can use up to 1 000 tags per graphic display This limit includes the tags contained in embedded variables Compact applications applications running on PanelView Plus Compact terminals have a limited number of displays 19 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 2 Before you begin Before you begin plan your displays Think about what information the operator needs to see and the best way to provide the information For example Does the operator need to know the
254. ctoryTalk Diagnostics local log files You can open the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer from within FactoryTalk View Studio or from the Windows Start menu The FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer is available on personal computers You can also set up personal computers to accept messages from Panel View Plus 6 Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminals and then display the messages in the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer or in the Diagnostics List For information about sending messages from PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminals to personal computers see page 10 8 10 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 10 6 To open the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer do one of the following m In FactoryTalk View Studio on the Tools menu click Diagnostics Viewer m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt FactoryTalk Tools and then click Diagnostics Viewer For information about setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics to send messages to the local log see Help for the Diagnostics Setup tool For additional information about setting up and using the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer see the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer Help Using the Diagnostics Setup tool Use the Diagnostics Setup tool to set up m destinations and message routing on the development computer including logging to the local log or to an ODBC database m destinations and message routing on personal com
255. cts moves all the selected objects The objects maintain their position relative to each other 20 39 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 40 To move objects in small increments using the keyboard 1 Select one or more objects 2 Place the pointer on the object not on its edge or handle 3 Hold down Shift while you press an arrow key To adjust the amount of the increment first hold down the Shift key and press the or keys on the keyboard s numeric keypad 4 Release the Shift key when the object is in place Copying objects To copy objects you can m drag and drop objects in the same display m drag and drop objects between displays or from a graphic library to a display m copy and paste objects When an object is copied any animation attached to the object is also copied If a group is copied the new copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects just like the original Copying objects with multiple languages If an object has multiple language strings set up copying the object copies all the languages If the object is pasted into an application with different languages only the strings for languages that are used by the application are pasted If the new application has languages that are not set up for the object those language strings are undefined and will be displayed with single question marks For more information about setting up multiple languages see Chapter 12 To co
256. d you can include a Compare column in the table to compare tag values to data sets at a glance If you choose this option FactoryTalk View displays an X in the Compare column when the tag value and data set value for an ingredient differ Ingredients with an X are listed first 29 Setting up RecipePlus RecipePlus button Use the RecipePlus button to perform actions on the selected recipe s ingredients The recipe is selected using the RecipePlus selector object Set up a separate RecipePlus button for each action you want to perform Download write the data set values to tags for all the ingredients in the selected recipe Upload write tag values to the data set for all the ingredients in the selected recipe If all values are uploaded successfully the recipe file is saved Upload and Create write tag values for all the ingredients in the selected recipe to a new data set creating a new unit The operator is prompted for a name for the new unit If all values are uploaded successfully the recipe file is saved The new data set is named Data Set n where n is the next available number starting at 1 that will create a unique data set name Restore display the selected recipe in the RecipePlus table Save save the data set values for the recipe file and unit displayed in the RecipePlus table If the operator made changes in the data set values using the string pop up keyboard or numeric pop up keypad the new values i
257. d a display or library to the Global Objects folder 1 In the Explorer window in the Graphics folder right click the Global Objects icon 2 Click Add Component Into Application 3 Browse to and select the display or library to add and then click Open The display is copied into the Global Objects folder and given the file extension ggfx Any ActiveX objects are deleted All other objects are converted to base objects If you delete remove or rename a global object display you break the links between the base objects in the display and their reference objects For more information about breaking links see Help 25 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 12 Creating reference objects FactoryTalk View global objects allow you to link the appearance and behavior of a graphic object to multiple copies of that object When the original base object is updated the changes are automatically applied to all the copies of the object The copies of the base object are called reference objects You can copy or drag base objects into standard graphic displays Each copied object becomes a reference object You can also copy drag and duplicate reference objects that you have already created to create more copies of the base object Base objects can be group objects This provides powerful template capabilities When you add or remove objects from the base object group all the reference objects are automatically updated
258. d at run time See page 4 5 for alarm restrictions on PanelView Plus Compact terminals as well as Windows PanelView Plus and PanelViewPlus 6 For information about setting up alarms see Chapter 9 Providing information for the operator In addition to notifying the operator of alarm conditions you can provide information and instructions about plant processes and inform the operator about system activities Before setting up information notification plan m what system activity the operator needs to be informed about what conditions will trigger information messages what information you want the messages to contain Local and information messages Use local messages to give the operator information in a specific graphic display while the display is open Use information messages to give the operator information no matter which display is open For information about setting up local messages see page 19 26 For information about setting up information messages see Chapter 27 Diagnostics messages Set up diagnostics messages to notify the operator of system activity such as tag reads and writes running macros communication problems or problems opening displays For information about setting up diagnostics messages see Chapter 10 Planning trends When planning trends consider how they will be used For example will the trend be used to 3 Planning applications m analyze process trends monitor produc
259. d drag inward to increase roundedness or outward to decrease roundedness Pa To finish drawing click the object To change how the object looks click Properties on the context menu or double click the object to open its Properties dialog box Select rounded rectangle or square options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help To close the dialog box click OK For information about using the Rounded Rectangle tool to reshape the rounded rectangle see page 20 44 ETFL ActiveX Control tool 20 Using graphic objects Using wmf and dxf files Windows metafiles wmf and AutoCAD dxf files are converted to drawing objects such as lines ellipses and polygons when you import them You can edit the drawing objects the same way you edit drawing objects that you create in FactoryTalk View Depending on the complexity of the metafile or AutoCAD file the converted image could consist of 500 or more drawing objects This would lead to long display load times In this case it would be better to covert the wmf or dxf file to a bitmap and then display the bitmap in an image object To place a wmf or dxf file in a display 1 On the Objects menu click Import 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the file and then drag to draw a rectangle 3 In the Files of type box select the type of file to import 4 Navigate to the directory where the file is stored and then click the file to
260. d or invalid the file is deleted and recreated and an error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics If logging to a folder on a networked computer and the run time computer is not logged in to the Windows domain of the network computer the log folder cannot be created An error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics If logging to an invalid path the log folder cannot be created An error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics One of the reasons that the path might be invalid is that the top level folder of the path is not shared When the application starts FactoryTalk View checks whether there is disk space to store the data log model s data If there is not enough space an error message is sent to FactoryTalk Diagnostics and data logging does not start 26 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 26 6 C2 Using information messages This chapter describes m steps for setting up information messages m using the Information Messages and Information Setup editors m preparing to set up information messages how information messages work m creating information messages in multiple languages m the INFORMATION display m creating your own information message display m opening and closing the information message display how the information message display graphic object works m changing the information message file used at run time About information messages Use information messag
261. d then click Edit Driver 5 To edit a device select it and then click Edit Device For information about setting up RSLinx Enterprise drivers and devices see the RSLinx documentation Once the driver is set up FactoryTalk View ME Station automatically starts the driver software when you run the application Specifying the printers to use at run time You can use local or network printers to print alarm messages reports diagnostics messages and graphic displays at run time If desired you can use a different printer for each type of printing To specify the printers to use at run time 1 In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Terminal Settings 2 Double click Print Setup 15 Running applications on a personal computer Print Setup Alarm Print Setup Diagnostics Print Setup Display Print Setup i 3 Double click the type of printing to set up Print Setup E Faper Size Letter Source Automatically Select Margins inches A Orientation f Portrait Lett i Right i Landscape Top j Bottom i Cancel Printer 4 Click Printer 15 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 15 12 J Print Setup E Printer Properties Name Emam Status Ready Type Brother OCP 1300 USB Printer Where USBOO1 Comment Brother OCP 1300 USB Network OF Cancel _Network PK cea Modify the print
262. d then click Unlock All Wallpaper All objects in the graphic display are converted back to their original state Using graphic libraries There are two graphic libraries that are available Symbol Factory and Graphics Library FactoryTalk View Studio Graphics Library comes with a set of libraries contained in the Libraries folder As with a public library the graphics libraries can provide you with source materials and reference information Each graphic library consists of a graphic display with the file extension gfx The library displays contain graphic objects that you might find useful in your own application Many of the objects are preconfigured with animation For example see the Conveyor parts library You can m look at the objects and displays to get ideas for your own application m drag and drop or copy and paste objects from the libraries into your own displays For information about copying objects from a library into your graphic display see page 20 40 m use the objects as they are or change them to suit your needs m create your own libraries of objects m create libraries of displays that are translated into multiple languages m use libraries as displays in your application Working with Symbol Factory The Symbol Factory 1s a library of over 5 000 graphics for industrial automation Symbol Factory including pumps pipes valves tanks mixers motors ducts electrical symbols flow meters material
263. dd users to RSView 3 20 and earlier applications and assign security codes to them 1 Open the Runtime Security editor and click the RSView 3 20 and earlier tab 2 Add users and then assign macros passwords and security codes to them For details about using the Runtime Security editor see Help Changing RSView 3 20 and earlier user passwords For RSView 3 20 and earlier applications users cannot change passwords at run time You can only change passwords in the Runtime Security editor After changing passwords recreate the application and download the mer file Adding 3 20 and earlier users or groups from a Windows domain In RSView 3 20 and earlier applications there are two possible types of user accounts m users or groups from a Windows domain m users you create in FactoryTalk View You cannot use both user account types in the application at the same time Before you can make use of Windows user accounts in FactoryTalk View you must first create the user accounts in your Windows domain To do this in a Windows network domain your network must have at least one Windows server acting as a domain controller You cannot use Windows Workgroups When you use Windows users or groups the user password is the Windows domain password 11 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To add users from a Windows domain to FactoryTalk View 1 Open the Runtime Security editor and then click the RSView 3 20 and earlier tab
264. de an initial graphic display for logging in a graphic display that serves as a menu an overview of the plant a comprehensive display of each process being monitored process specific displays that provide more detail management summary displays trend displays of historical and current data The following illustration shows a sample display hierarchy Main Menu Alarm Process Management Summary Overview Summary Historical Data Trend Display Process Process Process Monitoring 1 Monitoring 2 Monitoring 3 Area 1 Area 2 Area 3 Trend Display Trend Display Trend Display 13 Setting up display navigation Testing display navigation Once you set up display navigation for your application test the application to make sure that navigation flows smoothly and that you have avoided problems like these m A graphic display contains no buttons for moving forward or back m When a graphic display closes no other display is open and there is no way to continue using the application For information about testing your application see page 14 2 Using graphic objects to navigate Use these graphic objects to navigate through the displays in the application Use this object To do this Goto display button Open the specified graphic display Goto configure mode button Stop the application and open the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box Return to display button Close the current display and open the pr
265. de your file is well formed If the XML code is not well formed Internet Explorer displays an error message E Importing and exporting alarm XML files Importing XML files You can import an alarm setup that has been created using an external programming tool or editor or you can import an XML file that you originally exported from FactoryTalk View and then modified When you import an alarm setup your existing alarm setup will be overwritten Back up your application first using the Application Manager tool Or you can save a copy of your existing alarm setup by exporting it to an XML file before you import the new one If the application is a Compact Machine Edtion application only the number of alarms allowed by the Compact application limits will be imported Error log file If errors occur during importing the errors are logged to a text file The file opens automatically when importing is finished The last paragraph of the file lists the location of the file Importing alarm XML files To import alarm information from an XML file 1 Inthe Explorer window right click the Alarm Setup editor 2 Click Import and Export The Alarm Import Export Wizard opens 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard For more information about using the Alarm Import Export Wizard see Help Alarm setup XML file structure The alarm setup XML file is a FactoryTalk View XML document that describes the alarm setup for an application Th
266. decimal is 4 or less the value is rounded down For example 8 495 is rounded to 8 m Ifthe number after the decimal is 6 or more the value is rounded up For example 8 6 is rounded to 9 m Ifthe number after the decimal is 5 the value is rounded using a banker s algorithm to average out the rounding over time m Ifthe number before the decimal is 0 the value is rounded down For example 10 5 1s rounded to 10 m Ifthe number before the decimal is an odd number the value is rounded up For example 11 5 1s rounded to 12 m Ifthe number before the decimal is an even number the value is rounded down For example 12 5 is rounded to 12 Floating point values are rounded to a maximum of six digits Therefore using a floating point data type and adding to it a value that exceeds the six significant digits will result in a rounding error For example adding any number to 999 999 will result in a rounding error 7 Using HMI tags This rounding method is also used for numeric input enable buttons that use the implicit decimal position if an integer tag 1s assigned to the button s Value connection For more information about the numeric input enable button see page 21 30 Using the Tags editor The Tags editor has these parts form area query box folder hierarchy and spreadsheet area Tags Pumphouse Tag Type Biel Es Mame Alarm_tags Air dryer _on off Close pee Description eecr
267. dee oie st eeadedessergeue ees 23 4 Using tag names and tag placeholders 0 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 23 5 Using tag placeholders instead of tag names 0000s 23 5 CONS IAMIS 64 te eee orca sa eb cara E bore Sane wees new ee 23 6 AtithiientC operator 4 4 4 o4044 Son ees ives Seaeee eee i eaadeedsekeuesec 23 6 BUMS OPEIS 2644 44 e535 eke heeded Heder s eee beeede Pek eee ees 23 7 Relational operato S 24 6 4 0222645444cc4ceeseei ate ee sss 23 7 How string operands are evaluated 1 0 0 0 cee 23 7 Logical opcia i edseece eee dee chad titer gp iner i bade tee eri 23 7 Biwi ODElAlOls 2 4 54 44 25 ste bk cae eStae oe sie e bes he booker erral 23 8 Using the left shift operator 0 eens 23 9 Evaluation order of operators 0 eee eens 23 10 Mathematical TUNCHONS J gene acid Gk Roe HEAR eee bb ak Powe howe aek 23 13 Secur iy MOCOS k 2 5452 u 4 ve Seed dae eebws es sd he Chee ee ee eee ets 23 14 Language MOCHON 2 264 oe ease deaw wands ca A a a weed oes 23 14 NAIM CUSCISG 2 eA hac etn oe ore bas Sea oe eae ieee eA eae Beh aay 23 16 INGS GCI 1NCHHCISC 4 000 it oh hraa Cased eden oS ee ees eae ee Be 23 17 Using Write EXPreSSIONS i 0494 0 04 exeieae sede sees bod eeceedscadedde ds 23 18 Using embedded variables About embedded variables 0 0 ccc eee e eee nnes 24 1 Where you can create embedded variables 0 0000 cc cee 24 2 Creating embedded variables 0 0 0 cee eens 24 2 Em
268. describes m the types of expression components m using the Expression editor m which editors use expressions m formatting expressions m using tag names and tag placeholders with expressions m using constants m using operators m using math security and language functions m using if then else logic in expressions m the evaluation order of operators m using write expressions About expressions Sometimes the data you gather from devices is meaningful only when you compare it to other values combine it with other values m create a cause effect relationship with other values Expressions allow you to create mathematical or logical combinations of data that return more meaningful values Depending on the components used in the expression the value returned can be in the form of a numeric value a true false value or a text string Expressions that result in floating point values If an expression results in a floating point value but an integer value is required the floating point value is rounded For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 23 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 2 Expression components Expressions can be built from m tag values m tag placeholders m constants m arithmetic relational logical and bitwise operators mathematical and security functions m if then else logic Tags arithmetic operators bitwise operators and mathematical functions s
269. device tags For device tags you must provide the address and path to the OPC server that is connected to the data source For example the OPC server could be connected to a device such as a programmable controller The syntax for OPC tag addresses 1s AccessPath Address or AccessPath Address FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE where indicates that the address resides in a data server in the application The two colons are necessary when the address contains a colon for example N7 0 The square brackets are part of the syntax They do not indicate optional parameters The access path is one of the following For communications with an RSLinx Enterprise data server the access path is the name of the device shortcut in RSLinx Enterprise For communications with an RSLinx Classic OPC server the access path is the name of an OPC topic in RSLinx Classic For communications with other OPC servers the access path might be optional For information about the syntax for the access path see your OPC server documentation Example Logix5000 addressing We recommend that you use the Tag Browser to select OPC items When you use the Tag Browser the correct syntax and data types are selected automatically However if you want to define tags before setting up communications you can type the address manually as shown in this example If you type the address manually be sure to select the data type for
270. dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and the macro to run when the button is pressed m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button m Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 56 21 Setting up graphic objects Setting up time and date displays A time and date display shows the current time and date in a graphic display To set up a time and date display 1 Double click the time and date display General Common Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color ja BB Back color Back style Pattern style oO Border color Soid tts None C Pattern color _ Fore color l Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial fic Bl z uj cece CEC M word wrap eee Time and date format 9 3 2002 8 38 50 AM Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the time and date display looks like at run time Inthe Common tab specify the time and date display s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 57 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 58 Setting up print alarm
271. diting device short cuts looking up contact information for technical support setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics at run time setting up serial ports for KEPServerEnterprise setting up RSLinx Enterprise communication drivers specifying the printers to use at run time specifying startup options for FactoryTalk View ME Station deleting log files on the run time computer specifying the time date and number formats to use at run time using the DeskLock tool Summary of steps Follow these steps to install the necessary hardware and software on the run time computer transfer your Windows 7 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 application to the run time computer set up options in FactoryTalk View ME Station For information about installing FactoryTalk View ME Station see the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Installation Guide 15 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 15 2 Installing hardware and software on the run time computer l If you will be printing displays alarms or diagnostics messages set up printer connections on the run time computer For more information see page 15 10 If you are using RSLinx Enterprise set up communications as described in Chapter 5 If you are using RSLinx Classic as the OPC server on the run time computer install RSLinx Classic on the run time computer If you are using R
272. does not affect the position of your objects Make the grid passive to position an element between the grid lines Make the grid active and the next object you draw or place is automatically aligned with the grid Making the grid active does not affect the placement of existing objects The grid is visible during application development only It is not visible at run time 19 e Using graphic displays To set up the grid 1 On the View menu click Grid Settings or right click an empty area of the display and then click Grid Settings Grid Settings Check this box to make Attributes Spacing the grid visible OF Show Grid Check this box to make gt I Snap To Grid Horizontal x 10 the grid active T t E tid Colo u Help Cancel Select a color for the Set the spacing of the grid grid points points in pixels 2 Specify the color and spacing of the grid points 3 To turn on the grid click Show Grid When the Grid Settings dialog box is not open you can turn the grid on by clicking Show Grid on the View menu 4 To make the grid active click Snap To Grid When the Grid Settings dialog box is not open you can make the grid active by clicking Snap On on the View menu 5 Click OK To make the grid passive m Inthe Grid Settings dialog box clear the Snap To Grid check box or on the View menu click Snap On to toggle the option off There is no check mark beside the menu item when it is turned o
273. e For example you can export an application s alarm setup information import the setup to another FactoryTalk View application and then modify it in the new application to suit your requirements Or you can modify the file before importing it into the new application You can use the Alarm Import Export Wizard to import alarm setup information that has been created using an external programming tool or editor or you can import a FactoryTalk View XML file For more information about importing and exporting alarm setup files see Appendix E How alarms work This section provides an overview of the key components of your application s alarm system and describes how the different parts work together 9 Setting up alarms Alarm triggers and trigger values You specify the tags and expressions also known as connections to monitor for alarm conditions by creating an alarm trigger for each connection Each alarm trigger can generate one or more alarm messages associated with different trigger connection values For each alarm trigger you specify the trigger values that will generate alarm messages and create the messages to display for the trigger values The trigger value can be a non zero integer value or a bit position depending on which trigger data type you assign For more information about trigger data types see page 9 11 Filtering alarm triggers in multiple languages FactoryTalk View 5 00 and later supports a
274. e default language The default language is also used for RSView Machine Edition 4 00 applications When you open or import the application into FactoryTalk View 5 00 or later the application s alarm information and local messages are associated with the language that you select to be the default language For example if you open an RSView Machine Edition 4 00 application that contains local messages and you select French for the default language the local messages will be treated as if they are French when you export the application s strings for translation That is they will appear in the French language column You can add other languages for these messages as described in this chapter When you create a new application the language you specify for the application is the default language You can change the default language at any time The default language can be any of the languages in the application You can display undefined strings in the default language during application development If you do not select this option undefined strings are displayed as a question mark character If you select this option but do not include the default language with the run time application undefined strings are displayed as a question mark character at run time Alarm trigger labels are displayed in the Trigger Label Selector list using the default language If you change the default language you must re specify the trigg
275. e from tags or expressions or constant decimal point settings and display settings In the Timing tab set up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key These settings do not apply when you ramp values For information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 12 In the Common tab specify the object s spacial properties name and visibility In the Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the numeric input cursor point exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 21 Setting up graphic objects For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up string displays Use the string display object to show the operator messages from the data source For example you might set up the data source to generate strings that report on the state of a process or operation or that provide instructions about what the operator needs to do next At run time the display shows the operator the string value of the Value connection at the data source How values are displayed m Ifthe Value connection is unassigned the string display is blank m FactoryTalk View displays the number of characters bytes specified for the tag assigned to the Value connection To set up a string display 1 Double click the string display String Display Properties Ea General Common Connections Appearance Border style Border w
276. e the asterisk will be displayed as the last character at the right end of the string Examples String embedded variable syntax To display the current value of a string tag called Blower_ status with a fixed length of 20 characters you would type this S 20 Blower_status To display the literal string Oven temperature type this LS 20 Oven temperature To display the literal string 36 5 type this LS 3 36 5 To assign the tag placeholder 1 without a fixed string length type this S 0 1 To display the value of the string tag Conveyor message with a fixed length of 40 displaying the right most characters with an asterisk to indicate if the message is truncated type this S 40 Conveyor message SHOWSTAR 24 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 24 6 Time and date embedded variable syntax Use time and date embedded variables to insert the current time or date into captions title bars and messages Time and date embedded variables use this syntax Time_date_format where Time_date_format uses one of these character sequences These characters Specify this format SD Short date LD Long date SDT Short date and time LDT Long date and time T Time TSD Time and short date TLD Time and long date Example Time and date embedded variable syntax To display the time followed by the short date you would type this TSD A space is placed between the time a
277. e Fore color to white a Fore color other than white G 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE _ Aprenbox H Importing and exporting graphics XML files This appendix describes m creating graphics XML files m exporting editing and importing XML files m the graphics XML file structure About XML XML is the Extensible Markup Language used to create documents with structured text information It has a standardized format and structure You can use XML to edit the elements and attributes needed to create an alarm setup file or to modify graphic displays and global displays For information about working with alarm XML files see Appendix E Sometimes editing your display information in an XML file is quicker than working in FactoryTalk View For example if you have a list of 100 local messages to set up for a graphic display you might prefer to enter all the information in a text editor and then import the display information into FactoryTalk View For more information about XML see the World Wide Web Consortium s web page about XML at http www w3 org XML Creating graphics XML files by exporting The quickest way to create an XML file for your application s graphic displays is to export the data from FactoryTalk View You can then open the XML file in Notepad make your changes and import the file back into FactoryTalk View The strings for the application s current language are exported to th
278. e General tab assign tags or expressions to the Ramp and Limit connections Ramp buttons have no Indicator connection For information about assigning tags see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up numeric displays Use the numeric display object to show the operator numeric information from the data source For example you might use a numeric display to show the current temperature of an oven How values are displayed The numeric display shows the value of the Value connection at the data source The value shown depends on whether the Value connection value is a floating point number or an integer Integer values are displayed as is Floating point values are rounded to fit the display The decimal places option also affects how floating point numbers are displayed For example if the numeric display is set up to show 6 digits with one decimal place 1234 56 is rounded to 1234 6 1234 44 is rounded to 1234 4 The decimal counts as one of the digits For more information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 Problems with displaying values m Ifthe Value connection is unassigned the numeric display is filled with asterisks m If the integer portion of the value including the decimal point and minus sign contains more digits than specified for the display the numeric display is filled with asterisks m Ifthe numeric display is sized so that the v
279. e Help To specify the COM port to use for serial communications 1 In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Terminal Settings 2 Double click Networks and Communications 3 Double click KEPServer Serial Port ID s 15 Running applications on a personal computer Kepware Serial Port ID s SERIAL15 v Communication port o aaaeeeaeo Edit Port Close F1 F8 It 4 Inthe Kepware Serial Port ID s dialog box click the serial port ID you specified when you set up the KEPServerEnterprise channel 5 Click Edit Port 6 In the Communication Ports dialog box click the COM port to use for KEPServerEnterprise communications Setting up RSLinx Enterprise communication drivers Use RSLinx Enterprise to set up communication drivers for your run time application You can set up the drivers directly in RSLinx Enterprise or open RSLinx Enterprise by using the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box To set up the RSLinx Enterprise communication driver to use at run time 1 In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Terminal Settings 2 Double click Networks and Communications 3 Double click RSLinx Enterprise Communications 15 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 15 10 RSLinx Enterprise Configuration Virtual Backplane lt No Devices gt Ethernet a Edit Device Edit Driver Restore Default Close Fl F2 F3 i 4 To edit a driver select it an
280. e XML file To export strings for another language reopen the application in the new language and repeat the XML export To export graphic display information to an XML file 1 Inthe Explorer window right click the Displays editor or the Global Objects editor 2 Click Import and Export H 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE H 2 The Graphics Import Export Wizard opens 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard For information about using the Graphics Import Export Wizard see Help FactoryTalk View creates XML files for the selected graphic displays in the location you specify FactoryTalk View also creates a file called BatchImport Application name xml in the same location You can use this file to import multiple displays at the same time To import a different set of displays than you exported edit the list of display names in the BatchImport_ Application name xml file Editing XML files We recommend that you use Notepad to edit your XML files If you do not want to change a property you don t need to include it in the XML file When you import the file if you select the option Create new objects in the display properties that are not listed in the file are set to their default values If you select the option Update existing objects on the display only properties that are listed in the file are updated with imported information If you include attributes for an object whose name does not
281. e amount specified in the right operand The bit on the right disappears Either a 0 or a 1 is shifted in on the left depending on whether the left most bit is a O or a 1 and whether the operand consists of a signed or unsigned data type For signed data types if the left most bit is 0 a 0 is shifted in If the left most bit is 1 a 1 is shifted in In other words the sign of the number is preserved For unsigned data types a 0 is always shifted in Shifts the bits within an integer or tag to the left Shifts the bits within the left operand by the amount specified in the right operand The bit on the left disappears and 0 always shifts in on the right See Using the left shift operator later in this chapter Returns one s complement that is it toggles the bits within an integer or tag Reverses every bit within the number so every 1 bit becomes a 0 and vice versa Using the left shift operator If the left bit is a 1 an overflow occurs and an error message is generated To prevent this use the bitwise AND operator with the left shift operator in an expression For example dev lt lt 1 amp 65535 where dev is a tag whose value is being shifted left and 65535 is 1111 1111 1111 1111 in binary form 23 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 10 Examples Bitwise operators For these examples tag 5 binary 0000 0000 0000 0101 and tag2 2 binary 0000 0000 0000 0010
282. e development computer workstation or a specific device and then click Security 2 Specify which groups and users have access to the item and what actions they can perform For details see Help Specifying which users can back up and restore FactoryTalk Directory and FactoryTalk View applications You can allow users or groups of users to back up and restore the contents of the local FactoryTalk Directory including applications users groups and all security settings Users must have permission to back up and restore FactoryTalk Directory to use the Application Manager tool to back up and restore applications For information about using the Application Manager see page 4 10 To specify which users can back up and restore FactoryTalk Directory and FactoryTalk View applications 1 Inthe System Policies folder double click User Rights Assignment 2 Set permissions for users For details see Help Specifying activities to track for audit purposes You can keep an audit trail of activities such as changing the setup of the FactoryTalk Directory and whether security access is denied or granted to users To specify which activities to track for audit purposes 1 Inthe System Policies folder double click Audit Policy 2 Set up audit policies For details see Help Specifying policies for passwords accounts and FactoryTalk sign on You can use the FactoryTalk Directory Security Policy to specify how to manage passwords and
283. e eee ees 9 26 The ALARM MULTI LINE display 0 0 0 0 0 cc ccc ee eee 9 27 The STATUS display 220442 0024464442424w 53 8a die decee bus Gee d4e5 9 28 The HISTORY display 2 2 0 0 cc eee 9 29 Using displays from the library in your application 004 9 30 Creating your own alarm display 0 c ccc eee 9 31 Opening and closing the alarm display 0000s 9 31 Openime ihe display 22324 ees eke eee eeeeie tnt Gh snee be oedeee tees 9 31 Closing the display ssracssrrririrkeort s raire iieri upa ar 9 31 How the alarm list graphic object works 0 0 0 0 0000 eee 9 32 Whatisdispliyed ovou tae D3ds wands oeeete hese hnneeesnesae ee ass 9 32 How the Tist SCIONS 05 54 445244b Aaa cose goanhd dae aaeoeoek tak be ees 9 33 How the alarm banner graphic object works 0000 c cece eee 9 33 Wat 18 displayed is deer cc cadae ba eede det eedee b Roadie Neie 9 34 How the alarm status list graphic object works 00 000 9 34 What is displayed g1 lt lt eicecsn ca ssd inke irine i doa dates teeeets 9 35 What happens when the display is opened n n 0 0 eee eee 9 35 Using buttons with the alarm history and alarm objects 9 36 Alara DUNOIS a eerease sree ea ww E Ra eee A 9 36 Linking buttons to objects n a annn eee eee 9 37 Key DUE ONS esea e are a E ere oe be E Aa a sees EA 9 38 Using alarm buttons to acknowledge silence clear and delete alarms
284. e hold time While the hold time is in effect the alarm status cannot be reset again The status of alarms keeps updating during the hold time How the Remote Status Reset connection works When this connection changes to a new non zero value the status of all alarms is reset as described on page 9 9 Alarms can be reset using other methods regardless of this connection s value Set up the data source to send a new non zero value to the Remote Status Reset connection each time you want a remote resetting of alarm status to take place How the Close Display connection works When the application starts this connection has a value of 0 If the alarm display assigned in the Alarm Setup editor closes this connection is set to 1 for the hold time At the end of the hold time the connection 1s reset to 0 If subsequent alarms are generated the alarm display opens again regardless of the Close Display connection value or hold time status How the Remote Close Display connection works When this connection changes to a new non zero value the alarm display closes The alarm display can be closed using other methods regardless of this connection s value Set up the data source to send a new non zero value to the Remote Close Display connection each time you want a remote closing of the alarm display to take place The ALARM display When you create an application it comes with a graphic display called ALARM The ALARM displ
285. e in the list You can set up the key buttons to work only with the specified diagnostics list or to work with whichever object is selected in the graphic display For information about linking buttons to objects see page 21 9 For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 For information about setting up specific buttons see Help 10 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 10 14 44 Setting up security This chapter describes using FactoryTalk Security steps for setting up security without FactoryTalk Security using the Runtime Security editor how user accounts and security codes work assigning security to graphic displays providing a way for users to log in and log out preventing unauthorized users from stopping the application setting up FactoryTalk Security in FactoryTalk View Studio including m adding FactoryTalk Security user groups and users and setting up passwords m assigning user access to the computer s FactoryTalk Directory FactoryTalk View Machine Edition uses the local FactoryTalk Directory m setting up security access to the application action groups policies networks and devices user groups users and other resources m setting up policies for passwords and user accounts for backing up and restoring FactoryTalk Directory and for tracking activities for audit purposes a sample startup display that uses all the FactoryTalk View security feature
286. e indicators 2 0 0 eee eee 21 39 Setung Up SVMDOlS c4 inte oreo dS iadt rre iaae k aca DENA ne eed 21 41 Setting p list indicatOrS is oo eee nS cen aOR Ee iners k bedeii aprii bakes 21 42 How to use bar graphs gauges and scales 0 0 c cece eee eee 21 44 Bar graphs make it easy to compare values 0 0 0 e eee eee 21 44 Thresholds change a bar graph s fill color 1 0 0 0 0 0008 21 44 Use bar graphs with scales to show limits 0 00 00 eee 21 44 Gauges make it easy to see limits 0 ce eee 21 45 Thresholds change a gauge s fill color 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 21 45 Petting up Dar graphs s ces4 0 saa ddainn Ganda a ee dee 38 ox o a a a PhS 21 46 Pete up CAVES ei ee era oad 2 eee ea bad eee ee eee oeee eee es 21 47 SENE UP Scales ea cau suse ct ade ee dor aaa 4 aah oe a 21 48 Setting up control list selectors 2 0 0 0 cee eens 21 49 Using buttons with the control list selector 000 0000 21 49 How Enter key handshaking works 0 c cee eens 21 49 Setting up piloted control list selectors 0 0 21 51 xvii FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE xviii 22 Choosing between piloted control list selectors and control list selectors 21 51 How piloted control list selectors work at run time 4 21 51 Setting up local message displays annann ccc eee eee 21 54 Setting up macro buttons
287. e information see page A 9 Set up graphic object features that don t convert directly For more information see page A 12 Check each expression you used in PanelBuilder 1400e For more information see page A 13 If you are going to use a printer at run time set it up for Ethernet or USB printing Adjust the printer settings on the PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal For information about setting up printers on the terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual Converting PanelBuilder 1400e application files Follow these steps to convert a PanelBuilder 1400e application file with the extension pvc to an FactoryTalk View application file with the extension med The original PanelBuilder 1400e application file is not modified by the conversion A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications For information about converting RIO applications see page A 10 Steps to take in PanelBuilder 1400e before you convert the application 1 Delete the Pass Through file assignment FactoryTalk View Studio does not support pass through file transfers 2 Make sure the block transfer file numbers are sequential without gaps If necessary renumber the block transfer file numbers so there are no missing numbers Tag addresses in the application will change automatically to match the new number 3 Save the application You can convert the PanelBuilder 1400e application when you open FactoryTalk View Studio o
288. e is passed to the graphic display or alarm system Browsing for tags You don t have to remember the path and name of a tag to use it in your application Whenever you need to use a tag you can open the Tag Browser and select the tag to use To open the Tag Browser In most editors click the Browse button in the Tags column In the Expression editor position the cursor where you want to insert a tag name and then click Tags In the Parameters editor double click where you want to insert a tag name FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 6 6 Using the Tag Browser amp Tag Browser Select Tag Folders Contents of Alarm _tags Root folder Pumphouse ir _dryer_on off EJ Channelkep Eutane_flow Bt a x Butane_mode aie a amp Compressor _on oti p Folders pane i 5 ei amp Diesel blendom TASE 2 Diesel_blend_pa ChannelSiemens B n H A _Systern A Diesel blend_ per 9 DeviceSiemens A Isobutane How 5 69 PLCS j lzobutane_mode Tags pane ao ae Ts ee iE ogas blend_on 4 3 Jae amp Mogas_blend_pa Mogas_blend_pe amp Propane_flow Propane_mode RWP _analpzer_o For a better view of the folders or tags drag this bar to the left or the right Taa flier lt None gt Selected Tag Home area i me tee In the Tag Browser you can m select a single tag or multiple tags The ability to select multiple tags is available in
289. e latched push button first opens if the Value connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up To set up a latched push button Double click the latched push button Latched Push Button Properties ES General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width 4 M Border uses back color im Highlight color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle Button settings Latch reset type Non zero Value Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo jo Other MV Audio Cancel Help 21 Setting up graphic objects In the button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and how to unlatch it m Inthe States tab specify what the button does when it is latched and unlatched For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help When you are finished click OK 21 23 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 24 Setting up multistate push buttons The multistate push button displays and allows an operator to cycle through multiple opti
290. e list The highlight bar or cursor moves up to the next unacknowledged alarm unless it is already on the top unacknowledged alarm m Ifthe highlight bar or cursor is on an acknowledged alarm when the operator presses the acknowledge alarm button the button press is ignored m The alarm is removed from the alarm banner Acknowledging all alarms When the operator presses an acknowledge all alarms button all unacknowledged alarms in the system or optionally for a specific alarm trigger are acknowledged This is what happens when the alarms are acknowledged m For each alarm trigger to which an Acknowledge all value is assigned the specified Acknowledge all value is sent to the trigger s Ack connection The value is held as long as the operator presses the button or for the hold time whichever is longer Then the connection s value is reset to 0 If the Acknowledge all value is not assigned for a trigger no value is sent to the trigger s Ack connection If the hold time for any alarm is still in effect and the operator presses acknowledge all alarms the button press is ignored m Ifthe alarm list is set up to display unacknowledged alarms only all acknowledged alarms are removed from the list m The alarm banner is cleared Silencing alarms When the operator presses the silence alarms button any audible signal triggered by an alarm is silenced and the Silence connection is set to 1 for the hold
291. e message audience SQL SMALLINT or l 0 for Operator SQL TEGER 1 for Engineer 2 for Developer 3 for Secure Severity A number representing the severity of the SQL _ SMALLINT or l diagnostics message SQL INTEGER 0 for Error 1 for Warning 2 for Information 3 for Audit Area The FactoryTalk path to the area in which the SQL VARCHAR or 80 activity occurred Used for FactoryTalk View Site SQL CHAR Edition only Location The name of the computer where the message was SQL VARCHAR or 15 generated SQL CHAR D 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE This column Contains SQL data type Length UserID The name of the user including domain name if SQL VARCHAR or 38 there is one that initiated the action that caused the SQL CHAR diagnostics message If the diagnostics message was caused by an HMI server the user column contains System UserFullName The full name of the user that was logged in when SQL VARCHAR or 255 the activity occurred SQL CHAR Provider The name of the product that generated the message SQL VARCHAR or 20 SQL CHAR D 2 _ Aprenbox E Importing and exporting alarm XML files This appendix describes m creating alarm XML files m exporting editing and importing XML files m the alarm XML file structure About XML XML is the Extensible Markup Language used to create documents with structured text information It has a standardized format and structure You can use XML to edit t
292. e of contents and the index in the User s Guide and Help You can also perform a full text search on both the Help and the User s Guide For information about using Help see Chapter 5 Getting the information you need in the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Installation Guide For information about performing searches on the User s Guide see Adobe Reader Help Information on the Internet If you can t find the answer to your question or problem in the User s Guide or Help you can find information on the World Wide Web You can connect to the Rockwell Automation web site from within FactoryTalk View Studio To do so you must have a web browser installed on your computer and you must have an active Internet connection To connect to web sites from FactoryTalk View Studio m On the Help menu select Rockwell Automation on the Web and then click the name of the web page you want to view The Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase The Knowledgebase web page leads to a comprehensive searchable database of support information for all Rockwell Automation products PREFACE Contacting Rockwell Automation Technical Support If you can t find the answer to your question using any of the resources suggested above contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support at Telephone 440 646 3434 World Wide Web http www rockwellautomation com support Support staff are available Monday to Friday from 8 AM to 7 PM Eastern
293. e root element of the XML document is called alarms It represents the Alarm Setup editor An XML document can contain only one root element All other elements in the document must be contained or nested within the root element In an XML document the start of an element is marked lt element name gt The end is marked lt element name gt If the element contains no subelements the end can be marked gt For example lt trigger id T1 type value ack all value 0 gt The syntax for specifying an attribute for an element is attribute value The attribute value must be enclosed in single or double quotes FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Here is a sample structure for an alarm XML document Element lt alarms gt lt alarm gt lt triggers gt lt trigger id T1 gt lt trigger id T2 gt lt triggers gt lt messages gt lt message id M1 gt lt message id M2 gt lt messages gt lt alarm gt lt alarms gt Description Root element Contains attributes from the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor as well as the triggers and messages elements Contains a trigger element for each trigger in the Triggers tab of the Alarm Setup editor Contains attributes for the first alarm trigger Contains attributes for the second alarm trigger Indicates the end of the triggers element Contains a message element for each message i
294. e software at anytime without prior notice It is your responsibility to obtain the most current information available from Rockwell when installing or using this product Modified June 2 2011 5 01 28 Contents Preface About the documentation aannaaien eee eee eens P 1 Finding the information you need 0 0 0 eee es P 2 Try the User s Guide and Help first 0 00 P 2 Information on the Internet 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee P 2 Contacting Rockwell Automation Technical Support P 3 1 Getting Started The parts of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition 0 0000 l 1 Additional soWai Oese 4 5 n4 nekane seinra e PAs be eee a a A as l 1 FactoryTalk Administration Console n on 000 0 l 1 The FactoryTalk View Machine Edition tools a an nnnnaaaa eee eee 1 2 FactoryTalk View Studio tools 0 0 0 ee eens 1 2 Factory Laue tO0lS 2 222 s lt tteknepetadedetnda ee edt eures EGN en heres 1 3 FactoryTalk Activation Manager 0000 ccc eee teens 1 3 2 Exploring FactoryTalk View Studio Starting and exiting FactoryTalk View Studio 0 0 0 0 cee 2 1 Starting FactoryTalk View Studio 0 cee 2 1 Exiting FactoryTalk View Studio 0 0 0 cee 2 1 Opening sample applications 0 0 0 0 0 eee teens 2 2 Exploring the FactoryTalk View Studio main window 00005 2 4 Toemen DIr a4 6 5 5 3 5 dah irinin a a Aa a Gun arama es a 2 4 TC T
295. e strings FactoryTalk View analyzes the text and indicates repeated instances of the same string using a reference number This way the translator only needs to translate the text once When you import the translated strings from the spreadsheet into the application FactoryTalk View copies the translated string into all the graphic objects that used the string originally Excel spreadsheet file name format The format for the exported spreadsheet file name is lt ApplicationName gt _ lt ExportVersion gt xls where a lt ApplicationName gt is the name of the application m lt ExportVersion gt is an incremental number assigned to each successful export operation For details about the schema of exported spreadsheet files see page 12 9 For a list of Windows languages and the corresponding RFC1766 names see page F 1 12 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 12 8 Exported language string file locations Exported language files are saved at this default location C Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise Strings Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or C Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise Strings Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 You can specify another location if desired To export application text 1 On the Tools menu click Languages 2 Inthe Language Configuration dialog box select the application language for which to export
296. e the group Arranging objects You can arrange objects or groups of objects in a number of ways You can layer objects by moving them in front of or behind other objects align objects with each other and with the grid space objects horizontally or vertically flip drawing objects horizontally or vertically rotate drawing objects lock objects into position 20 47 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE coy Bring to Front tool a Send to Back tool 20 48 Layering objects You can layer objects or groups of objects on top of each other Objects are layered in the order they are created with the most recently created object on top Change the layer order with Send to Back and Bring to Front Send to Back moves the selected object to the bottom layer Bring to Front moves the selected object to the top layer To bring an object to the front 1 Select the object To select an object that s behind another object place your pointer on the front object click once pause and then click again Do not double click and do not move the mouse You can also select a concealed object easily by clicking the object in the Object Explorer 2 On the Arrange menu click Bring to Front or click the Bring to Front tool Y T Select the object from behind Bring the object to front To send an object to the back 1 Select an object 2 On the Arrange menu click Send to Back or click the Send to
297. e the sizes of the default displays Graphic Display Width in pixels Height in pixels DIAGNOSTICS 640 160 ALARM 640 210 INFORMATION 640 80 If your project window size is smaller than the default message display sizes you can resize the default displays or use your own displays instead 4 14 4 Working with applications Compact Machine Edition application Applcations intended for Panel View Plus Compact terminals have certain restrictions such as the number of displays and alarm messages supported Whether an application will be developed as a Compact Machine Edition application is specified when the application is first created You can change that choice here at any time Title bar If you select this option a title bar is used for all Replace graphic displays For information about graphic display types see page 19 12 If desired you can also use a Control box Minimize button and Close button on the title bar The Close button appears only if you select the Control box in the Project Settings editor P Refinery A Pumphouse Login ME x Title Graphic display name Minimize button Control box Close button If you plan to set up security for your application and want to prevent unauthorized users from stopping the application do not use a title bar For information about setting up security see Chapter 11 Changing the Title bar or Border setting If you change the Title bar or Border setting
298. e values you set up m the Trigger type is set to LSB and the position of the least significant bit set in the Value connection does not match one of the state values you set up m the Trigger type is set to Value and an array tag has been assigned to the object s Value connection 21 39 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 40 To set up a multistate indicator 1 Double click the multistate indicator Multistate Indicator Properties Ea General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width Raisedinset fe v Border uses back color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle State settings Number of states Trigger type 4 M Value X OK Cancel Help o 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the indicator looks like and the number of states for the indicator m Inthe States tab specify how the indicator s appearance changes when its tag or expression s value changes For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 Inthe Common tab specify the indicator s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression from which the indicator receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 Setting up graph
299. eate an enter button on the same display as the control list selector and select the Write on enter option The operator can scroll through the control list selector using m key button graphic objects These are graphic objects that duplicate the functions of keyboard keys m the arrow keys and Enter key on a terminal s keypad m the arrow keys and Enter key on a keyboard Using buttons with the control list selector The operator presses the buttons to scroll up or down the list or to make selections from the list The buttons can be set up to work with the control list selector that has input focus or you can link the buttons to a specific control list selector Use this button To do this Backspace Move the cursor back to the highlighted item in the list End Move to the bottom item in the list Enter Select the item the cursor is pointing to Home Move to the top item in the list Move down Move down one item in the list Move up Move up one item in the list Page down Move down one page in the list Page up Move up one page in the list How Enter key handshaking works When the operator selects a state in the control list selector and presses an enter button or Enter key the highlighted state s value is written to the programmable controller or device 21 49 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 50 You can use Enter key handshaking to hold the value of the tag at the pro
300. eck box Alarm list graphic object with Use alarm colors turned off for one or more alarm conditions For all alarm conditions that you are displaying select the Use alarm colors check box Alarm list graphic object with the Acknowledged symbol column turned off Select the Display column check box for the Acknowledged symbol column Alarm list graphic object with an Acknowledged symbol other than Change the Acknowledged symbol to Alarm list graphic object with the Active symbol column displayed Clear the Display column check box for the Active symbol column Alarm list graphic object with tags or expressions assigned to one or more connections Clear the tags or expressions assigned to the connections Alarm list graphic object with Selected alarm indicator set to Cursor Change the Selected alarm indicator to Highlight bar Alarm list graphic object with Lines per alarm set to gt 1 Change the Lines per alarm to 1 Alarm banner graphic object with Use alarm colors selected Clear the Use alarm colors check box G Features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View To remove or replace this feature Do this Alarm status list graphic object with Clear the Use alarm colors check box Use alarm colors selected Alarm status list graphic object with Change the Lines per alarm to 1 Lines per alarm set to gt 1 Alarm status list graphic object with Change th
301. ectangle 2 Click the Rounded Rectangle tool or right click the object and then click Edit A handle appears inside the rounded rectangle 3 Click the handle and drag inward to increase roundedness or outward to decrease roundedness Deleting objects If you accidentally delete an object use the Undo tool to restore it To delete objects 1 Select one or more objects 2 On the Edit menu click Delete or press Delete on the keyboard my Group tool LH Ungroup tool 20 Using graphic objects To delete all the objects in the display m On the Edit menu click Clear All Working with groups of objects Grouping and ungrouping objects Grouping combines several objects into a single object so you can manipulate them as a single object Grouping is useful for keeping objects in the same position relative to each other You can cut copy and paste groups arrange the group as a single object relative to other objects and apply the same properties to all the members of the group at once You can attach animation to a group and any animation attached to individual objects in the group remains active The group animation generally takes precedence over the animation of individual objects within the group For more information see page 22 16 Deleting a group deletes all individual objects in the group To group objects 1 Select all the objects you want grouped 2 On the Arrange menu click Group or on the Graphics t
302. ectangle but the actual size of the image is used rather than the size of the rectangle you drew 4 To change the image s attributes double click the image to open the Image Properties dialog box Panel tool 5 6 20 Using graphic objects Select image options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help Click OK to close the dialog box To add an image from Symbol Factory to a graphic object using the image browser l O St pe P aP 9 In the graphic display draw the graphic object you are going to import an image for The Image Browser will open In the Image Browser click Launch Library Symbol Factory will open as a new window Browse the Categories frame clicking on a category to see the symbols in the right frame Click on the graphic to select it for the Graphic Display Click Copy the Symbol Factory minimizes returning to the Image Browser Click the Paste from Library button A dialog box Image Name Entry will open Type in an unique name for the image then click the OK button The graphic will now be displayed in the Preview window The graphic has been added to the list in the Image Browser This also adds the image to the Images folder in the Explorer window Click OK to close the Image Browser The image will be in the Graphic Display Symbol Factory objects imported by the Image Browser will by saved in the Images folder as a bitmap Creating panels Pan
303. ection fore color Text Font Size fois 0 ef Other MV Key navigation Wrap around Cancel Help 21 Setting up graphic objects 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the alarm list looks like at run time whether the operator can navigate to the list using a keyboard and how scrolling works for the list In the Alarm tab specify the columns to include in the list the number of lines per alarm and the triggers to filter by if any In the Display tab specify the types of alarms to display in the list and the appearance of the different alarm conditions In the Common tab specify the alarm list s spacial properties name and visibility In the Connections tab specify the tags or expressions to use to control the type of alarms to display in the list The use of these connections is optional For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up alarm banners The alarm banner graphic object displays a single unacknowledged alarm message For example the banner could display a message that warns the operator that the pressure in a boiler is too high The ALARM display and the ALARM BANNER graphic library both contain an alarm banner object You can use the displays and objects as is customize them or create your own For more information about using al
304. ector startup create a macro to set the appropriate tag values for the objects connections For information about macros see Chapter 30 Assign the macro in the Startup editor For details see Help A 12 Unsupported feature in Graphic object FactoryTalk View A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications Notes Trend Blinking pens Date labels on the X Axis Background screen plotting The date is displayed in the title You can plot tag values in the background by assigning the tags to a data log model Tags set up for background screen plotting are automatically assigned to a data log model on conversion However data log models do not plot expression values Therefore expressions set up for background screen plotting are not converted For information about data logging see Chapter 26 All objects PanelBuilder 1400e object name Object names are replaced with the FactoryTalk View default object names The PanelBuilder 1400e object name is used for the object s description You can view and edit the name and description in the Property Panel For details see Help All objects Caption and image placement FactoryTalk View supports one three or nine positions for captions and images depending on the type of object On conversion captions and images are positioned using the closest match Therefore some captions might overlap images some captions might be truncated and some images mi
305. ecurity access to FactoryTalk Directory to the application and to networks and devices For information about setting up security see Chapter 11 An application consists of one or more data servers and an HMI project also known as an HMI server The data servers provide communications for the project The project consists of graphic displays alarm information user information and other settings This manual generally uses the term application to refer to both application level and project level procedures 2 Exploring FactoryTalk View Studio El lt 9 Local USPAZJFULKERD2 The top icon is FactoryTalk Local Directory This application contains two servers Ey sO Malthouse Clas 800x600 1 The application s HMI server contains iia Malthouse Cigs 8004600 editors for setting up your application fg B a System and the components you create Sie Project Settings Hga Auntime Security ae iG Diagnostics List Setup wl Global Connections ho Startup 5 ra HMI Tags Eunn Tags Click the symbol to close a folder 5 123 F en PoP o E Displays Click the symbol to see the list of i Ee Global Objects components for an editor a Symbol Factory i f Libraries ni F Images on Parameters 1 4 2 i Local Messages Components are listed below the ME E Z clockwise editor s icon when you open the folder opo J germ_runs load unload raise lower mun stop aoe Alarms H Information H E
306. ed and then imported back into the application These text strings allow language switching and are exported for translation m display titles for On Top displays defined in the Display Settings dialog box m text graphic objects m captions that you define for graphic objects including objects in global object displays m alarm local and information messages m alarm trigger labels m embedded time date and numeric variables Undefined strings are exported as undefined strings regardless of whether you select the option in the Language Configuration dialog box to display undefined strings using the default language That option is used only for displaying strings during application development and at run time It does not substitute the default language s strings for undefined strings in the exported file or spreadsheet Exporting text in Unicode format When you export text in Unicode format these text strings are also exported m text descriptions and error messages for the Change Password window These strings are exported if you use a password button in your application You can translate these strings but you cannot change their language dynamically at run time the way you can for graphic object strings For the Change Password window the run time application will use the strings that are in the application when the run time application is created For example if the current application language is French and you have impor
307. een security settings PanelBuilder screen security settings are not converted because FactoryTalk View uses a different method to assign security to graphic displays For information about setting up security in FactoryTalk View see Chapter 11 Power up options These PanelBuilder power up options are not imported into FactoryTalk View m Write Last Terminal State to Controller m Display Last User Screen Use Terminal Presets B 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Converting non RIO communications This section describes how communications that do not use Remote I O RIO are converted For information about converting RIO communications see page B 9 FactoryTalk View does not use nodes for communications Nodes are converted to RSLinx topics Topics are then converted into device shortcuts to run with RSLinx Enterprise You must have both RSLinx Classic and RSLinx Enterprise installed to make this two step conversion If you import an application multiple times delete the device shortcuts in RSLinx Enterprise before re importing Otherwise multiple unused topics will be created in RSLinx Enterprise For more information about setting up communications see Chapter 5 Tags for unsupported communication protocols Some communication protocols are not supported in FactoryTalk View For example DH communications that use the AutoMax node type are not supported FactoryTalk View does not support
308. efore recommend that you use return to display buttons in Replace displays only Example Navigating through displays This example uses the display hierarchy illustrated on page 13 2 and shows what happens as the operator navigates through the hierarchy The graphic displays are all Replace displays 1 Inthe Main Menu display the operator uses a display list selector to open the Process Overview display 2 Inthe Process Overview display the operator presses a goto display button to open the Process Monitoring 1 display 3 After viewing the state of the process the operator presses a return to display button to close the current display and reopen the Process Overview display 13 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 13 6 4 Inthe Process Overview display the operator presses a return to display button Which display opens The Process Monitoring 1 display because this was the previously opened display To return to the Main Menu display from the Process Overview display the operator would have to press a goto display button that is set up to open the Main Menu display Close display buttons When the operator presses a close display button at run time the graphic display that the button is on closes You can set up the button to write out a value when the display closes If the graphic display that is closing is a Replace display and the display change is controlled remotely the display does not close
309. elected in the Language Configuration dialog box 3 Click Import 4 Follow the instructions in the String Import Export Wizard For details about options in the String Import Export wizard click Help If you cancel the import before it is complete any text strings that were changed are not restored to their original values To restore the text that was originally in the application import the text from the backup file you created Problems importing You do not have to check every graphic display in your application to verify that text was imported correctly If errors occurred while importing text they are displayed automatically from a log file called ImportErrors txt in the following folder C Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise Strings Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or C Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise Strings Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 Each time errors occur while importing text into an application the ImportErrors txt file is overwritten If errors occurred while importing text or if the import was canceled a message appears in the Diagnostics List and in the FactoryTalk Diagnostics log file Canceling importing If some but not all of the text in an application seems to have been modified the import might have been canceled If you cancel the import before it is complete any text strings that were changed are not restored
310. elp In the Runtime Security editor assign login and logout macros and security codes to the users and groups For details about using the Runtime Security editor see Help 11 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To migrate RSView 3 20 and earlier users to FactoryTalk View 1 With the Runtime Security editor open and the ME Runtime 4 00 and later tab selected on the Setup menu click Migrate ME Runtime 3 20 and earlier accounts Users from the ME Runtime 3 20 and earlier tab are added to the FactoryTalk Security Users folder and to the ME Runtime 4 00 and later tab Users are not migrated if they already exist in the ME Runtime 4 00 and later account list 2 If desired edit the users security codes and login and logout macros 3 To edit the users passwords see page 11 18 Setting up users for 3 20 and earlier applications Runtime Security Condiments ME Runtime 4 00 and later ME Runtime 3 20 and earlier Use this tab to specify the accounts for Machine Edition Runtime MER versions 3 20 and earlier The accounts defined in thie tab are specific to this application Form area accent iD SUPERVIEDR Sariy Codes Close WMA hwo hw C hw OD Login Macro LOGIN L VEwMWE MG RH Accept Logout Macro BI fet hw KR hw L Discard Password Po i mo go g Help Spreadsheet area A Double click in the security code columns to toggle between Yes and No 11 Setting up security To a
311. elping to determine how many data elements to address to achieve the required number of bits To create an array tag specify how many elements to use beginning with the first element at the tag s address For example if you want to monitor 128 bit positions for an alarm trigger and you are using the Long Integer data type you would append the modifier 4 to the tag name because 4 x 32 128 For detailed information about tag syntax see page 9 16 You cannot use HMI tags for array tags You must use data server tags for array tags 9 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 16 Equivalent data types Different processors and OPC servers use different terminology for tag data types This section provides information about equivalent data types that you can use for array tags with the associated number of bits for each PLC and SLC tags When creating array tags you can use PLC and SLC tags with this data type Data type Number of bits Short Integer 16 Data server tags with the Short Integer data type are displayed in the Tag Browser with the Item Canonical Data Type of Integer To view a tag s Item Canonical Data Type m Inthe Tag Browser right click the tag and then click Properties Logix5000 tags When creating array tags you can use Logix5000 tags with these data types Data type Number of bits SINT 8 INT 16 DINT 32 Data server tags with the data types described in the previou
312. els support visibility animation only To create a panel l 2 Select the Panel tool Click the mouse where you want to position the panel and then drag to draw a rectangle the general size you want the panel to be To change how the panel looks double click the panel to open the Panel Properties dialog box Select panel options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 20 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Arc tool 20 16 5 To close the dialog box click OK Creating arcs and wedges Arcs and wedges are drawn in two steps first you create an ellipse or circle and then you reshape it into the segment you want A Zx n A Arc Hollow wedge Filled wedge To create an arc or wedge l 2 Select the Arc or Wedge tool Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag to draw an ellipse or circle To base the arc or wedge on a circle rather than an ellipse hold down Ctrl while you drag When you release the mouse button a set of handles appears so you can decrease the angle of the wedge or arc from 360 degrees to the desired angle Click a handle and drag the mouse to cut out part of the circle To finish drawing click the object To change how the object looks click Properties on the context menu or double click the object to open its Properties dialog box Select arc or wedge options For information about the opti
313. eosstetedeeess 20 52 Locking objects into position 6 6 eee eee 20 53 Setting up graphic objects Setting up objects spatial properties names and visibility 21 2 Tips for setting up objects with states 2 0 eens 21 3 Copying and pasting properties from one state to another 21 3 Adding and removing stateS 0 0 eee eens 21 3 Setting up how objects are used at run time 0 0 0 cece eee 21 4 Positioning objects for touch screensS 0 0 eens 21 4 Using touch MALOMS 205 0242 ou eo ene bees dddiee schooners eeonmene ed 21 4 Assigning function keys to buttons nananana cee 21 5 Function key equivalents 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eens 21 6 Using the keyboard to navigate to and select objects 00058 21 7 What input focus looks like 0 0 eee ene 21 8 Using the keys on the keyboard or keypad 0 000 cee eee 21 8 Removing objects from and adding objects to the tab sequence 21 8 Linking buttons to objects 2 0 ete eens 21 9 Repeating a button s action by holding down the button 21 11 Contents Ensuring values are read by the data source before sending new values 21 12 Methods of Enter key handshaking 0 0 0 0 cc eee eee 21 12 Holding the value for a specific period of time 0005 21 13 Holding the value until it is acknowledged 0 000058 21 13 Time date
314. epresent variable states such as temperature or the position of rotary controls Digital Oorl Use digital tags to represent devices that can only be on or off such as switches contacts and relays String ASCII string series of characters or whole words maximum of 82 characters Use string tags to represent devices that use text such as a bar code scanner that uses an alphanumeric product code 7 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 7 2 This tag type Stores this type of data System Information generated while the system is running such as the name of the logged in user system time and date and so on FactoryTalk View creates system tags when you create an application The system tags are stored in the folder called system in the HMI tag database You cannot edit system tags You can use system tags anywhere you would use any other type of tag For a list of system tags see Appendix C Analog tags that use floating point values You can assign analog tags to most of the connections in FactoryTalk View including both HMI and data server tags If the analog tag uses a floating point data type but an integer value is required the floating point value is rounded For information about the data types available for analog tags see Help How values are rounded When a floating point value must be rounded to an integer this is how the value is rounded m Ifthe number after the
315. eps for using tags To use tags follow these basic steps 1 Ifthe tag does not already exist create the tag To use a data server tag you can use an existing tag in the processor for example a programmable controller or you can create a new one in the processor or OPC server For example in a Logix5000 processor you could create the tag using your RSLogix 5000 programming software To use an HMI tag you must first create it in the Tags editor For details see Chapter 7 2 Browse for or type the name of the tag anywhere you want to connect an object to data at run time For example to make a push button change a tag value when it is pressed connect the push button to a tag by typing the tag name in the Connections tab of the push button s Properties dialog box Browsing for tags If you don t know the names of tags you can browse for them You can browse while online and connected to a device or you can browse for tags from an offline file for example a Logix5000 program file To browse for tags use the Tag Browser For details see page 6 5 6 e Working with tags Using tag names that don t exist You can type the name of a tag that doesn t yet exist If you do this ensure that you spell every instance of the tag name consistently and that when you do create the tag you spell it the same way you did when you referred to it When to use data server tags For some of the things you want to do in yo
316. er Rights Assignment Audit Policy i Security Policy gt Networks and Devices 9 Users and Groups 9 User Groups Authenticated Users Windows Administrators Group Administrators 2 Users f Administrator fi Anonymous Logor maintenance f operator 9 Connections C Databases Application 11 Setting up security Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up security using FactoryTalk Security and FactoryTalk View security features l fe 8 In the Explorer window in the System folder underneath the HMI server add FactoryTalk Security user groups and users and set up their passwords You can also add users and groups in the Runtime Security editor in the ME Runtime 4 00 and later tab as described on page 11 5 Assign user access to the computer s FactoryTalk Directory If desired restrict access to the application and to networks and devices You can also restrict security access to policies user groups and users Set up policies for m backing up and restoring FactoryTalk Directory m tracking activities for audit purposes m passwords and user accounts In the Runtime Security editor add FactoryTalk Security users or user groups to FactoryTalk View and assign login and logout macros and security codes to them In the Graphics editor assign security codes to graphic displays that will have limited access Provide users with a method for logging in and out If desired preve
317. er labels for every graphic object that filters alarms To do this specify the trigger label names in the new default language For more information about filtering alarms when your application uses multiple languages see page 9 5 12 e Setting up language switching To change the default language l The checkmark BIS French Canada fr CA indicates the default language Current application language gt Current language English Canada en CA On the Tools menu click Languages Language Configuration General Language ee English Canada en CA Add Remove E port Import Set As Default T Display undefined strings using the default language cuca Help Select the language to use for the default language Click Set As Default A large checkmark to the left of the selected language indicates that it is now the default language To use this language for all undefined strings in the application select Display undefined strings using the default language Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up language switching for an application l For applications that will run on a personal computer install the Windows languages that the application will use For applications that will run on a PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal set up the fonts that the application will use Create open or import the application in the l
318. ere languagecode is a lowercase two letter code and Country RegionCode is an uppercase two letter code For example U S English is en US 23 Using expressions For more information about setting up languages for your application see Chapter 12 For a list of RFC1766 names see Appendix F Language switching alarm information and local messages in FactoryTalk View ME Station 4 00 FactoryTalk View 5 00 and later provides direct support for switching message languages at run time For applications that will run in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 4 00 you can use the CurrentLanguage expression function to set up language switching for messages To do this set up trigger value offsets for series of messages in the Alarm Setup editor information message files and local message files Export the text strings in the Alarm Setup editor and message files for translation Then paste the translated strings into the editor and original message files and assign each string the correct trigger value For information about exporting text for translation see Chapter 12 Example Setting up information messages in multiple languages This example shows how to generate English French or German information messages at run time in an FactoryTalk View ME Station 4 00 application depending on which language the application is using 1 Create a tag called Information messages that will generate trigger values of 11 to 20 for different co
319. erence objects that are linked to the deleted base objects are broken A broken reference object is displayed as a red square with an X through it You cannot edit broken reference objects To repair a broken reference object m Recreate the base object with the same object type and name as before on the same display as before Using global object parameters Global object parameters are parameters that you can assign to global objects You can use a global object parameter to assign different tags or sets of tags to each reference object without breaking the link to the base object You can then make changes to the base object and all the associated reference objects at the same time Use global object parameters when more than one instance of a global object is used on a display For example the Logix PIDE global object display contains a grouped object composed of other grouped objects The objects connections are set up with tags and expressions that use values from a set of Logix5000 tags When you create multiple reference objects from this base object each reference object can use a different set of Logix5000 tags The global object parameters you assign to the base object allow you to do this because you are using a placeholder instead of a specific backing tag a backing tag is a path to a folder of tags it is also known as a structured tag If you then change 25 Using parameters and global objects add or remove a tag or
320. eric input cursor point to work as a ramp button In this case when the cursor point has focus the operator can press a move up or move down button to change a tag by either an integer or floating point value The operator can also press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow on the keyboard or keypad to ramp the value 21 31 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 32 To set up a numeric input cursor point 1 Double click the numeric input cursor point Numeric Input Cursor Point Properties General Numeric Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color Raisedinset B BB Back color BB Border color Back style Pattern style E aes Solid None C Fore color E Highlight color Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial gt fo Blzjuj ccc CeO eee Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin jo 0 Other MV Audio MV Key navigation Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the cursor point looks like at run time and whether the operator can navigate to the cursor point using the keys on the keyboard or keypad In the Numeric tab set up which pop up window opens if any what caption if any will be displayed on the pop up the ramp value if any minimum and maximum values to send to the data source whether the minimum and maximum values will be variabl
321. ert analog or digital tag values into captions title bars and messages You can use both HMI and data server tags You can also insert literal numbers to display a constant or to specify a tag placeholder in the caption or message Numeric embedded variables use this syntax LN Tag name Fill character DP where L optional indicates it is a literal constant number This symbol prevents a tag read If you type a tag placeholder for the Tag name the value of the placeholder is substituted from the parameter file or global object parameter definition N indicates it s a numeric embedded variable indicates the number of digits 24 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 24 4 Tag name is the tag to display you can also type a literal number or tag placeholder here Fill_character is the fill character to use NOFILL ZEROFILL or SPACEFILL indicates the number of decimal places Examples Numeric embedded variable syntax To display the current value of a tag called Oven_temp with 3 digits no decimal places and no fill character type this N 3 Oven_temp NOFILL DP 0 To display the constant 48 with 3 decimal places and 2 zeroes to the left of the number for a total length of 8 digits including the decimal type this LN 8 48 ZEROFILL DP 3 At run time the numeric embedded variable would look like this 0048 000 String embedded variable syntax Use string embedded variabl
322. es connection whenever the list scrolls To use this feature the assigned tag must support arrays and the array must be the same length as the number of visible states in the piloted control list selector For information about using array tags see page 9 15 To set up a piloted control list selector 1 Double click the piloted control list selector Piloted Control List Selector Properties Ea General States Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width IV Border uses back color fe E Ee o BB Border color Pattern style _ Pattern color None _ Selection back color BB Selection fore color Blink Text Font Size Caption truncate Arial vijfic z B z u wod C Character m Number of states Fal Buttons JV Write on enter MV Key navigation V Wrap around 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab Inthe General tab specify what the selector looks like at run time its number of states whether to write out a value when the operator presses the Enter key whether the operator can navigate to the selector using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the cursor wraps from the bottom of the list back to the top 21 53 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 54 m Inthe States tab set up the value and caption for each state Also specify whether each state can be selected and by whom For tips abo
323. es dialog box see FactoyTalk View Machine Edition Help For information about editing and removing data servers see FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Help Updating data server caches If tags are added modified or deleted on the data server you must update synchronize the cache manually For information about updating the data server cache periodically after you create it see FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Help 5 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE gt 6 working with tags This chapter provides general information about working with all kinds of tags This chapter describes m types of tags when to use data server tags m steps for using data server tags m when to use HMI tags m steps for using HMI tags browsing for tags and offline tags m using the Tag Browser m using tags and expressions in your application m logging tag values m using macros to assign values to tags For information about creating HMI tags see Chapter 7 Types of tags A tag is a logical name for a variable in a device or in local memory RAM For example a tag can represent a process variable in a programmable controller Data server tags FactoryTalk View conforms to the OPC Data Access DA 2 05a specification for information exchange among automation or control applications field systems or devices and business or office applications In FactoryTalk View data servers such as RSLinx
324. es remotely you can set up the data source to open graphic displays using global connections Global connections are connections that apply to your entire run time application Global connections allow the data source to control or interact with your application at run time For example the Remote Display Number connection is a global connection that you can use to control display changes from the data source You can also use global connections 13 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 13 8 to apply parameters to the displays that are opened from the data source to close one or more On Top displays from the data source to print graphic displays from the data source to run macros from the data source to control the date and time displayed on the run time terminal to set the intensity of Panel View backlights and to monitor run time RAM usage For more information about global connections see Chapter 8 41a Creating run time applications This chapter describes m specifying startup settings m testing your application m creating run time application files m converting run time application files to development applications Specifying startup settings Use the Startup editor to specify which application processes and components to start when the application starts at run time You can specify startup settings once you ve set up all the parts of the application or you can specify processes and select compone
325. es that are saved at run time Use the RecipePlus Editor in FactoryTalk View Studio to view data values that have been saved at run time The operator can save tag values at run time by uploading to an existing data set or to a new data set The operator can also edit data set values in the RecipePlus table and save the edited values unless the table is View only If recipe files are stored with the HMI project changes are saved in the mer file To view the changes in FactoryTalk View Studio convert the mer file to an med file For more information about converting the run time application file see page 14 7 To view data values in modified recipe files 1 Ifrecipe files are stored outside of the HMI project do one of the following m Add the recipe file rpp that you saved at run time into the application using Add Component Into Application for details see page 18 3 m Ifthe recipe file already exists in the application you can just copy the modified file back into the application s RecipePlus folder For the path to the RecipePlus folder see page 29 5 29 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 Ifrecipe files are stored with the HMI project and you have not already done so convert the run time application file to a development application as described on page 14 7 3 Inthe Explorer window in FactoryTalk View Studio double click the modified recipe file The RecipePlus Editor opens 4 Click
326. es to give the operator messages about the process prompts or instructions and information about current states Information messages versus local messages Use information messages to give the operator information no matter which display is open To give the operator information in a specific graphic display while the display is open use local messages For details about local messages see page 19 26 Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up information messages 1 In the Information Messages editor set up the messages and their trigger values 2 Inthe Information Setup editor specify the graphic display to open when information messages occur and the file of messages to display Also use this editor to assign a tag or expression to the Value connection If you want the operator to acknowledge messages assign the Ack connection and specify the acknowledge hold time 27 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 3 Inthe Startup editor ensure that the Information messages box is checked it is checked by default See Chapter 14 4 If desired in the Graphics editor modify the default INFORMATION display or create your own graphic display to use for information messages For example if you don t want the operator to acknowledge messages edit the default display to remove the information acknowledge button For information about graphic displays see Chapter 19 Using the Information Messages edito
327. es to insert string tag values into captions title bars and messages You can also insert literal strings of static text For example you can type a word or phrase a tag placeholder or a number To control how constant numbers are displayed use a literal numeric variable rather than a string variable String embedded variables use this syntax LS Tag name SHOWSTAR where L optional indicates it is a literal static string This symbol prevents a tag read If you type a tag placeholder for the Tag name the value of the placeholder is substituted from the parameter file or global object parameter definition The value cannot contain spaces S indicates it s a string embedded variable optional A minus sign before the indicates that if the string is longer than the fixed number of characters the right most characters will be displayed indicates the number of characters if you select a fixed number of characters type 0 if you don t want to use a fixed number 24 Using embedded variables Tag name is the tag to display you can also type a literal string or tag placeholder here The string cannot contain spaces SHOWSTAR optional specifies that if the string is longer than the fixed number of characters an asterisk will be displayed to indicate the string is truncated If you use the minus sign the asterisk will be displayed as the first character at the left end of the string Otherwis
328. essages from Windows CE devices For information about who receives which types of messages see page 10 4 Receiving messages from a PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal You can set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics to receive messages that are generated on the PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal at run time The terminal must be on the same network as the computer running FactoryTalk Diagnostics To receive messages m enable the personal computer to receive the messages For details see Help for the Diagnostics Setup tool m set up the PanelView Plus 6 Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal to send the messages For information about setting up a PanelView Plus 6 Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal to log to the personal computer see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual Displaying and printing diagnostics messages at run time At run time you can display diagnostics messages in a graphic display You can also print the messages Using the Diagnostics List Setup editor Use the Diagnostics List Setup editor to set up when to print and display messages at run time in FactoryTalk View ME Station 10 Setting up Factory Talk Diagnostics The Diagnostics List Setup editor is located on the application tree under the System folder Double click on Diagnostics List Setup to open the editor FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition File View Application
329. etup editor 2 Click Import and Export E 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE E 2 The Alarm Import Export Wizard opens 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard For information about using the Alarm Import Export Wizard see Help FactoryTalk View creates a file with the name you specify in the location you specify Editing XML files We recommend that you use Notepad to edit your XML files If you do not want to change a property you don t need to include it in the XML file Saving XML files in Notepad Save XML files created or edited in Notepad using either UTF 8 or UTF 16 file format Notepad s Unicode file type corresponds to UTF 16 file format For files containing strings in English or other Latin based languages UTF 8 is recommended to reduce the size of the XML file For other languages such as Chinese Japanese or Korean UTF 16 is recommended The first line of every XML file contains XML version and encoding attributes Make sure the encoding attribute matches the format that you are going to use when you save the file For example if the original file was saved in UTF 8 format and you plan to save it in UTF 16 format make sure the first line specifies encoding UTF 16 Testing XML files An XML file must be well formed to be imported To find out whether your XML file is well formed test it To test an XML file m Open the XML file in Internet Explorer If you can see the XML co
330. evious display Close display button Close the current display Can send a value to a tag when the display closes Display list selector Provide a list of graphic displays so the operator can select which display to open Shutdown button Stop the application and exit FactoryTalk View ME Station The behavior of these graphic objects depends on which types of graphic displays are used See the following sections for details For detailed information about setting up graphic objects see Help Switching languages If the application uses multiple languages and operators will be switching languages at run time place language switch buttons in a display that the operators have access to For example put the buttons in the display that opens when the operators log in Create a language switch button for each language that the operators will be using For more information about setting up multiple languages see Chapter 12 13 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 13 4 Display type The display type you use gives you additional control over how the operator navigates between displays For example use the On Top type to keep a graphic display on top at all times even when another display has focus Or use the Replace type if you want a display to replace all other open displays when it opens For more information about display types see page 19 12 Goto display buttons When you set up a goto display but
331. externally the position of the slider changes to reflect this Control list selector Select from a list of states for a process or operation The list is highlighted to show the current state and the operator can scroll through the list to select a different state The value assigned to the selected state is written to the tag If the value of the tag is changed externally the position of the highlight changes to reflect this ActiveX object A third party object connected to an analog digital or string tag including both HMI and data server tags When the object s property value changes the new value is written to the associated tag You can attach visibility animation to these graphic objects to display or hide the objects based on changes in tag or expression values For information about visibility animation see page 22 9 For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 For information about setting up graphic objects see Chapter 21 and Help Viewing tag data This section gives an overview of the graphic objects you can use to display tag data For information about setting up the objects see Chapter 21 and Help The operator can view tag data at run time using these graphic objects Use this graphic object Numeric display To display this Numeric tag values For example display the current temperature of an oven Numeric input cursor point Numeric tag values For examp
332. eyboard keys m the arrow keys and Enter key on a terminal s keypad m the arrow keys and Enter key on a keyboard The operator presses the buttons to scroll up or down the list or to make selections from the list The buttons can be set up to work with the piloted control list selector that has focus or with a specific piloted control list selector You can use the buttons listed in the table on page 21 49 Selecting items in the list Each state can be selected directly by an operator or remotely by a device such as a programmable controller The operator or the controller scrolls through the list to select a different state or a different group of visible states When an operator or remote device selects a state the value assigned to the selected state is written to the piloted control list selector s Value connection If the state is turned off the state s value is not written to the Value connection If the operator attempts to select a state that is remote controlled the state s value is not written to the Value connection 21 Setting up graphic objects Scrolling through the list If the piloted control list selector contains more states than can be displayed in the list simultaneously the value of the Top Position connection if assigned changes whenever the item at the top of the list changes If the Visible States connection is assigned the values assigned to all visible states are written to the Visible Stat
333. ff To turn off the grid m Inthe Grid Setting dialog box clear the Show Grid check box or on the View menu click Show Grid to toggle the option off Zooming in and out To magnify or reduce your view of a graphic display use Zoom In and Zoom Out Zoom In magnifies objects Zoom Out reduces magnification 19 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE E Zoom In tool Zoom Out tool 3 Undo tool L Redo tool 19 10 To zoom in on objects 1 Select the objects you want to zoom in on 2 Onthe View menu click Zoom In or click the Zoom In tool To zoom out m On the View menu click Zoom Out or click the Zoom Out tool Correcting mistakes If you change your mind about something you did you can undo the action If you change your mind again you can redo the action You can undo and redo all the operations you performed since you last saved the display one operation at a time The operations you perform between opening and closing a dialog box are treated as a single operation Operations you perform in the Property Panel are treated as separate operations To undo an operation m On the Edit menu click Undo or click the Undo tool To redo an operation m On the Edit menu click Redo or click the Redo tool Testing your displays as you work To test the objects in your displays as you work use the Test Display tool to switch to test mode When you are finished testing switch back t
334. finished click OK 21 Setting up graphic objects How to use indicators Indicators display the status of processes or operations by showing different colors captions or images to reflect different states You can create different kinds of indicators to suit your needs Multistate indicators display the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color caption or image to reflect different states Symbols display a symbol that changes color to indicate the state of a process or operation This allows the operator to see the status of a process or operation at a glance List indicators display a list of states for a process or operation and highlight the current state Each state is represented by a caption in the list This type of indicator is useful if you want operators to view the current state but also see the other possible states For sequential processes the list can inform the operator about what happens next Setting up multistate indicators The multistate indicator displays the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color caption or image for each state The error state The multistate indicator s error state is displayed at run time when m the Indicator connection is unassigned m the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up m the Trigger type is set to Value and the Indicator connection value does not match one of the stat
335. for these printers as well as manual installation if a suitable JETCET print driver is available Print support is centrally managed and independent of the application You can add and configure a new printer from the desktop control panel Printer configurations include the printer name printer driver port and port specific parameters New configurations are retained through a power cycle Transferring applications 1 On the PanelView Plus PanelView CE or PanelView Plus 6 terminal start FactoryTalk View ME Station For more information see page 16 3 2 In FactoryTalk View ME Station if you re transferring via a serial connection specify and set up the serial driver If you are using Ethernet for the transfer you can skip this step For more information see page 16 4 3 On the development computer set up the RSLinx Enterprise driver to use for the transfer For more information see page 16 5 4 Move the application to the Panel View Plus or PanelView Plus 6 terminal using the Transfer Utility tool For more information see page 16 6 You can also transfer applications to the terminal using a Flash Card For information about this method see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual Starting FactoryTalk View ME Station To start FactoryTalk View ME Station on a PanelView Plus 6 terminal m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software and then click FactoryTalk View ME Station The
336. formation is contained in a file called Displayname gfx The Graphics Import Export Wizard in FactoryTalk View Studio allows you to export this information to an XML file or to import a graphic display XML file You can export the display information import the graphic display XML file to another FactoryTalk View application and then modify it to suit your requirements Or you can modify the file before importing it You can use the Graphics Import Export Wizard to import graphic display information that has been created using an external programming tool or editor or you can import a FactoryTalk View XML file For more information about importing and exporting graphic display files see Appendix H Tools and tips for working in the Graphics editor This section describes features of the Graphics editor that help you create your displays It describes how to m use context menus and toolbars to perform actions quickly m view displays in grayscale to emulate the appearance of a PanelView Plus terminal m setup a grid that you can use to position and size objects precisely m zoom in when you need to look at details closely correct mistakes m test your displays as you work 19 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Using context menus No matter where you are in the Graphics editor you can open a menu by clicking the right mouse button This is often quicker than moving the mouse up to the menus at the t
337. g N20 The text would be converted as an expression and turned off To turn on an expression 1 Select the object containing the expression 2 Open the Property Panel and then click the Connections tab 3 Inthe Exprn column click the Browse button beside the expression to turn on 4 Inthe Expression editor delete the warning text and exclamation marks 5 Revise the expression if necessary using the tables in the following three sections as guides 6 Click Check Syntax For more information about using the Expression editor see Chapter 23 or Help Equivalent expression syntax This table describes FactoryTalk View expression syntax that is equivalent to PanelBuilder 1400e syntax When you edit the converted expressions replace the PanelBuilder 1400e syntax with the FactoryTalk View equivalent Syntax that is not listed in this table or in the next section is okay the way it is Type of expression component or operator PanelBuilder 1400e syntax FactoryTalk View syntax Comment REM or Line continuation _ underscore Not needed Equality EQ or A 14 A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications Type of expression component or operator PanelBuilder 1400e syntax FactoryTalk View syntax Bitwise Not Not tilde Bitwise And And amp Bitwise Or Or pipe Bitwise XOr XOr i If both operands are Byte Integer Long Variant or any combination of these data types use the Fact
338. g 21 placing in graphic displays 14 tips for using 25 viewing 23 mea files 11 med files 1 mer files 2 comparing amp converting to med 4 7 creating 3 transferring from PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE 7 to PanelView 1 6 to PanelView Plus CE 1 6 to personal computers 1 3 wmf files 20 placing in graphic displays 21 axul Files 4 by ot Numerics 21 CFR Part 11 compliance 5 A A I 5 tags importing 11 AB DF1 1 using to transfer applications 5 AB ETH 1 using to transfer applications 6 Acknowledge alarm button graphic object 7 16 using with alarm objects 8 36 Acknowledge all alarms button graphic object 8 16 using with alarm lists 36 ActiveX objects 2 animating 2 at run time 17 18 creating 21 navigating to 7 using to display tag values 6 9 using to set tag values 5 9 Addressing syntax for HMI tags gt b Log1x5000 6 Adobe Reader 1 ALARM BANNER display editing 26 Alarm banner graphic object 9 61 at run time 33 19 linking buttons to 9 navigating to 7 specifying time and date format for 17 using buttons with 36 ALARM display 6 editing 25 window size 14 Alarm display opening and closing 25 31 remotely 25 Alarm Import Export Wizard 1 Alarm list graphic object 9 60 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 at run time 32 19 linking buttons to 9 navigating to 7 specifying time and date format for 17 using buttons with 36 Alarm log file 3 10 deleting at application startup 16 printing
339. g FactoryTalk View Studio Printing at run time Print graphic displays at run time using the display print button or using a remote display print You can also send diagnostics and alarm messages to a printer at run time For information about See Display print buttons page 19 31 Printing graphic displays page 19 30 Printing displays remotely page 8 5 Printing alarm messages page 9 10 Printing diagnostics messages page 10 8 Specifying the printers to use at run time for page 15 10 Windows 7 Professional XP Server 2003 R2 Vista or Server 2008 applications The type of printer to use with a Panel View page 16 1 Plus 6 Panel View Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal 2 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 16 C3 Planning applications A well designed application requires planning To help you plan this chapter describes understanding the machines and processes you re automating collecting data designing an HMI tag database planning graphic displays and navigating between them planning languages planning alarms providing information for the operator planning trends planning recipes designing a secure system FactoryTalk ViewFactoryTalk View comes with several sample applications that can give you guidance when planning your application For instructions on opening the sample applications see page 2 2 Understanding the process Gather information from
340. g Overview display is opened from a graphic display called Main Menu l Create these sets of tags You can use both HMI and data server tags Tag type Tag name Tag name String Corn Name Pea _ Name Analog Corn Temp Pea_Temp Analog Corn Weight Pea_Weight Analog Corn Level Pea_ Level In the Canning Overview display assign tag placeholders to the Value connections for these graphic objects This graphic object Uses this tag placeholder String display 1 Numeric display 1 2 Numeric display 2 3 25 Using parameters and global objects This graphic object Uses this tag placeholder Bar graph 4 3 Use descriptive text to illustrate the objects in the display 4 Inthe Main Menu display create a display list selector for opening the Canning display with two states 5 In the first state choose the parameter list option and select the Corn parameter tags from the Tag Browser in this order Corn Name Corn Temp Corn Weight Corn Level In the second state do the same for the Peas tags 6 Call the captions for the states Corn and Peas respectively At run time when the operator selects the Peas state on the display list selector in the Main Menu and presses the Enter key the Canning Overview display opens and shows the values of the Pea_ tags When the operator selects the Corn state the values of the Corn_ tags are displayed Parameter passing You can use parameter files or parameter lists to pass
341. g a string input enable button the number of characters the input accepts depends on how you set up the button To use the string pop up character input on a personal computer l 2 3 In FactoryTalk View Studio on the Tools menu select Options Click the String Pop Up tab Select Use the string pop up character input To use the string pop up character input on a PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal l 2 3 In FactoryTalk View ME Station click Terminal Settings Double click Input Devices Select String Pop Up and then click Enter Specify whether to invoke the pop up character input instead of the pop up keyboard and then click OK 17 Using your application Using the string pop up scratchpad If the operator opens the string pop up scratchpad by pressing a string input enable button the number of characters the scratchpad accepts depends on how you set up the string input enable button The scratchpad does not contain any buttons If the run time computer does not have an external keyboard attached the operator will be unable to enter characters or close the scratchpad unless the run time terminal is a keypad terminal If the run time terminal is a keypad terminal the operator can enter numbers not letters in the scratchpad and close the scratchpad When the scratchpad is open no other objects in the graphic display can accept input Using buttons and keys with the string pop
342. g an object s Properties dialog box or the Property Panel Use one of these methods if you want to assign separate colors to different foreground or background color properties or to choose colors that don t appear in the toolbars For example if you want to use a dark blue background color for a button with a light blue background color for its image label you must assign the colors separately Using the toolbar would assign the same color to both properties Also use the Properties dialog box or Property Panel to change the default colors for properties that cannot be assigned using the color toolbars Naming objects Objects and groups of objects are automatically given a name and number when you create them for example NumericInputEnable4 If desired you can assign a more meaningful name to the object for example Conveyor speed input Each object in a display must have a unique name The object name appears in the status bar Diagnostics List Property Panel and Object Explorer in FactoryTalk View Studio and in diagnostics log messages at run time To name an object in the Property Panel 1 Select the object 20 Using graphic objects 2 Inthe Property Panel click the Properties tab 3 Double click the Name row and then type the name The name must start with a letter and cannot contain spaces You can use the underscore character _ To name an object in its Properties dialog box 1 Double click the object
343. g box How user accounts and security codes work When you assign a security code to a graphic display only the users and groups who are assigned that security code have access to the display There are 16 security codes A through P The asterisk symbol is used in displays and represents any code Users must have at least one code assigned to open displays that use the code You can assign combinations of security codes to users and groups to allow each user or group access to a different set of displays or graphic objects To use security codes to restrict user access to graphic objects assign visibility animation to the objects using expressions containing the security functions For an example see page 11 11 Assigning security to graphic displays Assign security to graphic displays in the Graphics editor You can m assign security when you create the graphic display or at any time after creating the display m assign the same security code to more than one display m assign whichever codes you want in any order For example you can choose to use only the codes D and P and you can assign P before you assign D For more information about graphic displays see Chapter 19 11 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 11 10 To assign security to a graphic display 1 Inthe Graphics editor right click an empty area of the display and then click Display Settings Display Settings General Behavi
344. g macros to reset tag values This example shows you how to run a macro whenever the operator needs to reset production information tags to known values The macro writes the desired values to the tags whenever the operator presses a momentary push button 1 Create a memory tag called ResetProdData 2 Create a momentary push button with the caption Reset Production Data Assign the ResetProdData tag to the Value connection 3 Create a macro called Macrol with these tag assignments TotalProductionUnits 0 LineDownTime 0 TotalRejects 0 4 Inthe Global Connections editor assign the ResetProdData tag to the Remote Macrol connection When the operator presses the Reset Production Data button the value of the ResetProdData tag changes from 0 to 1 This tells FactoryTalk View to run Macrol which writes the specified values to the tags in the macro 30 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Where to assign macros Once you ve created the macros you want to use assign the macros in these editors In this editor Do this Startup Assign application startup and shutdown macros Graphics Assign macros to run when displays open or close using the Display Settings dialog box Runtime Security Assign macros to run when users log in and log out Macros that you assign to groups of users run each time any member of the group logs in or logs out Global Connections Specify the tags or expressions that
345. g software 2 Create a data server in FactoryTalk View if your application doesn t already have one Every new FactoryTalk View Machine application includes a RSLinx Enterprise data server automatically FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 6 4 For more information see Chapter 5 3 In graphic displays data log models or anywhere else you want to use a tag s value create a direct reference to the tag At run time the tag s value is passed to the graphic display or data log model When to use HMI tags Use HMI tags to manipulate tag data and to store tag values in the run time computer s memory Scaling offsetting or providing a range for data Use HMI tags if the data server you are using does not provide for scaling or offsetting a value setting minimum or maximum limits on a value that is providing a range of values Scale and offset The scale and offset modify the raw data that comes from and goes to the programmable controller before the data is saved in the computer s memory called the value table The scale and offset also modify the value specified in FactoryTalk View before it is written to the programmable controller The scale is a multiplication factor the value from the programmable controller is multiplied by the scale The offset is a fixed value after the value from the programmable controller is multiplied by the scale the offset amount is added Minimum a
346. gation refers to the way the operator moves between the graphic displays that make up an application Use these methods to set up display navigation for your application m Develop a hierarchy of graphic displays to chart how users will navigate the application m Determine which users will have access to which parts of the application m Create graphic objects that the operator can use to navigate the application m Use the Remote Display Number connection to automatically control display changes The use of this connection is optional Assign it in the Global Connections editor m Inthe Startup editor specify the graphic display to open when the application starts Set up security so that only authorized users have access to the application or parts of the application For information about setting up security see Chapter 11 Developing a hierarchy of displays A display hierarchy is a series of graphic displays that provide progressively more detail as users move through them Design your display hierarchy to meet the needs of the various users including managers supervisors and operators If you plan to use security determine which groups of users need access to which displays and decide where in the hierarchy to locate login logout password and shutdown buttons For information about setting up security see Chapter 11 13 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 13 2 A display hierarchy could inclu
347. ght be clipped to fit the object All objects Multiple image labels FactoryTalk View supports one image label per object or state Ifa PanelBuilder 1400e object is set up to use multiple image labels only the top left image is converted Converting expressions Some PanelBuilder 1400e expression syntax is not supported in FactoryTalk View Expressions are converted without modification and then turned off by placing warning text at the beginning of the first line of the expression In addition exclamation marks are placed at the beginning of each subsequent line of the expression Warming text is also placed in expressions assigned to alarm triggers in the Alarm Setup editor To turn on the expression you must remove the warning text and exclamation marks and revise the syntax if necessary The maximum expression length in FactoryTalk View is 16 000 characters If a PanelBuilder 1400e expression contains more than 16 000 characters the excess characters are not converted FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Browse button Some PanelBuilder 1400e objects support both tags and expressions For these objects if the text assigned to a connection could be valid syntax for both a tag and an expression the connection is treated as an expression and is therefore turned off For example N20 0 String 64 could be the name of a tag or it could be an expression that subtracts 0 String 64 from the ta
348. ging works by periodically exporting the contents of the local log file to an ODBC compliant database FactoryTalk View supports these ODBC compliant databases Microsoft Access m Sybase SQL Server m Oracle m Microsoft SQL Server If you have set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics to overwrite events in the local log file make sure messages are logged to the ODBC compliant database before the oldest events are deleted For information about the contents of the FactoryTalk Diagnostics ODBC tables see Appendix D Setting up message buffering FactoryTalk Diagnostics messages are stored in the computer s local log file and are exported to the ODBC compliant database at the interval you specify 10 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 10 8 You can also specify that messages remain in the local log file for a period of time after they have been exported to the ODBC compliant database This is useful in the event of a network failure or any other reason that causes the database to be unavailable In this case the messages remain in the local log file until the buffer time expires If the ODBC compliant database becomes available during that time the buffered messages are then exported to the database Routing messages For each destination you set up you can specify how messages are routed To route messages specify m the types of messages to log m the audiences to send the messages to m whether to accept m
349. gl lt tag2 is true statement it NOT reverses the logical value operates on returns a Q The parentheses are essential in the above expressions They determine the evaluation order of the operators For more information see page 23 10 Bitwise operators Bitwise operators examine and manipulate individual bits within a value These operators are for integers only not floating point numbers Do not use them with tags or expressions that return floating point values Symbol Operator Action for examples see page 23 10 amp And Compares two integers or tags on a bit by bit basis Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if both the corresponding bits in the original numbers are 1 Otherwise the resulting bit is 0 23 8 Symbol gt gt lt lt Operator inclusive OR 23 Using expressions Action for examples see page 23 10 Compares two integers or tags on a bit by bit basis Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if either or both of the corresponding bits in the original numbers are 1 If both bits are 0 the resulting bit is 0 exclusive OR XOR Compares two integers or tags on a bit by bit basis right shift left shift complement Returns an integer with a bit set to 1 if the corresponding bits in the original numbers differ If both bits are 1 or both are 0 the resulting bit is 0 Shifts the bits within an integer or tag to the right Shifts the bits within the left operand by th
350. gle recipe or between two recipes If you are comparing data sets or tag sets within a recipe only ingredients with different values are displayed in the report If you are comparing data sets or tag sets between two recipes both common ingredients and unique ingredients are listed in the report To compare recipes 1 Open the RecipePlus Editor 2 On the Recipe menu click Compare Recipes Compare Recipes C Compare within a single recipe f Compare across bwo recipes Recipe 1 CADocuments and Settings 4ll Users Documents AS View Enterprises ESH ell 7 Projects Baken Reciperlus Organic brownies op Recipe 2 C Documents and Settings 4ll Users Documents AS view Enterprises MESH hl w Projects BakenAeciperlus Onganic cookies op W Compare Data Sets Data Set 1 Data Set HY Small batch Small batch eal Compare Tag Sets l l Compare Cancel Help 3 Specify the recipe file or files data sets and tag sets to compare For information about the options in the Compare Recipes dialog box see Help 4 Click Compare A report is displayed in Windows Notepad 29 Setting up RecipePlus P CompareReport txt Notepad Ox File Edit Format View Help Recipe Compare Report 6 6 2005 8 16 24 PM Report Type Data Set Compare Recipe Files Recipel C Documents and Settings All Users Documents RSView Enterprise mMeE HMI Projects Bakery RecipePlus organic brownies rp Recipe2 C Documents
351. grammable controller or device for a specific period of time to ensure the value is read before the control list selector overwrites the value with a new value Enter key handshaking only works if the Write on enter check box is selected in the General tab For more information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 12 To set up a control list selector 1 Double click the control list selector Control List Selector Properties x General States Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color WB Back color BB Border color Pattern style C Patter color None C Selection back color BB Selection fore color l Blink Text Font Size Caption truncate Arial Jo Bi z au wod C Character Number of states eo Buttons V write on enter M Key navigation I Wrap around Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab Inthe General tab specify what the selector looks like at run time its number of states whether to write out a value when the operator presses the Enter key whether the operator can navigate to the selector using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the cursor wraps from the bottom of the list back to the top m Inthe States tab set up the value and caption for each state The value defines the control list selector s action by changing the Value connection to the
352. guide users through the system Before designing individual graphic displays plan an overall display hierarchy and plan how users will navigate through the hierarchy For information about navigation methods and developing a hierarchy of displays see Chapter 8 3 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 3 4 Creating a template to ensure consistency It is possible to keep a consistent appearance among all the displays in an application by presenting the same pieces of information in the same place on each graphic display To ensure uniformity develop a display with common elements that acts as a template Each time you develop a new display start with a duplicate of the template For example the template could contain m your company logo m atitle m the date and time m navigational buttons Use global object displays to create template objects You can copy the objects into your graphic displays and update all the objects at once by updating the original object in the global object display For information about creating global object displays see page 25 11 Designing displays When designing displays applying good visual design principles helps users and increases their efficiency Remember these important design principles Consistency Beconsistent with your use of symbols and color Beconsistent with button labels and button placement When you design several displays place the same kinds of but
353. hapter 11 4 00 and later applications To log in the user must have an account in the Runtime Security editor in the ME Runtime 4 00 and later tab The user must have a password which 1s set up in FactoryTalk Security using the Users folder For details see Chapter 11 Passwords are case sensitive 3 20 and earlier applications To log in the user must have an account in the Runtime Security editor in the ME Runtime 3 20 and earlier tab User passwords are optional in RS View 3 20 and earlier If you use them they are not case sensitive To log in 1 Press the login button The Login window opens Td ee E 2 Press the User button or press F2 on an external keyboard The string pop up keyboard opens For details about using the keyboard see page 17 11 17 Using your application 3 Type your user name in the string pop up keyboard or on an external keyboard and then press Enter For FactoryTalk View 5 00 and later applications and for RSView 4 00 applications the name is not case sensitive For RS View 3 20 and earlier applications the name must use ALL CAPS 4 To enter a password press the Password button or press F3 on an external keyboard 5 Type the password in the string pop up keyboard or on an external keyboard and then press Enter For FactoryTalk View 5 00 and later applications and for RSView 4 00 applications the password is case sensitive For RS View 3 20 and earlier applicat
354. he data source to queue alarm notifications when multiple alarms are generated for the same trigger Use the Handshake connection to notify the data source that FactoryTalk View has detected the alarm notification Then the data source can send the next alarm to FactoryTalk View When the application starts the Handshake connection has a value of 1 When the trigger connection s value changes the Handshake connection s value toggles from 1 to 0 The next time the trigger value changes the Handshake connection s value toggles from 0 to 1 9 Setting up alarms A change in the trigger connection s value does not necessarily indicate an alarm the value might still be within acceptable limits How the Ack connection works When the application starts this connection has a value of 0 How the value changes m When the operator acknowledges an alarm by pressing the acknowledge alarm button FactoryTalk View sends the alarm s trigger value or bit position for bit triggers to this connection and holds the value as long as the operator presses the button or for the duration of the hold time whichever is longer Then the connection s value is reset to 0 m When the operator acknowledges all alarms or the alarms for this trigger only by pressing the acknowledge all alarms button FactoryTalk View sends the trigger s Acknowledge all value to this connection and holds the value as long as the operator presses the butt
355. he elements and attributes needed to create an alarm setup file or to modify graphic displays For information about working with graphics XML files see Appendix H Sometimes editing your alarm setup in an XML file is quicker than working in FactoryTalk View For example if you have a list of 100 tags to monitor for alarms with multiple messages for each tag you might prefer to enter all the information in a text editor and then import the alarm setup information into FactoryTalk View Another example of using XML files 1s to export the alarm setup information you develop in one application import the setup information to another FactoryTalk View application and then modify the alarm setup as needed Or you could modify the information in the XML file before importing it For more information about XML see the World Wide Web Consortium s web page about XML at http www w3 org XML Creating alarm XML files by exporting The quickest way to create an XML file for your application s alarm setup is to export the data from FactoryTalk View You can then open the XML file in Notepad make your changes and import the file back into FactoryTalk View The strings for the application s current language are exported to the XML file To export strings for another language reopen the application in the new language and repeat the XML export To export alarm information to an XML file 1 Inthe Explorer window right click the Alarm S
356. he application language For details see page 21 16 Open the Login dialog box and then log in For details see page 11 12 Logout button Password button Log out of the application For details see page 11 13 Change the current user s password For details see page 17 4 20 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Use this graphic object To do this Shutdown button Stop the application and shut down FactoryTalk View ME Station For details see page 13 7 Goto configure mode button Stop the application and open the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box For details see page 13 4 Print alarm history button Print a report of alarm messages in the alarm log file You can print a report for all alarms or for a specified alarm trigger For details see page 21 58 Print alarm status button Print a report of the status of alarms including how many times each alarm was triggered and the time in alarm You can print a report for all alarms or for a specified alarm trigger For details see page 21 59 Starting and controlling processes Use this graphic object To do this Momentary push button Start a process or action by sending one value to the tag when pressed and another value when released For details see page 21 19 Maintained push button Toggle between two values by sending one value to the tag when pressed and a second value the next time the button
357. he format of the file before you import it into FactoryTalk View The differences are Double quotes surrounding the string definitions are removed for most strings m String definitions containing embedded double quotes or other characters that Excel treats as special characters such as commas are enclosed within double quotes m Any embedded double quotes are converted to a pair of double quotes Saving the Unicode text file in Notepad When saving the file save it using the Unicode encoding option in the Save As dialog box File schema Comments The text file uses the symbol as a comment delimiter if it is the first character on a line Header The first seven lines of the text file contain header information that must not be translated or modified Body The body of the text file starts on line eight and includes the following columns Component type Component name String reference String definition ee Graphic Display Pump station 1 Stop motor The file is sorted alphabetically by component name and then numerically by string reference number Each string reference number refers to a different object in the component In the example shown above string reference 1 might refer to a momentary push button in the graphic display called Pump station 12 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 12 12 The string definition is enclosed in quotes in Notepad but not in the spreadshee
358. he graphic display In the Explorer window in the Graphics folder right click the Libraries icon Click Add Component Into Application In the dialog box navigate to the Gfx folder and then click the gfx file for the display to use The Gfx folder is located in Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Application Name Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 or Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Application Name Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 where Application Name is the name of your application Click Open The display is copied into the Libraries folder 19 e Using graphic displays Using libraries as displays in your application The graphic libraries are available on the development computer but do not appear at run time To use a library as a graphic display at run time you must add the library into your application s folder of graphic displays If the library doesn t contain strings for languages supported by the current application the undefined strings are displayed with question marks To use a library as a display in your application 1 In the Explorer window in the Graphics folder right click the Displays icon 2 Click Add Component Into Application 3 In the dialog box navigate to the Libraries folder and then click the gfx file for the library to use The Libraries folder is located
359. he hold time is in effect for the Ack connection 9 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 20 Example Using the Remote Ack connection This example shows how to use the Remote Ack connection to acknowledge an alarm In this example the same application is run at two different locations on the plant floor and both terminals are connected to the same programmable controller All the tags in the example refer to addresses in the programmable controller Application Location 2 Application Location 1 Fro graria kle controller 1 Create an alarm trigger for a tag called Alarm Use the Value trigger type Assign a tag called Ack to the Ack connection Assign a tag called Remote ack to the Remote Ack connection Create an alarm message for the alarm trigger with the trigger value 1 Se oe OS Set up the data source to write the value at the Ack connection to the Remote Ack connection whenever the value of the Ack connection changes from 0 to a non zero value At run time when an alarm with the trigger value 1 is generated the alarm message appears at both locations simultaneously If the operator acknowledges the alarm at Location 1 FactoryTalk View writes the value 1 to the Ack connection Since the Ack connection is write only not read the acknowledgement doesn t appear at Location 2 However the programmable controller writes the value from the Ack connection 1 to the Remote Ack con
360. he minus sign if any is removed Enter Close the pop up window and write the value to the object s Value connection If the Optional Expression connection is assigned to the button or cursor point FactoryTalk View calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value connection For details see page 23 18 If Enter key handshaking is set up for the button or cursor point the object s Enter connection is set to 1 and the handshaking timer begins timing For details see page 21 12 17 Using your application Use this button or key To do this Delete Clear the scratchpad There is no Delete button in the pop up keypad but you can use the Delete key on an external keyboard or keypad How values are ramped If the button or cursor point is being used to ramp a value at the Value connection When the tag assigned to the Value connection is an integer tag but the ramp value is a floating point value the ramp value is added to or subtracted from the Value connection value and then the result 1s rounded and written to the Value connection For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 If the operator presses and holds down the move up or move down button or the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key on the keyboard or keypad the button or key goes into auto repeat mode The ramp value is added to or subtracted from the last value sent to the Value connection For more information about auto re
361. he run time terminal or computer screen in pixels The run time screen resolution is the actual size of 4 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE the run time terminal or computer screen in pixels Therefore the project window size must be less than or equal to the run time screen resolution FactoryT alk View Studio Machine Edition Demo Mode File Edit View Objects Arrange Animation Application Tools Window Help f Low Level Tag Read Wiite Objects 5 Screen Demo Display Project window size acted 640 x 480 pixels al Ee rean font needs to be installed to display Korean characters corres Pushbuttons Inputs Numeric vanana l Indicators T List Multistat Latched OEE Keypad State 0 TETEN State 0 Please click one of the buttons to receive help Screen resolution 1024 x 728 pixels lear Clear All NUM Position width 3 height 3 Client Area Usually an application is designed to completely fill the run time terminal or computer screen If you want your application to do this set the project window size to the resolution of the screen in pixels For information on setting the project window size see page 4 17 Screen resolution for PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals If you are going to run your application on a Panel View Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal select one of these project window sizes For this term
362. he shutdown button 1 Right click the shutdown button select Animation and then click Visibility 2 Inthe Animation dialog box in the Expression box type this CurrentUserName ADMIN 3 For the Expression True State click Visible 4 Click Apply 11 Setting up security Example Assigning visibility animation to the shutdown button This example shows how to assign visibility animation to the shutdown button so that only users assigned code G or code H can stop the application To assign visibility animation to the shutdown button 1 Right click the shutdown button select Animation and then click Visibility 2 Inthe Animation dialog box in the Expression box type this CurrentUserHasCode GH 3 For the Expression True State click Visible 4 Click Apply 11 25 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 11 26 419 Setting up language switching This chapter describes m what language switching is summary of steps for setting up language switching setting up Windows to support language switching adding languages to the application exporting application text strings for translation translating application text importing translated text files setting up multiple language support for graphic libraries About language switching The FactoryTalk View language switching feature provides the ability to set up multiple languages for an application and switch languages dynamically
363. he states that are common to all objects in the group appear in the toolbar For more information about using the States toolbar see page 20 33 Editing objects within a group You can also edit individual objects within the group without breaking the group which is particularly useful when you have animation attached to the group 20 Using graphic objects To edit objects within a group l Double click to edit the 4 gt Double click the grouped object or right click it and then click Edit A hatched border appears around the group When the hatched border is around the group you are in group edit mode In this mode you can select individual objects in the group and modify them You can also add new objects to the group Click again Handles appear The handles show the individual object selected within the group group A hatched border appears This border indicates that this is a group To select an individual object or a group in the group click it You can also use the Object Explorer to select objects within the group The status bar and Object Explorer indicate which object or group is selected Make your changes to the object You can change the selected object s shape size or position or use the object s Properties dialog box or the Property Panel to edit the object s properties If desired create new objects inside the hatched border To stop editing click outsid
364. hen planning displays determine the best way for users to navigate through your displays and develop a template to establish a common look and feel for your displays Also consider factors about the run time terminal that affect how the application is displayed and used such as m screen size m the maximum number of displays supported at run time m Ifthe applications runs on a personal computer the maximum number of displays is based on the type of activation used m Ifthe application runs on PanelView Plus the maximum number of displays is based on the amount of memory used by the application Applications run on a PanelView Plus can contain as many displays as can fit in the memory of the Panel View Plus terminal m Ifthe application runs on PanelView Plus Compact for the maximum number of displays available when the application is running on a Panel View Plus Compact terminal see page 4 5 m whether the operator will be using a keyboard touch screen mouse or combination of navigation and data entry methods For information about creating graphic displays see Chapter 19 Developing a hierarchy of displays A hierarchy of displays is a series of graphic displays that provide progressively more detail as users move through them Design your display hierarchy to meet the needs of the various users including managers supervisors and operators Well organized graphic displays present information clearly and consistently and
365. hether the operator can navigate to the list using a keyboard and how scrolling works for the list m Inthe Alarm tab specify the columns to include in the list the number of lines per alarm and the triggers to filter by if any Inthe Common tab specify the alarm status list s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up diagnostics lists The diagnostics list graphic object displays run time information about system activity m Information messages such as messages about tag assignments tag read and write activity and macro usage These are system generated information messages They are not the same messages as the information messages you create and display in the information message display object m Warning messages m Error messages such as messages about communication errors invalid values and unassigned connections Audit messages about tag writes and tag write failures FactoryTalk View comes with a default graphic display called DIAGNOSTICS that contains a diagnostics list object You can use the display and object as is customize them or create your own For more information about using diagnostics lists see page 10 12 21 Setting up graphic objects To set up a diagnostics list 1 Double click the diagnostics list Diagnostics List Properties Ea General Common Appearance Borde
366. hh cee eek eee oe es RecipePlus TAD a cence atoraettdeweehen cad eade athens RecipePlis DUON s 40caanoocsiddaeeoredeatants athens Number format 20 0 cece eens Numeric limits 2 0 0 0 ce eee nes Specifying the run time file location 0000 Storing files outside the HMI project 0 Storing recipe files with the HMI project Setting up recipe files nannan ee eee eee Comparing recipes 6 eee eee ees Time and date formats 0 0 0 cece eee Printing TCCIDCS 6 octet on Fee hea idikia eee ees niak Creating RecipePlus objects 0 0 cee eee Testing RecipePlus objects 0 0 ccc eee Using the RecipePlus Components graphic library Using buttons with recipe objects 0 0 ccc ees Viewing data values that are saved at run time 30 Using macros Using macros to assign values to tags 2 cee Using the Macros editor 2024404 0bc0eddededeveceuns baw e dbee WHC 4OUSC MACOS 4455 4 d ube SS oar en ed wd a dere ae ween Running macros when tags or expressions change value Where to assign macros 1 eens A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications TSmMINOlOSY 4 24 6 4 05 558 24445 KS 4 oo 0 3SS8 SARE SR SERRE ee OHSS Summary Of SIGDS 2 cc4544 radi b 2445654564 dae ai sees Converting PanelBuilder 1400e application files Equivalent graphic objects 0
367. hic displays To view an image that you ve already imported m Inthe Images folder double click the image name or right click it and then click Open Arow Down Pumphouse Images Iv Image attributes Type Monochrome Width Height 22 4 22 Using the Image Browser to import images Use the Image Browser to import images as needed while you set up graphic objects In the Image Browser you can import images into the application m select the image to use on a graphic object m delete images from the application To open the Image Browser use one of these methods m Inan object s Properties dialog box click the Browse button next to the Image box Depending on the type of object the Image box could be located on the General tab Label tab or States tab For information about opening the Properties dialog box see page 20 28 m With one or more objects selected in the Property Panel click the Image property and then click the Browse button For information about opening the Property Panel see page 20 29 19 23 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 24 Click an image to select it Image Browser x Select image Preview Add from File Launch Library Paste from Library Delete kulnstepcontrol korea south_flag Overview Overview Overviews 19 21 e ire portugal_flag pumproom spain_flag steeping steepingz steeping steeping4
368. history buttons The operator can press the print alarm history button to print a report of all the alarm messages in the alarm log file The report can include the time alarms occurred and were acknowledged For information about the alarm log file see page 9 10 To set up a print alarm history button 1 Double click the button Print Alarm History Button Properties x Appearance Border style z Back style Solid Shape Rectangle Touch margins Horizontal margin 0 Filtering Filtered triggers Other MV Audio General Label Print Common Border width MV Border uses back color 4 WB Back Color Pattern style W Border Color Nore C Pattern Color Highlight color Blink Vertical margin 0 Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and whether to filter the alarms to include in the report In the Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button In the Print tab specify what information to print on the report In the Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 Setting up graphic objects Setting up print alarm status buttons The operator can press the print alarm status button to print a report of the
369. holders can provide a way to use one graphic display to represent a number of similar operations For example suppose you are creating displays for a plant that cans corn and peas The machinery used in both processes is identical Instead of creating two displays and specifying corn related tags in one display and pea related tags in another you can create one display and not specify any tag names Where a tag name is required type a tag placeholder Use parameter files or parameter lists to specify which tags to substitute for which placeholders when a display opens at run time For information about using parameter files see page 25 4 For information about using parameter lists see page 25 7 You can also use tag placeholders with global objects You can assign tag placeholders to the connections for base objects and to connections for reference objects with the LinkConnections property set to False For more information about global objects see page 25 10 You can use tag placeholders in m the graphic display that opens when the application is first run Specify the graphic display to open and the parameter file or parameter list to use with it in the Startup editor m graphic displays that are opened using goto display buttons Specify the graphic display to open and the parameter file or parameter list to use with it when you set up the button m graphic displays that are opened using display list selectors Specify the graph
370. ibility animation as well as in an expression to control some other aspect of animation when you set up visibility set the Expression true state to Invisible If you do not do this the object could appear briefly in its design time location and orientation before animating properly For more information about setting up visibility animation see Help Example Using visibility animation to set up security for a graphic display This example shows how to use visibility animation to control what operators can see In a graphic display that all users have access to only the Admin user can see the graphic object to which this animation is attached This example uses the security function CurrentUserName The function returns the string value of the Account ID user name for the user who is currently logged in The CurrentUserName function is case sensitive All user names use uppercase letters so make sure that you use uppercase letters in your expression 22 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 10 To specify which user can view an object in a display 1 Select the object to limit visibility to 2 Open the Animation dialog box and click the Visibility tab 3 In the Expression box type this CurrentUserName ADMIN 4 For the Expression true state click Visible 5 Click Apply and then click Close At run time the object is visible only if the Admin user is logged in Setting up color an
371. ic displays to open and the parameter files or parameter lists to use with them when you set up the display list selector m the graphic display that opens when a logout button is pressed m the graphic display specified in the Project Settings Runtime tab when auto logout is enabled m displays specified in the Display tab of the Global Connections editor 25 Using parameters and global objects Summary of steps Follow these steps to use tag placeholders with parameter files or parameter lists l In the Graphics editor create graphic objects and assign tag placeholders to the objects If you are using parameter files create parameter files in the Parameters editor for each set of tags that the display will use In the parameter files specify which tags to substitute for which placeholders In the Graphics editor create goto display buttons logout buttons or display list selectors for opening the display containing tag placeholders Specify the appropriate parameter files in the graphic objext s dialog box To use parameter lists specify the tags for the lists in the dialog box For information about setting up goto display buttons see page 21 35 For information about setting up display list selectors see page 21 37 For information about setting up buttons see page 21 17 If the startup display uses tag placeholders in the Startup editor specify the parameter file to use with the startup display To use a par
372. ic object and text Scales consist of major ticks represented by long lines and minor ticks represented by short lines To indicate the values of major or minor ticks use text objects 21 Setting up graphic objects Gauges make it easy to see limits Gauges display numeric values in dial format They are useful for displaying a value in relation to its lower and upper limits For example a temperature gauge shows the current temperature in relation to its minimum and maximum extremes By looking at the position of the needle on the gauge pointing left up or right the operator can tell at a glance whether the temperature is nearer its lower limit nearer the middle or nearer its upper limit Gauges are used instead of numeric displays when it s important for the operator to recognize an abnormal condition instantly either from far away when the scale on the gauge isn t visible or before the operator has had the opportunity to determine the exact reading on the gauge This characteristic of gauges is one of the reasons why they are used in automobile instrumentation Thresholds change a gauge s fill color As the needle sweeps higher on a gauge the gauge can fill the area behind the needle with a color The gauge can change its fill color to help an operator recognize abnormal conditions The change in color happens when the tag or expression value crosses a threshold you set up for the gauge For example m Ifthe tempera
373. ic objects Setting up symbols The symbol is an indicator that displays a single monochrome image that changes color to match the state of a process or operation This allows the operator to see the status of a process or operation at a glance The error state The symbol s error state is displayed at run time when the Indicator connection is unassigned the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up the Trigger type is set to Value and the Indicator connection value does not match one of the state values you set up the Trigger type is set to LSB and the position of the least significant bit set in the Value connection does not match one of the state values you set up the Trigger type is set to Value and an array tag has been assigned to the object s Value connection To set up a symbol l Double click the symbol Symbol Properties x General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width 4 Shape Rectangle Symbol settings Number of states Trigger type 4 X Value X Image ARROWRT B OK Cancel Help ok 21 41 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 42 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the symbol looks like at run time and the number of states for the symbol m Inthe States tab specify how the symbol s appearance changes
374. ication B are not reflected in the component in Application A All the language strings associated with the component in Application A are copied into Application B For example if you add an information message file for which three sets of language strings have been defined all three sets of strings are copied into Application B regardless of which languages have been set up for Application B For more information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 To add a component from Application A into Application B 1 In Application B right click the type of editor that was used to create the desired component For example to add a graphic display component right click the Displays icon in the Graphics folder 2 Click Add Component Into Application Look in E Gfx da c EJ A E ACTIVITY gfs E Overview gfx x E ALARM gfx E processdesc gfx Meese E INFORMATION gfs E PumpRoom afs Documents FanRoom gfx PumpRoomD esc gfx E E FanRoomDesc gfx Ej steeping gfx E Germ Dampers gf E SteepingDesc gfx Desktop E GermDesc gfx E GetmMachine ofx a feo GermM achineControl gfx E GermStepControl afx My Documents E Kiln Status gfx E KilnDesc gfx SE Kilnmachine2 gfx E KilnMachineControl gfx By ante E KilnStepControl gfx Sti File name Places Files of type Graphic Displays afx x Cancel 18 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 18 4 3 In the dialog bo
375. ick the Browse button and then create an expression in the Expression editor Use this method if you want to check the expression syntax or to use multiple lines for the expression For more information about expressions see Chapter 23 Replacing tags using tag substitution You can replace tags assigned to the graphic objects in your display by using tag substitution You can also replace the tags used in expressions assigned to graphic objects For example if you assign a tag called HoistHeight to multiple objects in the display and then decide to use the tag Hoist height instead you can use tag substitution to quickly replace the old tag with the new tag You can replace m atag name with or without folder names m a folder name m the text in an expression m tags contained in embedded variables To replace tags 1 Select one or more objects 20 Using graphic objects To select all the objects in the display on the Edit menu click Select All 2 On the Edit menu click Tag Substitution To replace the tags for a single object you can right click it and then click Tag Substitution Tag Substitution Search for tank_flow or hank_input_conmectort flank_output_ connector Replace with Jtank1_flow ftank_flows lank_input_ connector tank_output_ connector i Confirm replacements Close Help For details about the options in the Tag Substitution dialog box see Help A log f
376. idth M Border uses back color Faisedinset a O Back color Back style Pattern style oO Border color Soid st None _ Pattern color C Fore color T Blink Text Font Size Alignment for J fo wi x wl coe eee M Word wrap Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the string display looks like at run time 21 33 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Inthe Common tab specify the string display s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression whose data is displayed For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up string input enable buttons The operator can press the string input enable button to open a string pop up scratchpad or keyboard The operator can enter text in the scratchpad or keyboard and then send the string to the data source For more information about using the string input enable button at run time see page 17 6 To set up a string input enable button 1 Double click the string input enable button General Label String Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color 4 BB Back color Back style Pattern style O Border color Sod z None a _ Pattern color
377. ied in the Project Settings Runtime tab when auto logout is enabled m graphic displays that are opened using the Remote Display Number global connection Use parameter files or parameter lists to specify which tags or folders to substitute for which placeholders For global objects you can specify the tags or folders of tags using global object parameters For more information about using parameter files parameter lists and global object parameters see Chapter 25 Creating tag placeholders A tag placeholder is the cross hatch character followed by a number from 1 to 500 The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name including folder names For example you could create a parameter file specifying that the tag placeholder 1 Folderl You could assign the folder and a tag name to a graphic object s connection 1 Tag1 You can assign tag placeholders in m the Connections tab of an object s Properties dialog box m the Connections tab of the Property Panel m the Expression box in the Animation dialog box m anywhere that you can insert an embedded variable For information about embedded variables see Chapter 24 To create a tag placeholder m Type the cross hatch character followed by a number no space in between For example 1 Performing basic operations on objects Once you have drawn an object you can select the object and work with it You can move objects m copy objects 20 38 20
378. ile is displayed after substitution It provides details on the substitution process and results If the substitution fails the reason will be shown The last line shows where the log file is located in case you want to review it in the future Using tag placeholders Tag placeholders provide a way to use one graphic display to represent a number of similar operations For example suppose you are creating displays for a plant that cans corn and peas The machinery used in both processes is identical Instead of creating two displays and specifying corn related tags in one display and pea related tags in another you can create one display and not specify any tag names Where a tag name is required type a tag placeholder You can use tag placeholders wherever you would normally assign a tag to an object including in expressions and embedded variables You can also use tag placeholders in the expressions you create to animate objects You can also use tag placeholders with global objects For more information see Chapter 25 You can use tag placeholders in 20 37 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE m the graphic display that opens when the application is first run m graphic displays that are opened using a goto display button m graphic displays that are opened using a display list selector m the graphic display that opens when the logout button is pressed to log the logged on user out m the graphic display specif
379. iles are used with graphic displays to specify the tags a display l uses at runtime You assign parameter files to displays in the Startup editor and in the dialog box for configuring goto display buttons and display list selectors l Syntax l replacement tagname Example l 23 A_COLOR I 23 in any expression in a graphic would be replaced by the tag A_COLOR 1 Data_logging Particulate_input 2 Data_logging Particulate_flow 3 Data_logging Particulate_output For details about using the Parameters editor see Help To open the Help press F1 on your keyboard Example Using a parameter file to replace tag placeholders This example shows how to use a graphic display called Canning Overview with two sets of tags one for canning corn and one for canning peas The Canning Overview display is opened from a graphic display called Main Menu l Tag type String Analog Analog Analog Tag name Corn Name Corn Temp Corn Weight Corn Level Create these sets of tags You can use both HMI and data server tags Tag name Pea Name Pea_Temp Pea_Weight Pea Level 25 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 6 2 Create two parameter files called Corn and Peas containing these parameters Corn Peas 1 Corn_Name 1 Pea_Name 2 Corn_Temp 2 Pea_Temp 3 Corn_ Weight 3 Pea_ Weight 4 Corn_ Level 4 Pea_ Level 3 Inthe Canning Overview display assign tag placeholders to the Va
380. ill run on a personal computer only m Remote Silence Assign a tag or an expression to this connection to allow the data source to silence all alarms for applications that will run on a personal computer only Remote Ack All Assign a tag to this connection to allow the data source to acknowledge all alarms at once 9 23 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE m Status Reset Assign a tag to this connection to notify the data source that the alarm status has been reset Remote Status Reset Assign a tag or expression to this connection to allow the data source to reset the alarm status Close Display Assign a tag to this connection to notify the data source that the alarm display has closed m Remote Close Display Assign a tag or expression to this connection to allow the data source to close the alarm display Assign tags or expressions to these connections in the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor For more detailed information about how these connections work see the next sections How the Silence connection works When the application starts this connection has a value of 0 When alarms are silenced this connection is set to 1 for the hold time and the internal beeper is turned off At the end of the hold time the connection is reset to 0 If the silence event is triggered by a button press this connection is set to 1 for the hold time or for the duration of the button press whichever is lo
381. imation With color animation an object changes color based on a tag value or the result of an expression You can specify up to 16 color changes A to P for any object Colors can be solid or blinking For each color change specify the value or threshold at which the color is to change and specify the colors to change to At run time when the value reaches or crosses the threshold the color changes Choosing between Solid Original and Shaded Fill Styles allows for more animation options for the blinking object Solid Allows you to change the colors and they will have a solid look to them Original Retains the colors and the shading of the object as it was imported Both the line and fill color can be altered from the original using Blink Shaded Uses a tight dot pattern to soften or give a shaded appearance Some types of graphics are made up of many elements An individual element can be selected and have color animation applied just to it Color animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels KEEP ORIGINAL COLOR Using the Original Fill Style allows for more variations on animating an object Instead of a specific color for the object s non blink state the object s original color can be used If Original is used as a Fill Style on any state the color palette boxes will not allow a color change By selecting the Blink option a different color can be used for both the Line and the Fill color or
382. ime application file is not created You must remove or turn off the unsupported features before you can create the run time application file For information about creating run time application files see Chapter 14 The remainder of this appendix lists the features that are not supported in previous versions of FactoryTalk View ME Station The tables also show how to remove or replace the unsupported features Features that are not supported in version 5 10 or earlier These version 6 0 features are not supported in version 5 10 of RS View ME Station nor in earlier versions The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature To remove or replace this feature Do this Graphics objects with Shaded and Delete the Shaded or Original animation from Graphics Original animation is not support on objects animation v5 10 or earlier release Or User can select Solid in Fill Style to create version5 1 mer Features that are not supported in version 5 00 or earlier These version 5 10 features are not supported in version 5 00 of RSView ME Station nor in earlier versions The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature To remove or replace this feature Do this Tag or expression assigned to the Delete the tag or expression assigned in the Display tab of Close an On Top Display or Close the Global Connections editor All On Top Displays connections Tag or expression assigned to the Delete the tag or expres
383. import 5 Click Open The file is converted to drawing objects and grouped and then the grouped object is placed in the graphic display Using ActiveX objects ActiveX objects use tags or expressions to exchange information with the data source The properties and connections available for a particular ActiveX object depend on the third party vendor s implementation ActiveX objects support visibility animation only If your application will run on a PanelView Plus CE terminal the ActiveX object must be available for both the development system running on Windows 7 Professional XP Professional Server 2003 R2 Vista or Server 2008 and the PanelView Plus CE terminal platform Make sure you install and register the Windows CE version of the ActiveX object on the PanelView Plus CE PanelView Plus terminals do not support ActiveX objects To create an ActiveX object 1 Select the ActiveX Control tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag until the object is the size you want 20 21 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 22 Insert an Actives Control K IRSLins Comm Control IRSLins Hardware Tree Control Cancel ASMLangSwitchButton Class ASMMacroButton Class Help ASOPCBrowse Control JATReportBbrowser Control ScaleByr Class EE ScriptContral Object Register Search Assistant Control SelectFile Class Unregister SetBwr Class Shelsel Class j E
384. in Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 4 Click Open The library is copied into the Displays folder Using libraries to store displays with multiple languages The maximum number of languages an application can use is 40 during development and 20 at run time Since the libraries are stored outside of the HMI project folder and are available to all applications they do not have this limit However since they are not stored in the HMI project folder you cannot export the strings in library displays for translation Instead export a graphic display for translation import the translated strings then add the display into the library When you use a library display in your application make sure you add to your application the languages that you plan to use from the library 19 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 18 To save a library display with multiple languages l Zs Create a graphic display Export the text for your application which will include the text used in the graphic display Translate the text strings into each desired language saving the file with a new name for each language Import the files for all the new languages Add the graphic display to the Libraries folder The library is crea
385. inal or monitor Select this project window size PanelView Plus PanelView Plus Compact 400 or 600 320x240 Panel View Plus 700 or 1000 640x480 PanelView Plus CE 700H or 1000H PanelView Plus 6 700 or 1000 PanelView Plus Compact 1000 4 12 4 Working with applications For this terminal or monitor Select this project window size Panel View Plus 1250 800x600 Panel View Plus CE 1250H PanelView Plus CE 1200P 1200M or 1200W Panel View Plus 6 1250 PanelView Plus 1500 1024x768 PanelView Plus CE 1500H PanelView Plus CE 1500P 1500M or 1500W Panel View Plus 6 1500 PanelView Plus CE 1700M 1280x1024 PanelView Plus CE 2000M 1600x1200 Custom size If you are creating an application for a Panel View Plus 400 or 600 terminal m Resize the default message displays so that the entire message is visible m Reposition the ALARM display from the default position 0 0 as this position is below the viewing area of the terminals Changing the project window size after creating graphic displays The project window size is used for all graphic displays of the Replace type If you change the window size after you have already created graphic displays you have the option of scaling graphic displays If you choose to scale graphic displays all Replace and On Top displays are resized and the objects in them are scaled to fit the new size You can also specify whether to scale the font size and border size of
386. individually 22 Animating graphic objects CONTROLLING COLOR SHADING Using the Shaded Fill Style along with the Blink option allows control of the shading aspect of a display object by changing combinations of Line and Fill and different colors For more information about setting up color animation see Help Example 1 Creating a text object that blinks This example describes how to create a text object that constantly blinks between two colors Since the blinking is not based on changes in tag values the expression is simply a constant value that matches the value for the selected threshold For details about creating text see page 20 12 1 Select the text object 2 Open the Animation dialog box and then click the Color tab 3 Inthe Expression box type 0 Zero is the default value for threshold A In the list box click threshold A Leave the value in the Value box as 0 For the line color click Blink If desired click Blink for the fill color too For each color click the color box and then click the color to use Click Apply 7 i SS Example 2 Creating an object that changes color as the fill level changes This example describes how to create a rectangle object that changes color as the object s fill level increases This example uses a tag called Hopper1 FlourLevel The tag has a range of 1 to 100 When the flour level reaches 80 the rectangle blinks between gray and yellow to warn the operator that
387. information about the options in the dialog box see Help To close the dialog box click OK You can use the Polygon tool to reshape lines polygons polylines and rectangles For more information see page 20 43 Creating rectangles and squares To create a rectangle or square l 2 gt Select the Rectangle tool Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag until the rectangle or square is the size you want To draw a square hold down Ctrl while you drag To change how the object looks double click it to open the object s Properties dialog box Select rectangle or square options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help To close the dialog box click OK You can use the Polygon tool to reshape the rectangle into a polygon For more information see page 20 43 Creating rounded rectangles and squares Due to a Windows limitation you cannot rotate rounded rectangles and rounded squares To create a rounded rectangle or square l Select the Rounded Rectangle tool 20 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE E Rounded rectangle tool 20 20 Te Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag until the rectangle or square is the size you want To draw a square hold down Ctrl while you drag You can change how rounded the corners are by using the handle that appears inside the rounded rectangle Click the handle an
388. ing a goto display button m graphic displays that are opened using a display list selector m the graphic display that opens when the logout button is pressed m the graphic display that opens when auto logout is used m graphic displays that are opened using the Remote Display Number global connection Use parameter files or parameter lists to specify which tags or folders to substitute for which placeholders For global objects you can specify the tags or folders of tags using global object parameters For more information about using parameter files parameter lists and global object parameters see Chapter 25 The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name including folder names For example you could create a parameter file specifying that the tag placeholder 1 Folderl You could assign the folder and a tag name to a graphic object s connection 1 Tag1 22 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE a Browse button 22 6 To create a tag placeholder m Inthe Expression box type the cross hatch character followed by a number no space in between For example 1 Using expressions Many types of animation can be achieved using expressions You can use expressions containing tag values constants mathematical equations security functions and 1f then else logic A tag name or tag placeholder can be included as part of an expression or it can stand alone as the entire expression For more informa
389. ingle display only For more information about using goto display buttons see page 13 4 To set up a goto display button 1 Double click the goto display button 21 35 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 36 Goto Display Button Properties Ed General Label Common Appearance Border style Border width Raised 4 MV Border uses back color B WB Back color ack style Pattern style HB Border color Sold z None L Pattern color E Highlight color Shape i Blink Rectangle Display settings Display m Parameter file E Parameter list B Display position Top position Left position Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo o Other M Audio 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time the display to open and the parameter file or parameter list to use if any m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up close display buttons When the operator presses a close display button at run time the graphic display that the button is on closes You can set up the button to write out a value when the display closes For more information about using clo
390. int Only Object Circular Scale Scrolling Text Print Alarm Button Horn Silence Button Lamp Horn Test Button Select Operator Button Enable Disable Security Button Verify Password Button The FactoryTalk View Password button opens a dialog box that allows the user to type and verify a new password B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications Unsupported settings and controls This section describes PanelBuilder settings and controls that are not used in FactoryTalk View Settings and controls for alarms FactoryTalk View does not use these PanelBuilder features and settings to manage alarms Ack setting for alarm messages in FactoryTalk View all alarms can be acknowledged m bit alarm acknowledgement FactoryTalk View does not use these PanelBuilder controls to manage alarms m Remote Ack All Handshake Tag m Remote Clear All Alarm Tag Remote Clear All Alarm Handshake Tag Invalid characters in screen names and tag names Characters in PanelBuilder screen names and tag names that are not supported in FactoryTalk View are replaced with the underscore character Time and date PanelBuilder time and date formats are not converted For details about FactoryTalk View time and date formats see page 21 15 External fonts PanelBuilder external fonts are not converted When you convert your application you can specify the font to use instead For details see Help for the Machine Edition Import Wizard Scr
391. ion It is located under the application s HMI server in the Explorer window just above the FactoryTalk System folder ffy Ubjects 5 Screen Demo ne Objects 5 Screen Demo ASLing Enterprise You can create additional OPC data servers for your application For example you might want to use an RSLinx Enterprise data server and a KEPServerEnterprise data server If you use RSLinx Enterprise you cannot use Logix5000 with an Ethernet connection to connect to other Allen Bradley devices or bridge to DH or Remote I O networks If you need to do this use RSLinx Classic Setting up RSLinx Enterprise data servers Use an RSLinx Enterprise data server when you want to use RSLinx Enterprise communications You can use the Communication Setup editor to add drivers add devices set up driver and device properties and set up device shortcuts To set up communications in RSLinx Enterprise 1 In the Explorer window open the RSLinx Enterprise data server fa Objects 5 Screen Demo oe Objects 5 Screen Demo RS Lins Enterprize al 2 Double click the Communication Setup editor Communication Setup 3 Ina new application the RSLinx Enterprise Configuration Wizard opens Follow the instructions to create a new configuration or use an existing device configuration Once you make a choice and click Finish the Communication Setup editor opens In an existing application double clicking Communication Setup opens the Communication Setu
392. ion about setting up users and granting them access to applications see Chapter 11 To open the Malthouse sample application l Start FactoryTalk View Studio 2 Click the Existing tab Hew Open Machine Edition Application Hew Existing Baggage 640450 Baggage _S00 600 BizBikes_ME lnstantFizz_ME Malthouse Clogs 640x480 Malthouse Clos 800600 Objects 5 Screen Demo Objects_ 640x460 Objects_ 800x600 Language English United States en US T Open Cancel 3 Click Malthouse Clgx 640x480 or Malthouse Clgx 800x600 4 Specify a language for the application and then click Open FactoryTalk View Studio displays the sample application in the Explorer window 2 Exploring FactoryTalk View Studio Problems opening applications If you have trouble opening an application in FactoryTalk View Studio the problem could be a Microsoft Windows security setting You must have read and write access to the folder that contains the HMI projects For example if you belong to the Windows user group called Power Users and the group does not have write access to the HMI projects folder you won t be able to open applications in FactoryTalk View The default location for the HMI projects folder is C Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or Users Public Public Documents RS ViewEnterprise ME Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional
393. ion in editors For information about working with editors components see Chapter 18 in the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User s Guide Starting and exiting FactoryTalk View Studio FactoryTalk View Studio is configuration software for developing machine level applications This software runs on the Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Vista Business and Home Basic and Windows Server 2008 operating systems Starting FactoryTalk View Studio To start FactoryTalk View Studio m On the Windows Start menu select Programs and then click FactoryTalk View Studio FactoryTalk View comes with several sample applications We suggest you open the Malthouse sample application now to use while you try out the instructions in the remainder of this chapter See the instructions on page 2 2 Exiting FactoryTalk View Studio To exit FactoryTalk ViewStudio m On the File menu click Exit If there are any unsaved changes in open editors FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to save the changes before exiting the program 2 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Opening sample applications The sample applications are designed for two screen resolutions 640 x 480 and 800 x 600 Select the application that matches the screen resolution of your run time monitor When you first install FactoryTalk View sample applications are accessible to all users For informat
394. ions the password is not case sensitive 6 To close the Login window and complete the login press Enter What happens when a user logs in When a user logs in m Ifthe previous user did not log out the previous user is logged out now If a logout macro is set up for the previous user the logout macro runs assigning values to tags If the previous user belongs to a group and a logout macro is set up for the group the logout macro runs m The new user is logged in 17 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 17 4 m Ifa login macro is set up for the new user the macro runs assigning values to tags If the new user belongs to a group and a login macro 1s set up for the group the login macro runs Problems with logging in Login is unsuccessful under these circumstances m Ifthe graphic display changes remotely before the user has finished logging in the login is cancelled m Ifthe user name doesn t match the settings in the Runtime Security editor the user is not logged in m Ifthe user password doesn t match the password set up in FactoryTalk Security in the Users folder 4 00 or later applications or the password set up in the Runtime Security editor for 3 20 and earlier applications the user is not logged in m Ifthe screen resolution is smaller than 280 pixels wide by 84 pixels high the Login window cannot open m Ifthe screen resolution is smaller than 236 pixels wide by 208 pixels high
395. iption Newt Minimu 0 Scale i Masimum 1100 Offset E Data Type Defaut New Data Source Type Device C Memon Help Form area Address IPLESN77 OO SY Sait Faz IUSSINE me E 1 Alarm tags Air dryer on off 2 Alarm_tags Blend header _ pre 3 Alarm_tags Blend sensor on t 4 Alarm_tags Butane_ flow 5 Alarm_tags Butane_mode 6 T a E SS Folder hierarchy C Data_logg ee system Alarm_tags Compressor_ on off Alarm_tags Diesel blend on o Alarm_tags Diesel blend paci Alarm_tags Diesel blend perc Alarm_tags lsobutane_flow Alarm_tags lsobutane_mode Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog The information you enter in the form area is displayed in the spreadsheet area The folder hierarchy displays all the folders that you and FactoryTalk View create The Tags editor has special items on the View menu to control the appearance of the editor and extra tools on the toolbar Use the Tags editor to m create folders m duplicate nest and delete folders 7 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Al Refresh tool m create and view tags m edit duplicate and delete tags For details about using the Tags editor see Help Updating the contents of the Tags editor You can create tags in the Tags editor but you can also create them as you work in other editors and you can import them from an existing tag database To see the
396. is guide Editors that have components With some editors you enter information in a single window or a tabbed dialog box Other editors allow you to create multiple components such as graphic displays or message files Each component is stored in a separate file with its own name You can create components in these editors Graphics components include graphic displays global object displays and graphic libraries each in their own folder Parameters Local Messages Information Messages Data Log Models Macros RecipePlus The Explorer window lists the components you create under the icon for the editor you used to create the component You can use the Images editor to copy bitmap images into your application but not to create new images Each image you copy is listed as a component under the editor To view a list of components for an editor Click the symbol to the left of the editor icon or double click the editor name Working with components This section describes how to perform basic operations that are common to all components 18 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Fi Save tool ki Close button on the title bar Close Close button in component 18 2 For information on working with components in particular editors see the chapters later in this guide Creating components To create a new component do one of the following m Drag the component icon into the workspace
397. isia ar AE Arabic United Arab Emirates ar YE Arabic Yemen hy AM Armenian Armenia az AZ Cyrl Azeri Cyrillic Azerbaijan az AZ Latn Azeri Latin Azerbaijan F 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE F 2 RFC1766 Language Country Region Name eu ES Basque Basque be BY Belarusian Belarus bg BG Bulgarian Bulgaria ca ES Catalan Catalan zh HK Chinese Hong Kong SAR Default Sort Order Stroke Count zh HK Chinese Hong Kong SAR Alternate Sort Order Stroke Count zh MO Chinese Macau SAR Default Sort Order Pronunciation zh MO Chinese Macau SAR Alternate Sort Order Stroke Count zh CN Chinese China Default Sort Order Pronunciation zh CN Chinese China Alternate Sort Order Stroke Count zh SG Chinese Singapore Default Sort Order Pronunciation zh SG Chinese Singapore Alternate Sort Order Stroke Count zh TW Chinese Taiwan Default Sort Order Stroke Count zh TW Chinese Taiwan Alternate Sort Order Bopomofo hr HR Croatian Croatia cs CZ Czech Czech Republic da DK Danish Denmark div MV Dhivehi Maldives nl BE Dutch Belgium nlI NL Dutch The Netherlands en AU English Australia en BZ English Belize en CA English Canada en CB English Caribbean
398. itch buttons m create the run time application To add languages to an application 1 On the Tools menu click Languages Language Configuration General RFC1766 name for each language Langaas I Arabic Kuwait ar KA Chinese PRC zh CN Languages added English Canada en A to the application English United States en US French Belgium fr BE Fi French Canada fr CA French Switzerland fr CH German Switzerland de CH Current application Current language English Canada en A language Remove E sport Import Set As Default Display undefined strings using the default language OF Cancel Apply Help 2 Add languages For details see Help 12 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 12 6 Removing languages You can also use the Language Configuration dialog box to remove languages When you remove a language all the strings for the language are deleted the next time you save the application Saving a component deletes strings for the removed language from the component Exporting application text strings for translation There are two options for exporting text strings m one language at a time saving the text in a tab delimited text file in Unicode format The file can be translated and then imported back into the application m all languages at once exporting into a single Microsoft Excel spreadsheet The strings in the spreadsheet can be translat
399. ivity as it is happening You can m plot data for as many as eight tags or expressions on one trend m create a trend that is part of a graphic display or acts as the entire graphic display plot data over time or plot one variable against another in an XY Plot chart to show the relationship between them m display isolated or non isolated graphs Isolated graphing places each pen in a separate band of the chart With non isolated graphing pen values can overlap m create buttons to allow the operator to pause scroll and print the trend data The illustration below shows a trend that has been added to a graphic display You can view the Kiln Status display by opening the Malthouse sample application 28 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Pe Kiln Status Bakerp Display Air Off Temp N NNN deg F Monday March 18 2002 Air On Temp N NNN dep F The trend graphic object 12 51 44 PM Air OF Blue Air On Green 12 54 44 PM F show Trand Graph Return MUNA deg F F9 Current versus historical data The data displayed in a trend can come from two sources For current values data comes from the value table as it is collected The value table is a record of the most recent values collected from the data source and is stored in temporary memory while the application is running For historical values data comes from a data log model s log file if a model is assigned to the trend You c
400. jects a E l The margins at the top and The margins at the left and bottom edges are called 4 ight edges are called vertical touch margins a horizontal touch margins a is E The bounding box If the object s shape is a circle or ellipse the touch margin applies to the object s bounding box not the object s border The bounding box is an invisible square or rectangle that surrounds the object When you select the object the selection handles show the location of the bounding box a E n The invisible bounding box is just m inside the selection handles To create touch margins use one of these methods m Inthe General tab of the button s Properties dialog box type the number of pixels for the touch margins in the Horizontal margin and Vertical margin boxes m Inthe Properties tab of the Property Panel type the number of pixels for the HorizontalMargin and VerticalMargin properties Assigning function keys to buttons You can assign function keys to the buttons in your displays to allow the operator to press the buttons using the function keys on the run time terminal or the function keys on a keyboard if one is available You can also assign a function key to the numeric input cursor point You can assign up to 34 function keys to each graphic display Here are some tips for assigning function keys m Where possible use the same function keys for the same operations in all your graphic displ
401. jects into position You can lock graphic objects or groups of objects into position by converting them to wallpaper Once you convert objects to wallpaper you cannot select or edit them unless you unlock the wallpaper Wallpaper objects cannot be animated at run time If the grid is on wallpaper objects are positioned behind the grid If you just want to lock the objects into place while you re working in the display unlock the wallpaper when you re finished If you want to use the wallpaper objects as a background for your display leave the wallpaper locked For more information about creating a background for your display see page 19 13 20 53 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 54 94 Setting up graphic objects This chapter describes how to set up graphic objects It describes how to set up objects spatial properties names and visibility work with objects that have states position objects for touch screens assign function keys to buttons use the keyboard to navigate to and select objects at run time link buttons to lists and trends repeat a button s action by holding down the button ensure values are read by the data source before sending new values set up objects For objects that are not described in other chapters of the manual this chapter provides information about how to use the objects For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 For information
402. jects that are configurable in FactoryTalk View Studio Using the tables The tables beginning on the next page will help you choose which objects to use to control your application machines and process The tables group the objects according to function provide an overview of what each object does and list cross references to more detailed information about using the objects About connections Many of the objects use connections to interact with the data source A connection is the link between the object and the data source Depending on an object s function the object may have more than one connection For example a momentary push button has a Value connection and an Indicator connection The Value connection is used to set a value at the data source and the Indicator connection is used to display the data source value in your graphic display By assigning tags or expressions to an object s connections you control the flow of data between the application and the data source which in turn controls your process or machines Assign tags or expressions to an object s connections in the Connections tab of the object s Properties dialog box see page 20 26 or in the Connections tab of the Property Panel see page 20 29 20 Using graphic objects Illustrating your displays Use this graphic object To do this Text Create text for labels or instructions in the display See page 20 12 Image
403. k Connections Assign tags in the Connections tab of the Properties dialog box m Right click the object and then click Connections Assign tags in the Connections tab of the Properties dialog box For information about m using the Tag Browser see page 6 6 m using the Properties dialog box see page 20 26 m using the Property Panel see page 20 29 Using expressions to manipulate tag values Many of the connections to which you can assign a tag also permit the use of expressions to perform logical or mathematical calculations on tag values If you assign an expression 20 35 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 36 FactoryTalk View monitors the expression value rather than the original tag value For example your machine might send values to the data source in the form of temperature in degrees Celsius You could use an expression to convert the value to degrees Fahrenheit and then monitor the expression result rather than the original tag value If you can assign an expression a Browse button is present in the Exprn column in the Connections tab Momentary Push Button Properties General States Common Connections PName ooo o Tag Expression Tag Expr na a E y ei Type the expression here Or Click the button to open the Expression editor To specify an expression do one of the following m Inthe Tag Expression column type the expression m Inthe Exprn column cl
404. k Test Display or Edit Display or click the Test Display and Edit Display tools Test mode is not the same as running the display Test mode does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box Also data logging is not turned on in test mode Using the Trends graphic library 28 10 The Trends graphic library contains a trend graphic object and buttons for controlling the trend It also contains numeric display objects that display the value of each tag used in the trend You can use the trend and objects as they are or you can edit them to suit your needs To use the objects drag and drop or copy and paste them into your graphic display For information about copying and pasting objects from the graphic libraries see page 20 41 f Trends Malthouse Clgx 640x48077 Library 28 Setting up trends To use the Trends graphic library 1 Open the Graphics folder and then open the Libraries folder 2 Double click the Trends library 3 Drag and drop or copy and paste objects into your display Using buttons to control the trend at run time You can use button graphic objects with the trend to allow the operator to pause the trend switch between pens or scroll the trend You can link buttons to a specific trend object or set up a button to work with whichever object is selected in the graphic display For information about linking buttons to objects see p
405. ks At run time when the Value connection at the data source changes from 0 to a non zero value the assigned information message display opens If the value matches a message s trigger value the associated information message appears in the information message display graphic object The object can be in the default INFORMATION display in an 21 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 27 8 information message display you have created or can be placed in any display in your application For information about setting up the information message display graphic object see page 21 65 What is displayed If the Value connection is unassigned the information message graphic display never opens automatically If the operator opens a graphic display containing an information message display object the object is blank The Value connection is rounded up to the nearest integer If the value does not match any of the trigger values in the specified message file the display is filled with question marks For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 If the message is too long to fit in the information message display object the last displayed character is replaced with an asterisk When the Value connection s value is 0 the information message graphic display is closed If you set up information messages in multiple languages messages are displayed in the current application language When a
406. ktop and to prevent access to Windows functions For more information about the DeskLock tool see Chapter 15 The DeskLock tool does not use FactoryTalk Security To limit the users who have access to the application or parts of the application you must set up user accounts and passwords If you set up the data source to open graphic displays remotely using global connections remote display changes occur whether or not the logged in user has security access to a given display For details about controlling display changes remotely see page 8 4 If you do not want to use FactoryTalk Security If you do not plan to use security for your application you can eliminate or minimize the use of FactoryTalk Security During installation users are set up as follows m an administrative user named Administrator is created m all users are granted initial access permissions m a Windows linked user group named Authenticated Users is created and added to the User Groups folder in the FactoryTalk Directory This means that any user who is authenticated by Windows that is has a password that allows access to the development computer can open FactoryTalk View Studio without providing a user name or password Authenticated users are not supported on Windows CE On Windows CE terminals Windows linked users must be added to FactoryTalk Directory before they can be logged in 11 Setting up security If you do not use FactoryTalk View
407. l alarms button and causes the newest alarm in the alarm history to be acknowledged m when the operator presses a clear alarm history button and causes the newest alarm in the alarm history to be deleted m when the Remote Close Display connection changes to a new non zero value m when the Remote Ack All connection changes to a new non zero value m when the newest alarm is acknowledged If you don t want the display to close when the newest alarm is acknowledged you can turn off this option in FactoryTalk View ME Station 9 31 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 32 To change how the display closes 1 In FactoryTalk View ME Station click Terminal Settings 2 Double click Alarms 3 Specify how you want the display to close How the alarm list graphic object works The alarm list graphic object displays the time an alarm was triggered and the time it was acknowledged if you set up the object to display acknowledged alarms At run time when a trigger connection at the data source matches a message s trigger value an alarm appears in the alarm list The alarm list can be in the ALARM MULTI LINE or HISTORY display in an alarm display you have created or can be placed on any display in your application You can use multiple alarm lists in the same display or in different displays Each alarm list displays information from the same alarm log file although you can set up different lists to displa
408. language switch occurs a message that was already in the information message display remains in the language that it originally appeared in New messages are displayed in the new language Changing the message file used at run time Your application can use only one message file at a time Follow this procedure to switch message files l 2 3 4 5 Shut down the application Start FactoryTalk View Studio and open the application In the Information Setup editor specify the new information message file Create the run time application See Chapter 14 Transfer the run time application to the run time platform For information about transferring applications to m a personal computer see Chapter 15 m a PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see Chapter 16 Run the new application 92 Setting up trends This chapter describes m what trends are m summary of steps for creating a trend graphic object m creating trends and the Trend Object Properties dialog box m the parts of the trend graphic object m the different chart types m choosing colors fonts lines and markers for the trend m testing the trend m using objects from the Trends graphic library m using buttons to control the trend at run time m printing trend data m run time errors for trends About trends A trend is a visual representation of current or historical tag values The trend provides operators with a way of tracking plant act
409. larm triggers in multiple languages When you create an alarm trigger its name is in the current application language You can export alarm triggers for translation and then import them back into the application For details see Chapter 12 Various graphic objects allow you to specify the alarm triggers to which the object s action applies using the name of the alarm trigger This is called filtering alarms When you translate trigger names into other languages the default language is used to display the trigger name in the object s selection list These graphic objects allow you to specify alarm triggers using a selection list called the Trigger Label Selector m alarm list m alarm status list m alarm banner m clear alarm history button m acknowledge all alarms button print alarm history button print alarm status button If the trigger label name has not been set up in the default language the Trigger Label Selector displays a question mark instead of the trigger label name To correct the display you must import the trigger labels for the default language You can also manually type in the trigger label names to use to filter alarms If you manually type in the trigger names specify the names in the default language If you change the default language you must re specify the trigger labels for each of the graphic objects listed above using the trigger label names in the new default language For more information abou
410. later ME Runtime 3 20 and earlier Use this tab to specify the FactorT alk Securite accounts for Machine Edition Runtime MER versions 4 0 and later Select a Factory alk Secunty account with the Add button and then assign 4 P security codes Click the browse buttons to select optional Login and Logout macros for the account Form area AccountID ADMINISTRATOR Login Macro i Logout Macro Remove Secunty Codes z Close HAMME iC MY OD ae ME MF WG MH o Frey Mw it wR hw L Next oh Ie Noi Oo i P Help D rns SE Seen Seo e iE Spreadsheet 1 DEFAULT YY YY YY YY YY YY YY p Ea ADMINISTRATOR YIEE rr Y r area 3 MAINTENANCE 4 OPERATOR ihn Oh Oh Oh Oe Ok Oe Ok Ok Ok kk ek ee Tae ee ee Use the form area to assign macros and security codes to users 11 Setting up security To add FactoryTalk Security users and groups to FactoryTalk View and assign security codes to them l Open the Runtime Security editor and select the ME Runtime 4 00 and later tab 2 Click Add 2 Select User or Group IOJ s PT Administrators ET Authenticated Users ET windows Administrators Group Create New gt Filter Users f Show groups only C Show users only C Show all In the Select User or Group dialog box add users and groups and select the ones to add to FactoryTalk View You can only select one user or group at a time For details on using the Select User or Group dialog box see H
411. le display the current temperature of an oven String display String tag values For example set up the data source to generate strings that report on the state of a process or operation or that provide the operator with instructions about what to do next 17 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 17 18 Use this graphic object To display this Bar graph Numeric values in bar graph format The bar graph increases or decreases in size to show the changing value Gauge Numeric values in dial format The gauge s needle moves around the dial to show the changing value Multistate indicator The state of a process on a panel that changes its color image or caption to indicate the current state Each state is set up to correspond to a numeric tag value or least significant bit Symbol The state of a process using a monochrome image that changes color to indicate the current state Each state is set up to correspond to a numeric tag value or least significant bit This object is useful for showing the state of a process or operation at a glance List indicator The state of a process using a list of possible states with the current state highlighted Each state is represented by a caption in the list and is set up to correspond to a numeric tag value or least significant bit This indicator is useful if you want to view the current state but also want to see the other possible state
412. le to create a legend use text objects Create the text objects and then position them next to the tick marks on the scale Group all the objects with the bar graph To set up a scale 1 Double click the scale Scale Properties Ea General Common Appearance Border style Border width i erea aei 2 BB Back color Line style Line width BB Border color Sold z fi BB Fore color Back style Blink Transparent Scale Setup r Up Tick direction C Left Right C Down Major ticks 3 Minor ticks 1 Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the scale looks like at run time Inthe Common tab specify the scale s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 Setting up graphic objects Setting up control list selectors Control list selectors allow an operator to scroll through a list of states for a process and select one of the states A highlight in the list shows the current state A control list selector can show several states at the same time but only one state can be selected at a time As the operator scrolls through the list each successive state is selected automatically If you want the operator to confirm the selection of a particular state before the state s value is written to the programmable controller cr
413. le controller that is linked to a sensor in the tank The tag s minimum value is 0 and its maximum value is 100 Use this expression for the alarm trigger if Acid_tank level gt 74 AND Acid tank level lt 90 then 1 else if Acid tank level gt 89 then 2 else 0 9 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 12 2 Use the Value trigger type for the alarm trigger 3 Specify these trigger values and alarm messages for the alarm trigger Trigger Value Message l Warning The acid tank has exceeded safe fill levels 2 Danger The level in the acid tank is too high At run time when the value of Acid tank level is 75 or greater Factory Talk View generates the first alarm message The second message is generated when the tag value is 90 or greater Using the expression in step 1 allows a range of values to trigger each alarm This is useful in case the tag is not being read at the exact moment it reaches a threshold level The Bit trigger type Use the Bit trigger type to generate multiple simultaneous alarm messages You can assign an array tag consisting of up to 1 024 bits to the trigger connection Each bit in the array whose value changes from 0 to 1 triggers an alarm if a message is set up for the bit position Example Trigger values using bit positions This example shows how to use bit positions to generate multiple simultaneous alarms The array tag uses 32 bits from N7 0 00 to N7 1
414. lications that will run in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 4 00 use the CurrentLanguage expression function to specify offsets for each trigger s messages in the Alarm Setup editor In the editor divide the messages for each trigger into sections for each language For information about the CurrentLanguage function see page 23 14 Optional alarm connections When an operator acknowledges an alarm the acknowledge time is recorded in the alarm log file and the alarm is silenced This might be all you require of your alarm system However you can use the optional alarm connections in the Alarm Setup editor to set up more sophisticated interactions with the data source when alarms are triggered acknowledged silenced and reset For example you can set up the data source to acknowledge silence and reset alarms You can also use optional alarm connections to close the alarm display or to allow the data source to close the alarm display There are two sets of optional alarm connections m connections that work with a specific alarm trigger You can assign a different set of connections to each alarm trigger m connections that apply to all alarms FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 18 You can also assign connections to alarm lists to allow the data source to determine which types of alarms to display in the lists For more information see page 9 32 Connections that work with a specific alarm trigger You
415. lications that will run on a personal computer only Toggle between sorting alarms in alarm lists and the alarm log file by time and by trigger value You can assign any caption you choose to the labels on the alarm buttons Linking buttons to objects You can link the acknowledge alarm button to a specific alarm list or alarm banner or set up the button to work with whichever alarm list or alarm banner is selected in the graphic display Similarly you can link the clear alarm banner button to a specific alarm banner This option is useful if you have multiple alarm banners in the same graphic display And you can link the alarm status mode button to a specific alarm status list For more information about linking buttons to objects see page 21 9 9 37 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 38 Key buttons You can also use these key button graphic objects to interact with the alarm list alarm status list or alarm banner This button Does this Move up Scrolls up one row in the list Move down Scrolls down one row in the list Page up Moves the highlight bar or cursor up one page in the list Page down Moves the highlight bar or cursor down one page in the list Home Moves the highlight bar or cursor to the top alarm in the list End Moves the highlight bar or cursor to the bottom alarm in the list Enter Acknowledges the currently selected alarm in alarm lists and alarm banners
416. lists the color properties you can assign using the color toolbars Property Foreground color Background color Back color No Yes Background color No Yes Border color Yes No Caption color Yes No Caption back color No Yes Fore color Yes No Foreground color Yes No Image color Yes No Image back color No Yes Legend color Yes No Needle color Yes No Pattern color Yes No 20 31 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 32 For objects with states the selected color is applied to the current state s color properties only In the Property Panel properties that apply to states have St_ at the beginning of the property name When to select colors using the toolbars For all the drawing objects except image and panel you can select colors from the color toolbars before you draw an object either before or after you click the object s tool The other objects are always drawn using their default colors but you can select the objects and then click the toolbars to change their colors The toolbars are especially useful for quickly assigning the same colors to multiple objects To display a color toolbar m On the View menu select Toolbars and then click Foreground Colors or Background Colors To close a color toolbar m On the View menu select Toolbars and then click Foreground Colors or Background Colors or click the toolbar s Close button Other methods for assigning colors You can also assign colors usin
417. lity to download your run time application and Windows TrueType font files from the development computer to the Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal Run time applications have the extension mer Windows TrueType font files have the extension ttf or ttc For information about creating the run time application file see Chapter 14 About the download You can use a Serial or Ethernet connection between the development computer and the PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal destination You must use one of the drivers listed in the previous section for the download You can download while an application is running on the run time computer You can download multiple applications one at a time to the same run time computer m anew copy of the application currently running on the run time computer for use the next time the application is started If the download process fails or is cancelled the application file will be deleted from the destination directories Make a copy of the application file before you begin and make sure there is enough storage space on the destination computer Serial downloads To perform a serial download make sure the terminal is connected to the development computer using the correct cable Connect a Panel View Plus CE PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus 6 terminal to the PC using the Allen Bradley serial cable 2711 NC13 To start the Transfer Utility tool On the development computer
418. lled Log In To create a startup display that uses security l Zi Set up FactoryTalk Security user accounts and passwords Assign Common Read and Common List Children security permissions to all users that are allowed to run the application at the FactoryTalk Directory or application level Assign Tag Write Value permission to all users that are allowed to write values to tags In the Runtime Security editor assign at least one security code to each user who you want to log in including the DEFAULT user In the Project Settings editor clear the Title bar check box Create a graphic display called Main Menu In the display create navigation buttons that give the operator access to the different displays in the application Assign a security code to the display so that only authorized users can open it Create a graphic display called Log In containing these button objects This button Does this Login Opens the Login dialog box Logout Logs the current user out and logs in the DEFAULT user Password Opens the Change Password dialog box so the user can specify a new password 11 Setting up security This button Does this Goto display Opens the Main Menu graphic display Shutdown Shuts down the application 8 Setup the goto display button in the Log In display to open the Main Menu display If desired attach visibility animation to the goto display button so that only logged in users can see the butt
419. lobal connection Use parameter files to specify which tags or folders to substitute for which placeholders For global objects you can specify the tags or folders of tags using global object parameters For more information about using parameter files and global object parameters see Chapter 25 The tag placeholder can replace any part of a tag name including folder names For example you could create a parameter file specifying that the tag placeholder 1 Folderl You could assign the folder and a tag name to a graphic object s connection 1 Tag1 23 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 6 To create a tag placeholder in an expression m Type the cross hatch character followed by a number no space in between For example 1 Constants A constant can have any of the following formats m integer 123 m floating point 123 45 m string constant character string Arithmetic operators Arithmetic operators perform math on two or more numeric values and calculate the result The arithmetic operators are Symbol Operator Example For these examples tag 5 and tag2 7 MOD KK addition subtraction multiplication division modulus remainder exponent tagl tag2 returns a value of 12 You can also use this operator with string operands See page 23 7 tagl tag2 returns a value of 2 tagl tag2 returns a value of 35 tagl tag2 returns a
420. low to orange to red as the tag s value increases Or a slider could move from left to right as a tag s value increases You can use these types of animation m color m fill m height horizontal position horizontal slider m rotation m vertical position m vertical slider m visibility 22 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 2 width The Objects 5 Screen Demo sample application contains many examples of animation In particular see the graphic displays called Animation I and Animation II Which objects can have which types of animation This table summarizes which types of objects support which types of animation For information about the different types of graphic objects see page 20 1 These objects Support these types of animation Drawing objects except images panels and All types rounded rectangles Rounded rectangles All types except rotation All other objects Visibility You can also attach animation to groups of drawing objects For more information see page 22 16 You can attach as many types of animation to a drawing object except images and panels as you like For example apply width height horizontal position and vertical position animation to an object to give it the appearance of moving into or out of the display as it shrinks and grows Using the Animation dialog box To attach animation use the Animation dialog box To open the Animati
421. lso use a single interlocked push button to send a value to a tag Use this graphic object 20 Using graphic objects To do this Ramp button Increase or decrease the value of a tag by a specified integer or floating point value For example use two ramp buttons together to create a raise lower control For details see page 21 27 Control list selector Select from a list of states for a process or operation The list is highlighted to show the current state and the operator can scroll through the list to select a different state The value assigned to the selected state is written to the tag For details see page 21 49 Piloted control list selector Select from a list of states for a process or operation The list is highlighted to show the current state and the operator or a remote device such as a programmable controller can scroll through the list to select a different state For details see page 21 51 Drawing object with horizontal or vertical slider animation Set the value of a tag by dragging the slider object The pixel position of the slider is translated into a value that is written to the tag If the value of the tag is changed at the data source the position of the slider changes to reflect this For information about animation see Chapter 22 ActiveX object Change tag values using a third party object connected to an analog digital or string tag including both HMI and data server tags
422. lue connection Using the numeric pop up keypad The keypad can accept up to 17 digits including the decimal point leading zero and minus sign Scratchpad area When the keypad is open no other objects in the graphic display can accept input 17 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 17 8 Using the numeric pop up scratchpad The scratchpad can accept up to 17 digits including the decimal point leading zero and minus sign Scratchpad area The scratchpad does not contain any buttons If the run time computer does not have an external keyboard or keypad attached the operator will be unable to enter values or close the scratchpad When the scratchpad is open no other objects in the graphic display can accept input Using buttons and keys with the numeric pop up windows You can use the following buttons and their keyboard or keypad equivalents with the numeric pop up keypad For the pop up scratchpad you can use the keys on an external keyboard or keypad only Use this button or key To do this Decimal Type a decimal point This button is visible only if the decimal point type for the numeric input enable button or numeric input cursor point is Implicit Minus Toggle the value between positive and negative ESC Close the pop up window without writing the value to the object s Value connection Backspace Delete the right most digit in the scratchpad If no digits are left t
423. lue connections for these graphic objects This graphic object Uses this tag placeholder String display 1 Numeric display 1 2 Numeric display 2 3 Bar graph 4 4 Use descriptive text to illustrate the objects in the display 5 Inthe Main Menu display create a display list selector for opening the Canning display with two states 6 Assign the Corn parameter file to one state and the Peas parameter file to the other 7 Call the captions for the states Corn and Peas respectively At run time when the operator selects the Peas state on the display list selector in the Main Menu and presses the Enter key the Canning Overview display opens and shows the values of the Pea_ tags When the operator selects the Corn state the values of the Corn tags are displayed 25 Using parameters and global objects The Canning Overview display looks like this when the operator selects the Peas state Canning Overview Peas Weight Main menu Creating parameter lists You create parameter lists by selecting the tags as you set up the objects that will open the displays that use them The first tag in the list will replace placeholder 1 the second tag in the list will replace 2 and so on A parameter list stays with the object when it is copied or duplicated and with the graphic display in which it is created when the display is copied or moved Parameter lists can be used anywhere that parameter files can be
424. lus terminals support printing using the Microsoft Windows CE PCL3 printer driver which is already installed on the terminal Printing is supported for most laser and ink jet printers If you have problems printing check that your printer is compatible with the PCL3 printer driver 16 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 16 2 2 If you are using an OPC server other than RSLinx Enterprise for example KEPServerEnterprise install the OPC server software on the terminal For installation information see the documentation supplied by your OPC server vendor For information about OPC data servers see Chapter 5 If your application uses third party ActiveX objects install and register the Windows CE version of the objects on the terminal For information about ActiveX objects see page 20 21 Installing printers on a PanelView Plus terminal If you will be printing displays alarms reports or diagnostics messages connect a printer to the USB or Network port PanelView Plus terminals support printing using the Microsoft Windows CE PCL3 printer driver which is already installed on the terminal Printing is supported for most laser and ink jet printers If you have problems printing check that your printer is compatible with the PCL3 printer driver The Panel View Plus terminal is a closed box which means you must order any software your application will need when you order the system All softw
425. m On the View menu click Object Explorer m Right click an object and then click Object Explorer 20 Using graphic objects Object Explorer x Right click an object to open its context menu ie MumerncDataDisplay a me Test i Text on Text Kev Assignments ee Text Arrange gt Text Animation k i Text L Tete Convert to wallpaper 5 liia Tag Substitution ETET Be Click the icon to view the m GotoDisplayButton Property Panel at b Group Object Explorer objects and groups within a 3 2 oe Wedgel group p Ellipsez i o e Rectangle40 meee E Group E Group Berl H Group Duplicate Rectangle Highlight L H Global Object Defaults Exparid Collapse 7 mee Edit Base Object Break Link You can keep the Object Explorer open as you work in the Graphics editor For more information about using the Object Explorer see Help Highlighting objects in the Object Explorer You can use the Object Explorer to highlight m specific types of objects m objects that have animation attached m objects that have a specific tag or expression assigned to them The objects are highlighted in red in the Object Explorer and in the graphic display If your graphic display uses a red background the highlighting is not visible in the graphic display 20 25 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 26 To highlight objects in the Object Explorer m Inthe Object Explorer click Highlighting on a
426. m PanelBuilder 1400e to FactoryTalk View 1 Convert the application as described on page A 2 2 Open the RSLinx Enterprise data server and then double click Communication Setup 3 In the Communication Setup editor add an RIO driver m For PanelView Plus 400 and 600 terminals use the 2711P RN1 driver m For all other PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminals use the 2711P RN6 driver For information about adding drivers in RSLinx see RSLinx Help 4 Expand the RIO tree right click RIO Data and then click Configure RIO 5 Inthe RIO Configuration dialog box right click RIO and then click Import 6 Browse to the location of the RIO configuration file The file is saved in the root of the application s directory 7 Inthe Communications Setup editor create a device shortcut that points to the RIO data device A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications For information about creating a device shortcut see RSLinx Help 8 Apply the shortcut to the RIO driver 9 Correct any invalid RIO configurations Invalid RIO configurations are highlighted with red x icons If red x icons appear after you import the RIO xml file you can fix block tags in the Communication Setup editor in FactoryTalk View The length of block tags must be the same for Read and Write pairs sharing the same rack group and slot 10 Create an alias for any data that is not a 16 bit integer or bit 11 Save the converted RIO applic
427. m Right click the editor and then click New m On the File menu select New and then click the type of component to create Opening components To open a component do one of the following m Double click the component m Right click the component and then click Open m Drag the component from the Explorer window to the workspace Saving components The Save tool is available when the active component contains unsaved changes To save a component 1 On the File menu click Save or click the Save tool cave Component name Cancel Untitled 2 Ifthis is the first time you re saving the component type a name in the Component name box and then click OK Closing components To close a component m On the File menu click Close or click the Close button on the component s title bar Some components have a Close button that you can click to close the component 18 e Working with components Before the component closes you are prompted to save unsaved changes if there are any Adding components into an application You can use the same components in more than one application by adding components into an application For example if you want to use the same graphic display in Application A and Application B create the display in Application A then add the graphic display component from Application A to Application B When you add the component into Application B changes you make to the component in Appl
428. m literal numbers constants m string tags including both HMI and data server tags m literal strings static text m tag placeholders For information about tag placeholders see page 20 37 m the time m the date 24 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 24 2 Where you can create embedded variables You can create embedded variables in these editors Graphics Use this editor to insert embedded variables in the captions for graphic objects For graphic objects with multiple states you can insert different embedded variables in each state s caption You can also use embedded variables in the title bar for On Top displays For information about specific graphic objects see Chapter 21 For information about On Top displays see page 19 12 Local Messages Use this editor to insert embedded variables in local messages For more information about local messages see page 19 26 Information Messages Use this editor to insert embedded variables in information messages For more information about information messages see Chapter 27 Alarm Setup tUse this editor to insert embedded variables in alarm messages For more information about alarms see Chapter 9 Creating embedded variables To create an embedded variable in a graphic object s caption I 2 3 4 J Open the graphic object s Properties dialog box Click the tab containing the Caption box The Caption box is on the Label
429. m log file and all alarm lists If the Ack connection is assigned for any of the alarm triggers the operator is prompted to acknowledge all alarms before clearing them You can set up the button to remove all alarms or just the alarms for a specific alarm trigger You can also specify whether to reset the cleared alarms If you choose to reset alarms pressing this button resets the number of times an alarm has been triggered to 0 and the accumulated time in alarm to 0 for all alarms that are being cleared If the alarm is still active the number of times in alarm changes to 1 after the alarm is reset to 0 With this graphic Use this button object Print alarm history Print alarm status Reset alarm status Silence alarms Sort alarms 9 Setting up alarms To do this Print a report of the alarm messages in the alarm log file You can include all alarms or just the alarms for a specific alarm trigger The report can include the time alarms occurred and were acknowledged Print a report of the status of alarms You can include all alarms or just the alarms for a specific alarm trigger The report can include how many times each alarm was triggered and the accumulated time in alarm Reset the number of times an alarm has been triggered to 0 and the accumulated time in alarm to 0 for all alarms If the alarm is still active the number changes to 1 Silence the audio indictor for all alarms for app
430. m the Value connection is unassigned m the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up 21 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 20 To set up a momentary push button 1 Double click the momentary push button Momentary Push Button Properties x General States Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width m MV Border Uses Back Color E Highlight color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle Button settings Button action Normally open C Normally closed C Value Hold time 250 msec Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo fo Other MV Audio Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the momentary push button looks like at run time and what type of action the button performs In the States tab specify what the button does when it is pressed and released For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 In the Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility In the Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 Setting up graphic objects Setting up maintained push buttons
431. ma E TEPES a a E a A a 3 In the dialog box that opens select the object to add to your graphic display For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 4 Click OK The object is placed in the display Depending on how the third party implemented the object it might be a different size than the rectangle you drew 5 To specify the object s properties and assign tags or expressions to its connections do one of the following m Right click the object and then click Properties to open the object s Properties dialog box Depending on how the third party implemented the object it might not have a Properties dialog box If the Properties menu item is not available use the next method m Right click the object and then click Property Panel 6 Inthe Properties dialog box or Properties tab of the Property Panel specify the object s properties 7 If desired set up the properties in the Common tab as described on page 21 2 8 In the Connections tab assign tags or expressions to the object s connections 9 To close the Properties dialog box click OK To close the Property Panel click the Close button For information about using the Properties dialog box see page 20 26 For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 k Select tool 20 Using graphic objects Tools and tips for working with objects This section describes features of the Graphics editor that help
432. match one of those in the graphic display the attributes for that object are not imported Attributes for all other objects in the file whose names do match the ones in the graphic display are imported Saving XML files in Notepad Save XML files created or edited in Notepad using either UTF 8 or UTF 16 file format Notepad s Unicode file type corresponds to UTF 16 file format For files containing strings in English or other Latin based languages UTF 8 is recommended to reduce the size of the XML file For other languages such as Chinese Japanese or Korean UTF 16 is recommended The first line of every XML file contains XML version and encoding attributes Make sure the encoding attribute matches the format that you are going to use when you save the file For example if the original file was saved in UTF 8 format and you plan to save it in UTF 16 format make sure the first line specifies encoding UTF 16 Testing XML files An XML file must be well formed to be imported To find out whether your XML file is well formed test it To test an XML file m Open the XML file in Internet Explorer H Importing and exporting graphics XML files If you can see the XML code your file is well formed If the XML code is not well formed Internet Explorer displays an error message Importing XML files You can import a graphic display or global object display that has been created using an external programming tool or editor or
433. mation messages This example shows how to set up the data source to notify the operator that a conveyor belt has stopped In this example the status of two conveyor belts is being monitored You can use both HMI and data server tags l Create a digital tag called Conveyor 1 status This tag points to an address in a programmable controller that is linked to a sensor on the first conveyor belt When the belt is running the tag s value is 0 When the belt stops running the value changes to l 2 Create a second digital tag called Conveyor 2 status This tag points to an address in a programmable controller that is linked to a sensor on the second conveyor belt When the belt is running the tag s value is 0 When the belt stops running the value changes to 1 3 Create an analog tag called Information messages Set up the data source to send a value of 1 to this tag when Conveyor _ 1 status has a value of 1 and to send a value of 2 to this tag when the Conveyor 2 status tag has a value of 1 4 Inthe Information Messages editor create these messages with trigger values matching the values that will be sent to the Information messages tag Trigger value Message l Conveyor belt 1 has stopped 2 Conveyor belt 2 has stopped 27 Using information messages Save the message file with the name Conveyor belts 5 In the Information Setup editor assign the Information messages tag to the Value connection and select the Con
434. me 18 border 5 chart 6 isolated graphing in 8 types 7 XY Plot 7 coloring 9 creating 3 linking buttons to 9 minimum and maximum values for 6 navigating to 7 pens 6 icons 7 markers 7 planning 6 plotting values across the chart 8 problems at run time 12 setting up 3 4 specifying number time and date format for 17 testing 10 time date and number format 3 window 5 x horizontal axis 6 labels 6 y vertical axis 6 labels 6 Trigger Label Selector 5 Trigger values for alarms 5 11 for information messages 5 for local messages 29 Troubleshooting See Problems at run time Problems during application development W Wallpaper converting graphic objects to 13 unlocking 14 Value table 2 4 5 Value trigger type 11 Wedge graphic object 3 16 Vertical position animation 6 14 at run time 18 Vertical slider animation 6 15 at run time 17 Width animation 6 14 at run time 18 Wildcard characters 4 7 Window size default graphic displays 14 project 12 Windows setting up for language switching 4 Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 editing device shortcuts on 6 running applications in 1 runtime settings 4 Windows languages 1 Windows metafiles See wmf files Windows network domain logging in to l Windows users or groups adding to FactoryTalk Security 17 19 adding to RSView 3 20 and earlier applications 7 removing from RSView 3 20 and earlier applications 8 WINtelligent LOGIC 5 tags Document version 6 1
435. mergency stops Emergency stop buttons must always be hard wired You can use different kinds of push buttons depending on what kind of machinery you are running or process you are controlling Momentary push buttons change a tag to one value when the button is pressed and another value when the button is released The machine is on only while the button is held down When the button is released the machine turns off Momentary push buttons are useful for jogging a motor and they can be set up to start and stop a machine or process Maintained push buttons toggle between two values This type of button is useful for changing a setting within a machine or process but not for starting the machine or process For example use the maintained push button for changing modes such as Auto to Manual or Metric to Imperial Latched push buttons latch in the on position and must be unlatched by another button or process to return to the off position This type of button is useful for starting a machine or process Multistate push buttons allow an operator to cycle through multiple options consecutively using a single button The current state of a process or operation is displayed on the button by a different color caption or image for each state 21 Setting up graphic objects Interlocked push buttons work in groups and share the same tag Pressing one button cancels another Although interlocked push buttons work as a group you add them
436. n Italy F 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE F 4 RFC1766 Language Country Region Name it CH Italian Switzerland ja JP Japanese Japan Default Sort Order ja JP Japanese Japan Alternate Sort Order Unicode kn IN Kannada India kk KZ Kazakh Kazakhstan kok IN Konkani India ko KR Korean Korea Default Sort Order ko KR Korean Korea Alternate Sort Order Korean Xwansung Unicode ky KZ Kyrgyz Kazakhstan Iv LV Latvian Latvia It LT Lithuanian Lithuania ms BN Malay Brunei ms MY Malay Malaysia mr IN Marathi India mn MN Mongolian Mongolia nb NO Norwegian Bokml Norway nn NO Norwegian Nynorsk Norway pl PL Polish Poland pt BR Portuguese Brazil pt PT Portuguese Portugal pa IN Punjabi India ro RO Romanian Romania ru RU Russian Russia sa IN Sanskrit India sr SP Cyrl Serbian Cyrillic Serbia sr SP Latn Serbian Latin Serbia sk SK Slovak Slovakia sl SI Slovenian Slovenia es AR Spanish Argentina es BO Spanish Bolivia es CL Spanish Chile F RFC1766 names RFC1766 Language Country Region Name es CO Spanish Colombia es CR Spanish Costa Rica es D
437. n To set up a ramp button k 2 Double click the ramp button General Label Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color 4 E Back color Back style Pattern style WB Border color Soid ts None L Pattern color Shape E Highlight color Rectangle 7 Blink m Button settings M Use variable lower upper Limit V Use variable ramp value Ramp up Upper limit Ramp value C Ramp down roo fi m Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin o Other MV Audio Cancel Apply Help In the button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like whether the button uses variable or constant upper and lower limits and ramp value and whether the button ramps a value up or down m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button m Inthe Timing tab set up whether or not the button press repeats automatically when the operator presses and holds the button down and the rate at which the button press repeats For more information about auto repeat see page 21 11 21 27 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 28 m Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags with which the button exchanges data If variable ramp and limit values are selected in th
438. n open the Tags editor and then create device tags that point to addresses in devices For details about creating HMI tags see Chapter 7 If you do not want to use HMI tags but instead want to reference addresses in devices directly skip this step Best practice is to use direct reference tags ve In objects in graphic displays or anywhere else you want access to values in tags type the tag name using the syntax for your OPC server or use the Tag Browser to select tags For details about using tags see Chapter 6 Create the run time application file For details see Chapter 14 All the necessary tag information is compiled with the run time application file If you are using an OPC server other than RSLinx Enterprise or RSLinx Classic install the OPC server software on the run time computer For applications that will run on a personal computer the OPC server can be on a different remote computer than the run time computer but the remote computer must be on the same network as the run time computer About data servers A data server provides a route to the physical devices on your network so you can see the values in those devices for example m programmable controller values m OPC tags and their value or status information 5 2 5 e Setting up communications m named variables in a Logix5000 processor Creating data servers An RSLinx Enterprise data server is created automatically with a new applicat
439. n the Messages tab of the Alarm Setup editor Contains attributes for the first alarm message Contains attributes for the second alarm message Indicates the end of the messages element Indicates the end of the alarm element Indicates the end of the alarms element You can specify multiple attributes for an element For example the alarm element contains 11 possible attributes from the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor For more information about alarm elements and their attributes see Help for the Alarm Import Export Wizard E 4 _ Aprenbrx F RFC1 766 names This appendix describes RFC1766 names for Windows languages Mapping languages to RFC1766 names The following table lists the languages that Windows supports and the RFC1766 name associated with each language You can use the codes to name the translated application files before importing them The codes are also used with the CurrentLanguage function RFC1766 Language Country Region Name af ZA Afrikaans South Africa sq AL Albanian Albania ar DZ Arabic Algeria ar BH Arabic Bahrain ar EG Arabic Egypt ar IQ Arabic Iraq ar JO Arabic Jordan ar K W Arabic Kuwait ar LB Arabic Lebanon ar LY Arabic Lybia ar MA Arabic Morocco ar OM Arabic Oman ar QA Arabic Qatar ar SA Arabic Saudi Arabia ar SY Arabic Syria ar TN Arabic Tun
440. n 236 pixels wide by 208 pixels high the pop up keyboard cannot open m Ifthe screen resolution is smaller than 236 pixels wide by 44 pixels high the pop up scratchpad cannot open m Ifthe string pop up window is set up to accept more characters than the Value connection tag length the pop up window remains open and the string is not written to the connection The scratchpad area changes to red to alert the operator of the error m If Enter key handshaking 1s still in effect the pop up window closes but the value is not written to the connection Changing tag values This section gives an overview of the graphic objects you can use to change tag values For information about setting up the objects see Chapter 21 and Help The operator uses these objects to start and stop plant operations and to control machines and processes Choose the objects that best suit your process Set up the data source to carry out the desired actions in response to the changes in tag values The operator can use function keys with all of these objects except control list selectors third party ActiveX objects and drawing objects with slider animation The last three types of objects can be pressed using a mouse or touch screen For information about assigning function keys to graphic objects see page 21 5 Do not use push buttons for emergency stops Emergency stop buttons must be hard wired You can also use macros to assign values to tags For more i
441. n Name the development computer tag Diglog Data Log Model Name ME Logs Runtime Alarm log file for applications that have run on alm Application Name the development computer M_ Alarms ME Runtime Run time application files mer ME HMI projects Sample application folders including all files and folders needed for the sample ME Faceplates Graphic displays and global object displays for gfx Logix5000 faceplates ggfx bmp If desired you can specify a different directory in which to store graphic library component files For more information see page 19 19 Default log file locations for PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE applications On the PanelView Plus6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal alarm and data log folders are located by default in this directory Windows Logs Data log file locations You can also store data log files in a different location on the run time computer on a networked computer or on a PC card For more information see Chapter 26 4 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 4 4 Naming files File names including the path can be up to 200 characters long file names can contain spaces For example the following path and file name contains 119 characters C Documents and Settings All Users Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Malthouse Clgx 640x480 Gfx Steeping gfx Creating importing opening and closing applications Creating appli
442. n On Top and Replace displays It does not close On Top displays that use the Cannot Be Replaced option m Ifthe selected display is an On Top display it opens on top of the current display The current display does not close The operator cannot use the display list selector to open Replace displays if display change is currently controlled remotely But the operator can still open On Top displays with or without the Cannot Be Replaced option Selecting the display to open The operator can scroll through the list and select displays using the key button graphic objects or if the list has the input focus by using the arrow keys and Enter key on a keypad or external keyboard You can link key buttons to a specific display list selector or set up the buttons to work with whichever object is selected in the graphic display For information about input focus see page 21 8 For information about linking buttons to the display list selector see page 21 9 Shutdown buttons When the operator presses the shutdown button at run time the application stops and FactoryTalk View ME Station closes To prevent an unauthorized user from stopping the application assign visibility animation to the shutdown button For details see page 11 14 Or place the button in a display that only authorized users have access to For information about setting up shutdown buttons see Help Controlling display changes remotely To control display chang
443. n assigned to the object matches a message s trigger value m Value connection a tag or expression When the value of this connection matches a message s trigger value the local message display object displays the associated message The local message display object always appears in the graphic display it s placed in whether or not there is a message to display However the operator does not see the message unless the object is located in the display the operator is currently viewing The following example shows how the key parts of the local message system work together Example Displaying local messages This example shows how to notify the operator of the status of a hoist 1 Create a tag called Hoist Status This tag points to an address in a programmable controller that is linked to sensors on the hoist The tag has five possible values The tag has this value When the hoist has this status l At bottom 2 Raising 3 Stopped between the top and bottom 4 Lowering 5 At top 19 e Using graphic displays 2 Inthe Local Messages editor create these messages with trigger values matching the values that will be sent to the Hoist Status tag Trigger value Message l The hoist is ready to rise 2 The hoist is raising the pallet 3 The hoist has stopped 4 The hoist is lowering the pallet 5 The hoist is finished rising Save the message file with the name Hoist status 3 Inthe
444. n set includes Release Notes Information to read before you begin installing or working with the software The Release Notes are available on the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition DVD as well as from the Help menu in FactoryTalk View Studio FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Installation Guide A guide to installing and activating the various components of FactoryTalk View Machine Edition The Installation Guide is available on the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition DVD as well as from the Help menu in FactoryTalk View Studio P 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE P 2 m FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User s Guide Comprehensive information about FactoryTalk View Machine Edition procedures for creating and running an automation application and reference information The User s Guide is also available on the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition DVD as well as from the Help menu in FactoryTalk View Studio Help Online procedures and reference information Help is available from the Help menu in FactoryTalk View Studio Finding the information you need You have many options for finding information about how to use FactoryTalk View or how to solve problems with FactoryTalk View Try the User s Guide and Help first The User s Guide and Help provide comprehensive information about typical uses of FactoryTalk View Chances are your question is answered in the documentation To find the answer use the tabl
445. n style E Border color Soid O None _ Pattern color _ Fore color T Blink Text Font Size Alignment for Jeja coe CEC M word wrap see Message file Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the local message display looks like at run time and which local message file to use m Inthe Common tab specify the local message display s spacial properties name and visibility Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression with which the local message display exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK 21 55 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Setting up macro buttons Macro buttons run macro files that assign values to tags when the button is pressed For information about creating macros see Chapter 30 To set up a macro button 1 Double click the button Macro Button Properties xX General Label Common Appearance Border style Border width 4 MV Border uses back color BB Back color Back style Pattern style Border color Solid 7 None _ Pattern color Highlight color Shape O p I Blink Rectangle Macro Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo 0 Other MV Audio Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties
446. n the selected property Scroll to see more properties Or drag the splitter bar to see more properties 20 29 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 30 You can keep the Property Panel open as you work in the Graphics editor You can drag the panel s borders to make the Property Panel larger or smaller For more information about using the Property Panel to set up an object s properties see Help Assigning tags and expressions to an object s connections Use the Property Panel s Connections tab to assign tags or expressions to the selected object s connections If multiple objects are selected the tab is blank because you can assign tags or expressions to only one object at a time How values are updated The arrows indicate the direction in which the data flows between the connection and the data source A right arrow indicates that the connection sends values to the data source The connection is a write connection A left arrow indicates that the data source sends values to the connection The connection is a read connection A double arrow indicates that the data flows in both directions The connection is a read write connection The arrows show the direction in G2REnaeary Click for help on the which data flows between the MaintainedPushButton2 Maintained Push Bu gt ka selected connection connection and the data source Properties Connections If the connection
447. n the list can be written to the Visible States connection when the list scrolls The Visible States connection must be a data server tag that supports arrays You cannot use an HMI tag Control list selectors have no Visible States connection The state value of the item at the top of the list can be written to the Top Position connection when the list scrolls Control list selectors have no Top Position connection How piloted control list selectors work at run time A piloted control list selector can show several states at the same time but only one state can be selected at a time 21 51 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 52 You can set up the piloted control list selector to be operator controlled or remote controlled by assigning tags or expressions in the Connections tab You can also set up individual states to be operator controlled remote controlled both or none If set to none the state is turned off If the piloted control list selector is set up to be operator controlled and the operator selects a remote controlled state or one that is turned off a hollow cursor is displayed Automatic Automatic The operator can select this state The operator cannot select this state Using buttons with the piloted control list selector When a piloted control list selector is operator controlled it works with m key button graphic objects These are graphic objects that duplicate the functions of k
448. n the operator presses the button the string pop up keyboard or scratchpad opens depending on how you set up the button To use the scratchpad a keyboard must be attached to the run time computer For information about setting up the string input enable button see Help 17 Using your application Using the string pop up keyboard The string pop up keyboard opens when the operator presses a string input enable button or the User or Password button in the Login dialog box The pop up is also used with the password button graphic object Scratchpad area ABISISISSIS SSIES siwlelejeiy alele p air If the operator opens the pop up keyboard by pressing a string input enable button the number of characters the keyboard accepts depends on how you set up the button When the keyboard is open no other objects in the graphic display can accept input Using the string pop up character input You can use a string pop up character input instead of the string pop up keyboard With the string pop up character input you use the arrow keys to select the characters to input The string pop up character input opens when the operator presses a string input enable button or the User or Password button in the Login dialog box The pop up is also used with the password button graphic object 17 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 17 12 INS Aa De CLR If the operator opens the string pop up character input by pressin
449. n the table overwrite existing data set values if any for the unit in the recipe file Delete delete the recipe unit selected in the RecipePlus selector object Rename rename the recipe unit selected in the RecipePlus selector object The illustration below shows a graphic library display that contains a RecipePlus selector RecipePlus buttons and a RecipePlus table The display also contains key buttons for working with the selector and table a bar graph that shows the percentage complete of the recipe operation and a string display that shows the status of the recipe operation 29 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 29 4 Fe RecipePlus_Components Condiments Library recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit recipe recipe re unit unit unit unit Ingredient Ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient ingredient Recipe Selection Recipe Buttons Download Upload Upload and Create Recipe Status SR Restore Delete rir ice Rename 56 A E A 4 v 4 Y Number format The values in the recipe table are displayed using the
450. n time computer the alarm log file for the older version is deleted automatically Alarm trigger data types When you create alarm triggers you must specify the type of data the trigger s tag or expression uses The type of data affects how alarms are triggered The Value trigger type To trigger alarms based on integer or floating point values use the Value trigger type When the value of the trigger connection equals the trigger value of a message an alarm is generated If you use an analog tag either an HMI tag or a data server tag or an expression you can use any non zero integer or floating point value to trigger an alarm Floating point values are rounded to the nearest integer For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 Trigger values cannot be 0 Digital tags have two possible values 0 and 1 Therefore if you use a digital tag either an HMI tag or a data server tag you can only use the value 1 to trigger a message If you want to use a digital tag to trigger two different messages create an expression that adds to the digital tag s value That way you can use the trigger values 1 and 2 Example Integer trigger values This example shows how to set up alarms using integer trigger values to monitor the level of acid in a 100 gallon tank Alarms are generated when the tank is 75 full and 90 full l Create an alarm trigger for the tag Acid tank level This tag points to an address in a programmab
451. n when you start FactoryTalk View Studio l Start FactoryTalk View Studio 4 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Tu Lar Open Application 4 8 Hew Open Machine Edition Application Hew Existing Application Name Baggage 640450 Baggage _S002600 BizBikes_ME lnstantFizz_ME Malthouse Clogs 640x480 Malthouse Clos 800600 Objects 5 Screen Demo Objects_ 640x460 Objects_ 800x600 Language English United States en US Z Open Cancel 2 Click the Existing tab and then click the application to open 3 Specify a language for the application and then click Open For information about using different languages see Chapter 12 If this is the first time you are opening an application that was created in RSView Machine Edition 4 00 you are prompted to select a default language Select a language and then click OK For information about the default language see page 12 2 FactoryTalk View Studio displays the application in the Explorer window To open an existing application when FactoryTalk View Studio is already open I On the File menu click Open Application or click the Open Application tool If an application is already open FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close the application that is currently open Click Yes Follow steps 2 through 4 in the previous procedure 4 Working with applications To open an application you used recently 1 On
452. nd Communications dialog box double click RSLinx Enterprise Communications E ee Hox RSLinx Enterprise Configuration El Virtual Backplane lt No Devices gt El Ethernet lt No Devices gt lt No Devices gt Edit Device Edit Driver Restore Default Close F1 F2 F3 F8 A Ig start 1 FactoryTak View ME Station MeL 3 08PM 2 4 Click the Serial DF1 driver and then click Edit Driver 5 Select Use Auto Configuration and then click Edit 6 Inthe dialog box that opens select Yes and then click OK Auto configuration works with most devices including Logix5000 and PLC 5 If auto configuration is not successful for your device return to these steps select No and continue to step 7 7 Setup the driver and then click OK If you are using auto configuration skip this step Setting up a driver for the transfer on the development computer On the development computer set up the RSLinx Enterprise driver that you will use to download your application to the PanelView Plus CE PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus 6 terminal Use one of these drivers for the transfer m Serial DF1 Use for a serial transfer 16 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 16 6 m Ethernet Use with an Ethernet connection For information about setting up drivers in RSLinx Enterprise see RSLinx Help Downloading applications and Windows TrueType fonts Use the Transfer Uti
453. nd date when the embedded variable is displayed at run time How embedded variables are updated at run time At run time this is how embedded variables are displayed and updated m Graphic objects and title bars When a display containing a graphic object or title bar that uses an embedded variable is open the value of the embedded variable is updated whenever a new tag value is read from the data source For time and date embedded variables the time and date are updated as the system time and date change 24 Using embedded variables Local messages When a display containing a local message display object is open and the message the object is displaying contains an embedded variable the value of the embedded variable is updated whenever a new tag value is read from the data source For time and date embedded variables the time and date are updated as the system time and date change Information messages The value of the embedded variable is read when the information message is first displayed It is not updated after that If the message is printed it is printed using the value the variable had when the message was first displayed This value is retained if you shut down and restart the application m Alarm messages The value of the embedded variable is read when the alarm occurs and is displayed in the message associated with the alarm It is not updated after that If the message is printed it is printed using the
454. nd for your display 0 0 00 ccc ee eee 19 13 Using graphic libraries 0 0 eet een nes 19 14 Working with Symbol Factory 0 000 eens 19 14 To open Symbol Factory 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 19 15 To select a graphic ase iiticsa ch be baner tevbeone ese bsawrsiveese 19 15 Manipulating the graphic 0 0 0 0 cc eee es 19 15 Creating graphic libraries 0 0 0 eee eens 19 16 Using libraries as displays in your application 0005 19 17 Using libraries to store displays with multiple languages 19 17 Location of library components 000 c cc eens 19 19 Importing images into your application 0 eee eee 19 20 Bitmap images that come with FactoryTalk View Studio 19 21 Importing bitmap and JPEG images nann nannaa anaana 19 21 Using the Image Browser to import images 00000 19 23 Using Symbol Factory 000 een eens 19 24 Tips TOP USING WMACES 2 2 ees cade oh deer toed t ede ndesee cans edees 19 25 sine local Messaees 4 s 2 0225 deen nde te bee ceed 6 eee eed oehe ES 19 26 Local messages versus information messages 00000 eens 19 26 PUMIALY Ol SICDS 222 05 oda Seatesde ns ead Geeeteedd e554 e 384s 19 27 Using the Local Messages editor 0 0 0 00 eee ees 19 27 Preparing to set up local messages 0 ccc eee eee 19 27 How local messages work 2 0 eee ees 19 28 Local messages and trigger values 0 0
455. nd maximum HMI tags allow you to set a minimum and maximum value that can be written to the programmable controller or server These values do not affect what is read from the programmable controller or server For example if you specify a minimum of 0 and a maximum of 100 FactoryTalk View would be able to read a value of 200 from a programmable controller and store it in the value table but would not be able to write this value to the programmable controller For more information about minimum and maximum and scale and offset see Help Storing values in FactoryTalk View memory A memory tag can be used to store values without the need for an attached or accessible device For example you might need to store a value in memory 6 e Working with tags to store the result of a calculation temporarily for example a counter or index to maintain information about the system s current state for example which graphic display was last displayed For information about creating HMI memory tags see Chapter 7 Steps for using HMI tags To use HMI tags complete two basic steps l In the Tags editor in FactoryTalk View create a tag HMI tags can be used as an internal storage location Optionally you can map the tag name to an OPC tag or device address For more information see Chapter 7 In graphic displays alarm triggers or anywhere else you want to use a tag s value assign the tag At run time the tag s valu
456. nd then click Settings Highlight Settings By object type By animation type Alarm Banner MEolor Alarm List AF A a beeen tesee daeana ote Alarrn Status List Height JAlarmn Status Mode Horizontal Position lAr Horizontal Slider Backspace Kep Rotation _ Bar Graph ertical Position Clear Vertical Slider Clear Alarm Banner isibility Clear Alarm History width To clear all the check boxes Clear ll right click the list and then FJ Close Display fa Control List Selector click Clear All fa Diagnostics List Display List Selector Ciena Print x To select all the check boxes right click the list and then click Select All Cancel Help For details about the options in the Highlight Settings dialog box see Help Using the Properties dialog box Every graphic object has a Properties dialog box that you can use to set up the object Depending on how the vendor implemented the object third party ActiveX objects might have a Properties dialog box as well The Properties dialog box contains tabs that you can use to set up the object s properties and connections In this tab General 20 Using graphic objects Do this Set up the object s appearance audio indicator and touch margins for buttons and settings that are unique to the object
457. nditions that require information messages 2 Create an information message file 3 Create English messages for trigger values 11 to 20 Tip Messages are sorted alphanumerically in the Excel spreadsheet or Unicode text file created for translation Therefore numbers 2 through 9 would appear after 10 11 12 and so on To keep your messages in order in the translation file begin the first series of numbers at 11 4 Create French messages for trigger values 21 to 30 5 Create German messages for trigger values 31 to 40 6 Assign this expression to the Value connection in the Information Setup editor If Currentlanguage en US then information messages Else If Currentlanguage ir PR then Information messages 10 Else information messages 20 23 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 16 if then else If then else expressions carry out an action conditionally or branch actions depending on the statements in the expression The if then else statements enable the expression to perform different actions in different situations and to repeat activities until a condition changes To build conditional expressions use the relational operators and the logical operators for the statement and values The if then else structure is if statement then valuel else value2 If the statement is true then the expression returns value if the statement is false then the expression returns value2 If the result
458. ndshake This column is for display Enter information in this purposes only column These editors contain spreadsheets Tags Runtime Security formerly User Accounts Global Connections Local Messages Alarm Setup Information Setup Information Messages Macros RecipePlus Editor In the Graphics editor many of the Properties dialog boxes for setting up graphic objects contain spreadsheets for assigning tags or expressions to the objects 2 e Exploring FactoryTalk View Studio To enter information in a cell in a spreadsheet m Click the cell and then type the information If the cell already contains text the new information is added after the current text In the Property Panel double click the cell and then type the information If the cell already contains text double clicking highlights the text and typing replaces the highlighted text To move to the next cell in the row m Press Tab or Enter The method to use depends on which editor you re working in To move to the first cell in the next row m Press Enter or Down Arrow The method to use depends on which editor you re working in To delete a cell s contents m Click the cell and then press Delete or Backspace Pressing Backspace removes the characters one by one The method to use depends on which editor you re working in To delete rows m Select one or more rows right click the selection and then click Delete Rows Printing
459. ne B 7 Settings and controls for alarms 0 ccc ees B 7 Invalid characters in screen names and tag names 20054 B 7 Tine AMOROUS aie ay Puce to earn ee ee worded oer dea eee era gee B 7 Peta OMG 6 hig ts eae oe ee eee ee oe oe neem ee eee oe et B 7 Screen security SCUINGS 2 nieesteuke ideas dxtads Erre ied ds oeeds B 7 POW El p options erresa ncecddchadhdtesyteecedh don oedideciaaee et B 7 Converting non RIO communications 00 00 B 8 Tags for unsupported communication protocols 00000 B 8 WAU Oy AUS nana oe ee ce Sa eee eee EE B 8 Converting RIO communications oona aaaeeeaa eee eens B 9 Unsupported PanelBuilder RIO tags 0 0 0 0 eee B 9 Unsupported graphic object features 0 0 ee eee B 10 C System tags Ala ses eere dees areestrcd amp ode aie es oe he ce aot Se Ge ean dG es bw ase a a C 1 MTT AICS 3k os seed oa Gtk oe eee oe eS oe eee eae seed Sok ee eee C AA ses esis E eee a ae alse Ae ee oe le eee ei ae T C 2 SE a vse ee i eee oe ee ae ee E Re eg re ee ee ls C 3 D ODBC database schema FactoryTalk Diagnostics log table 1 eens D 1 E Importing and exporting alarm XML files APAM xe etek Erer ote ees EREET es bee densennne pene ae E 1 xxiii FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE XXIV Creating alarm XML files by exporting 0 0 00 ccc eee E 1 Editing XML IES 22 cers eonc theta gdm ndee ek aad eoedeeeow sek antes E 2
460. nection and the alarm at Location 2 is acknowledged 9 Setting up alarms How the Remote Ack Handshake connection works This connection is used to notify the data source that the remote acknowledgement has been detected by FactoryTalk View When the application starts the Remote Ack Handshake connection has a value of 1 When the Remote Ack connection value changes the Remote Ack Handshake connection s value toggles from 1 to 0 The next time the Remote Ack value changes the Remote Ack Handshake value toggles from 0 to 1 The Remote Ack Handshake value toggles whether or not the new Remote Ack value matches a trigger value Ensuring alarm messages are read by the data source before sending new messages This section explains how the Message Message Notification and Message Handshake connections work To ensure an alarm message is read by the data source before FactoryTalk View sends a new message use message handshaking While message handshaking is in effect for an alarm message FactoryTalk View cannot send a new message to the alarm trigger s Message connection Methods of alarm message handshaking Alarm handshaking works by setting the alarm trigger s Message Notification connection to 1 As long as the Message Notification connection is set to 1 new messages cannot be sent to the Messages connection How the Message Notification connection is reset to 0 depends on how you set up alarm message handshaking There
461. nfig and Logix ALM Status When you add process faceplates any graphic images associated with the faceplates are added to the Images folder To add process faceplates to an application 1 In the Explorer window right click the HMI server and then click Add Process Faceplates Add Process Faceplates Select the display tyoes to add to the project Alarm ALM 3 displays Select All Clear All Totalizer TOT 3 displays Alarm Analog ALMA 3 displays Alarm Digital ALMD 3 displays Discrete 2 5tate Device D250 2 displays Discrete 3 State Device 0350 2 displays Enhanced PID FIDE 6 displays Enhanced Select ESEL 2 displays Phase Manager PhaseM anager 1 display Ramp Soak AMPS 3 displays OF Cancel Help The Add Process Faceplates dialog box opens 2 Select the faceplates to add For details about selecting options in the dialog box see Help 25 18 96 Setting up data logging This chapter describes steps for setting up data logging data log files data log models changing the data log model used at run time displaying data logs using the trend graphic object problems with data logging Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up data logging l In the Data Log Models editor set up a data log model that specifies how many log values to store the conditions that trigger data logging where to log data and which tags to monitor
462. nformation see Chapter 30 The operator can change tag values at run time using these graphic objects Use this graphic object To do this Momentary push button Start a process or action by sending one value to the tag when pressed and another value when released 17 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Use this graphic object Maintained push button To do this Toggle between two values by sending one value to the tag when pressed and a second value the next time the button is pressed and released This button is useful for changing a setting within a machine or process but not for starting the machine or process Latched push button Start a machine or process and remain set latched until the process is completed by sending a value to the tag when pressed and retaining this value until reset unlatched by the Handshake connection Multistate push button Cycle through a series of values Each time the operator presses the button the value for the next state is sent to the tag When the button is in its last state pressing it causes the button to change to its first state and write out the first state value This button is useful when you want the operator to see and select multiple options in sequence using a single button The button displays the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color caption or image to reflect the different states Interlocked push b
463. nformation about specifying the types of messages to display see page 10 3 1G The item tag does not exist an any server Clear Clear All The status bar The status bar displays information about the active window or about the selected tool or menu item The information that is displayed depends on where the mouse pointer is For example when you select a graphic object in the Graphics editor the status bar displays information about the selected object 4 60 Y 62 Width 107 Height 233 BarGraphi NUM 2 Exploring FactoryTalk View Studio Workbook tabs If you select Workbook Mode on the View menu the workspace displays tabs at the bottom for each open editor or component Workbook Mode allows you to bring forward an open item more quickly than by using the Window menu FactoryTalk Yiew Studio Machine Edition Mie x File Edit View Objects Arrange Animation Application Tools Window Help mi eS Dw e n BARE OSMAN AQuc gh ROAHOCOCNYUAOOISRSSS SCmOREm SSSR EUS HH Monn e serenade rdvazVe BEBADRA ngon EA 3 Local USPAZIFULKERO2 f Germ Dampers Malthouse Clgx 800x600 Display ffy Malthouse Clgs 800x600 Efi Malthouse Clax 8004600 SY System ES Project Settings Runtime Security 01 Diagnostics List Setup Global Connections lB Startup ag HMI Tags L g Tags B Graphics Ea Displays oof BCTMITY ALARM INFORMATION FanRoom FanRoomDesc TACA Bar Graph Germ Dampers Air Off GermDesc
464. ng up RSLinx Enterprise data servers 000008 Setting up an OPC data server 0 0 ccc eee ene Updating data server caches 0 ccc ees 6 Working with tags Types oroS oon cc cue sae nr eres seen eee eens e anes eens Daty sorvor ct ee ee ee ee ere ee ee ee a ee PUL AAP Ss oes oa te E EE eee eae eo SE bee eas THe ata BOUCO ee 45 608 Aa ads dh Ae ae oh A oe her S S es Basic steps for using tags 1 0 0 cee When to use data Server tags eee eens Eliminating duplication 0 0 0 00000 eens Using complex data 0 0 ccc eens Steps for using data server tags n n nann nnna eens When to use HMI tags 0 tenes Scaling offsetting or providing a range for data Storing values in FactoryTalk View memory Steps for using HMI tags 0 0 eens Browsing for tagS 0 eee eee teens Using the Tag Browser Showing Server names 0 ee ee eens Browsing for off line tags 20 0 ee eens Using tags and expressions in your application 0000 Assigning tags 2 ee eee eens Contents FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE vi Assigning tags to graphic objects 0 0 cee eens 6 9 Using expressions to manipulate tag values 0 0 0 0 00 eee 6 11 Substituting tag names used in graphic objects 0 000 eee 6 11 Lopping tag Vales s serranas raanei a a a eaneeoe nds 6 12 Using macros
465. ng up alarms Creating your own alarm display You can create your own graphic display for displaying and responding to alarms For example you could create a display with a static text object that notifies the operator that an alarm has occurred and a goto display button that the operator can press to open a display that lists the actual alarm message If you create your own graphic display use an On Top display and select the Cannot Be Replaced option For information about the graphic objects you can use to display alarm information see the information starting on page 9 32 For information about creating graphic displays and graphic objects see Chapter 19 and Chapter 20 Opening and closing the alarm display Opening the display The alarm display you specify in the Advanced tab of the Alarm Setup editor either the default ALARM display a display you copy from the library or your own display is automatically opened whenever a trigger connection s value matches a trigger value if you selected the Display option for the trigger value You can also create a goto display button that the operator can press to open the alarm display For information about setting up a goto display button and specifying the display to open see Help Closing the display The operator can close the display by pressing a close display button The display closes automatically under these circumstances m when the operator presses an acknowledge al
466. ng up reference objects link properties FactoryTalk View global objects allow you to link the appearance and behavior of a graphic object to multiple copies of that object When the original base object is updated the changes are automatically applied to all the copies of the object The copies of the object are called reference objects and they have the same properties as the original base object If desired you can assign unique size connections and animation to the reference object To assign unique properties to the reference object use the Property Panel to edit the following properties for the reference object m LinkSize select False to set up the height and width separately for the reference object If LinkSize is set to true when you try to resize the reference object it will snap back to its linked size m LinkConnections select False to set up connections separately for the reference object Whether you use the base object s connections or set up separate connections the tags used count towards the tag limit for the display You can assign tag placeholders to the connections for base objects and to connections for reference objects with the LinkConnections property set to False m LinkAnimation select Do not link to set up separate animation for the reference object To use the animation set up for the base object but assign different expressions to the reference object select Link without expressions
467. ng with diagnostics lists 13 using with recipes 12 using with trends 11 Move left button graphic object 7 16 setting up auto repeat for 11 using with trends 11 Move right button graphic object 7 16 setting up auto repeat for 11 using with trends 11 Move up button graphic object 7 16 49 setting up auto repeat for ll using with alarm objects 38 using with diagnostics lists 13 using with recipes 12 using with trends 11 Multistate graphic objects coloring 31 setting up 3 testing states 33 Multistate indicator graphic object 5 39 at run time 18 using with recipes 11 Multistate push button graphic object 4 24 at run time 16 setting up auto repeat for ll N Navigation between graphic displays 1 testing 3 between graphic objects in a display 7 Next pen button graphic object 6 16 using to change trend s vertical axis labels 6 11 Normally closed push button 19 Normally open push button 19 Number format at run time 17 Numeric display graphic object 8 28 10 at run time 17 specifying number format for 17 Numeric embedded variables 3 at runtime 7 Numeric input cursor point graphic object 8 31 at run time 16 17 navigating to 7 using Enter key handshaking with 12 Numeric input enable button graphic object 8 30 at run time 6 16 how values are calculated 9 how values are ramped 9 navigating to 7 using Enter key handshaking with 12 using write expressions with 18 Numeric pop up windows using at run time 7 8 Numeric val
468. nger At the end of this time the connection is reset to 0 If subsequent alarms that have been set up to sound the internal beeper are generated the alarms sound the beeper regardless of the Silence connection value or hold time status While the hold time is in effect new alarms cannot be silenced How the Remote Silence connection works When this connection changes to a new non zero value all alarms are silenced Alarms can be silenced using other methods regardless of this connection s value Set up the data source to send a new non zero value to the Remote Silence connection each time you want a remote silencing of alarms to take place How the Remote Ack All connection works When this connection changes to a new non zero value all unacknowledged alarms are acknowledged Set up the data source to send a new non zero value to the Remote Ack All connection each time you want a remote acknowledgement of all alarms to take place 9 24 9 Setting up alarms How the Status Reset connection works When the application starts this connection has a value of 0 If a reset alarm status or clear alarm history button is pressed this connection is set to 1 for the hold time or for the duration of the button press whichever is longer At the end of this time the connection is reset to 0 The Status Reset connection is also set to 1 if the Remote Status Reset connection changes to a new non zero value and remains set for th
469. nimation to blink For details see page 22 10 Color images do not blink Monochrome images use the Blink property to blink Increment Decrement Entry Button Allow Home End Converted to numeric input enable Allow Wrap button Ramping by coarse steps B 10 B Converting PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 applications Unsupported feature in FactoryTalk Graphic object View Notes Maintained Push Button Multistate Initial state values If you want to set these objects states on Push Button Standard Control List application startup create a macro to set Selector the appropriate tag values for the objects connections For information about macros see Chapter 30 Assign the macro in the Startup editor For details see Help Multistate Indicator Message Display Print Setting Bar Graph Inner text and inner graphic Converted to a separate text object and image object Gauge Inner text and inner graphic Converted to a separate text object and image object Scale clipping If the scale doesn t fit within the height or width of the gauge it is not clipped Check the position of the scale to ensure it doesn t overlap other objects Converted to a separate gauge object if Needle the gauge had 2 needles each needle is converted to a separate gauge object Alarm List No Acknowledgement Required All alarms can be acknowledged All objects Image placement FactoryTalk View supports one three or
470. ning to graphic displays 2 using display list selectors 3 using goto display buttons 3 in global connections 6 Parameter lists creating 7 in global connections 6 in graphic objects 3 parameter passing 9 Parameters editor 5 using tags in Password button graphic object 3 using at runtime 5 Passwords Document version 6 1 16 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 changing at runtime 4 for RSView 3 20 and earlier users 7 for Windows users in RSView 3 20 and earlier applications 8 for FactoryTalk Security users managing 21 uploading runtime changes to development application 7 Pause button graphic object 6 16 using with trends 11 Piloted control list selector graphic object 5 5l controlling remotely 52 differences from control list selectors 5l using Enter key handshaking with 12 Placeholders See Tag placeholders PLC tags importing 9 Polygon graphic object 3 18 Polyline graphic object 3 18 Preconfigured graphic displays ALARM display 6 DIAGNOSTICS display 11 INFORMATION display 6 Print alarm history button graphic object 4 58 specifying time and date format for 17 using to print alarm information 10 using with alarm objects 37 Print alarm status button graphic object 4 59 using to print alarm information 10 using with alarm objects 37 Printers selecting on the development computer 14 specifying at run time on personal computers 10 type to use with PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE 1 2 Problems
471. nking color option in color animation For details see page 22 10 Also many objects have a Blink property that you can set up For information about specific objects see Help FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Time These HMI tags record time and date information in various formats Tag Name Type Provides this data Read or write system Date String System date Read only system DateAndTime Analog Number of seconds elapsed Read only Integer since midnight 00 00 00 January 1 1970 coordinated universal time system DateAndTime String Complete date and time Read only String display For example Monday December 12 2001 10 47 50 AM system DayOfMonth Analog Day of the month Read only 1 31 system DayOfWeek Analog Day of the week Read only 1 7 Sunday 1 system DayOfYear Analog Day of the year Read only 1 366 system Hour Analog Hour of the day Read and write 0 23 system Minute Analog Minutes 0 59 Read and write system Month Analog Number for month 1 12 Read only system MonthString String Name of the month Read only system Second Analog Seconds 0 59 Read and write system Time String System Time Read only system Year Analog The year 1980 2099 Read only For information about using the data source to update the system date and time or about sending the run time computer s date and time to the data source see Chapter 8 C 2 User C
472. not read again after this 22 Animating graphic objects Defining a range of motion To define a range of motion for an object do one of the following m Use the mouse to move the object in the display This uses the Object Smart Path feature to visually define the range of motion m Type values in the At minimum and At maximum boxes Motion can be defined in pixels percentages or degrees Animation that does not use a range of motion Visibility and color animation do not use a range of motion because these types of animation represent a change of state not a range of values Using Object Smart Path With Object Smart Path you can easily set the range of motion for an object The following example shows how Object Smart Path works Example Using Object Smart Path to define the range of motion for horizontal slider animation To define a range of motion for a slider object 1 In the Graphics editor create a slider object using a line and a rectangle or copy a slider object from the Sliders graphic library 2 Open the Animation dialog box and click the Horizontal Slider tab 3 Inthe display select the rectangle in the slider object 22 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE _ 4 In the Tag box of the Animation dialog box specify a tag name loj x NNT a a Visby YY Rotation Tag menm4nimH ora Tags Erpessiam Expression range Horizontal offset
473. nt the line to start and then drag from the beginning point to the end point To draw horizontal or vertical lines hold down Ctrl while you drag the mouse 3 To change how the line looks right click the line and then click Properties on the context menu The Line Properties dialog box opens 4 Select line options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 5 To close the dialog box click OK You can use the Polyline tool to convert the line into a polyline For more information see page 20 43 Creating polygons and polylines A polyline is a series of connected line segments A polygon is a multi sided object with three or more sides For example use the polygon shape if you want to create triangles Folyline Transparent polygon Solid polygon To create a polygon or polyline 1 Select the Polygon or Polyline tool 2 Click and drag to create the first segment of the object Release the mouse button To draw horizontal or vertical lines hold down Ctrl while you drag ast a 3 Move the mouse to where you want the next segment to end and then click Repeat this step until you have completed the object L Rectangle tool 7 20 Using graphic objects aA A A To finish drawing double click an empty area of the display or click the Select tool To change how the object looks double click it to open the object s Properties dialog box Select polygon or polyline options For
474. nt unauthorized users from stopping the application These steps are described in detail in the following sections You can also assign security to action groups connections and databases These topics are not discussed in this chapter For information about these topics see the FactoryTalk Security help Creating FactoryTalk Security users You can set up users in FactoryTalk Security before you add them to the FactoryTalk View Runtime Security editor FactoryTalk Security allows you to reference user accounts that have already been set up in Windows These are called Windows linked users The link symbol in the Explorer window indicates that a user is a Windows linked user 11 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 11 18 The FactoryTalk Security access you give to users determines what actions they can perform in FactoryTalk View both on the development computer and at run time To do this Allow these Common actions Open applications Read and List Children Add and edit applications or components Write and Create Children Delete applications or components Delete Assign security and create users Create Children and Configure Security You can assign different permissions to users at different levels of the application Inheriting permissions The security you set up at the top level the FactoryTalk Directory is inherited by the application and users below it unless you select Do not inherit permissi
475. nthe Edit ShortCuts dialog box click the device you want the shortcut to point to and then click OK Looking up contact information for technical support To look up technical support contact information 1 In FactoryTalk View ME Station click Terminal Settings Terminal Settings About FactoryTalk View ME Station Alarms Diagnostics Setup Input Devices Networks and Communications Print Setup FactoryTalk View ME Station Startup Delete Log Files System Directory Overwrite Warning Close F8 a na ca 15 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 15 8 2 Double click About FactoryTalk View ME Station 3 Click Technical Support The telephone number and URL for technical support are displayed Setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the run time computer You can set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the run time computer using the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box To set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the run time computer 1 In FactoryTalk View ME Station click Terminal Settings 2 Double click Diagnostics Setup The FactoryTalk Diagnostics Setup dialog box opens 3 Set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics as described on page 10 6 Setting up serial ports for use with KEPServerEnterprise If you plan to use KEPServerEnterprise and serial communications you must specify which COM port to use For information about setting up communications in KEPServerEnterprise see KEPServerEnterpris
476. nts in the Startup editor as you create them wt Startup Pumphouse Mil x Start when project is run M Alarms M Information messages M Datalogaing Datalog Model 1 g M Startup macro Startup M Shutdown macro Shutdown s lt s I Initial graphic eoin o H f Parameter file Paai O Parameter list as OF Cancel Help For detailed information about the options in the Startup editor see Help 14 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Testing your application Test Application tool 14 2 You can test your application in FactoryTalk View Studio at any time during the development process to make sure that everything works the way you intend If the development computer is connected to the data source you can test all functions of the application including security settings language switching communications and alarm monitoring A FactoryTalk View ME Station emulator opens on the development computer and runs the application This run time version of the application is a temporary version for testing use only You cannot run it on another computer There is a two hour time limit for test running the application in FactoryTalk View Studio The procedure in this section shows you how to test your entire application For information about testing a single graphic display see page 19 10 To test your application in FactoryTalk View Studio 1 On the Application menu click Test Applic
477. number format of the current application language For example if the application language uses a comma for the decimal symbol floating point values in the table use commas for the decimal symbol For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 Numeric limits RecipePlus supports the range of numbers allowed by the VARIANT data type This range is 1 797693E 308 to 1 797693E 308 This range applies to the numbers that you enter in the RecipePlus Editor and it also applies to the tag values that are uploaded to the recipe file at run time 29 Setting up RecipePlus Specifying the run time file location Use the RecipePlus Setup editor to specify the run time file location Storing files outside the HMI project If you store the recipe files outside the HMI project the run time application can use updated recipe files without creating a new run time application mer file Storing recipe files outside the HMI project also allows you to use FactoryTalk View Studio to view and edit recipe data that is saved at run time without converting the mer file to an med file For more information see page 29 13 If you want to store recipe files outside of the HMI project at run time make sure you move the files from the application s RecipePlus folder to the specified run time location before running the application This is the path to the RecipePlus folder Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterpri
478. nverting PanelBuilder 1400e applications Notes Alarm Status Screen Alarm status list Clear All Button Clear alarm history button Print Button in Alarm History screen Print alarm history button Print Button in Alarm Status screen Print alarm status button Alarm Status Button Alarm Goto display button History Button Exit Button Close display button Alarm History List Alarm list Display Mode Button Alarm status mode button Time Display Time and date display During conversion the display is set up to show the time only The PanelBuilder 1400e time format is not converted For details about the FactoryTalk View time format see page 21 15 Date Display Time and date display During conversion the display is set up to show the date only The PanelBuilder 1400e date format is not converted For details about the FactoryTalk View date format see page 21 15 Arc with solid fill style Arc with solid back style and line The line graphic object is added because the solid FactoryTalk View arc shape does not have a line between the two points of the arc FactoryTalk View arc FactoryTalk View arc with line A 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE A 8 Unsupported graphic objects These PanelBuilder 1400e objects are not supported in FactoryTalk View Scrolling List includes Cursor List Multistate Indicator Object List Local Message Object List
479. o 2 4 assigning to RSView 3 20 and earlier users 7 assigning to users 9 running 3 6 Login window 2 Logix5000 faceplates See Process faceplates Log1x5000 processors 2 addressing syntax for 6 creating tags in 3 Logout button graphic object 3 16 locating in display hierarchy 1 logging out with 12 Logout macro 2 4 assigning to RSView 3 20 and earlier users 7 assigning to users running 3 6 LSBit trigger type 13 M Macro button graphic object 56 using to run macros 2 Macros creating 1 remote running from the data source 6 3 Macros editor 12 Maintained push button graphic object 4 21 at run time 16 Math functions in expressions 13 Memory tags 9 using 4 Memory usage monitoring at runtime 7 Menus in the Graphic Displays editor 6 Message severity for diagnostics messages 4 Messages displaying 9 multiple languages for in RSView ME Station 4 00 15 planning 6 See also Alarm messages Diagnostics messages Information messages Local messages Microsoft Access logging to 7 Microsoft Excel exporting text strings to 6 translating text strings in 9 Microsoft SQL Server logging to 7 Minimum and maximum values Document version 6 1 19 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 for animation 6 for HMI tags 4 for trends 6 Modicon devices 1 Momentary push button graphic object 4 19 at run time 15 Monochrome images 21 5 Move down button graphic object 7 16 49 setting up auto repeat for 11 using with alarm objects 38 usi
480. o display button 3 35 home button 7 16 49 information acknowledge button 7 16 information message display 9 65 interlocked push button 4 25 language switch button 3 16 latched push button 4 22 list indicator 6 42 local message display 9 54 login button 3 16 logout button 3 16 macro button 56 maintained push button 4 21 momentary push button 4 19 move down button 7 16 49 move left button 7 16 move right button 7 16 move up button 7 16 49 multistate indicator 5 39 multistate push button 4 24 next pen button 6 16 numeric display 8 28 numeric input cursor point 8 31 numeric input enable button 8 30 page down button 7 16 49 page up button 7 16 49 password button 3 16 pause button 6 16 piloted control list selector 5 51 print alarm history button 4 58 print alarm status button 4 59 ramp button 5 27 RecipePlus button 9 16 3 RecipePlus selector 9 2 RecipePlus table 9 2 reset alarm status button 16 reset alarm status mode button 8 return to display button 3 16 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 scale 5 44 48 shutdown button 4 16 silence alarms button 8 16 sort alarms button 8 16 string display 8 33 string input enable button 8 34 symbol 5 41 time and date display 6 57 trend 6 Graphic objects 1 aligning 49 animating 2 arranging 47 dl assigning connections to 34 using the Property Panel 30 coloring 31 converting to wallpaper 13 copying 40 cre
481. o edit mode to continue editing Test mode is not the same as running the display It does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box Alarm and information messages are not displayed although if communications are set up tag values are read and written Display navigation data logging parameters and macros do not work in this mode If you want to test these features test the application as described on page 14 2 If you set up local messages and graphic objects to use multiple languages the messages and objects are displayed in the current application language during test mode Using the Diagnostics List when in test mode The Diagnostics List shows messages about system activities when you test your graphic displays You can specify the types of messages to display in the Diagnostics List move the list resize it and clear the messages in it 19 e Using graphic displays For information about using the Diagnostics List see page 2 5 For information about specifying the types of messages to show in the Diagnostics List see page 10 5 Test Display To use test mode tool m On the View menu click Test Display or click the Test Display tool Edit Display To return to edit mode tool m On the View menu click Edit Display or click the Edit Display tool Setting up graphic displays To set up a graphic display specify its type background color and run time behavior in the
482. o force text to begin on a new line precede the text with the characters n For example Motor nStopped appears in the application as Motor Stopped To make the characters n appear as part of the text type n To make a backslash appear in the application type two backslashes Importing text containing multiple backslashes If the imported text file contains an odd number of backslashes next to each other one of the backslashes will be ignored For example the string Seven Eight is imported into the application as Seven Eight Importing text You can import text strings saved in Unicode text format or in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet format If your text strings are in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet format only text strings that exist in the spreadsheet are imported This means that existing strings in the application are not deleted during the import if they are not in the spreadsheet Back up the text in your application before importing You can do this by exporting the text Save the backup file in a different location than the translated file you are about to import To import text into your application from a text file 1 On the Tools menu click Languages 2 Inthe Language Configuration dialog box select the application language for which to import text strings 12 13 If you are going to import strings for multiple languages defined in an Excel spreadsheet it does not matter which language is s
483. o specify which users or groups can open the application and add edit and delete components You can also specify which users or groups can write to tags and set up view and respond to alarms To set security permissions for the application 1 Right click the application name and then click Security 2 Specify which users and groups have access to the application and assign permissions to users and groups for the actions listed in the dialog box For details see Help Setting up security access to System policies groups and users You can assign security access to the System folder and to all the folders in the System folder including policies groups and users You do this by specifying which groups and users have access to the folder and what actions they can perform To set up security access to policies groups and users 1 Right click the System folder or a folder in the System folder and then click Security 2 Specify which groups and users have access to the folder and what actions they can perform For details see Help Setting up security access to networks and devices You can assign security access to networks and devices in general to the development computer and to specific devices Set up security for networks and devices if you are using RSLinx Classic devices 11 Setting up security To set up security access to networks and devices 1 Inthe System folder right click Networks and Devices th
484. o start the tools m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt FactoryTalk View gt Tools and then click the tool to start To start the Diagnostics Viewer m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt FactoryTalk Tools and then click Diagnostics Viewer These tools are also available from the Tools menu in FactoryTalk View Studio FactoryTalk tools FactoryTalk tools are installed when you install FactoryTalk Services Platform They are available from the Windows Start menu To start FactoryTalk tools m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt FactoryTalk Tools and then click the tool to start FactoryTalk Activation Manager FactoryTalk Activation Manager is installed when you install FactoryTalk View if you choose to install the FactoryTalk Activation It isavailable from the Windows Start menu To start FactoryTalk Activation tools m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt FactoryTalk Activation gt FactoryTalk Activation Manager to start FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE A 2 Exploring FactoryTalk View Studio This chapter describes m starting and exiting FactoryTalk View Studio m Opening sample applications m exploring the FactoryTalk View Studio main window m using the Explorer window m working with editors m entering information in spreadsheets printing informat
485. oa deeeads 15 1 Moving applications to the run time computer 0 0 0 c ee eee eee 15 3 Starting FactoryTalk View ME Station 0 0 00 eee 15 4 Loading and running applications 0 0 0 00 eee eens 15 4 Shutting down applications 0 0 0 0 ccc cee eee eens 15 5 What happens when the application shuts down 00000 15 6 Changing application settings 0 0 cc eee eens 15 6 Editing device shortcuts 0 0 cnn eens 15 6 Looking up contact information for technical support 0048 15 7 Setting up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the run time computer 15 8 Setting up serial ports for use with KEPServerEnterprise 15 8 Setting up RSLinx Enterprise communication drivers 000000 15 9 Specifying the printers to use at run time 0 0 0 0 cee ee eee 15 10 Specifying startup options for FactoryTalk View ME Station 15 12 Deleting log files on the run time computer 0 0 00 e eee eee 15 16 Running a newer version of the application 00000 00 15 16 Deleting log files manually 0 0 0 0 0 c ccc eee 15 16 Turning off the FactoryTalk Directory Server warning 4 15 16 Specifying time date and number formats 20 0 0 00 cc eee eee 15 17 Using the DeskLock tool 0 0 eee ees 15 17 Transferring applications to a PanelView Plus terminal DUNIMIALy Ol SICDS2icciest
486. oaseeo teen dseeadsas ted ETARE EE a E a GRA 16 1 Starting FactoryTalk View ME Station 0 00 0 ccc eee ee 16 3 Specifying the driver to use for the transfer 0 0 0 0 0 cece ee eee 16 4 Setting up a driver for the transfer on the development computer 16 5 Downloading applications and Windows TrueType fonts 16 6 ADOUL te Gow iloaG ox 4084 she ekadesdenewa e Gd Reese eeehe sede ads 16 6 DEM aPdOWHIOACS a acet eae eed Ade cheers oan Rees maseeeena es ote 16 6 Uploading applications from the PanelView Plus CE PanelView Plus or Panel View Pilus Oe pine aka ge vod ar oE yok AEREN en eee ee os 16 7 ADOut the upload 2 42 2ntes be cee wsedenceeedeeenseetetelorne dey sh 16 7 Seral UPlOAS 00k ence ew odes won eeene ss See es Pees coe de ss bed eset 16 7 Comparing applications 00 ccc eee e ees 16 8 Using your application Logging in to a Windows domain 0 17 1 Logging in to the application 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eee 17 2 4 00 and later applications nananana ccc eee ene 17 2 18 3 20 and earlier applications 0 0 0 What happens when a user logs in 0 0 2 eee eee Problems with logging in eee Changing passwords 0 ccc eee eens Loppi pik 22 oat ae eee ee no eee ee aa Gah Oo ae epee et Entering numeric values 00 ccc eee eee Activating the cursor point 1 0 0 0 eee Ramping numeric values 0 000
487. odel defines which tags to log data for as well as how and where the data is logged You can set up multiple data log models but you can run only one data log model at a time For information about running a different data log model see page 26 4 Creating Data Log Models Use the Data Log Models editor to create one or more data log models Each data log model is a file stored in the editor s folder you can open and work on multiple models at the same time i Blend inputs Pumphouse Data Log Models JOf x Setup Paths Log Triggers Tags in Model Set up general aspects of the model Model nant BlerfNinputs Description Specify where to log the data Maximum data points Specify how logging occurs Specify which tags to log data for soo 26 2 26 Setting up data logging For detailed information about the options in the Data Log Models editor see Help Each data log model has a unique name and an optional description You can log a maximum of 300 000 points When the maximum number of data points have been logged the oldest data is deleted to make room for the new data Data storage locations You can store data log files in any one of these locations m on the run time computer m on another computer on the network m onacompact Flash Card for PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminals only If the logging destination is unavailable for any reason for example
488. of the MERuntime RAM Usage Total RAM Usage and Available RAM connections using data logging or using graphic objects such as numeric displays The connections are updated every 10 seconds as long as the Remote RAM Usage connection has a non zero value Set up the data source to set this connection to a non zero value when you want memory monitoring to occur or assign the same tag or expression to a graphic object such as a maintained push button that the operator can use to turn memory monitoring on and off These connections are available when you run FactoryTalk View ME Station on a personal computer and on the Panel View Plus 6 PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals For Panel View Plus 6 PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals you can also turn on the display of RAM usage statistics at run time To do this in the Configuration 8 Setting up global connections Mode window select Runtime RAM Usage and then make your selections in the Runtime RAM Usage window For more information see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual 8 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 8 10 lt Setting up alarms This chapter describes m steps for setting up alarms m preparing to set up alarms m how alarms work m alarm trigger data types m tips for using array tags optional alarm connections m creating alarm messages in multiple languages m the ALARM ALARM BANNER ALARM MULTI LINE
489. of the Property Panel specify the AutoRepeatRate and AutoRepeatDelay properties Ensuring values are read by the data source before sending new values To ensure a value is read by the data source before the operator sends a new value use Enter key handshaking While Enter key handshaking 1s in effect for an object the operator cannot send a new value to the object s Value connection You can use Enter key handshaking with these graphic objects control list selector m piloted control list selector m numeric input enable button m string input enable button m numeric input cursor point If Enter key handshaking is in effect for one of these objects the operator can still provide input to other objects in the graphic display If the graphic display is closed while Enter key handshaking is in effect the handshaking is cancelled Methods of Enter key handshaking Enter key handshaking works by setting the object s Enter connection to 1 As long as the Enter connection is set to 1 new values cannot be sent to the Value connection How the Enter connection is reset to 0 depends on how you set up Enter key handshaking There are two ways you can use Enter key handshaking m to hold the value at the data source for a specific period of time m to hold the value at the data source until the data source notifies FactoryTalk View that the value has been read Choose the method that best suits your application needs and communic
490. of the statement is a non zero value the statement is true and returns value1 if the result is 0 the statement is false and returns value2 The if then else structure is illustrated here Tue false 23 Using expressions Nested if then else You can also nest an if then else structure inside the Then or Else part of an if then else structure Example 1 Nested if then else This expression if statement then value else if statement2 then value2 else value3 has this interpretation True state ment false tue statement false wales vwalye 1 23 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 18 Example 2 Nested if then else This expression if statement then if statement2 then valuel else value2 else value3 has this interpretation Tue state ment2 false walle Using write expressions Write expressions allow the operator to enter a value which is manipulated by an expression before being sent to the data source FactoryTalk View substitutes the value the operator enters for the placeholder in the expression calculates the value of the expression and writes the result to the Value connection All write expressions must contain a question mark as a placeholder for the value the operator enters You can use write expressions with the numeric input enable button and the numeric input cursor point When the operator presses the button
491. on For more information see the example on page 11 24 9 Attach visibility animation to the shutdown button so that only authorized users can see and therefore use the button For more information see the example on page 11 24 10 Specify captions for the buttons and add explanatory text to the graphic display If desired attach visibility animation to the text as well 11 In the Display Settings dialog box assign the security code to the Log In display 12 In the Startup editor in the Initial graphic box select the Log In display Until an authorized user is logged in further access to the application is denied In addition only authorized users can stop the application Users who have access to the application can use the application and log out Make sure you provide a way for users to navigate back to the Log In display to log out When a user logs out the DEFAULT user is automatically logged in Do not give the DEFAULT user access to the goto display button or shutdown button You can also use the Remote Display Number connection to open the startup Log In display when a user logs out This might be useful if users can log out from various locations graphic displays within the application If you use the auto logout feature you can specify that the Log In display is opened when an auto logout occurs For more information about See Using the Project Settings editor Chapter 4 Attaching animation to g
492. on or for the duration of the hold time whichever is longer Then the connection s value is reset to 0 m When the Remote Ack connection changes to a new non zero value that matches the trigger value of an unacknowledged alarm FactoryTalk View sends the trigger s value or bit position for bit triggers to this connection and holds the value for the duration of the hold time Then the connection s value is reset to 0 To avoid confusion about whether a specific trigger s alarm individual alarm has been acknowledged or all alarms for the trigger have been acknowledged make sure the Acknowledge all value is not the same as one of the trigger values How the Remote Ack connection works The Remote Ack connection allows for the remote acknowledgement of alarms The data source writes the alarm s trigger value or bit position for bit triggers to this connection and the unacknowledged alarm with this trigger value is acknowledged If you assign this connection and specify an Acknowledge all value for the trigger when the data source sends the Acknowledge all value to this connection all unacknowledged alarms for the trigger are acknowledged Make sure that the Acknowledge all value is not the same as one of the trigger values Set up the data source to send the correct value to the Remote Ack connection when you want a remote acknowledgement to take place Remote acknowledgement does not take place if t
493. on 4 00 or later m assign user passwords version 3 20 and earlier applications only m add Windows users or groups version 3 20 and earlier applications only The method for adding users and assigning security codes to them depends on whether you are setting up users for FactoryTalk View 4 00 applications or for RSView 3 20 and earlier applications There is a separate tab for 4 00 and later applications and for 3 20 and earlier applications The Runtime Security editor has special items on the View menu to control the appearance of the editor It also has items on the Setup menu and extra tools on the toolbar FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE The DEFAULT user The first account in the editor is the DEFAULT user account The DEFAULT account is used when no one is logged in The DEFAULT user initially has access to each security code Unless you want everyone to have access to all parts of the application at run time without logging in turn off the DEFAULT user s access to the security codes you plan to use You cannot delete the DEFAULT user account Assign the security code for the startup display to the DEFAULT user or else the startup display won t open If the startup display uses the security code you can assign any code from A to P to open the display For more information see page 11 9 Setting up users for 4 00 and later applications Runtime Security Condiments ME Runtime 4 00 and
494. on dialog box do one of the following Select an object and then on the View menu click Animation Select an object and then on the Animation menu click an animation type Animation types that are not supported for the selected object are unavailable m Right click an object select Animation and then click an animation type Animation types that are not supported for the selected object are unavailable View menu a Edit Dispar Tance soan Animation 22 Animating graphic objects Animation menu 22 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 4 About the Animation dialog box The Animation dialog box is a floating dialog box which means you can keep it open all the time and move it around the screen While it s open you can select other objects and open other dialog boxes Animation tabs Expression box Animation Horizg tal Position Vertical Position Honzontal Slider Vertical Slider Touch OLE Vert v Hotation Width Expression Tank_ pressure Tags j Expression Expression range Rotation Degrees i nimun e mum Fe 180 C Use tag s min and max property values Ab minimum I a At maximun mhio Center of rotation Use constant Mir Ei Max 240 Cor ces cea c Read from bags l a Delete Close Help Expression range Animation result For details about the parts of the Animation dialog box see Help Using Object Smart Path to visually
495. onfirm Password F 4 2 Press the Old Password button or press F2 on an external keyboard The string pop up keyboard opens For details about using the keyboard see page 17 11 EEE SE Eee sielelel ye tele l ely AAEE popoooogngnh SEn oaan 3 Type your old password in the string pop up keyboard or on an external keyboard and then press Enter The password is case sensitive 17 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 17 6 4 Press the New Password button or press F3 on an external keyboard 5 Type the new password in the string pop up keyboard or on an external keyboard and then press Enter 6 Press the Confirm Password button or press F4 on an external keyboard 7 Type the new password again and then press Enter 8 To close the Change Password window and complete the change press Enter Logging out When the current user logs out if a logout macro 1s assigned to the user the macro runs If the user belongs to a group and a logout macro is set up for the group the logout macro runs After the current user is logged out the DEFAULT user is logged in If a login macro is assigned to the DEFAULT user the macro runs You can also set up the application to automatically log out the current user after a specified period of inactivity For more information see page 11 13 To log out m Press the logout button Entering numeric values The operator can enter or ramp numeric val
496. ons One way to set up security is to assign the Read and List Children permissions to the All Users group at the FactoryTalk Directory level and then assign permissions for writing creating children configuring security and deleting to users and groups at the application level If you deny permission for an action to a user this overrides permission the user is granted as a member of a group If you deny permission for an action to a group allowing the action to a member of the group does not override the denial The denial always takes precedence To set up users 1 Inthe System folder right click Users and then click New User or New Windows Linked User Specify the user name password and password options For details see Help Right click Users and then click Security Specify what actions the users can perform For details see Help og ee To add users to a group right click the group and then click Properties For details see Help To change user passwords 1 In the Users folder right click the user name and then click Properties 2 Click Reset Password For details see Help Users can change their password at run time using the Password button For more information see page 17 4 11 Setting up security Creating FactoryTalk Security user groups The use of user groups is optional but recommended Groups allow you to set up security access once for the entire group rather than individually for member
497. ons consecutively The multistate push button displays the current state of a process or operation by showing a different color caption or image to reflect different states Each time the operator presses the button the tag changes to the value for the next state When the button is in its last state and the operator presses the button the button returns to its first state The error state The button s error state is displayed at run time when m the Value connection is unassigned m the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up The error state is also displayed when the display containing the multistate push button first opens if the Value connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up To set up a multistate push button 1 Double click the multistate push button Multistate Push Button Properties Ea General States Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width m MV Border uses back color o Highlight color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle State settings Number of states Next state based on 2 Current State Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo fo Cancel Help 21 Setting up graphic objects 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like and how the button changes State m Inthe
498. ons in the dialog box see Help 5 Ellipse tool ie Freehand tool 7 20 Using graphic objects To close the dialog box click OK You can also use the Arc and Wedge tools to reshape arcs and wedges For more information see page 20 43 Creating ellipses and circles Use the Ellipse tool to draw an ellipse or circle To create an ellipse or circle l 2 J Select the Ellipse tool Click the mouse where you want to position the object and then drag to draw an ellipse or circle of the desired size To draw a circle hold down Ctrl while you drag To change how the object looks double click it to open the object s Properties dialog box Select circle or ellipse options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help To close the dialog box click OK Creating freehand shapes Using the Freehand tool is similar to drawing with a pen on paper To create a freehand shape l 2 3 5 Select the Freehand tool Click and drag to create the shape you want To change how the object looks double click it to open the Freehand Properties dialog box Select freehand options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help To close the dialog box click OK Creating lines To create a line l Select the Line tool 20 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Line tool a Polygon tool A Polyline tool 20 18 2 Click where you wa
499. ons on a personal computer Load the application For more information see page 15 4 Edit device shortcuts if necessary For more information see page 15 6 Set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the run time computer if you have not already done so For more information see page 10 6 If you will be using KEPServerEnterprise specify serial port IDs For more information see page 15 8 If you will be using RSLinx Enterprise set up communication drivers if you have not already done so For more information see page 15 9 Specify the printers to use For more information see page 15 10 Specify startup options for FactoryTalk View ME Station For more information see page 15 12 Once you ve completed these steps you re ready to run the application For information about running your application see Chapter 17 Moving applications to the run time computer The run time application file has the extension mer You can use any standard file transfer method to copy your run time application from the development computer to the run time computer You can copy the application file from the development computer to removable media such as USB thumb drive USB hard drive or a floppy disk and then from the removable media to the run time computer If the application file is too large for the removable media use a larger capacity removable media if the development and run time computers are on the same network
500. ons running on personal computers only All alarms are silenced when m the operator presses the silence alarms button m an alarm whose Audio property is turned on is acknowledged m the Remote Silence connection s value changes to a new non zero value m the operator presses the clear alarm history button Method for sorting alarms When the operator presses the sort alarms button the sort order toggles from time to trigger value or from trigger value to time The sort order applies to all alarms in all alarm lists and in the alarm log file Methods for resetting alarms Resetting alarms affects how alarms are displayed in the alarm status list When alarms are reset m the accumulated time an alarm has been in alarm is reset to 0 If the alarm is still active the time begins accumulating again m the number of times the alarm has been triggered is reset to 0 If the alarm is still active the number changes to 1 m the date and time are sent to the system tag AlarmResetDateAndTimeString The alarms for a specific alarm trigger are reset when m the operator presses a clear alarm history button that has been set up to clear and reset alarms for a specific alarm trigger All alarms are reset when m the operator presses a reset alarm status button m the operator presses a clear alarm history button if the button has been set up to clear and reset all alarms m the Remote Status Reset connection s value changes to
501. oolbar click the Group tool The handles around each object are replaced by a set of handles around the group a E E m E E m E E a E m m Y A Drag the mouse to select the objects Group them To ungroup objects 1 Select the group of objects to ungroup 2 On the Arrange menu click Ungroup or on the Graphics toolbar click the Ungroup tool 20 45 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 46 The handles around the group are replaced with handles around each object m m E E E E E E E E Select the group Ungroup it Ungrouping deletes any animation attached to the group because the group no longer exists However animation attached to the individual objects that were in the group remains active Editing groups of objects Edit a group the same way you would edit an individual object You can m use the Property Panel to apply the same properties to all the members of the group at once For example change the line width of all objects in the group to 2 pixels For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 m use the toolbars to apply the same pattern style background style foreground colors and background colors to all the members of the group m for objects with states use the States toolbar to cycle through the states and apply the same properties to the states for each object in the group at once When you select a group containing objects with states only t
502. op of the screen The items on the menu depend on the cursor s location For example when you right click an object the menu contains the most common actions you can perform on that object When you right click an object Start Conveyor 19 6 Key Assignments Arrange Animation Convert to Wallpaper Tag Substitution Property Panel Object Explorer Cut Copy Delete Duplicate Global Object Defaults Edit Base Object Break Link a menu opens It contains menu items for working with the selected object 19 Using graphic displays Using the toolbars The toolbars provide another convenient way to perform an action quickly You can customize your workspace by dragging the toolbars to any location on the screen You can also dock them to the inside edges of the FactoryTalk View Studio workspace Click the Close button to close the toolbar Click the grab bars and drag to undock a docked toolbar Click the title bar and drag to move a floating undocked toolbar mOS Os4e 5 r Untitled Display Foreground Color es i BEE SEEES EEE San EE EEE SRE ia Background Color Hew 38 W S 7 Z SS Nil ill tt 8 To display a toolbar m On the View menu select Toolbars and then click the toolbar to display The menu displays a check mark beside the toolbars that are already open To undock a toolbar m Click the double grab bars
503. or Display Type Replace OnTop Cannot Be Replaced Display Number fo Security Code T Title Bar Merania Disable Initial Input Focus 2 Inthe General tab select a security code To give every security code access to the display select the asterisk The is selected by default Example Assigning security codes to prevent access to graphic displays This example shows how to set up users with access to different graphic displays 1 Assign security codes to graphic displays as follows To this display Assign this security code Alarm History A Boiler B Furnace C Top Secret D 2 3 11 Setting up security In the Runtime Security editor assign the security code P to the DEFAULT user Assign security codes for the displays they can use to the other users To this user Assign these security codes MAINTENANCE A B C OPERATOR A B ADMIN All The users have access to these graphic displays MAINTENANCE has access to the first three graphic displays OPERATOR has access to the Alarm History and Boiler displays but not to the Furnace or Top Secret displays The ADMIN user has access to every graphic display The DEFAULT user has access only to graphic displays to which or P has been assigned In this example the DEFAULT user does not have access to any of the four graphic displays In this example you could have assigned the same security code to the
504. or if the data is outside the vertical axis range the pen does not appear in the chart Pen icons Pen icons appear at the right edge of the chart at run time if you choose to display them The icon s position indicates the pen s most recent recorded value from the value table even if the trend is paused or if the most recent value has not been plotted yet Pen markers Pen markers are symbols that indicate data points If data is plotted frequently the markers might not appear as distinct separate symbols For example see the lowest pen in the illustration on page 28 5 Chart types Standard vs XY Plots You can create a standard chart which plots tag values against time or an XY Plot chart which plots one or more tag s values against another s This illustration shows what an XY Plot chart could look like Time period 1 12 56 PM 1 14 56 PM Sunday December 31 2000 Notice that the horizontal axis labels display the range for the specified x axis pen The time period covered by the chart is at the upper left 28 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 28 8 Isolated graphing For charts with multiple pens you can allow the pen values to overlap or you can isolate each pen in its own horizontal band on the chart This is an example of isolated graphing with a 10 buffer between each pen s band Sunday December 31 2000 al 1 02 17 Phi 120241 1 03 03 1 03 29 1 03 53 1 04 1
505. or showing diagnostics messages at run time Diagnostics list graphic object f DIAGNOSTICS Condiments Display Clear Clear All F1 F2 You can use the DIAGNOSTICS display as is or modify the display For example you can change the color of the objects or add and remove buttons Or you can create your own graphic display to use for displaying diagnostics messages In the Diagnostics List Setup editor specify the display to use The diagnostics list graphic object The DIAGNOSTICS display contains a diagnostics list graphic object which lists the diagnostics messages For more information about the diagnostics list see page 10 12 Buttons in the DIAGNOSTICS display The DIAGNOSTICS display contains diagnostics list buttons for clearing the messages as well as buttons for scrolling the list and closing the display For information about how the buttons work see page 10 13 Creating your own diagnostics display You can create your own graphic display for displaying diagnostics messages containing a diagnostics list graphic object and the buttons the operator needs for using the display If you create your own graphic display use an On Top display and select the Cannot Be Replaced option For more information about the diagnostics list see page 10 12 For information about the buttons you can use with the list see page 10 13 For information about creating graphic displays and graphic objects see Chap
506. ored in the editor s folder You can open and work on multiple recipe files at the same time The RecipePlus Editor has special items on the Edit menu that allow you to easily copy and paste from the spreadsheet in the Ingredients tab to Microsoft Excel This editor also has items on the Recipe menu for adding deleting and renaming data sets and tag sets and for comparing recipes To help you get started FactoryTalk View creates one data set tag set and unit You can rename them and assign data values and tags to them or delete them and create your own For information about comparing recipes see the next section C3 RecipePlus e RecipeFlus Setup ge EEA Editor 29 Setting up RecipePlus Specify the run time name status tag and percent complete tag Set up ingredients minimum and maximum values data sets and tag sets Set up units pairs of data sets and tag sets Hot Sauce Condiments RecipePlus Editor Runtime recipe name fH ot Sauce Status tag StatusTag ae Percent complete tag PercentCompleteT ag ay Dere se For details about the options in the RecipePlus Editor see Help You can also use the RecipePlus Editor to view the data values that are saved at run time For more information see page 29 13 29 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 29 8 Comparing recipes You can use the RecipePlus Editor to compare data sets and tags sets within a sin
507. ory Talk View syntax For other data types no change is needed Unsupported expression syntax This table describes the PanelBuilder 1400e expression syntax that is not supported in FactoryTalk View with information about how to achieve the same result where possible Type of expression component or Equivalent FactoryTalk View syntax operator PanelBuilder 1400e syntax if any Exit statement Exit Local variables DIM varname AS varname Integer division x x MOD y y Endif If then endif If then else 0 If then else endif If then else Select case Select Case Use nested if then else Casel CaseN CaseElse EndSelect Logical Xor if one or both operands Xor NOT x AND y are Boolean or Single data types OR NOT x OR y FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE A 16 Order of precedence The order of precedence is slightly different in FactoryTalk View Check your expressions to make sure the result is what you intend PanelBuilder 1400e order of precedence FactoryTalk View order of precedence negation NOT tilde floating point division MOD AND amp amp amp gt gt lt lt integer division ts ORs MOD EQ NE LT lt GT gt LE lt GE gt subtraction E Not And Or Xor For more information about order of precedence see page 23 10 _ Aprenbrx B Converting P
508. osing the display For information about how the buttons work see page 9 36 The ALARM BANNER display The Libraries folder contains a graphic display called ALARM BANNER The ALARM BANNER display allows the operator to see a single alarm at a time p ALARM BANNER Condiments Library graphic object Ack Silence Alarm Alarms Buttons _ FA IF2 9 26 9 Setting up alarms The alarm banner graphic object The ALARM BANNER display contains an alarm banner graphic object which lists the most recent alarm message You can set up the alarm banner to queue new alarms until the displayed alarm has been acknowledged or to show new alarms as they occur The alarm banner in the ALARM BANNER display is set up to display new alarms as they occur and to display active alarms only but you can edit it if desired For more information about the alarm banner see page 9 33 Buttons in the ALARM BANNER display The ALARM BANNER display contains alarm buttons for acknowledging clearing and silencing alarms as well as a button for closing the display For information about how the buttons work see page 9 36 The ALARM MULTI LINE display The Libraries folder contains a graphic display called ALARM MULTI LINE The ALARM MULTI LINE display allows the operator to see multiple alarms at once p ALARM MULTI LINE Condiments Library Header an FGHIJK LMNOPQ RSTUY WXYZ
509. owse button is present in the Exprn column in the editor or Connections tab Trigger Cancel Type the expression here or Click the Browse button to open the Expression editor To assign an expression do one of the following m Inthe Exprn column click the Browse button and then create an expression in the Expression editor Use this method if you want to check the expression syntax m Inthe Tag or expression column type the expression The expression syntax is not checked if you use this method For more information about expressions see Chapter 23 Substituting tag names used in graphic objects You can use tag substitution to replace tag names and expressions assigned to the connections for graphic objects For example if you assign a tag to multiple objects in a graphic display and then decide to use a different name for the tag you can create a new tag and then use tag substitution to search for all tag references with the old name and replace them with the new tag name You can also use tag substitution to replace the tags contained in embedded variables For more information about tag substitution see page 20 36 6 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Logging tag values Analog and digital tag values can be logged including both HMI and data server tags To set up data logging use the Data Log Models editor For more information see Chapter 26 datalog Objects 5 Sc
510. p can perform For details see Help 5 To add members to the group later right click the group and then click Properties For details see Help Setting up security access to the FactoryTalk Directory The FactoryTalk Security access that you set up for the FactoryTalk Directory applies to all FactoryTalk View applications and all Rockwell Automation products installed on the development computer By default applications and the System folder inherit the security permissions assigned to the FactoryTalk Directory This means that you only need to assign permissions to user groups or users once If desired you can override the permissions that you set up at this 11 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 11 20 level by assigning different permissions to applications and to the items in the System folder You can assign permissions for actions related to FactoryTalk View applications and tags here or at the application level If you assign them here they are inherited by all applications To set security permissions for the FactoryTalk Directory 1 At the top of the tree in the Explorer window right click Local and then click Security 2 Specify which users and groups have access to FactoryTalk Directory and assign permissions to users and groups for the actions listed in the dialog box For details see Help Setting up security access to the application Assign FactoryTalk Security at the application level t
511. p editor with its two tabs The Design Local tab is for establishing the location of the tags addresses for editing The tags addresses can be online with a controller or other data server or an offline controller file This will enable the Tag Browser to find the tags addresses FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 5 4 The Runtime Target tab is for identifying the connection from the run time computer or terminal to the controller or other data server If the paths are the same use the Copy button to copy the Design configuration to the Runtime tab For more information see Help for RSLinx Enterprise Setting up an OPC data server Use an OPC data server if you want to use RSLinx Classic instead of RSLinx Enterprise or if you want to use a third party OPC data server You can set up a cache for tags on the data server A cache allows you to view tag names when you are not connected to the data server To create an OPC data server Inthe Explorer window right click the application select Add New Server and then click OPC Data Server OPC Data Server Properties Ei General Advanced Name S Description Computer hosting the server f Server will be hosted on local computer C Server will be hosted on remote computer aa OPEC Server name ProglD Browse Cancel Help 5 e Setting up communications For details about selecting options in the OPC Data Server Properti
512. page 21 12 What is written to the Value connection When the operator presses the Enter button in the pop up keyboard or scratchpad the string that is sent to the Value connection depends on how the string input enable button is set up m Ifa fill character is set up for the button and the operator enters fewer than the maximum number of input characters the fill characters are placed after the string the operator enters m Spaces have a hex value of 20 m Zeroes have a hex value of 30 m FF characters have a hex value of FF m Null characters have a hex value of 0 The null character indicates the end of string input It does not add to the actual string length Ifthe number of input characters is fewer than the number of characters in the length of the string tag assigned to the Value connection the remaining spaces are padded with the null character When the string is written to the Value connection the first character is placed in the high order byte of the first word at the tag address the second character is placed in the low order byte of the first word and so on 17 Using your application Problems with the string pop up windows Problems with the string pop up keyboard and scratchpad occur under these circumstances m Ifthe graphic display changes remotely before the user has pressed the Enter button the pop up window closes without writing out a string m Ifthe screen resolution is smaller tha
513. page 26 4 Deleting log files manually To delete log files for the loaded application m Inthe FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Yes beside the Delete Log Files Before Running button All alarm and data log files for the loaded application are deleted To delete log files for all applications on the run time computer 1 In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Terminal Settings 2 Double click Delete Log Files 3 Click Yes Log files for data log models that use the default path are deleted All alarm log files are deleted Turning off the FactoryTalk Directory Server warning When you load an application you are notified that the application s FactoryTalk System Directory of users and security policies will be loaded on the computer The computer s existing FactoryTalk System Directory is archived while you run the application It is restored when you stop the application You can turn off this notification warning To turn off the overwrite warning 1 In the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Terminal Settings 2 Double click System Directory Overwrite Warning 3 Click No 15 Running applications on a personal computer Specifying time date and number formats Time date and number formats are used by these graphic objects m numeric display m gauge m time and date display m trend m alarm banner m alarm list The time and date formats are also used when printing the ala
514. peat mode see page 21 12 If ramping the button or cursor point would cause the value at the Value connection to exceed the maximum value or be less than the minimum value a message is written to the Diagnostics List and the value at the Value connection is not changed How values are calculated When the pop up keypad or scratchpad has focus and the operator presses the Enter button the value that is sent to the Value connection depends on how the button or cursor point is set up m The value the operator enters is compared to the minimum and maximum range for the object If the value is within the range the value is written to the Value connection If the Optional Expression connection is assigned and the original value is within the range but the expression result is a value outside the range the value is still written to the Value connection If the decimal point type is Fixed Position with a Digits after decimal value that is greater than 0 the decimal point is stripped from the value before comparing it to the minimum and maximum range For example if the entered value is 9 25 the stripped value is 925 If the stripped value is within the range the stripped value is sent to the Value connection or substituted for the in the Optional Expression 17 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 17 10 If the decimal point type is Implicit and the tag assigned to the Value connection uses an integer d
515. pens m On Top displays that use the Cannot Be Replaced option remain open on top of the new Replace display If the operator attempts to open a Replace display that is already open for example using a goto display button to which the same display is assigned the display does not close and FactoryTalk View sends an error message to FactoryTalk Diagnostics On Top displays Use the On Top option to create pop up displays that open on top of the current Replace display Usually On Top displays are smaller than Replace displays so the operator doesn t lose track of display navigation You can open multiple On Top displays If more than one On Top display is open the display that has focus or had the most recent focus appears on top When an On Top display closes the display that had the most recent focus appears on top Use the Cannot Be Replaced option if you want the On Top display to remain open when a new Replace display is opened On Top displays do not have a Close button in the title bar Be sure to create a close button graphic object in On Top displays so the operator can close them The operator cannot move an On Top display by dragging its title bar The run time position of the display is fixed according to the position settings defined for the display You can specify unique titles for On Top displays You can use embedded variables in the title and the title text can switch languages at run time 1
516. play and all the original language strings will be undefined What is displayed When you open a library that supports multiple languages the strings are displayed using the current application language if available If the library does not contain the current language the strings are displayed as single question marks Similarly if the library contains the language but not all the strings are defined for the language undefined strings are displayed as single question marks For more information about using multiple languages with graphic libraries see Chapter 12 Location of library components The Libraries folder is located in Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 If desired you can specify a different directory in which to store library components If you specify a different directory FactoryTalk View saves graphic libraries that you add or create in the new directory Similarly when you open a library component FactoryTalk View looks for the component in the specified directory 19 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 20 If you specify a different directory but want to use the libraries that come with FactoryTalk View use My Computer or Windows Explorer to copy the library component files into the directory
517. pplication that is currently open Click Yes 2 Follow steps 2 through 7 in the previous procedure Equivalent graphic objects This section describes graphic objects that are equivalent in PanelBuilder 1400e and FactoryTalk View but have different names in the two products This PanelBuilder 1400e Is converted to this object FactoryTalk View object Notes Increment Value Button Ramp button During conversion the button is set up to increment Decrement Value Button Ramp button During conversion the button is set up to decrement Increment Value Button with Ramp button and numeric The Increment Value Button with Display is divided into Display display two separate FactoryTalk View objects Decrement Value Button with Ramp button and numeric The Decrement Value Button with Display is divided into Display display two separate FactoryTalk View objects ASCII Input small and large String input enable button Numeric Entry Keypad small Numeric input enable button and large Screen List Selector s list Display list selector The PanelBuilder 1400e Screen List Selector is divided into four separate FactoryTalk View graphic objects Screen List Selector s Enter Key Enter button A 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE This PanelBuilder 1400e object Is converted to this FactoryTalk View object Notes Screen List Selector s Down Cursor Move down button Screen List Selector s Up Cu
518. puters including run time logging to the local log or to an ODBC database m the Windows CE run time destination to receive logged messages from You can also use the Diagnostics Setup tool to clear the local log file To open the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Setup tool do one of the following m In FactoryTalk View Studio on the Tools menu click Diagnostics Setup m Inthe FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Terminal Settings and then double click Diagnostics Setup For information about opening the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box m on personal computers see page 15 4 m ona PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see page 16 3 10 Setting up Factory Talk Diagnostics m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt Utilities and then click Diagnostics Setup amp Diagnostics Setup Pile ES Specify which Diagnostics Setup Diagnostics Setup i j Destination Setup destinations FT View Diagnostics List This tool allows you to configure the installed FactoryT alk destinations and to receive wha t Tee configure the routing of the messages ODBC Database categories of Message Routing messages Cancel Apply Help For details about using the Diagnostics Setup tool see Help for the tool Logging to an ODBC database The option of logging FactoryTalk Diagnostics messages to an ODBC database is available for personal computers only ODBC log
519. py objects in the same display 1 Select one or more objects 2 Drag the object and then press Ctrl When you press Ctrl a plus sign is added to the cursor 3 When the object is where you want it release the mouse button and then the Ctrl key A new copy of the object is created If you selected several objects dragging one of the objects copies all the selected objects The objects maintain their position relative to each other db Cut tool Copy tool i Paste tool 20 Using graphic objects To drag objects between displays 1 Open both displays or a graphic library and a display 2 Position or resize the displays so both are visible For more information see page 19 13 3 Select one or more objects 4 Click the selected object and drag it to the new display If you selected several objects dragging one of the objects copies all the selected objects The objects maintain their position relative to each other Copying and pasting objects You can cut copy or paste objects using the menu items on the Edit menu or the buttons on the toolbar Once you cut or copy an object you can paste it anywhere in the drawing area of m the same graphic display m a graphic display in the same or a different application m agraphic library in the same or a different application To cut or copy objects 1 Select one or more objects 2 On the Edit menu click Cut or Copy or click the Cut or Copy tool on the Graphic
520. r Use the Information Messages editor to create one or more files of information messages Each file is stored in the editor s folder You can open and work on multiple message files at the same time i Maintenance Pumphouse Information Messages Trigger Value Tank due for cleaning at 13 00h Tank due for cleaning at 13 00h Check all fittings at dock at 9 00h You can define up to 10 000 messages in each message file For detailed information about the options in the Information Messages editor see Help 27 2 27 Using information messages Setting up how information messages are displayed Use the Information Setup editor to set up how information messages are displayed Information Setup Pumphouse Mel Display Display file name p en Message file name Maintenance E Edit Acknowledge hold time Masimum Update Fate 3 seconds h 0 5 seconds Connection E ome te For detailed information about the options in the Information Setup editor see Help Preparing to set up information messages As your application is running information is continually sent to the data source about the state of various processes For example your application might be monitoring whether a valve is open or closed or the temperature in a boiler Values representing the status of these processes are sent to the data source The data source The FactoryTalk View documentation use
521. r The menu bar contains the menu items for the active window Each editor has its own set of menus The toolbar The toolbar contains buttons for commonly used menu items so you can have quick access to the items without opening the menu When you point to a button on the toolbar the button name is displayed in a tooltip and in the status bar z FactoryT alk View Studio Machine Edition File View Application Tools Window Help Tooltip 2 Exploring FactoryTalk View Studio All editors use the Standard toolbar The Graphic Displays Graphic Libraries Runtime Security and Tags editors have additional toolbars The Explorer window The Explorer window has two tabs the Application tab and the Communications tab The Application tab contains the editors for creating and editing your application It also contains the System folder for setting up FactoryTalk Security The Communications tab contains the communications tree for the development computer For more information about using the communications tree see Help for RSLinx Enterprise For more information about the Explorer window see page 2 8 For information about setting up security see Chapter 11 The workspace The workspace is the blank area of the FactoryTalk View Studio window You can drag icons from the Explorer window to the workspace to open editors and components For more information see page 2 8 The Diagnostics List The Diagnostic
522. r or RecipePlus Table tool m On the Objects menu select RecipePlus and then click RecipePlus Button RecipePlus Selector or RecipePlus Table 3 Drag the mouse to create a box approximately the size you want for the object 4 Double click the object to open its Properties dialog box 5 Set up the object For details see Help Once you have set up a RecipePlus object you can edit it as you would any other graphic object You can move it resize it attach animation to it and so on You can also use the object in other graphic displays by dragging it from one display and dropping it into another For more information about graphic objects see Chapter 20 Testing RecipePlus objects I Test Display tool Edit Display tool 29 10 You can quickly test the recipe objects in a display by switching to test mode If communications are active and there is data for the tags you can download and upload recipe tag values When you are finished testing switch back to edit mode to continue editing To switch between test and edit modes m On the View menu click Test Display or Edit Display or click the Test Display and Edit Display tools Test mode is not the same as running the display Test mode does not change the appearance or position of the display as set up in the Display Settings dialog box 29 Setting up RecipePlus Using the RecipePlus_ Components graphic library The RecipePlus Components graphic library contains
523. r all captions on alarm objects In addition these alarm features can be translated into multiple languages m title of the alarm history report m title of the alarm status report Alarm objects and reports use the time formats for the current application language For more information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up alarms 1 Inthe Alarm Setup editor set up alarm triggers the tags or expressions to monitor define the alarm messages and their trigger values and specify the graphic display to open when alarms occur if any Also use this editor to specify trigger types Acknowledge all values the maximum alarm log file size the hold time and optional connections 2 Inthe Startup editor ensure that the Alarms box is checked it is checked by default See Help 3 Ifdesired in the Graphics editor modify the default ALARM display or create your own graphic display to use for alarms For example if you won t be using audible alarm signals edit the default display to remove the silence alarms button For information about graphic displays see Chapter 19 4 Test alarms on the run time system 9 Setting up alarms Setting up alarms Use the Alarm Setup editor to set up alarms Mf Alarm Setup Objects 5 Screen Demo OF x Trigger settings Define alarm triggers EEAO Trigger tyne Trigger label iF CirmernsLastDisp 1 3 13 AN
524. r color images including JPEG images you can specify whether to use a transparent or solid background fill If you select the transparent background fill style the black portions of the image become transparent For detailed information about setting up objects see Help Location of bitmap files The bitmap files that come with FactoryTalk View Studio are stored in this directory Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise Images Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise Images Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 The images are in folders called Arrows DIN ISA ListKey and Parts Importing bitmap and JPEG images To use bitmap and JPEG images you can m import the images first and then place them in your displays as needed This method is useful for images that you use to illustrate your displays For information about placing images in your display once you ve imported them see page 20 14 19 21 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 22 m use the Image Browser to import images as needed while setting up your graphic objects This method is useful for images that you use as labels on your graphic objects For information about using the Image Browser see page 19 23 m copy and paste images from the graphic libraries For information about copying and pasting objects see page 20 40 m copy and pa
525. r graphic object Delete the selector RecipePlus table graphic object Delete the table Acknowledge all alarms button with a filtered trigger Clear the Filtered triggers box Print alarm history button with a filtered trigger Clear the Filtered triggers box Print alarm status button with a filtered trigger Clear the Filtered triggers box Clear alarm history button with a filtered trigger Clear the Filtered triggers box Clear alarm history button with the Reset alarm status option cleared Select Reset alarm status G 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE G 6 Features that are not supported in version 3 10 or earlier The features listed in the previous tables are not supported in version 3 10 of RSView ME Station In addition these version 3 20 alarm options are not supported in version 3 10 nor in earlier versions The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature To remove or replace this feature Alarm list graphic object with an unsupported combination of alarm conditions Do this Do one of the following Select the Display check box for each alarm condition Select the Display check box for only these alarm conditions Active and unacknowledged Inactive and unacknowledged Alarm list graphic object with Blink selected for one or more alarm conditions For all alarm conditions that you are displaying clear the Blink ch
526. r is logged in If a macro is assigned to the DEFAULT user the macro runs For example you could create a macro to set the remote display number to open a new login display after the DEFAULT user logs in For information about controlling display changes remotely see page 8 4 Remote display changes are not checked for security To provide a way for users to log in 1 Specify the startup display in the Startup editor in the Initial graphic box The startup display is the graphic display that opens when your application starts running The startup display must have the code or a security code that is assigned to the DEFAULT user or it will not open For information about the Startup editor see Chapter 14 11 Setting up security 2 Create a login button in the startup display For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 For information about setting up login buttons see Help For more information about logging in see Chapter 17 Logging out To best maintain your security system set up your application so that users who log in are also required to log out When the current user logs out if a logout macro 1s assigned to the user the macro runs If the user belongs to a group and a logout macro is set up for the group the group s logout macro runs After the current user is logged out the DEFAULT user is logged in If a login macro is assigned to the DEFAULT user the macro runs Turn off the DEF
527. r once FactoryTalk View Studio is already open To convert a PanelBuilder 1400e application when you open FactoryTalk View Studio 1 Open FactoryTalk View Studio Hew Open Machine Edition Application New E sisting Application name Description Compact Machine Edition application Check this box to create an application that will min on a Panelview Plus Compact terminal Language English United States en US Cancel 2 Inthe New tab in the Application name box type a name for your converted application up to 32 characters long 3 If desired type a description of the application A 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE A 4 If the PanelBuilder 1400e application contains an Application File Comment the Application File Comment will overwrite the description you type here You can add or change the description later as described on page 4 18 4 Ifthe application is intended to run as a Compact Machine Edition application check this box If the application exceeds the limits for Compact applications the application will be created as a regular non Compact application 5 Specify a language for the converted application For information about using different languages see Chapter 12 6 Click Import Machine Edition Import Wizard Import Type Select the import type PanelBuilder Application pba PanelBuilder 1400e Ap lication ove Panel iew Terminal
528. r style Border width i Deriie Uses Hack coke Raisedinset E o Bact ices BB Border color C Fore color _ Selection back color BB Selection fore color Text Font Size Arial fo J Bl z uf Other MV Key navigation Wrap around Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the list looks like at run time whether the operator can navigate to the list using the keys on the keyboard or keypad and whether the cursor wraps from the bottom of the list back to the top Inthe Common tab specify the diagnostics list s spatial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up information message displays The information message display graphic object gives the operator run time messages about information that requires immediate attention FactoryTalk View comes with a default graphic display called INFORMATION that contains an information message display object You can use the display and object as is customize them or create your own 21 65 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 66 For more information about using information message displays see page 27 7 To set up an information message display 1 Double click the information message display General Common Appearance Border style Border width MV Border
529. r the same set of ingredients Each pairing of data set with tag set is called a unit Each unit is like a unique recipe At run time the operator can select the unit recipe that applies to the current operation For example a bakery making whole wheat bread could use the same ingredients and tag sets but depending on the type of crust desired could use different data sets to specify different baking temperatures As another example you might want to have multiple production lines baking the same bread In this case the data set for all the production lines would be the same but the tags receiving the recipe information would be different for each production line Units allow you to combine different tag sets and data sets for the same set of ingredients The FactoryTalk View RecipePlus system allows you to create up to 15 000 ingredients 500 data sets 50 tag sets and 2 500 units for each recipe file You can create data sets at 29 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 29 2 development time edit them at run time and also create new data sets from tag values at run time You can write the data set values to tags or write tag values to data sets The RecipePlus system can be used for manufacturing food and beverages but it can also be used for any application where you want to display edit download or save multiple values at once For example recipes are used in the petrochemical and pharmaceutical industries
530. r to analyze system activity and performance and make corrections during scheduled maintenance times m You can send errors that require immediate action to the diagnostics list object in the DIAGNOSTICS display as well as the log file m You can set up the DIAGNOSTICS display to open automatically when system activity occurs to allow the operator to respond to problems that might stop production if they are not solved immediately Categories FactoryTalk Diagnostics categorizes messages by severity and by audience For each destination you can specify the message severity and audience Message categories Error Warning Info Audit Operator T M r Engineer wW Developer D C Secure 10 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 10 4 Choosing not to log messages If messages of a particular category are not routed to any destination the messages for that category are not logged For example you might not want to log information messages or you might not want to send any messages to the Operator Message severities FactoryTalk View categorizes messages in four severities m Errors indicate that a process or action has failed For example a tag s value could not be written or a user typed the wrong password while logging on to the system m Warnings indicate that a process or action might not function correctly or might eventually fail if preventive action isn t taken For example
531. rameter 1 typed in When this button is pressed the Trend faceplate opens and its objects in turn replace their 1 parameters with the same structure tag name and read their values from the appropriate elements Using global objects FactoryTalk View global objects allow you to link the appearance and behavior of a graphic object to multiple copies of that object When you update the original object the changes are automatically applied to all the copies of the object You create global objects in global object displays in the Global Objects folder of the Explorer window The objects you create in a global object display are called base objects You can copy or drag base objects into standard graphic displays The copied object is called a reference object You can copy a global object into any number of graphic displays and multiple times into the same graphic display Global object displays have the file extension ggfx They are stored in this default location Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Application Name Global Objects Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Application Name Global Objects Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 where Application Name is the name of your application Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up global objects 1 In the Graphics editor c
532. raphic objects Chapter 22 Setting up display navigation Chapter 13 Using the Startup editor Chapter 14 Logging in logging out and changing passwords Chapter 17 11 23 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 11 24 For more information about See Stopping applications Chapter 15 Example Assigning visibility animation to the goto display button This example shows how to assign visibility animation to the goto display button so that a user must log in before seeing the button This example uses the security function CurrentUserName The function returns the string value of the Account ID user name for the user who is currently logged in The CurrentUserName function is case sensitive All RSView 3 20 and earlier user names use uppercase letters When the application starts the DEFAULT user is logged in The DEFAULT user 1s also logged in when a user logs out To assign visibility animation to the goto display button 1 Right click the goto display button select Animation and then click Visibility 2 Inthe Animation dialog box in the Expression box type this CurrentUserName lt gt DEFAULT 3 For the Expression True State click Visible 4 Click Apply Example Assigning visibility animation to the shutdown button This example shows how to assign visibility animation to the shutdown button so that only the ADMIN user can stop the application To assign visibility animation to t
533. reate a global object display For more information see the next section 25 10 Fi Save tool 25 Using parameters and global objects 2 Create graphic objects in the global object display These are the base objects Set up their appearance animation and connections 3 Copy or drag base objects into a standard graphic display The copied objects are reference objects For more information see page 25 12 4 Edit the link properties of the reference objects as desired For more information see page 25 13 Creating global object displays and base objects You can create a global object display in the Global Objects folder or create a graphic display in the Displays folder and then add the display to the Global Objects folder You can also add library displays to the Global Objects folder The objects you create in the global object displays are called base objects To create a global object display 1 In the Graphics folder right click Global Objects and then click New 2 Create graphic objects in the display These are the base objects You cannot use ActiveX objects as base objects You cannot convert objects to wallpaper in the global object display For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 3 On the File menu click Save or click the Save tool 4 Inthe Component name box type a name for the display and then click OK The display is added to the list in the Global Objects folder To ad
534. rectory in a folder with the same name as the application name This is the path to the ME HMI projects directory C Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or C Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 Once you create the application the system auomatically creates a display called MAIN and sets the Projects Settings startup Graphic to Main These settings determine the general appearance of your run time application and affect how your graphic displays look For more information see page 4 17 To create a new application when FactoryTalk View Studio is already open 1 On the File menu click New Application or click the New Application tool If an application is already open FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close the application that is currently open Click Yes 2 Follow steps 2 through 5 in the previous procedure Importing applications You can import PanelBuilder PanelBuilder32 PanelBuilder 1400e and FactoryTalk View Machine Edition applications into FactoryTalk View Studio PanelBuilder and PanelBuilder32 files can be in either development format pba or run time terminal format pva PanelBuilder 1400e files have the file extension pvc 4 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 4 6 When you
535. reen Demo Data Log Models Oy x Enter tag names separated by a space if more than one in the T ags to add box then click Add to add ther to the list of tags in the model Tags to add E Tage in model mer int mem inte Add system Second Remove Remove All Tagilas in the model soo Using macros to assign values to tags A macro is a list of tag assignments stored in a text file Whenever you run the macro the specified values are written to the tags For more information about macros see Chapter 30 i Blend recipe Pumphouse Macros Form Tag lt Expression gt i as a ee 1 Diesel blend_percent Mogas_blend_percent i 4 tit You can also use recipes to assign values to multiple tags with a button press For information about using recipes to assign values to tags see Chapter 29 T Using HMI tags This chapter describes m HMI tag types m using the Tags editor m data sources m addressing syntax for device tags m organizing HMI tags m viewing tag statistics m other methods for creating HMI tags importing HMI tags HMI tag types HMI tags are tags you create in FactoryTalk View For information about when to use HMI tags versus when to use data server tags see Chapter 6 You can create and use these types of HMI tags in FactoryTalk View This tag type Stores this type of data Analog Range of values Use analog tags to r
536. result of changes to the database you make in other editors while the Tags editor is open update the contents To update the contents of the editor m On the View menu click Refresh or click the Refresh tool When you click Refresh the undo buffer is cleared and recent changes can t be automatically reversed Refresh is not available if you haven t accepted the current tag For information about creating tags in other editors see page 7 8 Searching for HMI tags Use the Tags editor s query box to select the tags you want to display in the spreadsheet This allows you to edit tags in different folders without browsing the folder hierarchy You can m select a single tag by typing the tag name m select multiple tags by typing wildcard characters These are the wildcard characters This character Does this Matches any single character Matches any number of characters including the backslash character Use this wildcard character by itself to display all the tags in the HMI tag database For example to search for all the tags that contain the string pump in their name type pump in the Search For box When you press Enter a list of tags containing the string pump appears in the spreadsheet When you do searches remember that the backslash in a folder name counts as a character in the tag name 7 Using HMI tags Data sources When creating an HMI tag you must specify a data so
537. rm banner without removing the button alarm from the alarm log file and alarm lists Diagnostics clear button Diagnostics list Remove the selected message from all diagnostics lists Information Information message acknowledge button display Acknowledge the current message in the display For more information about using the buttons with lists and trends see the topics on these pages For information about See Linking a button to a specific list alarm banner or trend object Page 9 Using buttons with alarm lists alarm banners and alarm status lists Page 36 Using buttons with information message displays Page 6 Using buttons with diagnostics lists Page 13 Using buttons with trends Page 11 20 7 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 8 Unlike the buttons in the previous table the following buttons do not work with specific graphic objects You can use them to work directly with alarms in the alarm history and with the application s diagnostics messages Use this button To do this Acknowledge all alarms Acknowledge and silence all currently unacknowledged alarms or the button alarms for a specific alarm trigger Clear alarm history button Remove alarms from the alarm log file and all alarm lists You can remove all alarms or just the alarms for a specific alarm trigger You can also reset the cleared alarms This resets the number of times an alarm has been triggered to 0
538. rm history report using the print alarm history button The numeric and time and date embedded variables also use number time and date formats All objects use the time date and number formats of the current application language For example if the application language uses a comma for the decimal symbol numeric variables use a comma for the decimal symbol For information about using multiple languages see Chapter 12 Using the DeskLock tool Use the DeskLock tool to prevent users from switching to another software application or having access to the desktop at run time This tool can have far reaching effects on your operating system The DeskLock tool can replace the standard Windows 7 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 non configured desktop with a customized desktop The customized desktop is intended to prevent operators from having access to other applications and operating system functions such as restarting Windows or shutting down tasks You can also use the tool to set up an automatic Windows logon and to specify options such as which software applications are allowed or not allowed to run on the computer Before using the tool read the DeskLock Help completely To open the DeskLock tool m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt FactoryTalk View gt Tools and then click DeskLock For details about using the tool see
539. rnzontal axis labels s o0403645 4s bre Ohad HOGG Ok Re Eura 28 6 PCAs ed each eed eens baa eee oe ee ee oe ae nee ee as 28 6 PEM ICONS 6 645 acca oan ee a pe ee ok Re E E 28 7 Pen IA Clg spe ace ee oo oe ce ee a RE cen oa A 28 7 CHAU VCS 2 oe rte oi E a a ee aw ee ae oe eee eee as 28 7 Standard vs XY PIOIS 4 4 45 5 0 do eda ee w bade Oa ode eae 28 7 Isolated graphing 6 53 ew ou 2d at aenaue ess ow ba be caver edeseaees Th44 28 8 Plotting a value across the full width of the chart 28 8 Choosing trend colors fonts lines and markers 0 0 0 0 00 eens 28 9 The trend border color 4 5 4 cchackk eae 66 saw eA eas HHS 4 OO RO GRO 28 9 The trend window color 0 0 00 ccc eee eee a 28 9 Testine the tendes asee ea eee Coe eR eee Heh os e G ess bones 28 10 Using the Trends graphic library anaana nananana 28 10 Using buttons to control the trend at run time 0 0 000 c cea 28 11 Printing trend Gata 224452206854 404666054543 Abed Od oS SSS SSR RAE 28 12 Improving clarity of the trend printout 0 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 28 12 Run time errors for the trend 0 00000 ccc ee eens 28 12 Setting up RecipePlus About recipes 2 een eee e eee n eens 29 1 Summary Of stepS n nanan unaa ee eee e eee eee 29 2 xxi FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE How the recipe system works 0 00 cece cee eens RecipePlus SeleCtOP s s 0000 4 bn ok aoe
540. roducts FactoryTalk View Studio is configuration software for developing machine level applications This software runs on operating systems such as Windows 7 Professional Windows XP Professional Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Vista Business and Home Basic and Windows Server 2008 operating systems FactoryTalk View ME Station is a stand alone run time environment for machine level applications Use FactoryTalk View ME Station to run the applications you develop in FactoryTalk View Studio You can run machine level applications on PanelView Plus terminals and Panel View Plus CE terminals with the Windows CE 4 1 terminals as well as Panel View Plus 6 terminals with the Windows CE 6 0 terminals and on personal computers Additional software The FactoryTalk View Machine Edition DVD also includes three additional software products RSLinx Enterprise is a communication server built around FactoryTalk technology to assist in developing and running your FactoryTalk View ME applications RSLinx Classic is software that provides communications to a wide range of communication drivers RSLinx Classic is an OPC compliant data server RSLinx Classic is available for personal computers only Adobe Reader 10 0 1is software for reading the online FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User s Guide If desired you can also use the software to print the User s Guide FactoryTalk Administration Console The FactoryTalk Services Pla
541. rsor Move up button Control List Selector s list Control list selector The PanelBuilder 1400e Control List Selector is divided into four separate FactoryTalk View graphic objects Control List Selector s Enter Key Enter button Control List Selector s Down Cursor Move down button Control List Selector s Up Cursor Move up button Screen Select Keypad small and large Display list selector Specify the graphic displays that the display list selector can open Screen Keypad Enable Button Display list selector Specify the graphic displays that the display list selector can open Goto Screen Button Goto display button Return to Previous Screen Button Return to display button ASCII Display String display Numeric Keypad Enable Button Numeric input enable button Normally Open Momentary Momentary push button During conversion the button is set up to be normally Push Button open Normally Closed Momentary Momentary push button During conversion the button is set up to be normally Push Button closed Screen Print Button Display print button Alarm History Sort By Time Sort By Value Button Sort alarms button Alarm Status Reset Qty Time Button Reset alarm status button Alarm Panel Single Line Alarm Window Alarm banner Alarm banner A 6 This PanelBuilder 1400e object Is converted to this FactoryTalk View object A Co
542. rst graph can change to represent the required level for a particular application and the second graph changes as the actual level in the tank rises or drops Bar graphs are more useful than numeric displays when it s important for the operator to analyze the relationships between numeric values It s easier for the operator to see that one graph is at a lower level than the other or that one s fill 1s blue and the other s is yellow than it is to subtract one numeric value from another Thresholds change a bar graph s fill color As it fills a bar graph can change its fill color to help an operator recognize abnormal conditions The change in color happens when the tag or expression value crosses a threshold you set up for the graph For example m Ifthe temperature of an oven is lower than required for a recipe the bar graph can show the temperature in blue m Ifthe temperature is in the correct range for the recipe the bar graph can show the temperature in green m Ifthe temperature is higher than the recipe allows the bar graph can show the temperature in red If you want to use a different fill color on a bar graph to show abnormal conditions make sure enough of the new fill color is visible when the abnormal condition occurs that the operator can see the condition Use bar graphs with scales to show limits Unlike gauges bar graphs do not have integrated scales You can show values on a bar graph using a scale graph
543. runtime data in 13 RecipePlus selector graphic object 9 2 creating 10 linking buttons to 9 navigating to 7 using at runtime 16 18 12 RecipePlus Setup editor 5 RecipePlus table graphic object 9 2 creating 10 linking buttons to 9 navigating to 7 using at runtime 16 18 12 Recipes 1 comparing amp deleting units 3 displaying at runtime 2 downloading 3 editing at runtime 2 linking buttons to 12 number format 4 numeric limits 4 planning 7 printing 9 renaming units 3 Saving at runtime 3 selecting at runtime 2 setting up 2 testing 10 time and date formats 9 viewing data for 7 13 uploading 3 Rectangle graphic object 3 19 blinking 11 Reference objects creating 12 editing 13 link properties 13 Relational operators in expressions 7 evaluation order of 10 Remote display changes 4 23 Remote macros 6 3 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 Replace displays 12 sizing 13 Reset alarm status button graphic object 8 16 using to reset alarms 9 using with alarm status lists 37 Return to display button graphic object 3 16 using to navigate 3 5 RFC1766 names 1 Right click menus 6 Rotation animation 6 52 14 at run time 18 Rounded rectangle graphic object 3 19 RSLinx Classic 1 and OPC 1 RSLinx Enterprise l array tag syntax 16 device shortcuts created at runtime 3 7 setting up drivers in at run time 9 for transfer to PanelView Plus 5 for transfer to PanelView Plus CE 5 RSLogix 5 tags importing 11
544. s Using security with your application FactoryTalk Security works together with FactoryTalk View security features to provide secure access to applications during development and at run time FactoryTalk Security is installed as part of the FactoryTalk Services Platform and uses FactoryTalk Directory to manage user accounts and policies FactoryTalk Security applies to all applications and all Rockwell Automation products installed on the development or run time computer For example when you add a FactoryTalk Security user the user is then available to add to any FactoryTalk View application You can use FactoryTalk Security features on the development computer to determine which users can view edit create and delete applications determine which users can manage users and set up security FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE m determine which users can back up and restore applications You can use a combination of FactoryTalk Security and FactoryTalk View security features at run time to m prevent unauthorized users from running the application m prevent users from opening graphic displays m prevent unauthorized users from stopping the application m prevent users from seeing and using certain parts of a graphic display m prevent users from switching to other applications This feature uses the DeskLock tool and is available for personal computers only You can use this tool to set up a customized des
545. s minimum and maximum values as set up in the Tags editor Only the tags that change by the specified percentage are logged If you specify a percentage of 0 all changes are logged If a tag does not have a minimum or maximum attribute for example a data server tag in Logix5000 when you specify on change logging all changes are logged for that tag You don t need to specify a percentage Using a heartbeat rate You can also specify a heartbeat rate to log values at specified times even if no tag value changes have occurred The heartbeat ensures that the data in the log file is current The heartbeat is also a good way to ensure that data logging is working and acquiring valid data The heartbeat cannot be less than the maximum update rate which is the rate at which data servers send tag values to FactoryTalk View If you specify a heartbeat of 0 the heartbeat is not used Tags in the data log model The data log model can contain up to 100 analog or digital tags including both HMI and data server tags You cannot use string tags array tags tag placeholders parameters or expressions in your data log model Deleting tags from the model If you delete a tag from the data log model previously logged data for the tag is not accessible unless you add the tag back to the model Changing the data log model used at run time Your application can run only one data log model at a time Follow this procedure to switch data log
546. s Each image you copy is listed as a component under the editor To view a list of components for an editor m Click the symbol to the left of the editor icon or double click the editor name For information about working with components see Chapter 18 in the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User s Guide Opening editors To open an editor m Right click the editor and then click Open or New If there are no components in the editor you can double click the editor to open it Closing editors To close an editor m Click the close button on the editor s title bar or on the File menu click Close 2 11 FACTORY TALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Some editors have an OK Cancel or Close button that you can click to close the editor Entering information in spreadsheets Some editors contain spreadsheets for entering information You can enter information in the white columns Gray columns display information you cannot enter information in them E Alarm Setup Objects 5 Screen Demo oj Xx f Triggers Messages Advanced Seeccccscsceccescecsceed Select trigger Trigger settings if imemLastDisp_ x1 lt 14 4 eres Tame Inst i imem LastDisp_x1 gt 13 AN i Iaa gge lab if mem LastDisp_y1 gt 13 AN Value M Use ack all value Optional trigger connections CO Tanemon Tag Em gt j andshake Add emote ck emote Ack Handshake Edit Remove MessadHa
547. s For sequential processes the list can alert the operator about what happens next in the process Trend Historical or current numeric tag values plotted against time or displayed in an XY plot where one or more tags values are plotted against another tag s values to show the relationship between them RecipePlus table Current tag values and data set values of the ingredients in the selected recipe and the number of ingredients in the recipe The table works with the RecipePlus button and RecipePlus selector graphic objects Drawing object with rotation width height fill color or horizontal or vertical position animation ActiveX object Display the value of a tag using a pictorial representation that shows the current value in relation to a range of possible values For example use rotation animation to show the tag value as a needle s position on a dial For color animation assign different colors to represent different values A third party object connected to an analog digital or string tag including both HMI and data server tags The data displayed depends on the object 17 Using your application Many of these objects can be set up to manipulate tag values using expressions and display the expression result rather than the original tag value For information about expressions see Chapter 23 You can also attach visibility animation to these graphic objects to display or hide the object
548. s and times are printed in the current application language For information about specifying which printer to use at run time for applications that will run on a personal computer see page 15 10 For information about the type of printer to use with a PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see page 16 1 The alarm log file As soon as the application starts running FactoryTalk View begins monitoring trigger connections for alarm conditions When an alarm occurs FactoryTalk View adds the associated message to the alarm log file When the file is full the oldest messages are deleted to make room for new messages Specify the maximum number of messages to store in the Alarm Setup editor For each message the log file records the time the alarm was triggered and the time the alarm was acknowledged if it was acknowledged The log file is saved every 30 seconds if there are new alarms The log file is also saved when the application is shut down The alarm log file is also referred to as the alarm history For example the operator presses the clear alarm history button to remove all alarms from the log file 9 Setting up alarms The alarm log file is retained when you restart an application after a shutdown or power loss You can delete the log file from the run time computer at application startup For information about deleting the log file see page 15 16 If you download a newer version of an application to the ru
549. s see Chapter 24 To create a tag placeholder m Type the cross hatch character followed by a number from 1 to 500 no space in between For example 1 Creating parameter files The parameter file specifies which tags to substitute for the placeholders in the display by assigning one tag to each unique placeholder in the display Create a parameter file for each set of tags that you want to use with the same graphic display At run time the tag values that are displayed depend on which parameter file 1s used when the display opens When you open the display the tags specified in the parameter file replace the tag placeholders Parameters can replace any portion of a tag address For example you can use parameters to replace folder names Parameter files can list up to 500 tag placeholders Use them when a large number of tag placeholders are needed for a display The text format of a parameter file allows you to see and edit the placeholders easily When copying displays from one application to another the related parameter files must also be copied Using the Parameters editor Use the Parameters editor to create one or more files of tag placeholder replacements 25 Using parameters and global objects Each file is stored in the editor s folder You can open and work on multiple parameter files at the same time Particulate Pumphouse Parameters OF x l Parameter File Created 2002708731 Parameter f
550. s toolbar m To remove the original object click Cut m To retain the original object click Copy To paste objects 1 Click in the display or library to paste to 2 On the Edit menu click Paste or click the Paste tool on the Graphics toolbar Duplicating objects When an object is duplicated any animation attached to the object is also duplicated If a group is duplicated the new copy of the group can be ungrouped to individual objects To duplicate objects 1 Select one or more objects 20 41 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE AR Duplicate tool 20 42 2 On the Edit menu click Duplicate or click the Duplicate tool on the Graphics toolbar The duplicated object is placed slightly offset from the original Duplicate also duplicates actions For example if you duplicate an object move it and then duplicate it again the second Duplicate will in one step duplicate and move the object This is useful for creating a series of objects with an equal distance between them Select object Duplicate object Move object Duplicate again Duplicate works until you deselect the object Resizing objects You can resize objects using the mouse or using the keyboard The keys let you resize objects in small increments You can also use the grid to resize objects precisely Another option is to size an object using the object s Height and Width properties in the Property Panel This method is especially usef
551. s List at the bottom of the FactoryTalk View Studio window m alocal log which is viewable using the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer tool m an ODBC database At run time At run time you can send diagnostics messages to m diagnostics list graphic objects either in the default DIAGNOSTICS display or in a display you create m aprinter m alocal log available on personal computers only which is viewable using the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer m aremote log PanelView Plus 6 Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminals only m an ODBC database The FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer is available on personal computers only However if you send diagnostics messages from a PanelView Plus 6 Panel View Plus or Panel View 10 Setting up Factory Talk Diagnostics Plus CE terminal to a personal computer you can view the messages in the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer The destinations available on your computer might vary depending on which Rockwell Automation products you have installed Message routing You can decide which destinations receive which kinds of messages This allows you to make the right information available to the right person in the right place For example m You can send messages that contain information about what the system is doing to the local log file You can also send warnings about things that might go wrong if left unattended to the local log file This allows a control systems enginee
552. s List shows messages about system activities You can specify the types of messages to display in the Diagnostics List move the list resize it and clear the messages in it For information about testing graphic displays see page 19 10 Moving the Diagnostics List You can detach undock the Diagnostics List from the main window and then move the list anywhere on the screen To undock the Diagnostics List drag the grab bars at the bottom left of the Diagnostics List If you can t see the grab bars drag the top edge of the Diagnostics List to make it a bit larger To detach the Diagnostics List drag the grab bars gt To prevent the Diagnostics List from docking automatically while you move it across the screen hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard while you move the Diagnostics List 2 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 2 6 When the Diagnostics List is undocked you can make it any size you want for example to view more than one message at a time To resize the bar drag an edge or corner until the bar is the size you want To re attach the Diagnostics List double click its title bar To clear the selected message in the Diagnostics List click Clear To clear all the messages in the Diagnostics List click Clear All Messages in the Diagnostics List The types of messages that appear in the Diagnostics List depend on how you set up FactoryTalk Diagnostics on the development system For i
553. s Serif or Tahoma These fonts allow for font linking to support the character sets of other languages PanelView Plus 6 PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals are shipped with font linking turned on For more information about font linking see Help For more information about setting up languages for your application see Chapter 12 Using the Size to fit option If you use the Size to fit option the size of the text object will likely change for different languages Make sure you check all displays containing translated language strings To create a text object 1 Select the Text tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the text and then drag to draw a rectangle 20 Using graphic objects The Text Properties dialog box opens Text Properties x General Common Text Type the text here E Insert Yariable Font Size Arial 10 B T U a _ Back color Alignment Back style BB Fore color see Transparent W Size to fit socos MV Word wrap eee Cancel Apply Help 3 Select text options For information about the options in the dialog box see Help 4 Toclose the dialog box click OK The text is positioned where you drew the rectangle 5 To create another text object move to a new area in the display and then repeat steps 2 through 4 After you ve set up one text object to look the way you want copy and paste it to create additional text objects with
554. s based on changes in tag or expression values For information about visibility animation see page 22 9 For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 For information about setting up graphic objects see Chapter 21 or Help Displaying the date and time To display the current date and time create a time and date display This object uses the operating system s date and time in the format of the application s current language and therefore does not require tags or expressions Viewing alarms and messages The operator can view alarms and other messages at run time using these graphic objects and graphic displays Appears in this In this default graphic This information object display For details see Alarm messages Alarm banner ALARM page 9 26 Alarm messages Alarm list No default although this page 9 25 object appears in the page 9 27 and ALARM MULTI LINE and page 9 29 HISTORY graphic libraries Alarm messages Alarm status list No default although this page 9 28 object appears in the STATUS graphic library System activity Diagnostics list DIAGNOSTICS page 10 12 Information messages Information message INFORMATION page 27 7 display Local messages Local message display No default page 19 30 The default alarm and information displays open automatically when the assigned tags match messages trigger values The default diagnostics display opens automatically when system
555. s for a trend to the scale for the next pen Backspace button Control list selector Move the cursor back to the highlighted item in the list Piloted control list selector End button Lists and trends List move to the bottom item in the list Trend resume trend scrolling and move to the current latest data in the trend Enter button Lists Select the item the cursor is pointing to Alarm list and alarm Acknowledge the currently selected alarm banner 20 Using graphic objects Use this button With this graphic object To do this Home button Lists and trends List move to the top item in the list Trend pause the trend and move to the earliest data in the trend Move left right buttons Trend Pause the trend and scroll to the left or right Move up down buttons Lists trends and numeric input objects List move up or down one item in the list Trend scroll up or down to display higher or lower values on the vertical scale Numeric input cursor point and numeric input enable button ramp the value up or down Page up down buttons Lists Move up or down one page in the list Acknowledge alarm Alarm list Acknowledge and silence the selected alarm button Alarm banner Alarm status mode Alarm status list Change the type of alarms displayed in the alarm status button list from all alarms to active alarms to past alarms Clear alarm banner Alarm banner Clear the alarm in the ala
556. s for the base object 1 Create placeholders in each place where you want to use a global object parameter You can create the placeholders anywhere a tag or expression is required You can also type placeholders in embedded variables by using a literal string embedded variable For information about embedded variables see Chapter 24 2 Right click the global object or grouped global object and then click Global Object Parameter Definitions Global Object Parameter Definitions Mame Oooo Oen OOOO O Em iee E Cancel Help 3 Specify a parameter for each placeholder for the object If desired type a description for each parameter For details about using the Global Object Parameter Definitions dialog box see Help To open the Help press F1 on your keyboard To specify the parameter values for the reference object 1 Right click the reference object or grouped reference object and then click Global Object Parameter Values 25 Using parameters and global objects Global Object Parameter Yalues _ value m E Da Assign a PID enhanced tag to this object Cancel Help 2 Specify a value for each parameter The value can be a tag backing tag or numeric or string constant Numeric constants are treated as strings of text Using process faceplates Process faceplates are pre configured graphic displays and global object displays that interact with Logix5000 processors Process f
557. s of that object When the original base object is updated the changes are automatically applied to all the copies of the object For information about creating base objects see page 25 10 The copies of the object are called reference objects and they have the same properties as the original base object If desired you can assign unique animation to the reference object For information about creating reference objects see page 25 12 The LinkAnimation property determines whether the reference object uses the base object s animation To set up animation for a reference object 1 Double click the reference object to open the Property Panel 2 Select the LinkAnimation property setting to use Do not link allows you to set up separate animation for the reference object 22 Animating graphic objects Link with expressions the reference object uses the animation and tags or expressions assigned to the base object Link without expressions allows you to use only the types of animation set up for the base object but assign different tags or expressions to the reference object 3 Ifyou selected Do not link or Link without expressions set up animation for the object using the methods described in this chapter For more information about setting up link properties and working with reference objects see page 25 13 22 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 22 20 92 Using expressions This chapter
558. s of the group You can still set up separate permissions for individual members of the group Setting up groups saves time You can add all the users of an application to a single group in Factory Talk Security then add the group to the FactoryTalk View Runtime Security editor in one step which is much quicker than adding the users one by one FactoryTalk Security allows you to use groups that have already been set up in Windows These are called Windows linked groups The link symbol in the Explorer window indicates that a group is a Windows linked group FactoryTalk Security comes with an Administrators group already set up To start with members of this group have full security access to FactoryTalk Security and therefore have full access to your applications The user you set up for FactoryTalk Local Directory when you installed FactoryTalk Services Platform is a member of the Administrators group To ensure that you are never locked out of FactoryTalk Directory we recommend that you assign more than one user to the Administrators group That way if one user is locked out you can use the other one to log in To set up user groups 1 Inthe System folder right click User Groups and then click New User Group or New Windows Linked User Group 2 Add user groups You can add members to the groups now or later For details see Help 3 Right click User Groups and then click Security 4 Specify what actions members of the grou
559. s table are displayed in the Tag Browser with the Item Canonical Data Types of Character Short Integer and Long Integer respectively RSLinx Enterprise tag syntax To create an RSLinx Enterprise array tag use this syntax to specify the length of the array tagname Larraylength For example PLC5 N7 0 L5 The tag N7 0 uses the Short Integer data type 16 bits so the array tag consists of 80 bits 16x 5 When the tag name contains a colon put two colons before the RSLinx Enterprise device shortcut name 9 Setting up alarms KEPServerEnterprise tag syntax To create a KEPServerEnterprise array tag use this syntax to specify the length of the array tagname arraylength For example Chanl Dev1 Tag1 3 The tag Tag1 uses the Long Integer data type 32 bits so the array tag consists of 96 bits 32 x 3 Alternatively you can define the tag length in KEPServerEnterprise when you create the tag and then just select the tag name in FactoryTalk View Studio For more information see KEPServerEnterprise Help Creating alarm messages in multiple languages FactoryTalk View 5 00 and later supports alarm messages in multiple languages When you create alarm messages they are in the current application language You can export the alarm messages for translation and then import them back into the application For details see Chapter 12 Language switching alarm messages in FactoryTalk View ME Station 4 00 For app
560. s the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data for both data server tags and HMI tags The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source is set up to exchange information in the form of numeric or string values between FactoryTalk View and the machine that your application is controlling Identifying the tags and values to monitor To set up information messages determine which tags associated with machine processes to monitor and identify the values for those tags that will trigger information messages For information about creating tags see Chapter 7 27 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 27 4 How information messages work These are the key parts of the information message system m Information message file a text file containing a list of messages with a numeric trigger value for each message Information message display a graphic display that opens at run time and displays information messages m Value connection a tag or expression When the value of this connection matches a message s trigger value the information message display opens with the associated message displayed The following example shows how the key parts of the information message system work together Example Setting up the data source to display infor
561. s will be created in RSLinx Enterprise For more information about setting up communications see Chapter 5 Unsupported tag data types These tag data types are not supported in FactoryTalk View m Bit Position a 1 BCD 2 BCD 5 BCD 6 BCD 7 BCD 8 BCD BIN3 BIN4 BIN6 BINS used with Modbus communications Tags that use these data types are converted to analog HMI tags with the Default data type The Default data type uses floating point values A 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE A 10 For Bit Position data types use the bitwise expression operators to display data that does not reference supported lengths For more information see the Rockwell Automation KnowledgeBase To open the KnowledgeBase m In FactoryTalk View Studio on the Help menu select Rockwell Software on the Web and then click Rockwell Automation KnowledgeBase For information about using bitwise expression operators see page 23 8 Unsupported initial values Device tags in FactoryTalk View do not use initial values Memory tags are converted with their initial values Converting RIO communications You can use Remote I O RIO communications on the Panel View Plus 6 Panel View Plus and PanelView Plus CE run time platforms A RIO communications are not supported for applications that will run on a personal computer However you can test run your RIO applications on the development computer To convert an RIO application fro
562. se ME HMI projects Project name RecipePlus Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME HMI projects Project name RecipePlus Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 If recipe files are stored outside the HMI project when you perform an action on a recipe file at run time the file is locked until the action is completed This prevents other users from making changes to a file while you are working with it 29 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE lt RecipePlus F RecipePlus Setup RecipePlus Editor Recipe file location 29 6 Storing recipe files with the HMI project If recipe files are part of the HMI project when a recipe file is saved at run time FactoryTalk View updates the mer file with changes to the data sets When you stop the run time application the changes are retained and are displayed the next time you run the application and display the recipe file You can convert the mer file to an med file to view the changes in FactoryTalk View Studio For more information about converting run time application files see page 14 7 F RecipePlus Setup Condiments C Recipe files are NOT part of the HMI project PPeeaneisaniSethadneunes Doene a cno be _ For details about using the RecipePlus Setup editor see Help Setting up recipe files Use the RecipePlus Editor to set up one or more recipe files Each file is st
563. se display buttons see page 13 6 To set up a close display button 1 Double click the button 21 Setting up graphic objects Close Display Button Properties Ea General Label Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width MV Border uses back color 4 BB Back Color Back style Pattern style I Border Color Solid Nore H L Patter Color E Highlight color ane I Blink Rectangle Value Write on close Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin fo fo Other MV Audio Cancel Help 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the button looks like at run time and whether to write out a value when the display closes m Inthe Label tab specify what text or image to display on the button Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up display list selectors The display list selector is a list of graphic displays in the application Each graphic display is represented by a different state in the display list selector An operator can scroll through the list of displays and then select the display to open by pressing an enter button or
564. set to 0 Creating your own information message display You can create your own graphic display for displaying information messages containing an information message display graphic object and the buttons you want to use in the display If you create your own graphic display use an On Top display and select the Cannot Be Replaced option For more information about the information message display graphic object see page 27 7 For information about creating graphic displays and graphic objects see Chapter 19 and Chapter 20 Opening and closing the information message display Opening the display The information message display you specify in the Information Setup editor either the default INFORMATION display or your own display is automatically opened whenever the Value connection s value matches a trigger value You can also create a goto display button that the operator can press to open the information message display For information about setting up a goto display button and specifying the display to open see Help Closing the display The information message display closes when the Value connection s value changes to 0 To automatically close the display when the operator acknowledges a message set up the data source to set the Value connection to 0 when the Ack connection is set to 1 The operator can also close the display by pressing a close display button How the information message display graphic object wor
565. sh after a folder name counts as a character The tag name can contain these characters m AtoZ m Oto9 m underscore _ and dash Tag names cannot contain spaces The tag name can be mixed case Tag names preserve upper and lower case for readability but are not case sensitive For example the tag name MixerValvel is the same as mixervalvel When a tag name starts with a number or contains a dash enclose the name in curly brackets when you use it in an expression for example N33 0 For more information about using tags in expressions see Chapter 23 Using folders to group tags To organize tags create a folder to store tags that are related to one another To separate the folder name from the rest of the tag name use a backslash For example tags in the folder called Pump would start with Pump For greater organization you can nest folders For example you can organize the HMI tag database first by area then by machines in the area and finally by devices in each machine The result might be Areal Machinel Pump 1 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To create similar groups of tags quickly create one folder with its tags and then duplicate the folder Viewing tag statistics The Tag Statistics dialog box provides a summary of how many tags your application uses as well as other tag information such as the date the HMI tag database was last modified To view tag statistics the Tags edi
566. sing with alarm banners 36 Clear alarm history button graphic object 8 16 clearing alarms with 8 resetting alarms with 9 Silencing alarms with 9 using to delete the alarm log file 10 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 using with alarm lists 36 Close display button graphic object 3 36 and alarms 31 and diagnostics messages 12 and information messages 6 7 using to navigate 3 6 Closing On Top displays 6 Color blinking 1 for graphic objects 31 in graphic displays animating 10 in trends 9 Color animation 6 10 at run time 18 Communication drivers setting up at run time for transfer to PanelView Plus 4 for transfer to PanelView Plus CE 4 on personal computers 9 setting up in RSLinx Enterprise at run time 9 for transfer to PanelView Plus 5 for transfer to PanelView Plus CE 5 Communications displaying errors at run time 20 setting up l testing on the development computer 2 Compact Machine Edition application 1 4 3 project settings 15 Components 11 1 adding into applications 3 file locations 2 printing 13 D security for 18 working with 1 Connections 2 assigning to graphic objects 34 using the Property Panel 30 expressions 2 for alarms 5 17 23 tags 2 Constants in expressions 6 Context menus 6 Control list selector graphic object 5 49 at run time 17 differences from piloted control list selectors 5l linking buttons to 9 navigating to 7 using Enter key handshaking with 12 Current trends 5 2 D
567. sion assigned in the Display tab of Parameter File or Use Parameter List the Global Connections editor connections G Features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View To remove or replace this feature Tag or expression assigned to one or more of the Parameter Tag 1 10 connections Do this Delete the tag or expression in the Display tab of the Global Connections editor Parameter list property assigned in the Properties dialog box of a Display List Selector Goto Display button or Logout button graphic object In the object s Properties dialog box clear the Parameter list assignment Parameter list property assigned to the display specified for auto logout in Project Settings In the Project Settings editor s Runtime tab clear the Parameter list assignment Parameter list assigned to the Initial graphic property in the Startup editor In the Startup editor clear the Parameter list assignment for the Initial graphic Use variable minimum maximum property assigned to Numeric Input Cursor Point or Numeric Input Enable object In the Numeric tab of the object s Properties dialog box clear the Use variable minimum maximum property Caption on Keypad property assigned to Numeric Input Cursor Point object In the Numeric tab of the object s Properties dialog box set the Caption on keypad scratchpad property to blank Minimum or Maximum connections assigned for Numeric Inpu
568. software that prevents Windows 7 Professional Windows XP Windows Server 2003 R2 Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 users from exiting the FactoryTalk View application at run time You can use this tool to set up a customized desktop and to prevent access to Windows functions You cannot use DeskLock if you are running your application on a PanelView Plus 6 or Panel View Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal FTVIEWUSER Account Reset is software for resetting the FTVIEWUSER account back to its default FTView Graphic Strings Search Replace is software for performing search and replace operations on STRINGS that are contained within graphic displays STRINGS include tags expressions commands or text assigned to objects m Legacy Tag database conversion is software for converting your legacy tag database to a new format to work with Microsoft SQL database 1 e Getting Started Firmware Upgrade Wizard is software for installing new firmware releases on PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus CE or Panel View Plus 6 terminals ME Transfer Utility is software for moving a run time machine level application mer file from the development computer to Panel View Plus and Panel View Plus CE and Panel View Plus 6 terminals Tag Import and Export Wizard is software for importing or exporting the FactoryTalk View tag database Diagnostics Viewer allows you to view FactoryTalk Diagnostics messages using the Windows Event Viewer T
569. splay print buttons in the graphic displays you want to print At run time the operator presses the buttons to print the displays For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 Assign a tag or expression to the Remote Display Print connection in the Global Connections editor When the value of the tag or expression changes from 0 to a non zero value the current displays are automatically printed Program the data source to trigger the change as often as you want the data printed For more information about setting up remote display printing see page 8 5 19 31 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 19 32 920 Using graphic objects This chapter describes the types of graphic objects and outlines how to m create graphic objects including drawing and ActiveX objects m select and deselect objects and use the Object Explorer m use the Properties dialog box and Property Panel to set up objects color and name objects m test how objects look in different states m assign tags and expressions to objects m replace tags using tag substitution m use tag placeholders m move copy duplicate resize reshape and delete objects m group and ungroup objects and edit group objects m arrange objects and lock objects into position For information about setting up graphic objects once you ve created them see Chapter 21 For information about setting up global objects see Chapter 25 For
570. splays 3 Graphic Libraries 16 Images 22 Information Messages 2 Information Setup 3 Local Messages 27 Parameters 5 Project Settings 17 RecipePlus Editor 6 8 RecipePlus Setup 5 Runtime Security 3 Editors printing in 13 5 working with 10 Ellipse graphic object 3 17 Embedded variables 1 displaying at run time 7 in title bars 12 syntax for 3 types of values 1 updating at run time 6 End button graphic object 6 16 49 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 using with alarm objects 38 using with diagnostics lists 13 using with recipes 12 using with trends 11 Enter button graphic object 6 16 49 and Enter key handshaking 12 using with alarm objects 8 38 using with recipes 12 Enter key handshaking 12 Error messages See Diagnostics messages Problems at run time Exporting alarm files 4 1 global object displays 1 graphic displays 5 1 problems with 8 text for translation 6 Expression editor 2 using tags in Expression results rounding 1 types of values 2 Expressions 1 and animation 6 assigning to connections 11 assigning to graphic objects 34 using the Property Panel 30 constants in 6 evaluation order of operators 10 formatting 4 if then else logic in 16 language function in 14 math functions in 13 monitoring for alarms 4 operators in arithmetic 6 bitwise 8 logical 7 relational 7 security functions in 14 tags and placeholders in 5 viewing in Object Explorer 25 write expressions 18 F Facepla
571. ste images from one application to another For information about opening two applications at once see page 4 9 If you will be using images that have more than 256 colors before importing the images set up your video adapter to display more than 256 colors This will ensure that the colors of imported images appear the same as in the original For more tips about using images see page 19 25 To import bitmap and JPEG images 1 In the Graphics folder right click Images and then click Add Component Into Application Add Component Into Project To view the images click Look in this button and then click M DinO01 bmp DinO08 bmp w DinO1 5 bmp f Din24 brr Thumbnails Wdind02bmp EP Din00S bmp WY Din E bmp Wf Din025 brr WW Din003 bmp WW Din010 bmp WW Dinti 7 bmp F Din026 br WY Dian bmp DinO11 brmp wy DinO1 8 bmp Dine brr WF Din005 bmp WF Din012 bmp WW Din020 bmp E Din028 br WW Din006 bmp EP Din013 bmp EP Din021 bmp Din025 brr Wdindo7 bmp FP Dind4 bmp AP Din023 bmp YF Din030 brr gt File name Files of type Bitmap Images bmp Cancel 2 In the Files of type box select the type of image to add 3 Navigate to the directory where the bmp or jpg file is stored and then click the file name Shift click or Ctrl click to select additional files 4 Click Open to add the selected files to the list in the Images folder BI Browse button 19 e Using grap
572. t Cursor Point or Numeric Input Enable object In the Connections tab of the object s Properties dialog box delete the tag or expression assigned to the Minimum or Maximum connection Use variable ramp or Use variable limit property set for the Ramp button object Ramp or Limit connection set for the Ramp button object In the General tab of the object s Properties dialog box clear the Use variable lower upper limit and Use variable ramp value properties In the Connections tab of the object s Properties dialog box delete the tag or expression assigned to the Ramp or Limit connection The application is designated as a Compact Machine Edition application in Project Settings In the General tab of the Project Settings editor clear the Compact Machine Edition application check box G 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE G 4 Features that are not supported in version 4 00 or earlier These version 5 00 features are not supported in version 4 00 of RSView ME Station nor in earlier versions The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature To remove or replace this feature Delete action assigned to a RecipePlus button graphic object Do this Delete the button or change the action to Download Upload Upload and Create Restore or Save Rename action assigned to a RecipePlus button graphic object Delete the button or change the action to Download Upload Upload and
573. t alarms button the sort order toggles from time to trigger value or from trigger value to time The sort order applies to all alarms in all alarm lists and in the alarm log file Resetting alarm status When the operator presses the reset alarm status button the alarm status of each alarm is reset as follows m The accumulated time an alarm has been in alarm is reset to 0 If the alarm is still active the time begins accumulating again m The number of times the alarm has been triggered is reset to 0 If the alarm is still active the number changes to 1 If the Status Reset connection is assigned in the Alarm Setup editor it is set to 1 for the hold time or for the duration of the button press whichever is longer If a hold time from a previous reset alarm status button press is still in effect the button press is ignored Pressing the clear alarm history button can also reset the status of alarms if you select the Reset alarm status option for the button You can set the button up to clear and reset the status of all alarms or just the alarms for a specific alarm trigger 9 Setting up alarms Retaining alarm status The status of alarms is retained when the application is shut down When the application is restarted m if an alarm is still active the time begins accumulating again m ifan alarm is still active the number of times the alarm has been triggered is increased by 1 Changing the alarm status displayed
574. t and make changes to all of the objects at once Global object parameters allow you to assign different sets of tags to different copies of the object without breaking the link to the base object thus preserving the ability to update all copies of the object at once Process faceplates provide pre configured graphic displays that interact with the instructions in Logix5000 processors Using tag placeholders Use a tag placeholder to mark where you want to insert a tag name or some part of a tag name at run time A tag placeholder is a crosshatch character followed by a number from 1 to 500 FactoryTalk View Machine Edition uses three methods for replacing a tag placeholder with a tag name parameter files parameter lists 25 1 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 25 2 m global object parameters To use the same graphic display with different sets of tags use tag placeholders with parameter files or parameter lists Using tag placeholders can be quicker than duplicating a display and setting up the objects in it to use a different set of tags especially when the display uses a lot of tags Using parameter files or parameter lists also reduces the size of the run time application file You can use tag placeholders wherever you would normally assign a tag to an object including in expressions and embedded variables You can also use tag placeholders in the expressions you create to animate objects Tag place
575. t column in Excel In the translated text file the only text that can be modified is the text inside the quotation marks in the string definition column For example translated into German the file would contain these changes Component type Component name String reference String definition Graphic Display Pump station l Motor abschalten Do not change the entries in the component type or component name columns unless the component was renamed in the application after the text was exported Do not modify the string reference number The string reference number is a unique number that is assigned to an object by FactoryTalk View Modifying the string reference number prevents FactoryTalk View from identifying the object correctly when you import the text Working with pairs of double quotes If a text string contains double quotes the whole string definition must also be enclosed in double quotes For example Call Duty Manager must be entered in the string file as Call Duty Manager Importing text containing multiple sets of double quotes If the string definition contains an odd number of double quotes the number of double quotes is rounded down to an even number and then each pair is imported as one double quote For example the string Call Duty Manager appears in the application as Call Duty Manager 12 e Setting up language switching Working with backslashes and new line characters T
576. t displays a list of alarms from the alarm log file It can show all the alarms in the alarm log file or any combination of active inactive acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms It can also show the alarms for specific alarm triggers You can assign a tag or expression to the ActiveAcknowledged ActiveUnacknowledged InactiveAcknowledged or InactiveUnacknowledged connections to allow the data source to control the type of alarms to display in the list When one of the connection s values is a non zero value the related type of alarm is displayed in the alarm list The connection value overrides the setting for the list in the Alarm List Properties dialog box FactoryTalk View comes with two graphic displays ALARM MULTI LINE and HISTORY that contain alarm list objects The HISTORY display comes in two sizes These displays are in the graphic library You can copy the library displays into your application and use the displays and objects as is customize them or create your own For more information about using alarm lists see page 9 32 For information about the alarm log file see page 9 10 To set up an alarm list 1 Double click the alarm list Alarm List Properties Ea General Alarm Display Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width F v Border uses back color Raisedinset fe o Balt Raise WB Border color E Header back color WB Header fore color WB Selection back color L Sel
577. t parameter definition or value Delete the global object parameter definition The corresponding value will be deleted automatically Use parameter files instead G Features supported in different versions of FactoryTalk View Features that are not supported in version 3 20 or earlier The features listed in the previous table are not supported in version 3 20 of RSView ME Station In addition these version 4 00 features are not supported in version 3 20 of RSView ME Station nor in earlier versions The right column describes how to remove or replace the feature To remove or replace this feature Unsupported RSLinx Enterprise feature or shortcut warning Do this Delete or replace the feature or shortcut A hardware patch might be available that allows you to use the feature Therefore the run time application file will still be created Unsupported RSLinx Enterprise feature or shortcut error Delete or replace the feature or shortcut Global reference object that is not linked to a global base object Delete the global reference object or link it to a global base object All global reference objects that are linked to global base objects will be converted to standard graphic objects in the mer file Language switch button graphic object Delete the button Password button graphic object Delete the button RecipePlus button graphic object Delete the button RecipePlus selecto
578. t the default language see page 12 2 9 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 6 Alarm notification methods You can use any combination of these methods to notify the operator that an alarm condition has occurred m Open an alarm graphic display containing an appropriate alarm message Set off an audible signal if the application is running on a personal computer m Send a message to a printer m Send a message to the data source i If you set up alarm messages in multiple languages make sure that the data source can either receive the message in Unicode format or convert it into ASCII characters for all the languages you will be using To use these methods select the Display Audio Print and Message to Tag options when you create your messages Be sure to select the Print option if you need to keep a permanent record of alarms You can also print the contents of the alarm log file periodically as described on page 9 10 The alarm log file is also referred to as the alarm history Displaying alarm information FactoryTalk View comes with these alarm displays m ALARM in the Displays folder contains an alarm banner graphic object that is set up to display the newest active alarm in the alarm log file m ALARM BANNER a display in the Libraries folder contains an alarm banner graphic object that is set up to display the newest active alarm in the alarm log file m ALARM MULTI LINE a display
579. ta be derived from a pen s minimum and maximum values use a constant value or be controlled by tags You can set up the trend so all pens use the same scale or use individual ranges for each pen If you choose the latter method create a next pen button in the graphic display to allow operators to view the range for each pen When the operator presses the button the vertical axis changes to the new pen s range For example if Pen 1 has a minimum value of 10 and a maximum value of 100 the range on the vertical axis is 10 to 100 when the pen is selected If Pen 2 has a minimum of 10 and a maximum of 50 the range on the vertical axis changes to 10 to 50 when the operator presses the next pen button X axis The x axis is the bottom horizontal edge of the chart It is also known as the horizontal axis Horizontal axis labels For standard charts the horizontal axis labels indicate the time span covered by the trend For XY Plot charts the horizontal axis labels show the scale range of values for the pen selected to serve as the x axis pen If desired you can set up the trend to omit the horizontal axis labels The number of labels depends on the size of the trend object and the number of vertical grid lines Pens Pens are the lines and symbols used to represent values The values can be tags you are monitoring expressions that manipulate tag values or constants 28 Setting up trends If there is no data for a pen
580. tab specify what text or image to display on the button The same text will appear as a caption on the top of the pop up that opens when the button is pressed at run time m Inthe Numeric tab set up which pop up window opens if any the ramp value if any minimum and maximum values to send to the data source whether the minimum and maximum values will be variable from tags or expressions or constant and decimal point settings Inthe Timing tab set up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key These settings do not apply when you ramp a value For information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 12 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expressions with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up numeric input cursor points The operator can activate the numeric input cursor point to open a numeric pop up keypad or scratchpad The operator can enter a number in the keypad or scratchpad and then send the number to the data source The cursor point displays the current value at the data source if you assign a tag to the Indicator connection For more information about using the numeric input cursor point at run time see page 17 6 You can also set up the num
581. tagl amp tag2 Returns 0 binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 tagl tag2 Returns 7 binary 0000 0000 0000 0111 tagl tag2 Returns 7 binary 0000 0000 0000 0111 tagl gt gt Returns 2 binary 0000 0000 0000 0010 tagl lt lt Returns 10 binary 0000 0000 0000 1010 tagl Returns 6 binary 1111 1111 1111 1010 Evaluation order of operators Expressions with more than one operator are evaluated in this order m Operators in parentheses are evaluated first Therefore to change the order of precedence use parentheses m The operator with the highest precedence is evaluated next m When two operators have equal precedence they are evaluated from left to right Operators are evaluated in this order Evaluation order 1 highest 23 Using expressions Symbols 2 NOT x MOD KK AND amp amp gt gt lt lt OR 5 lowest EQ NE lt gt LT lt GT gt LE lt GE gt 23 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 12 Examples Evaluation order For these examples tag 5 tag2 7 and tag3 10 tagl gt tag2 AND tag1 lt tag3 is evaluated in this sequence l tagl gt tag2 0 2 tagl lt tag3 1 3 0AND 1 0 The expression evaluates to 0 false tagl gt tag2 AND tag3 is evaluated in this sequence l tag2 AND tag3 1 2 tagl gt 1l 1 The expression evaluates to 1 true NOT tagl AND
582. ted French text strings for the Change Password window then the French strings will be compiled in the run time application If 12 e Setting up language switching the operator opens the window the strings will be displayed in French If the operator changes to another language the strings will still be displayed in French Unicode file name format The format for the exported Unicode text file name is lt A pplicationName gt lt HMIServerName gt lt RFC1766 gt txt where a lt ApplicationName gt is the name of the application m lt HMServerName gt is the name of the HMI server containing the text strings you exported This is always the same name as the application name m lt RFC1766 gt is the RFC1766 name associated with the language selected for the export operation For details about the schema of exported Unicode text files see page 12 11 For a list of Windows languages and the corresponding RFC1766 names see page F 1 Exporting text to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet FactoryTalk View supports Microsoft Excel versions 2000 2002 2003 2007 and 2010 The exported file is in Microsoft Excel 5 0 95 Workbook format with the extension xls The maximum number of characters viewable in an Excel cell depends on the version of Excel and the font size If the maximum is exceeded the cell will be blank Optimizing duplicate strings When you export text to an Excel spreadsheet you have the option of optimizing duplicat
583. ted with the option Support Multiple Languages selected in the Display Settings dialog box Display Settings General Behavior Size Use Curent Size f Specify Size in Pixels Display Type Replace OnTop Width 540 Height fasa l Cannot Be Replaced Display Number fo Position Security Code T Title Bar Background Color mo Serb varale Digable Initial Input Focus Maxinium Tag Update Rate 1 seconds Cancel Apply Help For detailed information about importing and exporting to use multiple languages see Chapter 12 19 e Using graphic displays To save a library display with more than 40 languages l Create a display in one application with up to 40 languages and add it to the library as described in the previous section 2 Add the display into a new application with up to 40 different languages in the new application 3 Export the text for your application which will include the text used in the graphic display 4 Translate the text strings into each desired language saving the file with a new name for each language 5 Import the files for the new languages 6 Add the graphic display with the same name as the display in step 1 to the Libraries folder The new languages are added to the library Make sure the display contains the same objects as the original display Otherwise the new display will overwrite the previous dis
584. ter 19 and Chapter 20 10 11 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 10 12 Opening and closing the diagnostics display Opening the display The diagnostics display you specify in the Diagnostics List Setup editor either the default DIAGNOSTICS display or a display you create is automatically opened whenever a diagnostics message of the specified severity occurs The display remains open until the operator closes the display If you decide not to open the diagnostics display automatically you can create a goto display button that the operator can press to open the diagnostics display For information about setting up a goto display button and specifying the display to open see Help Closing the display The operator can close the display by pressing a close display button How the diagnostics list graphic object works At run time when a severity of system activity occurs that you ve set up to log a message about the activity is added to the diagnostics list The diagnostics list can be in the DIAGNOSTICS display in a diagnostics display you have created or can be placed on any display in your application You can use multiple diagnostics lists in the same display or in different displays Each diagnostics list displays the same information For information about setting up diagnostics lists see Help What is displayed m Ifthe message is too long to fit in the list the last displayed character is replaced
585. ter file identifies the parameter file for the display being opened remotely m Use Parameter List notifies the application that a parameter list is to be used to provide the parameters to the display being opened remotely m Parameter Tag 1 10 the tag values assigned to these global connections will replace the tag placeholders in the display being opened remotely Running macros Use these global connections in the Macro tab of the Global Connections editor to run macros This connection Runs this macro Remote Macrol Macrol Remote Macro2 Macro2 Remote Macro3 Macro3 Remote Macro4 Macro4 8 Setting up global connections This connection Runs this macro Remote MacroS5 Macro5 Create the macros in the Macros editor Make sure you name them exactly as shown in the right column of the preceding table with no space in the name When the tag or expression assigned to one of these connections changes to a new non zero value FactoryTalk View runs the associated macro Leave time for a macro to run before starting a new macro Otherwise FactoryTalk View will ij queue the macros which consumes memory and could lead to system instability When you shut down FactoryTalk View ME Station if a message about executing macros is displayed for more than a few seconds this means that macros have been queued For information about creating macros see Chapter 30 Setting up backlight intensity remotely For
586. tes See Process faceplates Factory Talk Local Directory restoring from runtime computer to development computer 7 Factorylalk loading directory of users and security policies 5 logging in 3 at runtime 3 single sign on 22 turning off warning 16 Factorylalk Diagnostics 1 setting up on a personal computer 8 See also Diagnostics messages Factorylalk Diagnostics Viewer tool 6 viewing diagnostics log files in 5 Windows Event Viewer 5 Factorylalk Directory security access to 19 Factorylalk Security l permissions for converting runtime applications to development appli cations 7 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 setting up 15 turning off 2 users creating 17 FactoryTalk View FactoryTalk View ME Station 1 FactoryTalk View Studio 1 FactorylTalk View Machine Edition 1 FactoryTalk View ME Station exiting 9 starting on PanelView Plus CE terminals 3 on PanelView Plus terminals 3 on personal computers 4 12 supported versions 10 1 Factorylalk View Studio main window 4 starting and exiting 1 Factorylalk View tags importing 11 File names 2 and spaces 4 maximum length of 4 Fill animation 6 13 at run time 18 Folders 7 Fonts for multiple languages 12 in graphic displays substitution at run time 12 in trends 9 transferring 6 Foreground Color toolbar 31 Freehand graphic object 3 17 Function keys assigning to graphic objects 5 G Gauge graphic object 5 44 47 at run time 18 specifying number format for 17 Glob
587. text strings If you are going to export strings for all languages defined for the application it does not matter which language is selected in the Language Configuration dialog box 3 Click Export 4 Follow the instructions in the String Import Export Wizard For details about options in the String Import Export wizard click Help If you export to a Unicode text file multiple times to the same location previously exported versions are overwritten Problems exporting You do not have to check every text file created during an export to verify that text strings were exported correctly If errors occur or if you cancel the export while it is in progress a message appears in the Diagnostics List and in the FactoryTalk Diagnostics log file In addition errors are displayed when they occur in a log file called ExportErrors txt which is saved at this location C Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise Strings Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or C Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise Strings Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 Existing error log files are overwritten for each subsequent export operation that generates errors 12 e Setting up language switching Translating application text in Excel spreadsheet files This section contains information about the format and schema of the exported Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file The spreadsheet cont
588. tform includes software called the FactoryTalk Administration Console This software allows you to set up FactoryTalk Security FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 1 2 FactoryTalk Security is a method for setting up security for users for multiple Rockwell Automation products in one place FactoryTalk Security is intended to improve the security of your automation system by limiting access to those with a legitimate need FactoryTalk Security authenticates user identities and authorizes user requests to access a FactoryTalk enabled system These security services are fully integrated into the FactoryTalk Directory and are included as part of the FactoryTalk Services Platform that installs with many products You can also set up FactoryTalk Security in FactoryTalk View Studio For more information see Chapter 11 To open the FactoryTalk Administration Console m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software and then click FactoryTalk Administration Console For information about using the FactoryTalk Administration Console see FactoryTalk Help The FactoryTalk View Machine Edition tools FactoryTalk View Studio tools These tools are installed with FactoryTalk View Studio Application Documenter is software that provides detailed information about FactoryTalk applications Application Manager is software for renaming copying deleting backing up and restoring applications DeskLock is
589. the File menu select Recent Applications and then click the name of the application to open 2 Ifan application is already open FactoryTalk View Studio asks you whether to close the application that is currently open Click Yes The application opens For applications with multiple languages the language you used most recently opens For information about using different languages see Chapter 12 Problems opening applications If you have trouble opening an application in FactoryTalk View Studio the problem could be a Microsoft Windows security setting You must have read and write access to the folder that contains the HMI projects For example if you belong to the Windows user group called Power Users and the group does not have write access to the HMI projects folder you won t be able to open applications in FactoryTalk View The default location for the HMI projects folder is C Documents and Settings All Users Shared Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 R2 Or C Users Public Public Documents RS View Enterprise ME Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional or Windows Server 2008 For more information about security see Chapter 11 To set up write access for any Windows Security Group 1 Right click the HMI projects folder and then click Properties 2 Inthe Security tab of the Properties dialog box select a Windows Security Group ex Power Users from the list of groups and user names
590. the alarm history list and opening the STATUS display as well as buttons for scrolling the list and closing the display For information about how the buttons work see page 9 36 Using displays from the library in your application The previous four sections described the ALARM BANNER ALARM MULTI LINE STATUS and HISTORY displays that are included in the Libraries folder You can copy objects from the displays to your own display or you can copy the entire displays into your application For information about copying objects from a library into your graphic display see page 20 40 The graphic libraries are available on the development computer but do not appear at run time To use a display in the library as a graphic display at run time you must add the library display into your application s folder of graphic displays For details see page 19 17 Example Using the ALARM and STATUS displays together To use the ALARM display to alert the operator about alarms as they occur and the STATUS display to show how many times and for how long alarms have been active 1 Inthe Alarm Setup editor in the Advanced tab select the ALARM display as the display to open when alarms are triggered if it is not already selected It is selected by default 2 Add the STATUS display from the library 3 Edit the ALARM display by adding a goto display button that opens the STATUS display when pressed 9 Setti
591. the pixel position of the object is translated into values that are written to the tag If the tag value is changed externally the position of the slider changes as well An object can have both vertical and horizontal slider animation Horizontal slider animation is available for all drawing objects except images and panels For more information about setting up horizontal slider animation see Help Tips Here are some tips for creating slider objects m The Sliders graphic library contains several slider objects you can drag and drop into your graphic displays Attach slider animation to the button portion of the slider object m If you create your own slider object it s useful to draw an object for example a line to represent the path the slider will move along Setting up vertical slider animation With vertical slider animation you can use a drawing object to set the value of a tag To do this define a path for the object At run time when the operator moves the object vertically using a mouse the pixel position of the object is translated into values that are written to the tag If the tag value is changed externally the position of the slider changes as well An object can have both vertical and horizontal slider animation To move an object on the display up a negative offset number is required The top left corner of the display has the coordinates of 0 0 Vertical slider animation is available for all dr
592. the run time computer s communication settings with the application s communication settings click Yes To keep the run time computer s communication settings click No You are notified that the application s FactoryTalk System Directory of users and security policies will be loaded on this computer This is the set of users and policies that have been set up for the application and are contained in the mer file The computer s existing FactoryTalk System Directory will be archived and will be restored when you stop the application To turn off this warning see page 15 16 5 To continue click Yes To stop loading the application click No If you continue the application name is displayed in the Current application box in the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box 6 To run the application click Run Application The DEFAULT user is logged in If a macro is assigned to the DEFAULT user the macro runs Shutting down applications To shut down an application use one of these methods m Press a shutdown button in a graphic display 15 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 15 6 m Ifthe application is set up to use a title bar with a Control box click the Close button at the right end of the title bar m Ifthe application is set up to use a title bar with a Control box on the Control menu at the left end of the title bar click Close Control box F Condiment Line Low Level Tag Read Write
593. the same formatting Then edit the text of the new objects To edit a text object 1 Double click the text The Text Properties dialog box opens 2 Inthe Text box click where you want to make the change To delete text characters use the Backspace and Delete keys 20 13 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE ib Image tool 20 14 Creating images Use the image graphic object to place images in your graphic displays Images support visibility animation only You can use images already contained in the Images folder or use Symbol Factory to select and add a graphic to the display and the Images folder Using bitmaps and JPEG images Before you can place a bitmap or JPEG image in a display you must import the image into your application For more information see page 19 21 To place a bitmap or JPEG image in a display 1 Select the Image tool 2 Click the mouse where you want to position the image and then drag to draw a rectangle The Image Browser opens Image Browser x Select image Preview kilnstepcontral Add from korea south_flag File overview Overview ee Paste from Library Delete Image attributes Type 167r 7216 color Width s Height 203 25 Format JPEG Cancel Help 3 In the Select image list click the image to place and then click OK For more information about using the Image Browser see page 19 23 The image is placed where you drew the r
594. the string pop up keyboard cannot open Changing passwords You can use the password button to change your password at run time Any password changes that are made at run time are saved in the mer file When passwords are changed at run time be sure to change the passwords on the development computer as well Otherwise the next time you create the mer file the password changes will be lost For version 5 00 and later applications you can convert the run time application file to a development application in order to save password changes For more information see page 14 7 If you are logged in to Windows as an Administrator user you can use the password button to change passwords for Windows linked users If you are not logged in as an Administrator user or if your application is running in Windows CE the passwords for Windows linked users must be changed in Windows For version 3 20 and earlier applications you cannot change passwords in FactoryTalk View ME Station To change a password for a FactoryTalk View user use the Runtime Security editor in Factory Talk View Studio then recreate the run time application and download the mer file again To change a password for a Windows user use the Windows Control Panel 17 Using your application To change your password 1 Press the password button The Change Password window opens Change Password User Name FactoryTalk Service Old Password F2 New Password F3 C
595. the tag that matches the data type used by the Logix5000 processor If you use the Default data type values are treated as floating point values This example shows you how to specify the OPC topic item name and bit level of an item that uses the integer data type in a Logix5000 processor OPC topic and item addressing Logix5000 uses this addressing syntax Device shortcut item name for RSLinx Enterprise OPC topic name item name for RSLinx Classic In this example the RSLinx Enterprise device shortcut name for the Logix5000 processor is CLGX To connect to an OPC item called Motor type this address CLGX Motor Bit level addressing You can gain access to the bit level of an item that uses the integer data type by appending to the end of the tag address where is the number of the bit you want access to 7 Using HMI tags For example to gain access to the first bit of the integer item Motor type this address CLGX Motor 0 Organizing HMI tags Organizing tags makes finding and using tags faster and simpler To organize your tags try these tips m Establish naming conventions Naming conventions enable you to use wildcard characters most effectively when searching for and displaying tags during development m Use folders to group related tags Naming tags Tag names can be up to 255 characters long including folder name If you create a folder the folder name becomes part of the tag name The backsla
596. the tool s Help 15 17 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 15 18 Transferring applications to a PanelView Plus terminal This chapter describes starting FactoryTalk View ME Station setting up communication drivers to use to transfer applications to a PanelView Plus CE PanelView Plus or Panel View Plus 6 terminal transferring applications and TrueType fonts to PanelView Plus PanelView Plus CE or PanelView Plus 6 terminals uploading applications from a terminal to the development computer comparing applications on the development computer with applications on the terminal For information about using your application at run time see Chapter 17 For information about using FactoryTalk View ME Station on the terminal including setting up communications printers and input devices see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual Summary of steps Follow these steps to install hardware and software on a PanelView Plus Panel View Plus CE or Panel View Plus 6 terminal transfer your application to the Panel View Plus Panel View Plus CE or PanelView Plus 6 terminal For information about installing FactoryTalk View ME Station see the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Installation Guide Installing hardware and software ona PanelView Plus terminal l If you will be printing displays alarms reports or diagnostics messages connect a printer to the USB or Network port PanelView P
597. thin the group is determined by the individual object animation Test your animation to ensure you achieve the intended results To apply animation to objects within groups use the group edit feature For details see page 20 46 Checking the animation on objects To see what type of animation has been set up for an object or group of objects use the Object Explorer the Animation menu or the Animation dialog box For information about using the Object Explorer to highlight objects that have animation attached see page 20 25 To see what type of animation has been set up for objects within a group use the group edit feature or the Object Explorer For information about using the group edit feature see page 20 46 22 Animating graphic objects To view the animation on an object using the Animation menu 1 Select an object 2 View the animation by doing one of the following m Click the Animation menu and see which items have a check mark m Right click the object and then select Animation to see which items have a check mark To view the animation on an object using the Animation dialog box 1 Select an object 2 Onthe View menu click Animation When the Animation dialog box opens look at which tabs have check marks on them to see which types of animation have been set up Rotation Horizontal Position Vertical Position Horizontal Slider Vertical Slider OLE Varb HoppersFlourLevel Tags Fi
598. tics clear Page down Diagnostics clear all Page up Display print Password End Pause Enter RecipePlus Goto configure mode Reset alarm status Home Return to display Information acknowledge Shutdown Language switch Silence alarms Login Sort alarms You can set up any combination of these buttons in a graphic display For example you might want to put a login logout and shutdown button in the same graphic display Create and then set up each button separately The illustration shows the login button Some buttons have different properties on the General tab but you can use these instructions to set up any of the buttons in the list For example on the General tab for the acknowledge all alarms button and the clear alarm history button you can specify a subset of alarms to which the button s action applies For details about filtering alarm triggers see page 9 5 To set up a button 1 Double click the button Login Button Properties ES General Label Common Appearance Border style Border width MV Border uses back color 4 BB Back Color Back style Pattern style Oo Border Color sod N _ Pattern Color oli z one E Highlight color Shape Blink Rectangle Touch margins Horizontal margin fo Other M Audio Vertical margin 0 Cancel Help 21 Setting up graphic objects 2 Inthe button s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab
599. time or for the duration of the button press whichever is longer Then the connection s value is reset to 0 If the hold time for any alarm is still in effect and the operator presses silence alarms the button press is ignored The audio alarm indicator is available for applications running on personal computers only 9 39 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 9 40 Clearing and deleting messages From the alarm history When the operator presses the clear alarm history button all alarms in the system or optionally for a specific alarm trigger are deleted from the alarm log file and from all alarm lists For information about the alarm log file see page 9 10 If the Ack connection is assigned for any of the alarm triggers being cleared the operator is prompted to acknowledge the unacknowledged messages before deleting them If the operator chooses to acknowledge the alarms the Acknowledge all value if any is sent to the Ack connection before deleting the messages If the Ack connection is not assigned or if the operator chooses not to acknowledge alarms all messages are deleted immediately From the alarm banner When the operator presses the clear alarm banner button the displayed alarm is cleared from the banner The alarm remains in the alarm log file and in all alarm lists it appears in Using alarm buttons to sort alarms and reset alarm status Sorting alarms When the operator presses the sor
600. ting up 17 using visibility animation 14 24 9 Security codes assigning to graphic displays 9 assigning to RSView 3 20 and earlier users 7 assigning to users 5 9 Security functions in expressions 14 using 11 24 9 Serial downloads cable to use for 6 Servers data 2 See also OPC servers Shutdown button graphic object 4 16 assigning visibility animation to 24 25 limiting access to 14 locating in display hierarchy 1 using to navigate 3 7 using to shut down application 5 using to stop application 2 Shutdown macro 2 4 Siemens devices 1 Silence alarms button graphic object 9 8 16 using with alarm objects 37 Single sign on 22 SLC tags importing 9 Sort alarms button graphic object 9 8 16 using with alarm lists 37 Special keys arrows using with graphic objects 43 Ctrl copying objects with 40 drawing objects with 17 18 19 20 resizing objects with 43 rotating objects with 53 selecting objects with 23 Shift using with graphic objects 40 43 using to navigate at run time 8 using with numeric pop up windows 8 using with string pop up windows 13 Spreadsheets working in 12 Square graphic object 3 19 Standard toolbar 5 Startup macro 2 4 Startup settings l States multistate graphic objects l States toolbar 33 Status bar 6 showing and hiding 8 STATUS display 6 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 copying 30 editing 28 String display graphic object 8 33 at run time 17 String embedded variables 4 at
601. tion s value is 0 the local message display object is cleared 19 29 Creating local messages in multiple languages FactoryTalk View 5 00 supports local messages in multiple languages When you create local messages they are in the current application language You can export the local messages for translation and then import them back into the application For details see Chapter 12 Language switching local messages in FactoryTalk View ME Station 4 00 For applications that will run in FactoryTalk View ME Station version 4 00 use the CurrentLanguage expression function to specify message offsets in the local message file In the file divide your messages into sections for each language For information about the CurrentLanguage function see page 23 14 How the local message display graphic object works When you open a graphic display at run time FactoryTalk View reads the value of the Value connection and updates the local message display object based on the value What is displayed m Ifthe Value connection is unassigned the display is filled with question marks m The Value connection is rounded to the nearest integer If the value does not match any of the trigger values in the specified message file the display is filled with question marks For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 m Ifthe message is too long to fit in the object the last displayed character is replaced with an asterisk
602. tion about expressions see Chapter 23 Setting minimum and maximum values Many types of animation require a minimum and maximum range for the tag or expression These values determine the start and end points for a range of motion For example if you specify a minimum of 0 and a maximum of 100 the object will not react to values outside of this range So even if the expression has a value of 200 the object does not change from its At maximum position When setting up animation select one of these methods for calculating the minimum and maximum values m Use tag s min and max property values select this method to use the minimum and maximum values of the first HMI tag in the expression If more than one HMI tag is used in the expression the first HMI tag s minimum and maximum values are used For analog HMI tags the values are taken from the Minimum and Maximum boxes in the Tags editor For digital tags the minimum is 0 and the maximum is 1 m Use constant select this method to use numeric constants Type the minimum and maximum values in the boxes Read from tags select this method to read two tags values to determine the minimum and maximum values Type the tag names in the boxes or click the Browse buttons to open the Tag Browser and select the tags If you use this method the tags are read when the graphic display opens Their values at that time are used for the minimum and maximum values The tags are
603. tion efficiency m archive process variables to ensure compliance with government regulations Based on such considerations you can determine m which tags need to be plotted on the same trend m which tags need to be logged by using a data log model For information about setting up data logging see Chapter 26 For information about creating trend graphic objects see Chapter 28 Planning recipes When planning recipes consider how they will be used For example will recipes be used to m compare tag values to pre set data values m upload tag values to existing or new data sets m download values from data sets to tags m archive tag values to ensure compliance with government regulations Based on such considerations you can determine m which tag sets and data sets to pair together in a recipe file m which RecipePlus button actions to use with the RecipePlus selector and RecipePlus table For information about using recipes and creating RecipePlus graphic objects see Chapter 29 Designing a secure system When deciding on your security requirements consider whether to m restrict access to every graphic display to prevent accidental changes m restrict access to certain graphic displays m have everyone log on m use passwords and if so whether to have a minimum length and whether to require that the passwords are changed periodically m allow only authorized users to shut down the application 3 7
604. tions tab assign a tag called Conveyor speed to the Value connection 3 Assign this expression to the Optional Exp connection if Feet_or_meters 0 then 7 else 3 281 FactoryTalk View writes the result of the expression to the Conveyor speed tag at the data source 23 19 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 23 20 IA Using embedded variables This chapter describes m the types of embedded variables m where you can create embedded variables m creating embedded variables m embedded variable syntax how embedded variables are updated at run time how embedded variables are displayed at run time About embedded variables Embedded variables allow you to display values that change dynamically at run time You can use embedded variables in the text captions on graphic objects in the title bar of On Top displays and in message text You can use multiple embedded variables in the same caption or message For example you could embed a tag value and the time variable in a local message At run time when the local message is displayed it is updated to reflect the tag s current value as the value changes The time is also updated as the time changes You can also use literal strings and constants in embedded variables or a combination of both variable and literal strings and numbers Embedded variables can consist of m numeric analog or digital tags including both HMI and data server tags
605. tirm Password 2 Specify the folder and file name for the run time application 3 Inthe Save as type box specify the version of FactoryTalk View ME Station for which to create the mer file 4 For version 5 00 and later mer files if you don t want to allow the run time application to be converted to a development application click Never allow conversion 5 For version 5 00 and later mer files if you require that the user enter a password to convert the application click Conversion protected by password Type the password in the two boxes 14 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE ve 8 9 The password can be up to 100 characters long The password is case sensitive Version 6 0 or earlier mer files created on a 64 bit operating system are not allowed to be converted to med files So if you are creating a version 6 0 or earlier mer file on a 64 bit operating system never allow a conversion that is the default and only choice under the Conversion to development application frame Click Save Create Runtime Application Wizard Select Languages Check the languages you would like to include in the runtime application up to a masimum of 20 languages Runtime Language Arabic Kuwait arki Chinese PRC zh C w English Canada en A English United States en US French Belgium fr BE Yj French Canada French Switzerland fr CH oer see TO kasel sul A FU
606. to assign values to tags eee eens 6 12 7 Using HMI tags aM Ean e ETE cock ae aoe aed EEE EEE E EEEE EEES 7 1 Analog tags that use floating point values n nananana aana aaa 7 2 How values dre rounded scserrrsrsssierirdd iiini kietara ana inia 7 2 Wesine the Vacs cdots 2344 544 nbcen034eus reri anr a EA 7 3 Updating the contents of the Tags editor 0 0 7 4 pearchine for HMI fal Sse 265 ccacteteeseeens et eeedeedhese eS es 7 4 Wald SOUICES 4 n ee eS Goce Ge aeons oh uae Gere Soe oe eeu Petes Baas 7 5 THE Cala SOC Cn phe bard bod nee a bane baat bees saad ed sae 7 5 DEVIC as pa eda eae Bes ene 6 ee ne ee nee Se os 7 5 KE on a a 4 nta ew E eee eee ee ee eats os oh ee ee oe ae ae ee 7 5 Addressing syntax for device tags 0 0 cee ene eee eens 7 5 Orcanizine HIVaes ccs enhasd biden coerce ndenasehh Gee deteedeek En 7 7 Nati O ACS 244i Pu cae t oe oh Se aes scab E EE EE 7 7 Using folders to group tags 0 0 0 eee eens 7 7 Viewing tag SIANISHCS 5c cus deeds stare Ciee aee tease de eeded tsetse tars 7 8 Other methods for creating HMI tags 0 0 cee 7 8 Creating tags as needed in other FactoryTalk View editors 7 8 Creating tags as needed in the Data Log Models editor 7 9 Importing tags from a PLC database 0 002 ee 7 9 Using the Tag Import and Export Wizard 0 0 0 0 00 cece eee eee 7 11 8 Setting up global connections About global connections
607. to make a change to the application but don t want to lose this run time information 14 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 14 4 you need to extract information that was generated at run time such as updated RecipePlus files Version 6 0 or earlier mer files created on a 64 bit operating system are not allowed to be converted to MED files So if you are creating a version 6 0 or earlier mer file on a 64 bit operating system never allow a conversion that is the default and only choice under the Conversion to development application frame When you create the mer file you can specify whether or not to allow conversion of the run time mer file and whether to require a password to convert the run time application For more information about converting mer files to development applications see page 14 7 14 Creating run time applications To create a run time application 1 In FactoryTalk View Studio with the application open on the Application menu click Create Runtime Application Create Runtime Application Ea Save irr E Runtime Ti gt f My Recent Documents Deskto m My Documents ar i x Mu Computer i biy Network File name Save as lipe Runtime 6 0 Application mer Cancel Conversion to development application Cave Help dii E Always allow conversion Never allow conversion Conversion protected by password Passion Eon
608. to open its Properties dialog box 2 Click the Common tab 3 Inthe Name box type the name The name must start with a letter and cannot contain spaces You can use the underscore character _ To name a group object 1 Select the group object 2 Inthe Property Panel click the Properties tab 3 Double click the GroupName row and then type the name The name must start with a letter and cannot contain spaces You can use the underscore character _ Testing how objects look in different states To make sure the different states for an object are set up correctly you can view them using the States toolbar or the Property Panel To open the States toolbar m Onthe View menu select Toolbars and then click States State To view an object s states using the States toolbar 1 Select one or more objects 2 Inthe States toolbar select the state to view If you selected multiple objects the toolbar shows the states that are common to all the objects 20 33 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 20 34 a To view the next state select it in the toolbar or press the Down Arrow key on your keyboard You can also use these keys to select the next state to view m To view the previous state press the Up Arrow key m To view the first state press the Home key m To see the last state press the End key To view an object s states using the Property Panel l 2 3 Sele
609. to the display one at a time Ramp buttons increase or decrease the value of a tag by either an integer or floating point value You can use two ramp buttons together to create an increment decrement control for example for the speed of a motor Or you can use a numeric input enable button or numeric input cursor point For information about the numeric input enable button see page 21 30 For information about the numeric input cursor point see page 21 31 Setting up momentary push buttons Use the momentary push button to start a process or action When pressed the button changes a tag to one value and when released the button changes the tag to another value The momentary push button s states can perform one of three kinds of actions m Change the Value connection to 1 when the button is pressed and to 0 when the button is released This kind of button is called normally open because its released state is off Pressing the button completes the circuit m Change the Value connection to 0 when the button is pressed and to 1 when the button is released This kind of button is called normally closed because its released state is on Pressing the button breaks the circuit m Change the Value connection to a value you specify You assign the desired values to the button s press and release actions For example 50 when pressed and 100 when released The error state The button s error state is displayed at run time when
610. ton specify the graphic display to open when the operator presses the button at run time The specified display doesn t open if the operator does not have security access for the display You can also assign a parameter file or parameter list that assigns tags to tag placeholders in the display when the display opens For more information about parameter files and lists see Chapter 25 For information about setting up goto display buttons see Help How display types affect the button s behavior The goto display button s behavior at run time also depends on which types of graphic displays are already open and which type of display it is opening m Ifthe graphic display assigned to the button is a Replace display it closes any open On Top or Replace displays It does not close any On Top displays that use the Cannot Be Replaced option m Ifthe display assigned to the button is already open but does not have focus pressing the button gives the display focus The operator cannot use the goto display button to open Replace displays if display change is currently controlled remotely using global connections But the operator can still open On Top displays Goto configure mode buttons When the operator presses a goto configure mode button at run time the current application stops running and the FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box opens While in configure mode the operator can use FactoryTalk View ME Station to change
611. tons in the same positions For example if you have a Start button in a certain position in one display don t put a Stop button in the same position in the next display Clarity m Use symbols that are easily recognizable For example use the conventional ISA symbols for tanks and valves Don t overload the screen with information m Use standard clear terminology and avoid abbreviations or acronyms that the user might not understand m Use colors with recognizable meanings For example in North America the colors red and green usually mean stop and start Keep color meanings consistent by assigning red only to Stop buttons and green only to Start buttons 3 Planning applications Some people are color blind to red and green so don t rely on color alone to establish meaning Use high contrast color combinations such as yellow on blue Display Types On Top display type is used to position the display in front of any other display that is already open at run time m Replace display type is used to have the display close any open displays on the screen at run time Replace displays do not close displays of the type On Top that have the Cannot Be Replaced option selected Only one Replace display can be open at a time Usability m If you re designing for a touch screen don t place important buttons where they Il be blocked by an On Top display The user can t press a covered button Also ensure the button
612. tor must be open and have focus To view tag statistics m On the View menu click Tag Statistics Tag Statistics Database CNDOCUMENTS AND SETTINGSSALL USERSSOCOCUMENTSSASVIEW ENTERPRISESMESHM PROJECT SSPUMPHOUSESTAGSPUMPHOUSE DB ODBC Data Source PUMPHOLISE Last Modified FrAug 30 14 37 43 2002 Tag Summary Analog 28 Digital 2 String 6 Total 36 Folders 3 Help Other methods for creating HMI tags al Browse button in the Tag column In addition to creating tags in the Tags editor you can m create tags as needed in other editors using the Tag Browser import tags from a PLC or SLC database For details see page 7 9 Creating tags as needed in other FactoryTalk View editors You can create tags as needed in any editor or dialog box that uses tags You can add a tag to the database by doing one of the following m Click the Browse button in the Tag column to open the Tag Browser and create the tag For information about using the Tag Browser see page 6 5 m Type anew tag name in the Tag or expression column Keep track of the tag name and add the tag in the Tags editor when convenient 7 Using HMI tags Creating tags as needed in the Data Log Models editor In the Data Log Models editor in the Tags in Model tab you can add a tag to the database by doing one of the following m Click the Browse button beside the Tags to add box to open the Tag Browser and Bel create the tag
613. trend You can also specify these settings in the Properties tab of the Property Panel To specify this Use this box or column In this tab Chart background color Background color Display Horizontal label color Text color Display Text font style and size Font button Display Pen line pen marker pen icon and Color Pens vertical label color Pen line width Width Pens Pen line style Style Pens Pen marker Marker Pens Vertical grid line color Grid color X Axis Horizontal grid line color Grid color Y Axis The trend border color The trend border uses the highlight color for the graphic display specified in the Behavior tab of the Display Settings dialog box The trend window color By default the trend window uses the background color of the display specified in the General tab of the Display Settings dialog box 28 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To use a different window color m Inthe Property Panel select the opaque WindowStyle and then specify the WindowColor property For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 Testing the trend a Test Display tool Edit Display tool You can quickly test the trend by switching to test mode If communications are active and there is data for the tags the pens plot values in the trend When you are finished testing switch back to edit mode to continue editing To switch between test and edit modes m On the View menu clic
614. tributes for the object s image lt animations gt Contains an animation element for each type of animation set up for the object lt animate Visibility gt Contains attributes for Visibility animation lt animateColor gt Contains attributes for Color animation lt animations gt Indicates the end of the animations element lt connections gt Contains a connection element for each connection assigned to the object lt connection name Value gt Contains attributes for the Value connection lt connection name Indicator Contains attributes for the Indicator connection gt lt connections gt Indicates the end of the connections element lt objectI gt Indicates the end of the object element Element lt object2 gt lt states gt lt state stateid 0 gt lt caption gt lt imageSettings gt lt state gt lt state stateid 1 gt lt caption gt lt imageSettings gt lt state gt lt states gt lt connections gt lt connection name Value gt lt connection name Indicator gt lt connections gt lt object2 gt lt gfx gt H Importing and exporting graphics XML files Description Contains attributes from the General and Common tabs in the object s Properties dialog box as well as elements for the object s states and connections Contains state elements for each of the object s states Contains attrib
615. trigger for the tag Motor starter The tag uses 16 bits and points to the programmable controller address N7 61 although only the first three bit positions are used in this example Use the LSBit Least Significant Bit trigger type Because you are using only the first three bits in a single tag element there is no need to specify a length for the array tag in this example You can use a simple tag type However if you were also monitoring bits in N7 62 you would need to add L2 to the address as follows PLCS N7 61 L2 9 14 9 Setting up alarms 2 Specify these trigger values and alarm messages for the alarm trigger Bit in the array bit address Bit position Trigger value Message 00 l l The motor has lost power 01 2 2 The motor has stopped 02 3 3 The overload switch has lost power At run time if power to the motor is lost the programmable controller changes all three bit values from 0 to 1 but FactoryTalk View generates the first alarm message only since bit 00 is the lowest that is least significant bit in alarm If the operator acknowledges the first alarm and power is not yet restored the second alarm is generated and so on Tips for using array tags You can use these tag data types for array tags Data type Number of bits Byte 8 Integer 16 Word 16 Long Integer 32 Double Word 32 The right column shows the number of bits for each data type This is useful for h
616. ts For applications that will run on a PanelView Plus 6 Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CE terminal install the fonts that the application will use For applications that will run on a personal computer the fonts you want are generally installed when you install the languages for the application Be aware that using MS Ariel Unicode as the default font makes a better performance for language switching For details about choosing fonts that work well with language switching see page 20 12 Make sure that the development and run time computers are set up to use the fonts you want for the title bar and inactive title bar Specify the font in the Windows Control Panel in the Display Properties dialog box For information about setting up fonts on a PanelView Plus 6 Panel View Plus or PanelView Plus CE terminal see the PanelView Plus Terminals User Manual 12 e Setting up language switching Windows locale settings Windows locale formatting determines how the application displays time date and floating point values at design time and run time When the application language is switched the locale settings for the new language are used even if that language has not been installed You do not need to edit the default locale settings Adding languages to the application Use the Language Configuration dialog box in FactoryTalk View Studio to add up to 40 languages to the application Add languages before you m create language sw
617. ts of a graphic object s appearance For more information about assigning expressions to graphic objects see page 20 35 You can also use expressions to attach animation to graphic objects For more information see Chapter 22 Global Connections You can use expressions to remotely control when to open and print displays as well as the date and time to display For more information see Chapter 8 m Alarm Setup When setting up alarms you can use expressions for alarm triggers and with some of the connections that silence and acknowledge alarms For more information see Chapter 9 Information Setup You can use expressions to determine when to display information messages For more information see Chapter 27 m Macros You can use expressions in macros to assign values to tags For more information see page 30 1 Formatting expressions You can format expressions so they are easier to read However do not let tag names function names or function arguments span more than one line When formatting expressions you can use line returns and multiple spaces Enclose strings in quotes The string can contain any character and can include spaces Example Formatting an expression To format this if then else statement you can align the Else with the appropriate If so the logic is easy to understand if tag1 gt tag2 then 0 else if tag gt tag3 then 2 else 4 Or you can condense it to the following if
618. ts toolbox click the Trend tool m On the Objects menu select Trending and then click Trend 3 Drag the mouse to create a box approximately the size you want for the trend 4 Double click the trend to open the Trend Object Properties dialog box 5 Set up the trend For details see Help Once you have set up the trend you can edit it as you would any other graphic object You can move it resize it attach animation to it and so on You can also use this object in other graphic displays by dragging it from one display and dropping it into another For more information about graphic objects see Chapter 20 28 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Setting up trends When you double click a trend object the Trend Object Properties dialog box opens Use the dialog box to set up the trend Set up the chart style and update mode Set up how the trend works at run time Set up pens Set up the horizontal axis Set up the vertical axis Set up focus highlight and keyboard navigation Set up the tags to display data for Trend Object Properties General Display Pens PAIS YARIS Common Connections Chart style f Standard Co r Plot Ez Chart update mode f Automatic Retesh Fate i Hf Seconds C On Change a Cancel Help For details about the options in the Trend Object Properties dialog box see Help 28 4 28 Setting up trends The parts of a trend The illustration belo
619. tting up Factory Talk Diagnostics FactoryTalk View automatically sends audit messages to the Engineer and Secure audiences Audit messages allow auditing tools such as those required for US Government 21CFR Part 11 compliance to track system activity Displaying diagnostics messages during application development During application development diagnostics messages are displayed as you create modify and delete components and when you test your graphic displays The messages are displayed in the Diagnostics List at the bottom of the FactoryTalk View Studio window You can also view the messages in the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer as described in the next section By default all warning and error messages are displayed in the Diagnostics List To change what is displayed in the Diagnostics List use the Diagnostics Setup tool as described on page 10 6 For information about testing graphic displays see page 19 10 To display the Diagnostics List m On the View menu click Diagnostics List A check mark beside the menu item indicates the Diagnostics List is displayed For information about moving resizing and clearing messages in the Diagnostics List see page 2 5 If you don t want to display diagnostics messages m On the View menu click Diagnostics List The option is turned off when no check mark appears Viewing FactoryTalk Diagnostics log files Use the FactoryTalk Diagnostics Viewer tool to view the contents of Fa
620. tting up alarms If alarms are currently being sorted by time alarms are listed with the newest alarms on top If alarms are currently being sorted by trigger value alarms from the first trigger in the Alarm Setup editor are listed first with alarms from subsequent triggers listed after Alarms in the list from the same trigger are grouped together and then sorted by trigger value from lowest to highest If there are multiple instances of the same alarm these alarms are sorted by time with the newest on top If you assign a tag or expression to any of the ActiveAcknowledged ActiveUnacknowledged InactiveAcknowledged or InactirveUnacknowledged connections when a connection s value is a non zero value the related type of alarm is displayed in the alarm list The connection value overrides the setting for the list in the Alarm List Properties dialog box If you set up alarm messages in multiple languages messages are displayed in the language that they were originally logged in All alarm and acknowledgement times are displayed in the current application language How the list scrolls When a display containing an alarm list is opened the highlight bar or cursor is at the top of the list on the most recent alarm if sorted by time or on the first alarm for the first trigger if sorted by trigger value If alarms are sorted by time and the top alarm is selected as new alarms occur the old alarms scroll down but the highlight b
621. tton is set up to work as a ramp button using the Fine Step value The Coarse Step value is not converted ASCII Entry Keypad Enable button String input enable button The Show Current String on ASCII Scratchpad setting is not converted The pop up scratchpad or keyboard is always blank when opened ASCII Entry Cursor Point String input enable button The Show Current String on ASCII Scratchpad setting is not converted The pop up scratchpad or keyboard is always blank when opened Message Display Multistate indicator B 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Is converted to this FactoryTalk View This PanelBuilder object object Notes Numeric Data Display Text The text object contains a numeric embedded variable that displays the read tag If the original numeric data display object does not contain text manually create a numeric display object with the desired properties in FactoryTalk View Connected Line Polyline Circle Ellipse The ellipse has a circular shape Freeform Freehand Screen List Selector Display list selector Goto Screen Button Return Screen Button Goto display button Return to display button New Password Button Password button Print Alarm List Button Print alarm history button Clear Alarm List Button Clear alarm history button Unsupported graphic objects These PanelBuilder objects are not supported in FactoryTalk View B 6 Pr
622. tup editor 8 Diagnostics messages 1 audiences for 4 creating your own display for 11 displaying at run time 8 19 displaying during application development 5 logging from PanelView Plus and PanelView Plus CE terminals 6 8 logging to an ODBC database 7 message severity 4 ODBC format for 1 printing at run time amp setting up at run time 10 setting up destinations for 6 setting up message routing for 6 8 viewing log files 5 Diagnostics Setup tool 6 Diagnostics Viewer tool 6 Digital tags 1 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 logging values for 4 monitoring for alarms 4 DIN symbols 21 Display editor See Graphic Displays editor Display list selector graphic object 3 37 linking buttons to 9 navigating to 7 using parameter files with 3 using to navigate 3 6 Display number specifying 4 D Display print button graphic object 31 3 16 printing trend data with 12 using the data source instead of 5 Display Settings dialog box 11 exporting to XML 1 importing XML 3 Display size See Window size Display types 12 and navigation 4 default 3 Displays See Graphic displays Documentation for FactoryTalk View finding 1 2 printing 1 Drawing objects 1 animating 2 coloring 32 creating 12 flipping 52 locking into position 53 reshaping 43 rotating 52 Drivers See Communication drivers E Edit mode 10 Editor types Alarm Setup 3 Data Log Models 2 Diagnostics List Setup 8 Expression 2 Global Connections 2 Graphic Di
623. ture of an oven is lower than required for a recipe the gauge can show the temperature in blue m Ifthe temperature is in the correct range for the recipe the gauge can show the temperature in green m Ifthe temperature is higher than the recipe allows the gauge can show the temperature in red Some people are color blind to red and green so don t rely on color alone to establish meaning 21 45 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 21 46 Setting up bar graphs Use bar graphs to represent numeric values by filling and emptying the object as the values rise and fall To set up a bar graph 1 Double click the bar graph General Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width yj eedah e i E Back color a BB Border color BB Fill color Bar graph settings Minimum value Maximum value Fill direction Thresholds Number of thresholds Threshold type 0 z Value X Threshold 1 value C Fill color I Blink Threshold 2 value BB Fill color T Blink Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab m Inthe General tab specify what the bar graph looks like at run time Inthe Common tab specify the bar graph s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tag or expression from which the bar graph receives data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34
624. two tag references 6 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Use one of these methods to assign tags to a graphic object Double click the object to open the object s Properties dialog box and then click the Connections tab Momentary Push Button Properties General States Common Connections eta oo Espressione Er PET z Type the tag name here or Click the Browse button to open the Tag Browser m Select the object and then assign tags in the Connections tab of the Property Panel Property Panel HMomentaryPushButtonl Momentary Pus Properties Connections EL ET E Value ee Indicator com or Click the Type the tag name Browse button to here open the Tag Browser Value Type Long Returns the control state value of the object Te 6 10 6 e Working with tags Using expressions to manipulate tag values In many of the places where you can assign a tag you can also use expressions to perform logical or mathematical calculations on tag values If you assign an expression FactoryTalk View monitors the expression value rather than the original tag value For example your machine might send values to the data source in the form of temperature in degrees Celsius You could use an expression to convert the value to degrees Fahrenheit and then monitor the expression result rather than the original tag value If you can assign an expression a Br
625. ty functions to control access to your application These functions allow you to determine a user s identity or security rights in order to limit access to the application based on these criteria This function Returns this value CurrentUserHasCode True 1 if any of the specified security codes have been assigned Security Code Letters to the user false 0 if not If checking multiple security codes do not type a space between the security code letters For example CurrentUserHasCode ABP returns the value 1 if the user has been assigned one or more of the specified codes CurrentUserName A string containing the name of the current user This function is case sensitive All RSView 3 20 and earlier user names use uppercase letters For more information about setting up security for your application see Chapter 11 For an example of using the CurrentUserHasCode x function see page 11 11 For examples of using the CurrentUserName function see page 11 24 Language function The language function shows you which language your application is currently using You can display the current language in a string display or use it in expressions to generate language specific messages for your users This function Returns this value CurrentLanguage RFC1766 name of the current run time language The RFC1766 name is a standard way of representing a language using the format languagecode Country RegionCode wh
626. u can assign any or all of the date and time connections or leave them unassigned Normally you would assign only one set of date and time connections either to update the date and time at the data source from the terminal or to update the terminal s internal clock from the data source The values of assigned date and time connections are updated in the order in which the connections are listed in the Global Connections editor 8 2 8 Setting up global connections Updating the date and time at the data source from the terminal To update the date or time at the data source from the terminal s internal clock assign a tag to one or more of these connections This connection Contains this range of values Year 00 99 Day of Week 1 7 with 1 being Sunday Month 1 12 Day of Month 1 31 Hour 0 23 Minute 0 59 Second 0 59 Specify how frequently to update the values of the assigned connections at the data source from the terminal s internal clock by typing a time in the Date and time output interval box Updating the date and time at the terminal from the data source This option is especially useful if you have several terminals connected to the same data source Instead of the operator resetting the date and time manually on each terminal the data source can reset all internal clocks at once To update the date or time in the terminal s internal clock from the data source assign a tag or an
627. uch as SQRT square root return numeric values Relational and logical operators return true false values The security function CurrentUserHasCode x also returns a true false value The security function CurrentUserName returns a string value The language function CurrentLanguage returns a string value Expressions that use if then else logic can return numeric values true false values or text strings depending on how they are structured These are called conditional expressions because the result of the expression depends on whether the If statement is true or false When the If statement evaluates to true the result is defined by the Then statement When the If statement is false the result is defined by the Else statement The Objects 5 Screen Demo sample application contains many examples of expressions For example see the alarm trigger expressions in the Alarm Setup editor Using the Expression editor To create an expression you can m type it directly in the Tag or expression column for any connection that accepts expressions or in the Expression box for animation open the Expression editor and then create the expression in the editor Using the Expression editor versus typing expressions directly Once you are familiar with expression syntax you might find it quicker to create short expressions by typing them directly in the Tag or expression column The Expression editor allows you to see
628. ues ramping at run time 7 using graphic objects to display and enter 8 Document version 6 1 Modified June 2 2011 5 03 15 0 Object Explorer 24 opening 24 viewing animation in 25 viewing tag and expression assignments in 25 using to highlight objects 25 Object Smart Path 4 7 ODBC storage format for diagnostics messages 1 Off line tags browsing for 7 On Top displays 12 Sizing 13 using for alarms 31 using for diagnostics messages 11 using for information messages 7 OPC communications and RSLinx Classic 1 setting up l using to connect to Logix5000 processors 6 OPC servers items in 6 OPC tags addressing syntax for 5 open Symbol Factory Symbol Factory 15 Operators in expressions 6 Oracle logging to 7 P Page down button graphic object 7 16 49 setting up auto repeat for 11 using with alarm objects 38 using with diagnostics lists 13 using with recipes 12 Page up button graphic object 7 setting up auto repeat for 11 using with alarm objects 38 using with diagnostics lists using with recipes 12 Panel graphic object 3 15 PanelBuilder 1400e applications converting l PanelBuilder 32 applications converting l PanelBuilder applications converting l PanelView Plus CE terminals logging diagnostics messages transferring applications to PanelView Plus terminals logging diagnostics messages running applications on 1 transferring applications to Parameter files 38 2 16 49 13 from 6 8 from 6 8 Ji assig
629. ues at run time using the numeric input enable button or the numeric input cursor point When the operator presses the button or activates the cursor point the numeric pop up keypad or scratchpad opens If you set up the button or cursor point to ramp pressing the object gives it focus but does not open a pop up window To use the numeric pop up scratchpad a keyboard must be attached to the run time computer or the terminal must be a keypad terminal For information about setting up the numeric input enable button and numeric input cursor point see Help You can also use a ramp button to ramp numeric values For details see Help for the button Activating the cursor point When the numeric input cursor point has focus the operator can activate the cursor point by pressing any of these keys on the keyboard or keypad 17 Using your application numbers from 0 to 9 m the minus sign or decimal point m the Enter key or an enter button m the Backspace key or a backspace button When the operator activates the numeric input cursor point the numeric pop up keypad or scratchpad opens Ramping numeric values If you set up the numeric input enable button or numeric input cursor point to ramp values the operator presses the object to give it focus When the object has focus the operator can press a move up or move down button or the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key on a keyboard or keypad to ramp the value at the Va
630. ul for quickly resizing multiple objects to the same size For information about using the Property Panel see page 20 29 You can also specify an object s size using the Common tab in the object s Properties dialog box For more information see page 21 2 When you resize text objects if you have selected the Size to fit option the font size is adjusted to fit the new object size as closely as possible To automatically align objects to the grid as you resize them m On the View menu select Snap On A check mark appears beside the menu item when the option is selected For information about setting up the grid see page 19 8 A Polygon tool 20 Using graphic objects To resize an object using the mouse l 2 Select the object Place the pointer on one of the handles A double arrow appears Drag the handle until the object is the desired size or shape Drag a side handle to change width or height or a corner handle to change both E E E E E E E E E E a m my E m m E nN E TE V E E E For perfect circles and squares press Ctrl and hold the key down while you drag a corner handle To maintain the object s original proportions width to height press Shift and hold the key down while you drag a corner handle To resize an object in small increments using the keyboard l a Select the object Place the pointer on one of the handles A double arrow appears Hold down Shift and press an
631. upport Multiple Languages After you turn on support for multiple languages when you save the graphic library all strings that support language switching are saved in the current application language For information about saving libraries in multiple languages see page 19 17 Using graphic libraries that support multiple languages To use the graphics libraries in an application you can add a graphic library into the Displays folder or copy objects from a graphic library into a graphic display If the graphic library supports multiple languages m when you add the graphic library into the Displays folder all strings including strings for languages that are not supported by the application are included with the display m if you copy an object from the graphic library into a graphic display only strings for languages supported by the application are copied For more information about using graphic libraries see Chapter 19 12 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 12 16 13 Setting up display navigation This chapter describes m what display navigation is m developing a hierarchy of displays m testing display navigation m using graphic objects to navigate controlling display changes remotely This chapter describes methods for navigating between graphic displays For information about navigating between objects in a graphic display see page 21 7 About display navigation The term display navi
632. ups of users and assign passwords to users set up access to the FactoryTalk Directory set up access to the application assign security access to action groups policies groups and users set up access to network devices connections and databases specify which users can backup and restore FactoryTalk Directory specify the types of activities to track for audit purposes specify policies for passwords and user accounts such as how often passwords must be changed Depending on what other products are installed on the computer you can also assign security access for those products to your users For example you can specify which users are allowed to browse the network for RSLinx Enterprise devices 11 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Set up access to the FactoryTalk Directory Set up access to the application You can assign security to all the folders in the System folder Set up policies Set up access to devices Add users and groups and assign passwords The link symbol indicates Windows linked groups and users 11 16 Explorer Condiments EF Local LARBCKYRE MPELOT Fim Condiment ip Condiments System HMI Tags Graphics _ Alarms 1 9 rs lnformatior 9 Logic and Control _ Data Log 9 RecipePlus ASLing Enterprise System CJ Action Groups Policies Product Policies 9 System Policies FactoryT alk Alarms and Events Us
633. ur application you might not need to create HMI tags Use direct references to tags located in devices instead for example tags located in an OPC server s database Eliminating duplication Using data server tags allows you to add modify or delete tags in a device without having to duplicate the changes in the FactoryTalk View HMI tag database Using complex data Some devices for example Logix5000 processors support complex data types such as arrays and structures Your controller might have structures that contain hundreds of member elements Referencing tag values directly eliminates the need for creating an HMI tag for each member Direct reference tags usually update faster than HMI tags To obtain the best system performance for your application use direct reference tags where possible Steps for using data server tags To use data server tags complete three basic steps 1 Create the tag in the OPC server or processor or use an existing tag in the processor The server must understand the syntax of the device it is connected to You need only create a tag if you want to browse the server Examples of OPC servers include RSLinx Enterprise RSLinx Classic and KEPServerEnterprise For information about creating tags in OPC servers that have their own tag database see the documentation provided with the server For information about creating tags in a Logix5000 processor see the documentation for your device programmin
634. urce The data source determines whether the tag receives its values externally or internally The data source The FactoryTalk View documentation uses the term data source as a generic term that includes all possible sources of tag data for both data server tags and HMI tags The data source can be memory or a device such as a programmable controller or an OPC server FactoryTalk View writes values to and reads values from the data source The data source is set up to exchange information in the form of numeric or string values between the FactoryTalk View value table and the machine that your application is controlling Device A tag with device as its data source receives its data from a source external to FactoryTalk View The data can come from a programmable controller or other device via RSLinx Enterprise or from another OPC server You can use up to 5 000 device tags For analog tags with Device as the data source the data type determines the format used when reading and writing tag data to the data server Memory A tag with memory as its data source receives its data from and stores values in the FactoryTalk View internal value table Tags with memory as the data source do not count toward the total tag limit For analog tags with Memory as the data source select the data type that matches the format of the data you will store in the tag Choosing Default is the same as choosing Floating Point Addressing syntax for
635. us information messages Use local messages to give the operator information in a specific graphic display while the display is open To give the operator information no matter which display is open use information messages For details about information messages see Chapter 27 19 e Using graphic displays Summary of steps Follow these steps to set up local messages 1 Inthe Local Messages editor set up the messages and their trigger values 2 Inthe Graphics editor create local message display objects in the graphic displays in which you want the messages to appear at run time For each local message display assign a tag or expression to the Value connection and specify the file of messages to display For information about creating graphic objects see Chapter 20 For information about setting up local message display objects see page 21 54 Using the Local Messages editor Use the Local Messages editor to create one or more files of local messages Each file is stored in the editor s folder You can open and work on multiple message files at the same time i Tank Pumphouse Local Messages P Triggenale Message O Tk Inlet valve is open Inlet valve is closed Outlet valve is oper Outlet valve iz closed Tanki ts filling Tank i draining You can define up to 10 000 messages in each message file For details about using the Local Messages editor see Help Preparing to set up local messages
636. use Windows Explorer or My Computer to move the file For information about creating the run time application file see Chapter 14 15 3 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 15 4 Starting FactoryTalk View ME Station If you are running an application on the development computer we recommend that you exit FactoryTalk View Studio before starting FactoryTalk View ME Station To start FactoryTalk View ME Station m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt FactoryTalk View and then click FactoryTalk View ME Station The FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box opens FactoryT alk View ME Station Current application _e E Load Application Terminal Settings For information about specifying startup options for when FactoryTalk View ME Station starts see page 15 12 Loading and running applications You can run any run time application that is on the run time computer Run time applications have the extension mer To load and run the application 1 Inthe FactoryTalk View ME Station dialog box click Load Application or press F1 15 Running applications on a personal computer Select Application Ei Look in E Runtime c E 14 Pumphouse mer File name Files of type Runtime Files mer Cancel 2 Navigate to the folder containing the application s mer file and then click the file name 3 Click Open 4 To replace
637. user accounts including how long passwords must be how often they must be changed if ever and whether to keep a record of deleted user accounts Remember that any changes that you make to system security policies will be included as part of the run time application It is therefore very strongly recommended that you do not alter the default settings in the Security Policy Properties dialog box unless absolutely necessary and unless you are aware of the full implications of the changes Always test the run time application to make sure the results are what you intended 11 21 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 11 22 Single sign on You can also use the Security Policy to turn off FactoryTalk single sign on If you turn this feature off users must log into FactoryTalk each time is FactoryTalk View Studio restarted When the feature is on if you shut down FactoryTalk View Studio and restart it without restarting your computer you remain logged in to FactoryTalk and are not prompted to log in again To specify how to manage passwords user accounts and Factory Talk sign on l In the System Policies folder double click Security Policy 2 Set up options for accounts passwords and single sign on For details see Help Summary of security features in a sample startup display This section provides an example of how to use FactoryTalk Security and FactoryTalk View security features in a startup graphic display ca
638. uses back color Faisedinset a O Back color Back style Pattern style O Border color Soid sts None C Pattern color C Fore color Blink Text Font Size Alignment Arial J fio B z uf ARA eee M Word wrap Cancel Help 2 Inthe object s Properties dialog box fill in the options on each tab In the General tab specify what the information message display looks like at run time In the Common tab specify the information message display s spacial properties name and visibility For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK C2 Animating graphic objects This chapter describes m the types of animation and which objects support which types of animation m using the Animation dialog box m testing animation m using tag names tag placeholders and expressions when attaching animation m setting the minimum and maximum values for animation that uses a range of motion m using Object Smart Path to define an object s range of motion m setting up each type of animation m applying animation to groups m checking what kind of animation is attached to an object m copying and pasting animation m setting up animation for global objects Types of animation Animation associates graphic objects with tags so the appearance or position of an object changes to reflect changes to the tag s value For example an object s color could change from yel
639. ut setting up states see page 21 3 Inthe Timing tab set up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key For information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 12 Inthe Common tab specify the piloted control list selector s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the piloted control list selector exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up local message displays Use local message displays to provide the operator with information about what to do next or with information about a process At run time the local message display shows one message at a time To use local messages create a local message display object in a graphic display and then assign a local message file to the local message display object For more information about local messages see page 19 26 If no message exists for the trigger value that matches the value of the Value connection the display is filled with question marks 21 Setting up graphic objects To set up a local message display 1 Double click the local message display Local Message Display Properties Ea General Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width M Border uses back color Faisedinset a oO Back color Back style Patter
640. utes for the object s first state as well as elements for the state s caption and image Contains attributes for the state s caption Contains attributes for the state s image Indicates the end of the state element Contains attributes for the object s second state as well as elements for the state s caption and image Contains attributes for the state s caption Contains attributes for the state s image Indicates the end of the state element Indicates the end of the states element Contains a connection element for each connection assigned to the object Contains attributes for the Value connection Contains attributes for the Indicator connection Indicates the end of the connections element Indicates the end of the object2 element Indicates the end of the gfx element You can specify multiple attributes for an element For example the caption element contains 13 possible attributes Elements for group objects begin with lt group gt and end with lt group gt The lt group gt element contains all the elements for each object in the group For more information about graphic object elements and their attributes see Help for the Graphics Import Export Wizard FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE Symbols bmp files 20 importing 21 location of 21 placing in graphic displays 14 tips for using 25 viewing 23 dxf files 20 placing in graphic displays 21 jpg files 20 importin
641. utine MICSSACES conc ecctsaacddetede x cate rasen OGEN ESEE teed 10 8 Receiving messages from a Panel View Plus 6 Panel View Plus or Panel View Plus CH Memmi 4 vincnds due OE me O Red amp Hie E 8 he des Dade eae e 10 8 Displaying and printing diagnostics messages at run time 4 10 8 Using the Diagnostics List Setup editor 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee 10 8 Setting up how messages are displayed and printed atrun time 10 10 The DIAGNOSTICS display 2 000 ene 10 11 Creating your own diagnostics display nonna anaana aaae 10 11 Opening and closing the diagnostics display 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 10 12 Opening the display 4 0 2622 casweasan oeeG oe ee eeeeuscrenn ee ed beds 10 12 Closing tie display s 0242i 5556eheeenseceerbetes cadedious ceeded 10 12 How the diagnostics list graphic object works 2 0 0 cc eee 10 12 What 18 displayed ees ae ddcedeeedediedeh oon ud ban e cee A 10 12 Using buttons with the diagnostics list 0 0 0 0 00 10 13 Setting up security Using security with your application nanaon aaaea eee 11 1 If you do not want to use FactoryTalk Security nnna nananana aeea 11 2 If you do not use FactoryTalk View user accounts 005 11 3 If you use FactoryTalk View user accounts 0 0 00 cece eee 11 3 Working with the Runtime Security editor 0 0 0 0 ee eee 11 3 The DEFAULT PUSer ice ci eects babe oe bono HEE Oe data
642. utton Use a group of buttons to send values to the same tag When the operator presses a button in the group the button s value is sent to the tag and the button remains highlighted as long as the tag value is the same as the button s value Pressing a new button in the group releases the other button and sends a new value to the tag You can also use a single interlocked push button to send a value to a tag Ramp button Increase or decrease the value of a tag by a specified integer or floating point value Use two ramp buttons together to create a raise lower control Numeric input enable button Numeric input cursor point Enter a numeric value and write the value to a tag You can also use this object to ramp values Enter a numeric value and write the value to a tag You can also use this object to ramp values String input enable button Enter a string value and write the value to a tag RecipePlus button Write values for all the ingredients in the selected recipe to a set of tags The button works with the RecipePlus table and RecipePlus selector graphic objects 17 16 Use this graphic object Drawing object with horizontal or vertical slider animation 17 Using your application To do this Control the value of a tag by dragging the slider object with a mouse The pixel position of the slider is translated into a value that is written to the tag If the value of the tag is changed
643. value of 0 7142857 tag2 MOD tagl returns a value of 2 The modulus operator is the remainder of one number divided by another In the example the remainder of 7 divided by 5 is 2 so 7 5 2 Important This operator is for integers only not floating point numbers tagl tag2 returns a value of 78125 23 Using expressions Be sure that any tag value you use as a divisor cannot at some point have a value of zero Expressions that attempt to divide a number by zero produce an error at run time String operands The operator can be used to join string operands For example the expression hello world returns helloworld You cannot join string tags to analog tags whether they are HMI or data server tags Relational operators Relational operators compare two numeric or string values to provide a true or false result If the statement is true a value of 1 is returned If false 0 is returned The relational operators are Symbols Operator Numeric Example String Example For the numeric examples tagl 5 and tag2 7 For the string examples serial_no ST009 EQ equal tagl tag2 serial no ST009 false true NE lt gt not equal tagl lt gt tag2 serial no lt gt STO11 true true LI less than tagl lt tag2 serial no lt ST011 true true GT gt greater than tagl gt tag2 serial no gt ST011 false false LE lt less than or
644. value the variable had when the alarm first occurred This value is retained if you shut down and restart the application How embedded variables are displayed at run time If there is no valid data available for the embedded variable the variable is replaced with question marks This could occur when a display first opens and the data has not arrived yet or when there is a problem that prevents communication with the data source If a string or numeric embedded variable has been set up but no tag has been assigned the embedded variable is replaced with asterisks Numeric embedded variables The value shown for a numeric embedded variable depends on whether the tag value is a floating point number or an integer Integer values are displayed as is Floating point values are rounded to fit the specified number of digits for the variable For example if the variable is set up to show 6 digits 1234 56 is rounded to 1234 6 1234 44 is rounded to 1234 4 The decimal counts as one of the digits For more information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 If the tag value including the decimal point and minus sign contains more digits than specified for the variable the numeric variable is replaced with asterisks For example if the variable is set up to show 6 digits and the tag value is 123456 the variable will be replaced with asterisks Literal numbers are displayed using the same rules as numeric tag values 24 7
645. value you specify when the selected state is in effect For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 3 21 Setting up graphic objects Inthe Timing tab set up the timing and handshake settings for the Enter key For information about using Enter key handshaking see page 21 12 Inthe Common tab specify the control list selector s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the control list selector exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help When you are finished click OK Setting up piloted control list selectors Piloted control list selectors allow an operator or remote device to scroll through a list of states for a process and select one of the states A highlight in the list shows the current State Choosing between piloted control list selectors and control list selectors Piloted control list selectors include the following features that control list selectors do not The states can be selected either by an operator or remotely for example by a programmable controller or by both an operator and a remote device Individual states can be turned off to prevent them from being selected by either the operator or the remote device Control list selectors do not allow states to be turned off The state values of all of the items that are visible i
646. veX object has depends on the vendor s implementation though if you can assign tags or expressions to the object it has a Connections tab 20 27 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE To open an object s Properties dialog box use one of these methods Double click the object m Right click the object and then click Properties m Select the object and then on the Edit menu click Properties m Inthe Property Panel with the object selected click the Custom property and then A click the Browse button Browse button m Inthe Property Panel with the object selected double click the Custom property m Inthe Object Explorer double click the object Multistate Push Button Properties Click a tab to select it General States Timing Common Connections Appearance Border style Border width Bm WW Border uses back color C Highlight color Back style Solid Shape Rectangle State settings Number of states Next state based on 2 bi Current State a Touch margins Horizontal margin Vertical margin This button is available E jo once you make changes in ae the dialog box Click it to F Audo apply your changes without closing the dialog box When you click a different tab the changes in the dL current tab are applied OK Cancel Hel onae Cancel troy Hebe You can also use the Property Panel to set up an object s properties as described next For details
647. veyor belts message file At run time when the value of Conveyor_1_ status changes to 1 the first message is displayed in the default information message display When the value of Conveyor 2 status changes to 1 the second message is displayed Information messages and trigger values Create messages associated with each tag value change that you want to inform the operator about Assign each message a trigger value and set up the data source to send the trigger value to the Value connection You can use both HMI and data server tags The trigger value can be any non zero integer value positive or negative Trigger values do not need to be contiguous but they must be unique for each message For example you could use trigger values of 1 2 and 3 or values of 10 20 and 30 Trigger values cannot be 0 Digital tags have two possible values 0 and 1 Therefore if you use a digital tag you can only use the value 1 to trigger a message If you want to use a digital tag to trigger two different messages create an expression that adds to the digital tag s value That way you can use the trigger values 1 and 2 If you use an analog tag or an expression you can use any non zero integer or floating point value to trigger an alarm Floating point values are rounded to the nearest integer For information about how values are rounded see page 7 2 You can create multiple information message files but you can use only one message file
648. w Notes Image text arc ellipse line Blinking wallpaper objects panel rectangle wedge If you want an object to blink at run time unlock the wallpaper In FactoryTalk View all of the listed objects except images and panels use color animation to blink For details see page 22 10 Panels use the Blink property to blink Color images do not blink Monochrome images use the Blink property to blink Numeric Display Polarity If a PanelBuilder 1400e application was set up with the Polarity control requiring a negative number to display the minus sign the numeric display will not work properly after the application is converted to FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Numeric Input Cursor Point Fixed Position and PLC Use an expression to achieve the same result Assign the Numeric Data Display Controlled decimal display expression to the object s Value connection For options information about expressions see Chapter 23 Numeric Input Cursor Point PLC Controlled and Decimal Objects are converted with the Decimal Point property Numeric Keypad Enable Button Key Controlled input options Numeric Keypad set to Implicit Numeric Input Cursor Point Retain Cursor on Cancel The numeric input cursor point retains focus when the operator cancels entering a numeric value Maintained Push Button Initial state values If you want to set these objects states on application Multistate Push Button Control List Sel
649. w shows a standard trend chart with three pens and a two minute time span Two of the pens have markers The third uses digital plotting For more information about chart types see page 28 7 Sunday Decerber 31 2000 d bord pe TIGON DNS Pen marker Trend window I I I I ban s oas a a a oas as aa 1 1 1 Pen icon Chart Digital plotting y axis Vertical axis label CUP CAE Ca a a aa aca a Cc Ce Pen marker 12 54 50 Phd 12 55 14 12 55 38 12 56 26 12 56 50 Phi x axis Horizontal axis label Trend border The border appears around the trend object at run time when the trend is selected Trend window The area around the chart between the border and the chart is the trend window 28 5 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 28 6 Chart The chart is the area of the trend in which values are plotted It is bounded by the y axis on the left and the x axis on the bottom It contains the plotted trend data shown using pen lines and pen markers as well as grid lines if you choose to display them Y axis The y axis is the left vertical edge of the chart It is also known as the vertical axis Vertical axis labels The vertical axis labels show the scale range of values for the pens If desired you can set up the trend to omit the vertical axis labels The minimum and maximum values for the scale can be determined automatically using the best fit for the current da
650. w the current state but also want to see the other possible states For sequential processes the list can alert the operator about what happens next in the process For details see page 21 42 Trend Historical or current numeric tag values plotted against time or displayed in an XY plot where one or more tags values are plotted against another tag s values to show the relationship between them For details see Chapter 28 Time and date display Display the current time and date For details see page 21 57 ActiveX object Drawing object with rotation width height fill color or horizontal or vertical position animation Data using a third party object connected to an analog digital or string tag including both HMI and data server tags The format of the data displayed depends on the object For details see page 20 21 The value of a tag using a pictorial representation of the current value in relation to a range of possible values For example use rotation animation to show the tag value as a needle s position on a dial For color animation assign different colors to represent different values For information about animation see Chapter 22 Working with lists trends alarm banners and numeric input objects Use this button With this graphic object To do this Pause button Trend Toggle a trend between pausing and automatic scrolling Next pen button Trend Change the vertical axis label
651. will run the macros named Macrol to Macro5 30 4 _ Aprenbrx A Converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications This appendix describes terms that are different in PanelBuilder 1400e and FactoryTalk View steps for converting PanelBuilder 1400e applications names of equivalent graphic objects in the two products PanelBuilder 1400e graphic objects that are not supported in FactoryTalk View PanelBuilder 1400e settings and controls that are not supported in FactoryTalk View how communications are converted and which PanelBuilder 1400e communication protocols are not supported in FactoryTalk View converting PanelBuilder 1400e Remote I O communications PanelBuilder 1400e graphic object features that are not supported in FactoryTalk View with information about how to achieve the same result when possible converting PanelBuilder 1400e expressions PanelBuilder 1400e applications are applications you create using PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Software for Windows For information about converting applications from PanelBuilder or PanelBuilder32 see Appendix B You can convert PanelView 1200 applications to PanelBuilder 1400e applications and then convert the PanelBuilder 1400e applications to FactoryTalk View Machine Edition applications Terminology These terms are different in PanelBuilder 1400e and FactoryTalk View PanelBuilder 1400e term FactoryTalk View term screen display graphic display Optional
652. x navigate to the component to add in Application A s folder and then click the component s file name Click and Shift click to select a group of components or Ctrl click to select multiple individual components For information about application folders and files see Chapter 4 4 Click Open The components are listed under the editor in the Explorer window in Application B If you later modify the component in Application A you can add the component into Application B again using the same steps as described above Using Add Component Into Application with graphic displays graphic libraries and global object displays The Add Component Into Application menu command is also useful for m adding graphic displays to your application s Libraries folder m using libraries as graphic displays in your application m moving libraries into the Displays folder so you can export their strings for translation m creating global object displays For information about graphic libraries see page 19 14 For information about global object displays see page 25 11 Deleting components Deleting a component deletes it from the Explorer window and from the hard disk To delete a component m Right click the component and then click Delete Removing components You can remove a component from the Explorer window but leave it on the hard disk in case you want to use the component in another application To remove a component m
653. xplorer window by dragging its edges Working with editors When developing an application you will use many different editors but they have many similar features and often require similar information Knowing how to use these features saves time For information on working with particular editors see the chapters later in this guide Locating editors The editors are grouped in folders in the Explorer window see the illustration on page 2 9 Each editor is displayed with an icon to the left of the editor name To open a folder in the Explorer window m Click the symbol to the left of the folder icon or double click the folder name 2 e Exploring FactoryTalk View Studio Viewing an editor s components With some editors you enter information in a single window or a tabbed dialog box Other editors allow you to create multiple components such as graphic displays or message files Each component is stored in a separate file with its own name You can create components in these editors m Graphics components include graphic displays global object displays and graphic libraries each in their own folder m Alarms m Parameters Local Messages Information Messages m Data Log Models m Macros m RecipePlus The Explorer window lists the components you create under the icon for the editor you used to create the component Use the Images editor to copy bitmap images into your application but not to create new image
654. xtension apa m restore a legacy project backup file with the file extension mea from an earlier release of FactoryTalk View Studio and convert it to the current version m restore a run time application file with the file extension mer to a development application with the file extension med For more information see page 14 7 To start the Application Manager tool do one of the following m In FactoryTalk View Studio on the Tools menu click Application Manager m On the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Rockwell Software gt FactoryTalk View gt Tools gt Application Manager For details about using the tool see the Application Manager s Help About project settings Project settings determine the general appearance of your run time application such as the size and position of the project window and whether a title bar appears in the project window You can also change the setting for running Compact Machine Edition applications and enable automatic logout of the current user Since project settings affect how your graphic displays look specify the settings before creating graphic displays Project window size and run time screen resolution This section describes the difference between project window size and run time screen resolution and describes how these two settings can affect the behavior of your application at run time The project window size is the amount of room your application occupies on t
655. xtension ctd before importing explicitly export to the ctd format to be sure of including the latest changes legacy PLC databases created using WINtelligent LOGIC 5 or A I 5 with file extension dsc For PLC and SLC addresses the Import PLC Tags dialog box shows only addresses that are used in the symbol or address list of the PLC programming software To open the Import PLC Tags dialog box do one of the following am DB Browser tool in the Tags editor In the Tag Browser right click the right pane and then click Import PLC Tags For information about using the Tag Browser see page 6 5 In the Tags editor on the Edit menu click Other Databases or click the DB Browser tool Import PLC Tags Pumphouse x Import Tags into Folder PO OF ASLine Topic Cancel Help PLC Symbols and Addresses dd PLC Database Browse Click on Search to Filter search initiate query of PLC database C Symbols C Use Symbol Name as Tag Address For more information about using the Import PLC Tags dialog box see Help 7 10 7 Using HMI tags Using the Tag Import and Export Wizard You can also import PLC or SLC databases into FactoryTalk View using the Tag Import and Export Wizard You can use the wizard to m export your application s tags to a csv file m import tags from another FactoryTalk View application s tag csv file m merge tags from
656. y 0 0 0 0 0 27 6 Creating your own information message display 0 000 c eee eee 27 7 Opening and closing the information message display 000 27 7 Contents Opening the display nannan dticwsedaededes sc dtheteua ae ded oe 27 7 Closing the display 0 0 0 0 ccc eet e ee nes 27 7 How the information message display graphic object works 27 7 Wat is displayed 22 cecceiebondodkudeesadadeen eh etaeea ne adee ed 27 8 Changing the message file used at run time 0 0 27 8 Setting up trends A DOU CHGS 5 4 2 5 5 545 44 0 ee A apie e Boas Ee ee 4 ad a bw ons Ga ee ae 28 1 Current versus historical data 2 0 eee 28 2 Time date and number formats 0 00 0 ce eee eee ees 28 3 SOMA OT SICPS 24 34 sneaked denne eese totes e aeons ee oes aE 28 3 Creating rend ObjECIS lt 4 4 ce nave sees sdadeeede tee ett end nee stee se d 28 3 Pete UP TENS 5 ces tae sree sei eases Ueedeabhesenddeesseteeense 28 4 AMG VANS Ol aWloMGh goodie ord ooh Seb ood eee Ree Ee eee See aoe 28 5 reaR i e nice oa end paseo 4 Rane ae E oto eee OES EE eA 28 5 Tnd WINGOW ss scx SS se Sha Sk SRS ee OS BA OSE ERE R SA 28 5 Ca acamenseegeeecew ease Ohi e pee ees 4 aie nat yep peer a eens 28 6 Nas oa pone oa eas Ya oe eos de Fas Bh een eee eae weet 28 6 W ertiCal axis labeh 4 54045 den vr ee dedaw ewer ee ohare tide stewed a 28 6 Db Cs ge ee ee ee a nS en EE E ne EE E ee 28 6 HoO
657. y and its address does not have an array size of 1 8 16 or a2 B 9 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE has a data type of Bit Array and its array size is 16 or 32 but its address does not have a bit offset of 0 has a data type of Bit or BOOL and its address does not contain the bit delimiter character has a data type of 4 BCD Unsigned Integer Signed Integer or INT Character Array or DINT and its address contains the bit delimiter character is a block transfer tag with a data type of Bit Array and its array size is 8 but its address does not have a bit offset of 0 or 8 is a block transfer tag with a data type of SINT and its address does not have a bit offset of 0 or 8 is an I O tag with an address that references an undefined rack is an I O tag with a data type of SINT and its address does not have a bit offset of 0 or 10 does not have a valid I O address or block transfer address Unsupported graphic object features This section describes features of PanelBuilder graphic objects that are not supported in FactoryTalk View The Notes column provides additional information and describes methods for achieving the same result when possible Graphic object Unsupported feature in FactoryTalk View Notes Image text arc ellipse freehand line Blink property polyline rectangle wedge In FactoryTalk View all of the listed objects except images use color a
658. y default key navigation is turned off for the numeric input enable buttons and string input enable buttons You can turn on keyboard navigation if you want the operator to use the keyboard to navigate to these objects To turn key navigation on or off use one of these methods m Inthe Properties tab of the Property Panel set the KeyNavigation property to False for off or True for on m For list objects alarm banners numeric input cursor points numeric input enable buttons and string input enable buttons in the General tab of the object s Properties dialog box clear the Key navigation box for off Check the box for on m For ActiveX and trend objects in the Common tab of the object s Properties dialog box clear the Key navigation box for off Check the box for on Linking buttons to objects Some FactoryTalk View buttons can be linked to specific trend list recipe and alarm banner objects or you can set them up to work with whichever object has focus in the display If you are creating small graphic displays you might prefer to use one set of buttons to work with all the display s graphic objects that accept input focus BS Tank oulput Display Tank Ouput Control System Activity This trend object _ __Menday September 02 20 has focus P py ihe tag Tanke_oulput has nao pig he tag Tankl_output has no peyihe item Tank output does Tho itam Tanki_cutput doas 7 aP roblem writing value
659. y different information For information about setting up alarm lists see Help What is displayed m If you set up the list to show the alarms for specific alarm triggers only alarms for those triggers are displayed m Ifthe list is set up to show unacknowledged alarms only the alarms displayed in the list are unacknowledged and the acknowledge time column if any is always blank m Ifthe list is set up to show both acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms acknowledged alarms can show a symbol which you can specify at the left end of the row and the acknowledge time appears in the acknowledge time column if displayed m Ifthe list is set up to show both active and inactive alarms active alarms can show a symbol which you can specify at the left end of the row If both the acknowledge symbol and active symbol are displayed the active symbol column is to the right of the acknowledge symbol column m Ifthe message is too long to fit in the object the last displayed character is replaced with an asterisk Similarly if a column heading is too long to fit in the column the last displayed character is replaced with an asterisk You can specify how many lines to allow for each alarm message from to 10 m The number of alarm messages that fits in the display depends on the height of the alarm list the list s font size how many lines you have specified for each alarm message and whether the column headings are displayed 9 Se
660. y what the button does when it is pressed and released For tips about setting up states see page 21 3 Inthe Common tab specify the button s spacial properties name and visibility m Inthe Connections tab specify the tags or expression with which the button exchanges data For information about assigning tags and expressions see page 20 34 For details about the options in the tabs see Help 3 When you are finished click OK Setting up latched push buttons The latched push button latches in the On position and must be unlatched by another button or process to return to the Off position This type of button is useful for starting a machine or process For example use the latched push button when you want the Value connection to start a process within a programmable controller and remain set until the process is completed You can also use a latched push button when you have a controller with a long program or long update times When the operator presses a latched push button it changes the Value connection to one value and remains at that value until the Handshake connection gives the signal to unlatch the button The error state The button s error state is displayed at run time when m the Value connection is unassigned m the Indicator connection s value does not match one of the state values you set up m The Handshake connection is unassigned The error state is also displayed when the display containing th
661. you ve specified or else change the path back to the default path when you want to open a FactoryTalk View library component To specify a new path for graphic libraries m On the Tools menu click Options Options General String Pop Up Graphic library location CA Documents and Settings 4ll Users Documents tA Siew N Enterprite SME Libranies i Cancel Help For details about using the Options dialog box see Help Importing images into your application You can use these types of external graphic files in your graphic displays bmp bitmap images JjJpg JPEG images dxf AutoCAD files wmf Windows metafiles You import and place dxf and wmf files in your displays in one step Once imported they are converted to drawing objects For more information about using these types of files in your displays see page 20 21 19 e Using graphic displays Bitmap images that come with FactoryTalk View Studio FactoryTalk View Studio comes with sets of bitmaps that are useful for illustrating graphic objects and displays m arrows m DIN symbols m ISA symbols m keyboard button symbols such as Enter and Page Up m parts such as buttons conveyors pipes tanks and valves The symbols and most of the arrows are monochrome that is use only two colors one for the line and one for the fill You can set up the line and fill colors for the monochrome images that you use for your objects Fo
662. you can import an XML file that you originally exported from FactoryTalk View and then modified When you import a graphic display or global object display your existing display will be overwritten Back up your application first using the Application Manager tool Or you can save a copy of your existing display by exporting it to an XML file before you import the new one If the application is a Compact Machine Edtion application only the number of displays allowed by the Compact application limits will be imported Error log file If errors occur during importing the errors are logged to a text file The file opens automatically when importing is finished The last paragraph of the file lists the location of the file Importing graphics XML files You can import a single graphic or global object display XML file at a time or import multiple displays You can also choose whether to import new objects or update existing objects To import multiple displays specify the names of the displays in the file BatchImport_Application name xml FactoryTalk View creates this file when you export multiple displays For details see page H 1 To import display information from an XML file 1 Inthe Explorer window right click the Displays or Global Objects editor 2 Click Import and Export The Graphics Import Export Wizard opens 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard For more information about using the Graphics Import Export Wizard see
663. you have the option of scaling graphic displays to accommodate the new display size For details see Help 4 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 4 16 Title bar for On Top displays For On Top displays you can specify a different name to use in the title bar Use the Display Settings dialog box to specify the name for details see Help The title you specify in the Project Settings editor applies to all replace displays pte Line 1 You can specify a different tee gt PE title for each On Top display using the Display Settings dialog box in the Graphics eal editor f Plant Display Mikl x Shipping Receiving Security Enable auto logout Use the Project Settings Runtime tab to log the current user out automatically if the terminal is inactive for a specified period of time You can set up the terminal to open a particular graphic display after the automatic logout and you can apply a parameter file or parameter list to the display you select If no display is selected whatever display was open at logout will remain open Note that this auto logout feature that returns to a specific display applies to ALL user accounts including the DEFAULT user account 4 Working with applications Specifying project settings To specify project settings use the Project Settings editor For details about selecting options in the editor see Help la System E Project Settings fnus2
664. you work with the objects you create It describes how to select and deselect objects use the Object Explorer to view and select objects use an object s Properties dialog box to set up the object s properties and assign tags and expressions to its connections use the Property Panel to set up individual and group object properties and to assign tags and expressions to individual objects connections color objects name objects test how objects look in different states Selecting and deselecting objects To work with an object you must first select it You can use the Select tool or the Object Explorer to select objects For information about using the Object Explorer see page 20 24 To select the Select tool On the Objects menu click Select or on the Objects toolbar click the Select tool The mouse pointer changes to a single arrow Selecting objects To select Do this An object or group of objects Click the object or group In the Object Explorer click the object or group An object within a group of Double click the group and then click the object objects In the Object Explorer open the group and then click the object Several objects Click the first object and then Ctrl click additional objects All objects in an area Click and drag diagonally to draw a selection border around the objects Ctrl click objects outside the border to add them to the selection 20 23 FACTORYTALK
665. ystem on Windows 7 Professional Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008 one of the following options needs to be selected m The operator will need to log into Windows as a member of the Administrators group The operator can then use MEStation for Windows An administrator can disable the UAC This allows a Windows user that is a member of the Users group to use ME Station for Windows An operator that is a member of the Users group who knows an Administrators password and can provide authentication when UAC prompts can use ME Station This allows the operator to load and run an MER as well as configure ME Station for Windows using the Graphical User Interface 15 15 FACTORYTALK VIEW MACHINE EDITION USER S GUIDE 15 16 Deleting log files on the run time computer When you run your application FactoryTalk View ME Station stores log files for alarms and data logging if you use these features When you start FactoryTalk View ME Station you can delete the alarm and data log files for the loaded application or for all the applications on the run time computer Running a newer version of the application If you run a newer version of an application the alarm log file for the older version is deleted automatically The data log file for the older version is retained to allow the display of historical data in trends For more information about the alarm log file see page 9 10 For more information about data log files see

FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents